Architectural Mockup Room Specification

HOSPITAL
IN TENBEK AREA
Architectural
interior design
Specification
Elevations are indicative only and under development until client approval is granted.
Detail Design
REV.1 29/12/2020
DD-RP-01 | REV.00 21 SEPTEMBER
2020
HOSPITAL IN TENBEK AREA
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section Number Section Name
02 PART 16 QA/QC MOCKUP ROOM

13 MASONRY
14 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
15 THERMAL INSULATION OF BULDINGS
17 METAL WORK
18 CARPENTRY JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY
24 FINISHES TO BUILDINGS
25 GLASS AND GLAZING
26 PAINTING AND DECORATING
30 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
31 FURNITURE
32 FIRESTOPPING
33 FITTINGS
APPENDIX A HARDWARE SCHEDULE ( SECTION 18.7)
APPENDIX B RADIATION PROTECTION
APPENDIX C HELIPAD SAFETY NET
APPENDIX D FIRE CURTAIN
APPENDIX E BMU SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENT 1
HOSPITAL IN TENBAK AREA
SECTION 2 – QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
PART 16 – MOCKUP ROOM
1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Section Includes: Requirements for mockup room indicated on Contract Drawings to verify
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution.
1.1.1.1. Prior to installation in or on building, provide specified mockups identical in every respect to
the finished work specified.
1.1.1.2. In accordance with the provisions of technical specifications, provide engineering design
required to ensure the structural stability of the mock-ups.
1.1.1.3. Mock-ups will be reviewed for approval and for acceptance by the Engineer. When so ap-
proved and accepted, the mockups will become the standard of workmanship by which sub-
sequent work will be evaluated.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Mockups: Independent structures, installations, or assemblies that represent components of a

portion of the facility or site work to demonstrate the coordination and interfacing of
different products, such as a window assembly and adjacent wall construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Product Data and Samples: Submit in accordance with the requirements of each respective
product Section.
1.3.2 Schedule: Time schedule for the construction of mockups shall be prepared and submitted
to the Engineer for review prior to construction.
1.3.3 Field Samples: Field samples are representative applications of finish materials on a limited
portion of the facility or site to verify the aesthetic effect of a critical portion of the work or
to evaluate the qualifications of the installer to complete the construction.
1.3.4 Where specified, prepare a field sample at a location on the site designated by the Engineer.
1.3.5 Where acceptable to the Engineer, field samples may be actual portions of the finished
work of this Section.
1.3.6 Provide one field panel for each type used in the work.
1.3.7 Make each panel of size indicated in specifications, unless noted otherwise.
1.3.8 Make adjustment in the sample panels as required by the Engineer.
MOCKUP ROOM S2 Part 16 - 1

1.3.9 The field sample, when accepted by the Engineer, shall be used as basis for comparison
with the remainder of the installation of the work of this Section for the purpose of
acceptance or rejection
1.3.10 Quality Control Submittals: In accordance with the provisions of Division 01Section”
Submittals Procedure”, submit the following:
1.3.10.1 Design Data: When and as directed by the Engineer, engineering design calculations
confirming the structural stability of the mockups.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Qualifications:
1.4.1.1 Fabricators' and Installers' Qualifications: In accordance with the provisions of the
specification Sections for products and materials incorporated into the mockups.
1.4.1.2 In constructing mockups, take measures to ensure the safety of Project personnel and the
public.
1.4.1.3 Field Representation: During construction of mockup, representatives of the manufacturers

shall be present on site to coordinate installation.
1.5 SCHEDULING
1.5.1 The Engineer shall be notified at the start of construction of mockups and shall receive
progress reports to allow the Engineer to schedule his inspections.
1.5.2 Visual examination of the mockups during construction will be made by the Engineer and
other entities representing incorporated materials.
1.5.3 Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of mockups before commencing the
corresponding work for the Project, revise the updated Construction Schedule to reflect
required revisions to mockups.
1.5.4 All systems to be installed in the mockup shall have been tested and their correspondent
Certificates submitted following QCS requirements, and contract conditions.
1.5.5 Should mockups fail to meet the Engineer's approval or performance testing, partially or
completely, they shall be taken down or dismantled, and reconstructed to the extent
necessary, until acceptance has been obtained.
1.5.6 Time the completion and reworking of mockups necessary to obtain acceptance to avoid
delay in the construction schedule of the Project. Update the Construction Schedule to
reflect required revisions to mockups.
1.5.7 Retain and maintain mockups during construction to serve as a standard for judging work
incorporated into the Project. Do not alter, or remove.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
2.1.1 Materials and finishes shall comply with the requirements specified in the various applicable
Sections of the Specifications, and shall match previously submitted and approved samples.
2.1.2 Mockups shall incorporate all related construction materials and finishes having a visual or
technical effect upon the completed work.
2.2 MOCKUPS
2.2.1 Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination,
testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate
compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless
otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be
judged.
2.2.2.1 Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling
finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and
lighting.
2.2.2.2 Prior to installation in or on building, construct mockups for each system and finish required
to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as
well as qualities of materials and execution. Building mockups shall comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of work.
2.2.2.3 Place mockups on site in the location directed by Engineer. Provide mockups consisting of
constructions referred to in the various applicable sections of the specifications. Components
shall be full height and can be incorporated into the final work.
2.2.2.4 Notify Engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Engineer's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of work.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may

become part of the completed work.
2.3 MATERIALSPECIFICATIONS:
Item/Material Section Reference

Porcelain tile Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
Porcelain floor tile Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
Gypsum board with moisture resistance Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
CMU masonry, Section 13 Masonry

IP 006 25 mm wall Section 24 Finishes to Buildings

Paint to follow adjacent wall paint finish Section 26 Painting and Decorating
Vinyl flooring, slip resistance R9, 2 mm Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
thickness
Vinyl roll slip resistance: R9 Integral coved Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
Gypsum board, painted Regular Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
Exterior Window. 2400 x 1500 mm Section 25 Glass and Glazing
Uneven Double Door, 1100+400 mm Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery and
Ironmongery
Clinical Area Back Splash Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery and
Ironmongery
Wardrobe Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery And
Ironmongery
Bed Head Unit, Wall Section 31 Furniture
Nurse Workstation Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery And
Ironmongery
TV panel, wall Section 31 Furniture
Dispenser, Soap, wall mounted section 30 toilet and bath accessories
Dispenser, paper towel, wall mounted section 30 toilet and bath accessories
Drop down grab rail section 30 toilet and bath accessories
Grab rail horizontal section 30 toilet and bath accessories
Asymmetrical basin with overflow hole section 30 toilet and bath accessories
Dispenser, Barrier cream, wall mounted section 30 toilet and bath accessories
Television,42”-50”, flat panel Section 31 Furniture
Magnetic Glass Board Section 31 Furniture
Clinical Hand Wash Basin Section 31 Furniture
Sleeper Sofa patient room Section 31 Furniture
Side table 27”H patient room Section 31 Furniture
Chair, Patient room Section 31 Furniture
tiles for the en-suite bathroom Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
floor thresholds Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
Sanitary ware Section 20 Drainage Works For Build-
ing
Electrical fittings Section 21 Electrical Works
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Install materials in a manner that will duplicate the appearance in the completed building.
3.1.2 In constructing mockups, take measures to ensure the safety of Project personnel and the
public.
3.1.3 Construct mockups using same construction personnel, means, and methods as intended for
use on actual project.
3.1.4 Mockups shall be constructed in accordance with details indicated on the drawings and
approved Shop Drawings.

3.2 UP-KEEP
3.2.1 Maintain mockups during course of construction or until removal is directed.
3.2.1.1 Repair damage to mockups immediately upon occurrence. Maintain mockups and
surrounding site in a safe and clean condition.
3.3 REMOVAL
3.3.1 Remove mockups at the completion of the work in a manner that shows no evidence of
mock up's previous existence. Complete site work at area of mock up in accordance with
Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 13 – MASONRY
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section covers the products, erection and all associated accessories for construction of
concrete and clay masonry unit blockwork as well as requirements for glass block units,
gypsum units, and stonework.
2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows:

Section 5 Concrete
Section 15 Thermal Insulation of Buildings
Section 24 Finishes to Buildings
Section 26 Painting and Decorating
1.1.2 References
1 The following standards referred to in this Part:

BS 6100 ...................... Glossary of building and civil engineering terms
1.1.3 Definitions
1 Definitions used in this Section follow the requirements of BS 6100 unless otherwise stated.
1.2 APPROVAL OF SUPPLY SOURCE
1.2.1 General Requirements
1 All products supplied under this Section must be obtained from an approved source.
2 The Contractor will not be permitted to change his source of supply without the permission
of the Engineer.
1.3 SAMPLES, TESTING AND SUBMITTALS
1 Any individual block: not less than 80% of the value specified in part 4 of this section.
2 Initially, twelve (12) units will be selected by the Engineer from the first batch of units
manufactured or delivered. The units shall be delivered by the Contractor to an approved
independent testing laboratory, or if the Engineer so directed, to the Government Materials
Testing Laboratory.
3 The sample is to be accompanied by the following written information:
MASONRY S13 - 1
(a) Type of unit

(b) Means of identification of unit
(c) Name of manufacturer

(d) Type of masonry units making machine
(e) Capacity of plant and present stocks available
(f) Performance / Characteristic Certificate / Data sheet
4 A number of units to indicate colour range for exposed work to be submitted to the
Engineer for approval prior to commencement of the Works.
5 Further samples will be selected and tested as directed by the Engineer.
6 The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed methods for reinforcement to the
Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall also submit details of his proposed methods for
constructing lintels, anchors and anchor channels.
1.3.2 Sample Panels
1 Before any fair or faced masonry work is commenced, the Contractor is to erect one sample
panel, size 1800 mm long x 2000 mm high, of each type of finish to be used.
2 The panels should incorporate a typical opening detail and a typical corner detail, and a
typical movement joint.
3 Before starting face brickwork, the Contractor shall lay up a sample panel 2 m long by 1 m
high for the Engineer’s approval. Random piles of brick as delivered to the Site
shall be used.
4 Brickwork to be incorporated in the Works is to match original sample brickwork panels as

approved by Engineer. Sample panels must not be removed until directed by Engineer.
1.3.3 Drawings
For each type of block masonry, submit drawings and other information showing such details
of the work as the Engineer may reasonably require, including but not necessarily limited to
the following:
1 Method of bonding, including type and locations of ties, anchors and reinforcement
2 Built in items
3 Movement joint
4 Joints and connections to adjacent structures, including soffits
5 Openings through fire walls
6 Cavity wall insulation
MASONRY S13 - 2
7 Damp proof courses.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
1.4.1 Storage of Materials
1 Masonry units delivered to the Site are to be carefully unloaded and handled so as to prevent
chipping and breakage. Tipping of units will not be allowed.
2 The units are to be stacked on a level area in an orderly manner on planks or other suitable
supports to ensure that they are free from contact with the ground. Stored units shall be kept
under waterproof covers.
3 Packaged materials shall be stored in their original containers.
1.5 WORKMANSHIP
1 Tops of walls shall be covered with waterproof covering when the work is not in progress.
2 When starting or resuming work, loose mortar and foreign materials shall be cleaned from
the top surface of the work. Surfaces of clay type masonry shall be wetted before resuming
work.
3 Newly laid blockwork and brickwork shall be protected from the harmful effects of sunshine,
rain, drying wind, and surface water.
4 Blockwork shall be water cured for a minimum of three days.
5 Units that will be exposed to view in finished work shall be supplied in adequate quantities to
permit selection and mixing of brick from several deliveries in advance of laying. Units shall
be exposed to the atmosphere for minimum of two weeks before laying.
1.6 CLEANING
1 Clean exposed masonry surfaces on completion. Protect material liable to damage.
1.6.2 Brickwork
1 Cut out defective exposed new joints to a depth of approximately 20 mm and repoint.
Remove mortar droppings and other foreign substances from the wall surfaces. First wet
surfaces with clean water and then wash down with a solution of soapless detergent specially
prepared for cleaning brick. Brush with a stiff fibre brush and immediately after, hose down
with clean water. Clean surfaces from any traces of detergent, foreign streaks or stains of any
nature. Protect adjoining construction materials during cleaning operations. Use of muratic
acid for cleaning brickwork is prohibited.
1.6.3 Concrete Masonry Units
1 Immediately following setting, brush exposed surfaces free of mortar or other foreign matter.
MASONRY S13 - 3
2 MORTAR AND GROUT
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.1.1 Scope
1. This Section specifies mortar and grout for masonry, glass blocks and stone work.
2. Related Parts and Sections are as follows:

This Section
Part 2 Unit Masonry
Part 3 Reinforced Unit Masonry
Part 5 Masonry Laying
Section 5 Concrete
2.1.2 References
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part:

ASTMC270................ Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
BSEN 459-1 .............. Building lime. Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
BSEN 934-3 .............. Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Admixtures for masonry
mortar. Definitions, requirements, conformity and marking and
labelling
BSEN 998-2 .............. Specification for mortar for masonry. Masonry mortar
BSEN 12004 ............. Adhesives for tiles. Requirements, evaluation of conformity,
classification and designation
BSEN 12878 ............. Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement
and/or lime. Specifications and methods of test
BSEN 13888 ............. Grout for tiles. Requirements, evaluation of conformity, classification
and designation
PD 6472 ..................... Guide to specifying the quality of building mortars

PD 6678 ..................... Guide to the specification of masonry mortar
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
2.2.1 Preparation Requirements
1 The required class of mortar, together with the type of mix, shall be as described in the
Project Documentation.
2 Mortar shall be mixed only as and when required in the relevant proportions indicated in
Table 2.1, until its colour and consistency are uniform. The constituent materials shall be
accurately gauged allowance being made for bulking of sand
MASONRY S13 - 4
Table 2.1
Mortar Mixes
Nominal Mix by mass and their compressive strength

Cement (C), Lime (L) & Sand Cement (C) & Sand (S)
Compressive
(S) with or without entrainment with or without entrainment
Class (kg) (kg) strength at 28 days
N/ mm2
C L S C S
M2 70 50 740 85 775 2
M4 105 35 725 110 755 4
M6 135 25 700 155 710 6
M12 190 20 655 190 675 12
3 The inclusion of mortar plasticisers will not be permitted without approval of the Engineer.
4 All mortar shall be conveyed fresh to the works as required for use. Mortar which has begun
to set or which has been site-mixed for a period of more than one hour in the cases of Classes
M2, and M6, and two hours in the case of classes M4 and M12 shall not be used.
5 Plasticizing and set retarding mortar admixtures shall comply with BS EN 934-3 and shall be
supplied with instructions for use.
6 Ready-mixed lime: sand for mortar and ready-to-use retarded mortar shall comply with the
relevant provisions of BS EN 998-2 or ASTM C270.
2.2.2 Cement
1 Cement is to comply with the relevant provisions of Section 5, Concrete.
2 Mortar for use in contact with the ground will be mixed using sulphate resistant cement and
comply with the relevant provisions of Section 5, Concrete.
3 Cement, unless otherwise specified, is to be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1.
4 Sulphate Resisting Cement: to BS 4027.
5 White Cement: to BS EN 197-1.
6 Lime: Do not Use Lime.
MASONRY S13 - 5
2.2.3 Aggregates
1 Aggregates are to generally comply with the relevant provisions of Section 5, Concrete.
2.2.4 Water
1 Water is to comply with the relevant provisions of Section 5, Concrete.
2.2.5 Lime
1 Lime for mortar shall be in the form of lime putty, complying with the relevant provisions of
BS EN 459-1.
2.5 GROUTS
1 The required class of mortar, together with the type of mix, shall be as described in the
Project Documentation.
2 Cement grout shall be mixed in the relevant proportions indicated in the Table 2.2 using the
minimum quantity of water to ensure the necessary fluidity and to render it capable of
penetrating the work.
Table 2.2
Grout Mixes
Nominal Mix by Mass
Class
Cement Sand Pfa
G1 1 - -
G2 1 3 -
G3 1 10 -
G4 1 - 10
G5 1 - 4
G6 1 - ½
3 Cement grout shall be used within one hour of mixing, except where containing a retardant
admixture.
4 Sulfate-resisting cement shall not be used as a constituent of grouts containing pulverised

fuel ash.
5 Grout to have a compressive strength of 17,500 kPa at 28 days.
6 Grout for Concrete Masonry: Comply with the following requirements:

Type: Fine
Binding Material: Ordinary Portland cement, do not use lime.
Minimum cement content: shall be 300 kg/m3.
Aggregates: As specified in Sub-Clause 2.2.3 of this section.
Slump: 200-280 mm to BS 1881-102.
MASONRY S13 - 6
Admixture: Approved liquid types.
3 ACCESSORIES
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies anchor and tie system, joint control, reinforcement and lintels associated
with masonry works.
2 Related Parts and Sections are as follows:

This Section
Part 1 General
Section 1 General
Section 6 Concrete
3.1.2 References

BS EN 845-1:2003+A1:2008 Specification for ancillary components for masonry. Ties,
tension straps, hangers and brackets
BS EN 10346:2009 .... Continuously hot-dip coated steel flat products. Technical
delivery
conditions
BS EN 10143:2006, ... Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on
dimensions and shape
BS EN 13658-2:2005 . Metal lath and beads. Definitions, requirements and test methods.
External rendering
GSO ISO 4998:2007, . Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet of structural
quality
ISO 14657:2005, ....... Zinc-coated steel for the reinforcement of concrete
3.2 ANCHOR AND TIE SYSTEMS
3.2.1 Cavity Wall Ties
1 Cavity wall ties to comply with BS EN 845-1 and as directed by the Engineer or as noted in
the Project Documentation:
2 Ties fabricated from wire are not be used for cavities exceeding 75 mm.
MASONRY S13 - 7
(a) All connections between masonry walls or partitions and concrete columns or walls
shall be made using propriety stainless steel ties secured to stainless steel fixing
channels embedded in the concrete. Galvanized steel can be used for internal masonry
3.2.2 Materials: provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2.3 Adjustable Anchors for Connecting Head of the walls: provide anchors that allow vertical
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1 Connector for Head of the walls: One-part anchor system made of galvanised steel, where
one is embedded in the wall and other fixed to soffit above. Anchor system to accommodate
for structural movement and filling/ sealant material at Head of the wall.
2 Connection between block walls and concrete or steel columns are to be reinforced with
stainless steel or zinc coated expanded metal and approved ties at maximum 400mm
following the corresponding project documents and shop drawings.
3.2.4 Expansion Bolts: galvanized steel, appropriate type and size as recommended and certified
for particular purpose, function, location and background by the manufacturer, and to
approval.
3.2.5 Ties for Bonding Leaves of Cavity Walls: to BS EN 841-1, galvanized steel, fitted with
plastics insulation retaining clips recommended by manufacturer for this type of tie.
3.2.6 Fixed Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
3.2.7 Flexible type triangular shapedwire anchor 4.76mm thick galvanized after fabrication fixed
to wall by steel sheet 19mm wide, 2.78mm thick.
3.3 CONTROL JOINTS
3.3.1 Movement Joints
1 Movement joints to be 12 mm wide and formed where indicated or where continuous runs of
block walling exceed 8 metres in length.
2 The joints are to be straight and vertically formed with uncut faces of the blocks to each side
and filled with an approved joint filler compressible material manufactured specifically for
building into movement joints.
3 External joints are to be sealed with a mastic compatible with the joint filling material when
the block walling is thoroughly dry and the joint surfaces have been cleaned with a wire
brush or mechanical tool.
4 A primer is to be applied to the joint surface if specified by the manufacturer of the mastic.
MASONRY S13 - 8
5 Mastic sealing to unfilled movement joints to be on an approved foam backing strip placed
to ensure the correct depth of sealant.
6 Movement Joint Filler: bitumen impregnated fibreboard to ASTM D1751.
7 Multi-part Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base

polymer indicated and which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those
referenced Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
3.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
3.4.1 Reinforcement for Concrete Block Masonry
1 Expanded mesh lath reinforcement is to be fabricated from minimum nominal thickness 0.3
mm as per BS EN 13658-2:2005, or welded wire lath or mesh with a minimum weight of
0.87 kg/m² as per BS EN 13658-2:2005; or Zinc coated steel with one of the surface quality
Types "B" or “C” with minimum zinc coating - 225 g/m² as per BS EN 10346:2009, as
directed by the Engineer or Project Documentation.
2 The widths of reinforcement for various wall thicknesses to comply with Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
Expanded Steel Mesh Joint Reinforcement Widths
Block Thickness Reinforcement Width
(mm) (mm)
100 50
150 60
200 110
3.5 LINTELS
3.5.1 Precast or Cast In-situ Lintels
1 Precast or cast in-situ lintels to be manufactured in accordance with the relevant provisions
of Section 5 of the specification as well as with the relevant structural drawings and
schedule.
2 An open joint not less than 12 mm are to be left between the ends of precast or cast in-situ
concrete lintels and the blocks adjacent to these ends. These open joints should be left as
long as possible during construction and not be filled in until plastering or other works
necessitate such filling.
MASONRY S13 - 9
3 Lintels are to have a minimum end bearing of 200 mm.
4 UNIT MASONRY
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies clay and concrete masonry units.
2 Approval from Qatar Standards shall be obtained for masonry units intended to be used in
elements subject to thermal insulation.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Mortar And Grout
Part 3 Accessories
Section 1 General
Section 5 Concrete
4.1.2 References

ASTM
C270................ Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM
C1364.............. Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone
BS
187........................ Calcium silicate bricks
BS 1217
..................... Cast stone
BS 6073-2
.................. Precast concrete masonry units. Guide for specifying precast concrete
masonry units
BS EN 771
................. Specification for masonry units
BSEN 772-2
.............. Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of percentage area
of voids in masonry units (by paper indentation)
BS EN 771-3
.............. Specification for masonry units. Aggregate concrete masonry units
(dense and light-weight aggregates)
BS EN 771-5
.............. Specification for masonry units. Manufactured stone masonry units
EN 771-1
.................... Specification for masonry units. Clay masonry units
MASONRY S13 - 10
EN 771-2
.................... Specification for masonry units. Calcium silicate masonry units
EN 998-2
.................... Specification for mortar for masonry. Masonry mortar
PD 6678
..................... Guide to the specification of masonry mortar
4.1.3 Definitions:
1 Aggregate: granular material used in construction and may be natural, manufactured or

recycled.
2 Natural aggregate: aggregate from mineral sources which has been subjected to nothing
more than mechanical processing.
3 Manufactured aggregate: aggregate of mineral origin resulting from an industrial process

involving thermal or other modification.
4 Recycled aggregate: aggregate resulting from the processing of inorganic material previously
used in construction.
5 Lightweight aggregate: aggregate of mineral origin having a particle density not exceeding
2,000 kg/m3 or a loose bulk density not exceeding 1,200 kg/m3.
4.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
4.4.1 Concrete Blocks
1 Normal Weight Blocks to be made with ordinary Portland cement to BS EN197-1 and
natural normal weight aggregates to BS EN 12620, unless used below ground floor at natural
slab level in which case sulphate-resisting cement is to be used. Blocks, cellular (hollow) or
solid shall be normal weight, of average intensity of 2000kg/m3.
Unless otherwise specified, are to be to BS EN 771-3 tested to BS EN 772-2, nominal size

400 x 200 mm or as indicated on drawings and to the thicknesses shown on the Drawings.
Minimum cement content shall be 350kg/m3. Do not add lime to the mix.
2 All blocks are to be manufactured, supplied and tested in accordance with BS EN 771-3, BS
6073-2, and approved by Qatar Standards.
3 Recycled Aggregates may be used to replace up to 50% of natural coarse aggregates when
the average compressive strength is equal to or greater than 7.0 MPa (N/mm2).
4 Recycled Aggregates may be used to replace up to 100% of natural aggregates (fine and
coarse) when the average compressive strength is less than 7.0 MPa (N/mm2).
5 Aggregate shall meet the following requirements:
MASONRY S13 - 11
a. The manufacturer shall declare the materials to be used, the percentage of each
material, their grading and shall be responsible for their suitability.
b. The acid soluble sulphate, as measured by BS EN 1744-1, shall not exceed 0.8% by
weight of aggregate.
c. The acid soluble chloride, as measured by BS EN 1744-5, shall not exceed 0.2% by
weight of aggregate.
6 The use of blocks shall comply with Table 4.5. The minimum compressive strength of the
average of 3 blocks shall be as given in Table 4.5. The associated mortar requirements for
use with different applications for blocks is also provided in Table 4.5. Details of mixes for
the class of mortar specified is provided in Part 2 of this Section.
Table 4.5
Compressive Strength
Uses for which Blocks are
Classification Minimum Compressive Suitable Class of
2
Strength (N/mm ) Mortar
Classes Average Lowest
of 3 Individual
Blocks Block
1 7.0 5.6 External non-load bearing walls M6
2 10.4 8.3 Load bearing walls M6
Load bearing walls below

3 17.4 14 ground M12
4 14.0 11.2 Soakaways and manholes M12
5 4.0 3.6 Internal non-load bearing walls M6
5 4.0 3.6 Roof Block M4
5 4.0 3.6 Protective skins to foundations M6
7 Manufacturer should label or clearly define the classification of the products from the
factory.
8 Consultant or contractor should also mention the classification or the uses of the blocks in
request sheet when the samples submit for testing in laboratory.
9 The volume of the cavities in the block shall not exceed 50 % of the gross volume of the
block. The overall dimensions and wall and web thicknesses shall comply with Table 4.6.
MASONRY S13 - 12
Table 4.6
Block Dimensions and Wall and Web Thicknesses
Minimum Thickness (mm)
Coordinating (nominal) size
Work size (mm)
(mm)
Wall Web
400 x 200 x 100 390 x 190 x 100 19 19
400 x 200 x 150 390 x 190 x 150 25 25
400 x 200 x 200 390 x 190 x 200 32 30
Notes:
a. Co-ordinating size is the size of the space allocated to the block including
the joints and tolerances.
b. Work size is the actual size for manufacture within the tolerances specified.
10 Subject to the tolerances specified in Table 4.7 and to any requirement for blocks with
special faces, all surfaces should be flat and rectangular and adjacent surfaces are to be at
right angles to one another with clearly defined undamaged arises.
Table 4.7
Block Tolerances
Dimensions Work Size of Block
Length + 3 mm to - 5 mm
Height + 3 mm to - 5 mm
Thickness 2 mm for any measurement
1.5 mm for the average of 7 measurements in any one block.
11 Unless otherwise specified, all block faces are to provide a satisfactory bond for mortar,
plastering or rendering.
12 Each block manufactured from sulphate resisting cement is to be colour coded with an
identifying mark.
13 All connections between masonry walls or partitions and concrete columns or walls shall be
made using propriety stainless steel ties secured to stainless steel fixing channels embedded
in the concrete.
14 Full Water Absorption:
MASONRY S13 - 13
15 The average water absorption of the tested sample shall not exceed 7% and no individual
block shall have a water absorption greater than 7.5% (in accordance with CML Method 9-
97).
16 Water absorption by capillarity method:
17 The manufacturer shall declare in g/m²s the maximum water absorption coefficient due to
capillarity action of the exposed face of the unit. (according to EN 771-3:2003)
4.4.2 Manufacture of Concrete Blocks
1. Blocks are to be manufactured in a vibrated/pressure block making machine using cement and
aggregate in the proportions required to produce the minimum strengths given in Table 4.5.
2. The different types of blocks is to be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
production commences.
3. The materials to be mixed in a mechanical mixer and placed in the block-making machine in
layers not exceeding 100 mm, each layer being thoroughly vibrated and compacted before
the addition of the next.
4. Immediately after manufacture the blocks are to be stacked on clean, level, non-absorbent
pallets in honeycomb fashion. The pallets are to be marked with the date of production (in
English and Arabic) and stored in a level curing and stacking area in such a manner that one
day’s production is separated from the next.
5. Blocks manufactured from mobile machines are to be cast on to a clean concrete hard
standing. Each day’s production shall be easily identifiable and kept separate from the next.
6. All blocks, however manufactured, are to be immediately protected from the effects of the
sun and wind by suitable moisture retaining coverings.
7. Concrete masonry units shall be wet cured continuously for a minimum period of 7 days.
4.4.3 Block Dimensions
1. Block dimensions are to be measured in accordance with BS EN 772-2.
2. Blocks not exceeding 75 mm thick and blocks for use in the ground are to be solid unless
otherwise directed. All other blockwork is to be hollow.
MASONRY S13 - 14
5 MASONRY LAYING
5.1 INTRODUCTION
5.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies workmanship and setting out of masonry works.

This Section
Part 2 Mortar and grout
Part 4 Unit Masonry
Section 6 Concrete
5.1.2 References

BS 743........................ Materials for Damp-Proof Courses
BS 6398:1983 ............ Specification for bitumen damp-proof courses for masonry
BS 6515:1984 ............ Specification for polyethylene damp-proof courses for masonry
BS 8215:1991 ............ Code of practice for design and installation of damp-proof courses in
masonry construction
5.2 WORKMANSHIP
1 Work is to be performed by experienced workers under the direction of a qualified

supervisor who is fully aware of the Project requirements. Final work is to be equal to mock-
ups approved by the Engineer.
2 Standard: construct concrete unit masonry in accordance with the requirements of BS 5628-3
and BS 8000-3.
3 Storing: stack blocks so that they are stable and clear of the ground. Protect from inclement
weather and keep dry.
4 Conditioning of Concrete Blocks:
do not use autoclaved concrete blocks when still warm from the manufacturing
process
do not use non-autoclaved concrete blocks until at least four weeks after casting
do not wet concrete blocks before laying; use an approved water retaining
admixture in the mortar to counteract suction.
MASONRY S13 - 15
5 Construct Unit Masonry with all materials fully bonded or tied together to ensure compliance
with design requirements for stability, strength, fire resistance, thermal and sound insulation
as relevant.
6 Connection Between Walls and Partitions: walls and partitions should generally be bonded,
tied or dowelled to one another at angles and junctions. Where it is necessary for a partition
to be connected to an adjacent wall or column, this should be done by toothing or block
bonding unless otherwise specified.
7 Tie block walling to concrete structural elements with metal ties approved for the purpose.
8 Wet Weather: protect newly erected masonry during interruption through rain and at
completion of each day's work by covering.
9 Fire Rated Walls: joints between fire rated-walls and adjacent structures and soffit of slabs
are to be tightly finished and well packed to prevent the passage of smoke. All openings in
fire rated-walls are to be provided with sleeves that will prevent the passage of flames and
smoke in case of fire.
10 Soffits: build non-loadbearing partitions full height of storey to underside of solid floor or
roof structure above. Keep a free space of 20 mm approximately between the top course of
non-loadbearing partitions and the structure above. Fill this space with impregnated
fiberboard, or alternative approved material. Anchor the top course of non-loadbearing
partitions to the structure above with a resilient anchor permitting vertical deflection while
preventing lateral movement.
11 Soffits: at fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and
underside of structure above to comply with Fire and Life safety requirements.
5.3 BLOCKWORK
5.3.1 Setting Out of Blockwork
1 All blockwork is to be fully set out before laying commences to ensure:
(a) correct bonding over all lengths of wall particularly at openings and piers
(b) minimum cutting
(c) compliance with Table 5.1
2 The average thickness of both vertical and horizontal mortar joints is to be 10 mm exclusive
of any key in the joint surfaces of the unit.
3 Set out the work carefully to ensure satisfactory junctions and built-in elements. Keep
courses level, true to lines and evenly spaced. Accurately plumb all faces angles and features
within the following maximum tolerances:
(a) Horizontally ± 3mm - Position in plan of any point in relation to the nearest
building grid line at the same level.
MASONRY S13 - 16
(b) Level of bed joints ± 10mm -Up to 5 meters long

± 15mm -5 meters to 10 meters long
± -25mm -Over 10 meters long
(c) Straightness ± 10mm -Straightness in any 5 meters length
(d) Vertically ± 6mm -In any 3 meters height

± 10mm-In overall height of building exceeding 6 meters
(e) Thickness ± 10mm -Overall thickness of walls
4 Lift Shafts: use templates for forming lift shafts accurately at each floor level.
5 Lintel Bearings: carefully predetermine setting out so that full block or brick units occur beneath
ends of lintels.
Setting Out of Blockwork
Permissible Deviation
Item of Construction Type of Dimensions
(mm)
Space between walls At floor 20
At Soffit 30
Size and shape of wall Height up to 3,000 mm 40
elements
Straightness in 5,000 mm 8
Verticality up to 2,000 mm 15
Level of bed joints in 3,000 mm 15
Walls Position in plan of any point or
specified face in relation to nearest
15
grid line on the same level
Door, window and other Position in elevation from design
openings position 15
Level of sill or soffit for each 1,000
mm of width 5
with maximum of 15
Verticality of any point for each
1,000 mm of height 5
with maximum of 15
5.3.2 Wetting Blockwork Units
1 All blocks are to be adequately wetted with water before they are laid and the tops of walls
left off from the previous day’s work are to be similarly wetted before the new work
commences.
5.3.3 Laying of Blockwork
MASONRY S13 - 17
1 Block walls are to be built from concrete masonry units as specified in running bond with
each course interlocked at corner or intersection (toothed masonry). Blockwork Bond,
unless otherwise specified, is to be stretching half lap as defined in BS 5628-3, Appendix B
2 All bed and vertical joints are to be spread with mortar to ensure complete and solid bedding
and grouting through the full thickness of the wall. All keys in jointed surfaces must be
completely filled.
3 Mortar extending into the cavities of hollow blocks which are to be reinforced and filled
shall be removed.
4 Each block is to be adjusted to its final position in the wall whilst the mortar is still plastic.
Any block which is moved after the mortar has stiffened shall be removed and relaid with
fresh mortar.
5 Half blocks and special blocks are to be used as required to ensure correct bonding.
6 All perpends, quoins and joints are to be kept true and square, other angles are to be
plumbed and bed joints levelled as the work proceeds.
7 The work is to be carried out course by course not leaving any part more than 800 mm lower
than another. Work, which is left at different levels, is to be racked (stepped) back to the
approval of the Engineer.
8 In cavity wall construction both leaves are to be carried up together, not leaving any leaf
more than 400 mm below the other.
9 Partitions shall be 100 mm thick unless otherwise noted. Partitions having lavatories or other
plumbing fixtures secured to them back-to-back (or approximately so) are to be a minimum
of 150 mm thick. Solid concrete masonry units shall be built in where full units cannot be
used or where needed for the fixing of accessories. Bells or hubs of pipes must be
completely enclosed.
10 Reinforced masonry partitions are to fully extend to the underside of slabs.
11 When pipes or conduits or both occur in plastered partitions, at least one web of the hollow
masonry units must be retained.
12 When new masonry partitions start on existing floors, the existing floor finish material is to
be cut down to the concrete surface. New masonry partitions are not to abut any existing
plastered surfaces, except suspended ceilings.
13 Ties: where walls are built as facing to concrete, the ties are to be staggered vertically and
horizontally at a rate of 5/m2 with no more than 400 mm vertical spacing.
14 Filling Movement Joints: build in movement joint filler as work proceeds ensuring no
projections into cavities. In joints to be pointed with sealant, position filler accurately at
recommended distance from face of wall. Leave joints open for as long as possible before
sealing.
15 Building in Frames: adequately support and protect frames permitted to be built-in, to

prevent distortion and damage.
16 Templates: where frames are not to be built in, form openings using rigid templates
accurately fabricated to required size.
MASONRY S13 - 18
17 Bond: if any bond other than stretcher is specified for a half-brick skin, use standard special
or machine cut half bats so that no brick projects into or is set back from the cavity.
18 Wall Ties: provide additional ties at sides of openings at every block course or every fourth
brick course.
19 Jambs: build solid jambs to openings in cavity walls.
20 Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. Provide not
less than 200mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of opening and between
adjacent chases and recesses.
21 Cut Concrete masonry units with motor-driven dry-cutting saws designed to cut masonry
with clean, sharp and unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and
to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting and special pieces as per
paragraph 5 of this clause to the maximum possible extent.
22 Built-in Work: Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
23 Built-in Frames: fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry, with rock-wool or as
per manufacture recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
24 Joints in Masonry to be plastered: as the work proceeds, strike off and leave rough.
5.5 REINFORCEMENT
1 Expanded stainless steel mesh joint reinforcement, if specified, will be embedded in the
horizontal mortar joints not closer than 20 mm from the external face of the wall and, except
at movement joints, is to be continuous and lapped at least 75 mm at all passings. Full lap
joints are to be provided at angles.
2 Vertical bar reinforcement is to be properly positioned and secured against displacement.

The cavities containing the reinforcement are to be completely and solidly filled with the
specified concrete. The whole surface of the reinforcement is to be in contact with the
mortar or concrete. The minimum clear distance between the vertical bars and the block is
to be 12 mm.
3 Joint Reinforcement: lay on an even bed of mortar in a continuous strip with 150 mm laps at
joints and full laps at angles. Keep reinforcement back 25 mm from face of external work,
12 mm back from face of internal work and finish mortar joint to normal thickness.
5.5.2 Placing Reinforcing
1 At the time of placement, steel reinforcement is to be free from loose flaky rust, mud, oil, or
other coatings that will destroy or reduce the bond.
2 Steel reinforcement is to be in place at the time of grouting. Horizontal reinforcement shall

be placed as the masonry work progresses.
3 The minimum clear distance between reinforcing and masonry units shall be 12mm.
4 The minimum clear distance between parallel bars shall be one bar diameter.
MASONRY S13 - 19
5 Vertical steel reinforcement shall be held in place by centring clips, caging devices, or other
approved methods.
6 Vertical bars shall be supported near each end, and at intermediate intervals not exceeding
80 bar diameters.
7 Horizontal reinforcement shall be set in a full bed of grout.
8 Reinforcement shall be spliced or attached to dowels by placing in contact and wiring

together.
9 Splices shall be staggered in adjacent reinforcing bars. Reinforcing bars shall be lapped at
splices at a minimum of 40 bar diameters.
5.5.3 High Lift Grouting of Cavity Walls
1 Grout shall be placed by hand bucket, concrete hopper, or grout pump. Each lift of grout
shall be consolidated after free water has disappeared but before plasticity is lost.
2 When placing grout by the high lift method, the Contractor shall:
(a) not pour grout until the masonry wall has properly cured for a minimum of 72 hours
(b) close cleaning holes with masonry units
(c) place grout in one continuous operation (grouting of any section of a wall between
control barriers is to be completed in one day with no interruptions greater than one
hour)
(d) provide vertical solid masonry dams across the grout space for the full height of the
wall at intervals of not more than 9 m
3 High lift grouting of double cavity walls should be undertaken in a single, continuous pour of
grout to the top of the wall in 1 m layers or lifts in the same working day, with a minimum
waiting period of 10 minutes between each 1 metre layer or lift. Each layer or lift of grout is
to be vibrated. The vibrator is to be extended 300 mm to 450 mm into the preceding lift to
close any shrinkage cracks or separation from the masonry units.
4 Grout for cavities of double cavity walls less than 50 mm wide should not be poured from a
height exceeding 300 mm.
5.5.4 Low Lift Grouting of Cavity Walls
1 Grout shall be placed by hand bucket, concrete hopper, or grout pump. Each lift of grout
shall be consolidated after free water has disappeared but before plasticity is lost.
2 Double cavity masonry walls are to be constructed and grouted in lifts not to exceed 200
mm. Slushing with mortar will not be permitted.
3 The grout space shall be kept clean from mortar droppings and clean the space before placing
the grout.
4 All grout is to be puddled with a grout stick during and immediately after placing.
5 The cores of concrete masonry units containing reinforcing bars shall be grouted as the
masonry work progresses. Slushing with mortar will not be permitted.
MASONRY S13 - 20
5.5.5 Water Penetration Testing
1 Seven days before plastering or painting, the Contractor shall test exterior masonry walls for
water penetration. The number and location of tests shall be as stated in the Project
Documentation or as directed by the Engineer.
2 Water shall be directed at masonry for a period of one hour at a time when wind velocity is
less than eight kilometres per hour.
3 The areas showing moisture on the inside of the walls shall be corrected and re-tested to
insure that moisture penetration has been stopped.
4 Unless otherwise instructed, testing shall take place in the presence of the Engineer
5.7 OPENINGS
1 Openings are to be square and the jambs, vertical and formed with the uncut faces of the
blocks.
2 If door and window frames are to be built-in the requirements of Clause 5.3.4 of Section 18
shall be complied with and the fixing cramps built-in solid in the mortar joints.
3 The jamb walling is to be built up against the frame all round as the work proceeds.
5.8 INTERSECTING WALLS AND PARTITIONS
1 Walls and partitions are to be bonded or tied to one another at junctions, unless movement
joints are indicated.
2 If ties are used, they should consist of 1.5 x 20 mm stainless or galvanized steel as directed
by the Engineer fully embedded in the horizontal mortar joints at vertical spacings not
exceeding 600 mm.
3 The ends of the ties are to project a minimum of 75 mm into each wall or partition.
5.9 CONNECTIONS BETWEEN WALLS OR PARTITIONS AND COLUMNS
1 All connections between block walls or partitions and concrete or steel columns are to be
reinforced at maximum 400 mm centres by means of stainless steel or zinc coated expanded
metal as directed by the Engineer or approved proprietary ties shot fired to the column and
built into and fully embedded in the mortar joints of the block walls or partitions.
2 Stainless steel or expanded metal ties as directed by the Engineer are to be a width that will
allow 20 mm clearances from each face of the wall or partition and be embedded for a
minimum distance of 200 mm in the mortar joint.
5.10 JOINTS BETWEEN PARTITIONS AND FLOOR SOFFITS
MASONRY S13 - 21
1 Non-load bearing internal walls and partitions shall be built-up to leave a 20 mm joint
between the top of the wall or partition and the soffit of the slab.
2 After the walling has thoroughly dried out and after the expected deflection in the slab due to
dead load has taken place, the joint is to be filled solid with a Class M7 mortar in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Part 2 of this Section.
3 Where concrete slabs are supported on blockwork, a layer of polythene sheet is to be

provided between the top of the wall and the slab for the full width of the wall.
5.11 FILLING HOLLOW BLOCK WALLS
1 In the following situations, the cavities of hollow block walls are to be filled solid with either
Class M7 mortar in accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 2 of this Section or
concrete Grade C15:
(a) jambs of all openings

(b) ends, angles and junctions of walls and partitions
(c) junctions of walls and partitions with columns
(d) at sills
(e) at tops of partitions, if so specified
(f) to provide a solid fixing for false ceiling perimeters
2 The filling to courses is to be supported on a strip of expanded metal lathing embedded in the
joint below.
3 Walls which are to be filled solid are to be built up in lifts not exceeding 1,200 mm and be
filled after allowing a minimum period of 24 hours to elapse to enable the mortar to harden.
The initial compaction of the concrete is to be carried out by hand using a 25 x 50 mm
wooden rod or by vibrator. The final compaction shall take place 10-15 minutes after initial
compaction.
5.12 CAVITY WALLS
1 Cavity walls are to consist of two walls separated by a minimum space of 50 mm and bonded
together with stainless steel or approved other cavity wall ties.
2 The air space between the walls is to be kept clear and clean of mortar droppings by the use
of laths drawn up the cavity as the work proceeds or by other approved methods.
3 Any mortar which inadvertently falls on wall ties is to be removed.
4 Wall ties are to be spaced at the intervals given in the Table 5.2 unless otherwise indicated
elsewhere in the Project Documentation. Additional ties are to be provided in each course
within 250 mm of openings or at end wall situations and on each side of movement joints.
Table 5.2
Spacing of Wall Ties in Cavity Walls
MASONRY S13 - 22
Cavity Width Maximum Horizontal Maximum Vertical Spacing

(mm) Spacing (mm)
(mm)
50-75 1,000 400
75 - 100 800 400
100-150 500 400
Notes:
(a) The spacing of ties may be varied providing that the number per unit area is maintained.
(b) The Table is applicable to cavity walls constructed of two blockwork skins.
5 Cavity Work:
In cavity wall construction both leaves are to be carried up together, not leaving any leaf
more than 400 mm below the other.
Keep cavities clean as follows:
exclude mortar or debris by efficient means (e.g. laths, drawholes, thick rope)
ensure there are no ledges or projections which could permit mortar accumulation
prevent any accidental mortar droppings from adhering to cavity trays or wall ties
leave temporary openings at the bottom and in other areas where mortar could accumulate
and carefully clean out as necessary, avoiding damage to damp proof courses.
6 Bottom of Cavity: form the bottom of the cavity at least 150 mm below the lowest damp
proof course at any point.
7 Coursing: raise the skins of cavity walls together and approximately equally so that the
difference in height does not exceed:
the vertical spacing of consecutive rows of vertical twist pattern ties
1.5 m for all other ties. If one skin is constructed from units of a different height to the other
skin, arrange the coursing of the unfaced skin so that appropriate horizontal courses regularly
coincide during the height of the walls.
8 Weep Holes: leave vertical joints at 800 mm centres completely open in the masonry course
immediately above base of cavity and where bridged at external openings, damp proof
courses and the like.
9 Fixing Ties in Masonry Cavity Walls:
bed not less than 50 mm into bed joint of each leaf
slope downwards towards outer leaf with drip centred in the cavity and pointing
downwards. Do not bend ties to suit coursing
provide ties at the rate of not less than 1 metal tie for every 0.37 m2 of wall area spaced
at maximum 610 mm overall centres horizontally and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate
courses
MASONRY S13 - 23
provide additional ties within 300 mm of openings and space not more than 915 mm
apart around perimeter of openings
provide additional ties beneath the lowest row of insulation.
In cavity walls where both leaves are 90mm or thicker there should be a minimum of 2.5
ties per square metre. The maximum horizontal spacing is 900mm and the maximum
vertical spacing is 450mm, although this may be varied to 800mm for horizontal and
400mm for vertical. The ties should be evenly distributed over the wall area, in a
staggered pattern, except around openings.
For Connecting Masonry Walls/Partitions and Structural Walls/Columns: Use fishtail-

angle- or corrugated-angle-type ties.
Connector Section for Cavity walls: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail in cavity
wall and attached to tie section; formed from thickness as per QCS stainless-steel sheet
(external only).
10 Complete Cavity Fill Insulation: fix specified insulation type units as follows:
do not use any units that are warped
ensure that units are the correct thickness for the cavity width
build the outer leaf first to at least the height of the first row of insulation units, with ties
projecting
unless otherwise specified, commence cavity insulation below damp course level to overlap
any ground slab insulation by at least 150 mm
do not push insulation units into cavities under any circumstances
completely clean the wall face of mortar or projections and fix insulation tightly against it
with ties or other fixings as specified. Use purpose-made fixings strictly in accordance with
the manufacturers printed instructions
space wall ties so that each insulation unit is supported by at least two ties
fix the units a row at a time, the bottom edge resting on the ties, the top edges pushed below
the ties above
carefully and accurately slit and fit units over any additional ties around openings, etc.
carefully cut and tightly fit insulation around openings, air bricks, services and other
interruptions to the cavity
carefully cut units at wall angles
tightly butt units with staggered vertical joints, ensure there are no gaps in the insulation
keep ties and cavity clean
protect insulation from mortar droppings, particularly at top edges
MASONRY S13 - 24
protect the top of any insulation not extending to the top of the wall with a cavity tray
fix insulation units with their sides vertical.

5.13 SERVICES
1 Where walls are constructed of hollow blocks, the mechanical and electrical services are to
be run in the cavities of the blocks wherever possible. No services are to run within the
cavity of a cavity wall.
2 Where chases have to be cut, suitable power tools, as approved by the Engineer, are to be
used.
5.13.2 Fixings
1 Where fixing blocks, anchors, accessories, wall ties, etc., are specified they are to be built
into the walls or partitions and solidly bedded in mortar.
2 Fixings which are not built-in are to be drilled or shot fired to the blockwork.
3 Expanded bolt fixings are only to be drilled into solid blocks or blocks having their cavities
filled solid.
5.14 DAMP-PROOF COURSES
5.14.1 General Description
1 Damp-proof courses shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 743 or one of the other
references mentioned in 5.1.2.
2 Damp-proof courses are to extend through the full thickness of the wall, including pointing,
applied rendering or any other facing material.
3 The mortar bed upon which the damp-proof course is to be laid is to be even and free from
projections liable to cause damage to the damp proof course.
4 Where the damp-proof course is situated in a hollow block wall, the blocks are to be filled
solid in the course below the damp proof course.
5 All damp-proof courses are to be solidly bedded in mortar.
6 Joints of all damp-proof courses shall be lapped a minimum of 100 mm at all passings and
sealed.
5.15 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WALLING
1 All newly or partially built walls are to be protected against drying out too rapidly in the
sun’s heat by covering with hessian or other approved material which is to be kept wet for a
minimum of 3 days.
5.16 REPAIRING
MASONRY S13 - 25
1 Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units;
install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
2 In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
5.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
1 Excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of masonry works,

remove from Project site.
END OF SECTION
MASONRY S13 - 26
SECTION 14 – ROOFING
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section specifies general requirements for various types of roof covering and
waterproofing materials and accessories as applicable to the project.
2 All work indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or
required for the completion of the Project, shall be taken in conjunction with the Drawings
and other parts of the Contract Document. Unless indicated otherwise, applicable provisions
of Section 14 and other relevant parts of latest edition of Qatar Construction Specification
(QCS 2014) apply to this Section.
This section specifies the following roofing and water proofing systems;
2. MEMBRANE ROOFING
3. FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANES
4. METAL AND PLASTIC ROOFING
5. ROOF AND DECK INSULATION.
6. FINISHES
7. ROOF HATCH
3 Related Sections are as follows:

Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery and
Ironmongery Section 15 Thermal Insulation
of Buildings
1.1.2 References
1 The following standards are referred to in this Section:
BS 1070 -------- Black paint (tar based)

BS 1105 -------- Wood wool cement slabs up to 125 mm
thick BS 1197 -------
- Concrete flooring tiles and fittings
BS 1202 -------
- Nails
BS 1210 -------
- Wood screws
BS 1474 -------
- Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes:
Bars, extruded round tube and sections
BS 1494 -------
ROOFING S14 - 27
- Fixing accessories for building
purposes BS 1521 -------
- Water proof building
papers BS 3083 -------
- Hot-dip zinc coated and hot-dip aluminium/zinc coats corrugated steel sheets
for general purposes
BS 3379 -------
- Flexible polyurethane cellular materials for load bearing applications
BS 3416 -------
- Bitumen based coatings for cold application, suitable for use in contact with
potable water
BS 3690 -------
- Bitumens for building and civil engineering
BS 3797 -------
- Lightweight aggregates for concrete
BS 3837 -------
- Expanded polystyrene boards
BS 3869 -------
- Rigid expanded polyvinyl chloride for thermal insulation purposes and
building applications
BS 3927 -------
- Rigid phenolic foam (PF) for thermal insulation in the form of slabs and
profiled sections
BS 4016 -------
- Building papers (breather type)
BS 402 ---------
- Clay plain roofing tiles and fittings
BS 4154 -------
- Corrugated plastic translucent sheets made from thermo-setting polyester
resins (glass fibre reinforced)
BS 4841 -------
- Rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) form for building
applications
BS 4868 -------
- Profiled aluminium sheet for building
BS 5075 -------
- Concrete admixtures
BS 5284 -------
- Methods of sampling and testing mastic asphalt used in building and civil
engineering
BS 5534 -------
- Code of Practice for slating and tiling
BS 6229 -------
- Flat roofs with continuously support coverings
BS 6515 -------
- Polyethylene damp-proof courses for masonry
BS 6676 ------- Thermal insulation of cavity walls using man-made mineral fibre batts
- (slabs)
BS 680 ---------
ROOFING S14 - 28
- Roofing slates
BS 747 ---------
- Roofing felts
BS 8000 -------
- Workmanship on Building Sites
BS 812 ---------
- Testing aggregates
BS 8217 -------
- Code of Practice for built-up felt roofing
BS 882 ---------
- Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS EN 485 ----
- Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Sheet, strip and plate
BS EN 490 ----
- Concrete roofing tiles and fittings-product specifications
BS EN 491 ----
- Concrete roofing tiles and fittings-test methods
BS EN 538 ----
- Clay roofing tiles for discontinuous laying-flexural strength test
BS EN 539 ----
- Clay roofing tiles for discontinuous laying-determination of physical
characteristics.
EN 197-1 ------
- Portland cement
1.1.3 Definitions
1 For purposes of this Section, certain terms are designated in the following paragraphs:
BASE SHEET is one layer of felt or combination sheet secured to the deck over which may
be applied additional felts, a cap sheet, organic or inorganic fibre shingles, smooth coating or
mineral aggregate.
BUILT-UP ROOF COVERING is two or more layers of roofing consisting of a base sheet,
felts and cap sheet, mineral aggregate, smooth coating or similar surfacing material
CAP SHEET is roofing made of organic or inorganic fibres, saturated and coated on both
sides with a bituminous compound, surfaced with mineral granules, mica, talc, ilmenite,
inorganic fibres or similar materials
CEMENTING is solidly mopped application of asphalt, cold liquid asphalt compound, coal
tar pitch or other approved cementing material
COMBINATION SHEET is a glass fibre felt integrally attached to kraft paper
CORROSION -RESISTANT is any non-ferrous metal or any metal having an unbroken

surfacing of non-ferrous metal, or steel with no less than 10 % chromium or with not less
than 0.20 % copper
FELT is matted organic or inorganic fibres, saturated with bituminous compound
FELT, NONBITUMINOUS SATURATED is matted asbestos fibres with binder for use
with wood shingle and wood shake assemblies
GLASS FIBER FELT is a glass fibre sheet coated on both sides with bituminous compound
ROOFING S14 - 29
INTERLAYMENT is a layer of felt or non-bituminous saturated asbestos felt not less than
450 mm wide, shingled between each course of roof covering
INTERLOCKING ROOFING TILES are individual units, typically of clay or concrete,

possessing matching ribbed or interlocking vertical side joints that restrict lateral movement
and water penetration.
METAL ROOFING is metal shingles or sheets for application on solid roof surfaces, and
corrugated or otherwise shaped metal sheets or sections for application on solid roof surfaces
or roof frame works
NON-NAILABLE DECK is any deck, which is incapable of retaining an approved fastener
PREPARED ROOFING is any manufactured or processed roofing material, other than

untreated wood shingles and shakes, as distinguished from built-up coverings
SPOT CEMENTING is discontinuous application of asphalt, cold liquid asphalt compound,

coal tar pitch or other approved cementing material
UNDERLAYMENT is one or more layers of felt or non-bituminous saturated asbestos felt

over which the finish roofing is applied.
1.2 PREPARATION WORK
1 Before commencing installation of the roof, waterproofing and insulation system all
construction work and installations above roof level are to be completed as far as possible.
Particular care is to be taken to ensure:
(a) all rainwater, plumbing, air-conditioning and ventilation duct outlets have been
fixed in position and are protected against blockage or accidental damage.
(b) supports to ductwork, pipework, cable trays and the like have been installed
(c) all kerbs to roof lights, access doors, plant and water tanks have been installed
(d) all chases for skirtings, etc., have been prepared.
2 The surface of the roofing substructure is to be clean and dry, free from ridges or indentations,
laid to falls as required and not contaminated with oil or other deleterious matter.
3 No waterproofing membrane is to be applied until the roofing substructure has been inspected
and approved by the Engineer.
2 MEMBRANE ROOFING
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements for flexible roof coverings of various types.

Section 5 Concrete
Section 18 Carpentry, Joineryand Ironmongery
ROOFING S14 - 30
2.1.2 References

ASTM D412 - 06ae2 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers—Tension
ASTM
D1227.............. Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective
Coating for Roofing
ASTM
D2240.............. Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness
ASTM E96 .................. Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM G154................Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
BS 747........................ Specification for roofing felts
BS 812........................ Testing aggregates
BS 882........................ Aggregates from natural resources
BS 1070...................... Black paint (tar based)
BS 1197...................... Concrete flooring tiles and fittings
BS 1202...................... Nails
BS 1210...................... Wood screws
BS 1494...................... Fixing accessories for building purposes
BS 1521...................... Waterproof building papers
BS 3416...................... Bitumen based coatings for cold application, suitable for use in
contact with potable water
BS 3690...................... Bitumens for building and civil engineering
BS 4016...................... Building papers (breather type)
BS 5284...................... Methods of sampling and testing mastic asphalt used in building and
Civil Engineering
BS 6229...................... Flat roofs with continuously supported coverings
BS 6920...................... Suitability of non-metallic products for use in contact with water
intended for human consumption with regard to their effect on the
quality of the water
BS 7263...................... Pre-cast concrete flags, kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants
BS 8000...................... Workmanship on Building Sites
BS 8217...................... Code of practice for built-up felt roofing
2.1.3 General Description of Workmanship
1 The roof coverings are not to be applied to a damp base and care is to be taken to ensure
that no moisture is trapped between successive layers.
2 Skirtings are to be a minimum of 150 mm above the roof finish at any point.
3 Protective finishes and surface treatments are to be applied as soon as possible after
completion of the roof coverings.
4 Projections passing through the roof covering are to be provided with hoods or caps to permit
the roof covering to terminate beneath the hood and be protected by it from weather elements.
5 Outlets for surface water, whether in gutters or roof areas, are to be set slightly below the
ROOFING S14 - 31
adjacent roof surface and be suitably flashed to allow a bonded lap of roofing felt and flashing
material of 100 mm (minimum).
6 Roof waterproofing materials shall be applied by specialist personnel or a specialist sub-

contractor having previous experience of the system and approved by the Engineer's
Representative. The specialist sub-contractor shall provide the guarantee specified in Part 1
of this Section in favour of Public Works Authority.
7 On completion of application of waterproofing material to an existing concrete roof but before

the application of insulation and protection, the Contractor shall seal off all rainwater outlets
and flood the roof to a depth of 25mm. The Contractor shall make up any loss of water due
to evaporation or leaks. After 24 hours, visual inspection of the roof shall be undertaken from
inside the building in the presence of the Engineer’s Representative to establish if there are
any leaks in the structure. The Contractor shall locate and seal any leaks. The test shall be
repeated at the Contractor’s expense until no leaks exist.
8 On new roofs the test detailed in sub-clause 7 shall be carried out prior to application of
lightweight screed and waterproofing membrane.
2.2. TORCH APPLIED WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
2.2.1. General Requirements
1 Torch applied waterproofing membrane shall consist of a reinforced bitumen-

polymer membrane having the following minimum properties:
Thickness 3mm
Tensile Strength BS 2782 7.5N/mm
Elongation BS 2782 40%
Tear Resistance ASTM D1004 100N
Moisture Vapour Permeability BS 2782 2
8.5g/m /day
1 The waterproofing system shall incorporate the priming and reflective coating
materials recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane.
2 The waterproofing system shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

instructions supplied by the manufacturer.
3 The waterproofing system shall incorporate the priming and reflective coating
materials recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane.
4 The waterproofing system shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

instructions supplied by the manufacturer.
5 The waterproofing system shall be 2 layers. Area of application shall be wet areas.
2.2.2. WORKMANSHIP
ROOFING S14 - 32
1 Standard: work in this Section shall be executed generally in accordance with BS 8000-4.
2 Co-ordination: ensure membrane roofing manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations and standard details are provided as necessary for co-ordination
with related building elements and services.
3 Commence roofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and other
projections through the roof substrate have been completed and proceed only after any
substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired.
4 Ambient conditions: install roofing only within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures and conditions recommended by product manufacturers.
5 Protective clothing is to be worn by operatives using spraying equipment and as
recommended by the product manufacturer.
6 Quality of work: handle, store and install membrane roofing systems including ancillaries and
accessories, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and recommendations,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated or where project conditions require extra
precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. Make the roofing system sound and
weathertight at the earliest opportunity. Repair defects as quickly as practicable to minimise
damage and nuisance.
2.3. PVC ROOF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
General Requirements
Supply and installation of 1.5 mm minimmum thick, hot-air-weldable, fully adhered multy layer
synthetic PVC roof waterproofing sheet, with inlay of glass non-woven containing ultraviolet
light stabilizers and flame retardant according to EN 13956, formulated for direct exposure
should meet the following physical properties and include all accesories as recommended by the
manufacturer. Thickness : 1.50 mm
Resistance to static load EN 12730

Soft Substrate ≥ 20 kg
Rigid Substrate ≥ 20 kg
Tensile strength longitudinal and transversal EN12311-2 : ≥ 10.0 N/mm2 , ≥ 9 N/

Elongation at break longitudinal and transversal EN 12311-2: mm2 ≥ 200 % , ≥ 180 %
Resistance to UV Exposure (EN 1297) Pass (> 5 000 h / grade 0)

Water Vapour Transmission (EN 1931) μ = 15 000
External Fire Performance EN1187 EN13501-5 BROOF(t1) < 20°, >20° Dimensional Stability
EN 1107-2 Long ≤ |0.2|% Trans ≤ |0.1| %
2.4 PERMEABLE FILTER MEMBRANE
1 Permeable filter membrane are to be chemically stable and made of rot resistant fabric,
manufactured from synthetic, thermally bonded, non woven fibre weighing not less than 140
g/m2 and minimum 0.7 mm thick. The membrane is to be capable of freely passing water
but preventing the passage of salt and clay particles.
ROOFING S14 - 33
2 Application and execution of workmanship must comply with procedures recommended

by the manufacturer.
3 Fabric must be applied around projections or areas of reinforcement in the widths and
thickness recommended by the manufacturer prior to final applications of the
membrane.
3. FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANES
3.1. Liquid Applied Waterproofing Systems
1 Surfaces receiving the waterproof membrane are to be treated with the recommended
primer. sealer and allowed to dry.
2 When all the surfaces receiving the membrane and the equipment to be used are ready, the
materials are to be mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions using a
mechanical mixer. Only that amount which can be used within the pot life of the material is
to be prepared.
3 Reinforcing strips at construction and movement joints, shrinkage cracks, pipe inlets/outlets,
electrical conduit, air-conditioning ducting etc., must be applied in the widths and thickness
recommended by the manufacturer prior to final applications of the membrane.
4 When the reinforcing strips and expansion joint covers have cured, the membrane is to be
applied using an airless spray, trowel, squeegee or any other recommended method
producing the required membrane thickness.
5 Site operatives are to be kept off the membrane until it has cured sufficiently to accept foot
traffic. Tackiness of the surface may be neutralised by dusting with dry cement. Areas where
labourers will be working applying topping materials should be covered with a protective
layer of fibreboard.
6 Surfaces which are not to receive a permanent protective covering are to be treated with a
solar reflective finish recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane.
3.1. VAPOR-RETARDING MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER
1 Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane.
2 Physical and Performance Properties:
(a) Air Permeance: Maximum 0.02 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75-Pa pressure
difference; ASTM E 2178.
(b) Vapor Permeance: Maximum 5.8ng/Pa x s x sq. m ; ASTM E 96/E 96M.
(c) Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
3 Accessory Materials: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to

produce a complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.
(a) Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material
manufacturer.
(b) Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 1.0-mm-thick, self-adhering sheet

consisting of 0.8 mm of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 0.2-mm-thick, cross-
laminated polyethylene film with release liner backing.
ROOFING S14 - 34
(c) Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 0.76 to 1.0 mm thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-
reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing.
(d) Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.
(e) Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
(f) Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-
sensitive adhesive tape.
(g) Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, minimum 1.3- to 1.6-mm-thick, cured
sheet neoprene with manufacturer-recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with
stainless-steel termination bars and fasteners .
(h) Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of

cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-
component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding
extrusions to substrates.
(i) Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50
(low modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint
substrates indicated.
(j) Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric

liquid; trowel grade.
3.1.1. Workmanship
3.1.1.1. Generally:
1 Co-ordination: ensure waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations and standard details are provided as necessary for co-ordination with related
building elements and services.
2 Commence waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and other
projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed and proceed only
after any substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired.
3 Ambient Conditions: install waterproofing only within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures and conditions recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply
waterproofing to damp or wet substrates, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent.
4 Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation, application and curing of waterproofing

materials.
5 Protective Clothing is to be worn by operatives using spraying equipment and as

recommended by the product manufacturer.
3.1.1.2. Preparation of Substrates
1 Clean and Prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations to provide a clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing
application.
2 Clean to effectively remove dust, dirt, efflorescence, grease and oil from surfaces generally
and curing compounds, form release agents and other contaminants from concrete, that may
prevent adhesion or penetration of waterproofing. Remove surface projections and fill
honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids.
ROOFING S14 - 35
3 Mask off and protect adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing and joint spaces intended
for sealants and gaskets in order to prevent spillage or overspray damaging or adversely
affecting adjacent components and construction.
4 Seal off drains, outlets and other penetrations to protect against spillage and prevent migration
of waterproofing fluids.
3.1.1.3. Fluid Air-Barrier Membrane Installation
1 General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and
to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written
instructions. Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended
application temperature ranges.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day.
Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve
required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
2 Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates

according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around
protrusions such as masonry ties.
Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in

writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 1.0-mm dry
film thickness , applied in two equal coats.
3 Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.
4 Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.1.1.4. Ancillary Materials and Accessories
5 Primers, Adhesives and Sealants: types recommended for particular application and purpose
by waterproofing product manufacturer.
6 Accessories: jointing strips, reinforcing tape, flashings, protection course, etc., are to be types
recommended for particular application and purpose by waterproofing product manufacturer.
3.1.1.1. Curing, Protecting, and Cleaning
1 Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's recommendations, taking care to prevent

contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
2 Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period when
not concealed or protected by permanent construction immediately after installation:
do not permit traffic on unprotected waterproofing.
3 Protection course: where indicated or recommended by waterproofing manufacturer, install

protection course over completed and cured waterproofing treatments. Provide type indicated
or otherwise recommended and comply with recommendations for method of support or
ROOFING S14 - 36
attachment.
4 Clean and remove any spillage, overspray or soiling from adjacent surfaces not intended to
receive waterproofing using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer
of affected surfaces.
3.2. COLD APPLIED BITUMINOUS COATING
1 The Contractor is to clean and prepare roofing surface areas immediately prior to application
of bitumen coating. Black bitumen coating solutions to be applied in accordance with BS
3416, BS 6920.
2 Application of cold applied bituminous solution is to be done by a qualified experienced

personnel.
3 All openings and roof vents are to have watertight flashings.
3.3. SPRAY LIQUID APPLIED HYBRID MEMBRANE :

1.
3.3.1. A high-performance two -component, elastic, crack-bridging, rapid-curing polyurea
based membrane, for roofs, podiums and landscaped areas, with the following
properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Solid Content > 99 % (by weight & volume)
Shore A Hardness UNI EN ISO 90‐ 94
868:2005
Elongation at Break ISO 527‐1:2012 300‐350 %
Tear Strength UNI ISO 34‐1:2010 100‐ 130 KN/m
Tensile Strength ISO 527‐1:2012 13 ‐ 16 MPa
2.
3.3.2. WORKMANSHIP
1 Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to

recommendations.
2 Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
3 Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing
manufacturer.
3.4. POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING FOR WET AREAS and WATER TANKS
PART 1.GENERAL
3. 4.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
3. 4.2. SUMMARY
Section includes polymer-modified cement waterproofing.
ROOFING S14 - 37
Related Requirements:
3. Section 5 for concrete slabs serving as protective topping for waterproofing and the
finishing of concrete walls and slabs to receive waterproofing.
3. 4.3. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference as required.
3.4.4. ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.

4. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed product.

5. Include Samples of available color selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of waterproofing indicated, in manufacturer's

standard sizes.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Qualification Data: For Applicator.
Product Certificates: For each type of waterproofing, patching, and plugging material.
Product Test Reports: For each product formulation, for tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
Field quality-control reports.
3. 4.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE
Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying polymer-modified cement

waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service
performance, and that employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
6. Build mockup of typical surfaces as shown on Drawings.
7. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
8. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
3. 4.7. FIELD CONDITIONS
Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit polymer-modified cement waterproofing to be performed according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains,
and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed.
Proceed only after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have
ROOFING S14 - 38
been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal
inserts.
Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at

5 deg C or above during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated and kept free
of water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3. 4.8. PREPACKAGED, POLYMER-MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
Positive / Negative-Side, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Manufacturer's

proprietary blend of dry cementitious and other ingredients for mixing with polymer
admixture to produce a waterproof coating that is suitable for vertical and horizontal
applications below or above grade, is breathable, resists negative-side hydrostatic
pressure, and has properties complying with or exceeding the criteria specified below.
A.1. WET AREAS
1. Water Permeability: No Penetration for Positive Water Pressure at 7.0 bar to DIN
1048 Part 5:7.6: 1991 and No Penetration at 150 KPa to EN 14891 A.7
2. No Penetration for Negative Water Pressure at after 24 hours at 1.50 atm. (1.52
bar).
3. Elongation: Tested to EN ISO 527 Pt 3 at 28 days
Air Cured > 40%
Immersed and dried to constant mass > 40%
4. Tensile Strength: Tested to EN ISO 527 Pt 3 at 28 days
5. Air Cured 28 > 0.4MPa
6. Immersed and dried to constant mass > 0.6MPa
7. Crack Bridging: Ability to bridge cracks > 0.6 mm when tested to EN14891 A.8.2
8. Ability to bridge cracks > 1.5 mm with reinforcing mesh when tested to ASTM C836 /
C1305
9. Color: White & Gray
A.2. WATER TANKS

Comply with requirements for A1 and the following;
Elongation: Tested to EN ISO 527 Pt 3 at 28 days

Air Cured > 55%
Immersed and dried to constant mass > 55%
3.4.9. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
4.9.1. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or

sealant recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes,
honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections and compatible with substrate and other
materials indicated.
a. For wet areas;

Blow-holes shall be filled using the same material at a trowelable consistency, scraped tightly
into the surface.
b. For watertanks;
Blow-holes shall be filled using MasterSeal 588 at a trowelable consistency, scraped tightly into
the surface.
ROOFING S14 - 39
4.9.2. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic
properties and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and
moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and
horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); and compatible with substrate and
other materials indicated.
For watertanks use MasterSeal 590 (Formerly known as WATERPLUG)
4.9.3. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and admixture
designed to improve adhesion to prepared substrates and to not create a vapor barrier.
Water: Potable.
3. 4.10.MIXES
Prepackaged, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry

ingredients to mixing liquid according to manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together
with mechanical mixer or by hand to required consistency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4.11. EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for suitable
conditions where waterproofing is to be applied.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or defects that would affect system performance.
3.4.12. PREPARATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application of
waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operation and to ensure
adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.
Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or annular
spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and
pipe sleeves.
Stop active water leaks with plugging compound.
Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound.

1. At holes and cracks 1.6 mm wide or larger in substrate, remove loosened chips and cut
reveal with sides perpendicular to surface, not tapered, and minimum 25 mm deep.
Fill reveal with patching compound flush with surface.
Surface Preparation: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils,
paint, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to
surfaces.
2. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
Smooth-Formed and Trowel-Finished Concrete: Prepare by mechanical abrading or abrasive-blast
cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.
ROOFING S14 - 40
3. Clean concrete unit masonry surfaces according to ASTM D 4261.
Lightweight Concrete Unit Masonry: Abrade surface by wire brushing..
Medium- and Normal-Weight Concrete Unit Masonry: Sandblast or bush-hammer to a depth of 1.6
mm.
4. Clean clay masonry surfaces according to ASTM D 5703.
5. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturers written
instructions`
3.4.13. APPLICATION
General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application

and curing.
6. Saturate surface with water and maintain damp condition until applying waterproofing.
Remove standing water.
7. Apply waterproofing to surfaces as indicated on project drawings. And extend
waterproofing onto adjacent surfaces as follows:
Onto columns integral with treated walls.
Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a distance of 600 mm for cast-
in-place concrete and 1200 mm for masonry.
Onto exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns, for a height of 300 mm, where
floors, but not walls, are treated.
8. Number of Coats: Two
Coating Thickness: Maximum application thickness of 1.0 mm per coat for total thickness.
Coating Thickness with reinforcing mesh: Apply 0.5 mm bedding layer where initial application of
reinforcing mesh is required.
Apply first coat as slurry with brush or roller, and apply subsequent coats with brush, roller, spray,
or trowel.
Vigorously work first coat onto the substrate, forcing the material into surface voids. Apply each
subsequent coat into full contact with previous coat, preferably at 900 to the previous layer.
Allow to cure at least for 6 hours at 20°C before applying subsequent coats.
Final Coat Finish: Brushed or Textured, as required
Curing: Air cure waterproofing for not less than six hours immediately after application
and prior to being placed in service.
3.4.14. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test

and inspect completed application of waterproofing.
Tensile Adhesion Strength Tests to be conducted in accordance with the Engineers

requirements. Test method BS EN 14891 – 2007 Test Method A.6.2 permissible Tensile
Adhesion Strength > 0.5 N/mm2 (MPa).
4. METAL AND PLASTIC ROOFING
4.1. GENERAL
4.1.1. Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements for use of metal and plastic roofing systems for buildings
ROOFING S14 - 41
and structures.
2 Related Sections are asfollows:

Section 15 Thermal Insulation of buildings Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery and
Ironmongery
4.1.2. References
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part: BS 1210......................Wood Screws

BS 1474......................Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering
purposes.
Bars, extruded round tube and sections BS
1494......................Fixing accessories for building purposes
BS 3083......................Hot-dip zinc coated and hot-dip aluminium/zinc coated corrugated
steel sheets for general purposes
BS 3416......................Bitumen based coatings for cold application, suitable for use in
BS 4154......................Corrugated plastic translucent sheets made from thermo-setting
polyester
resins (glass fibre reinforced)
BS 4868......................Profiled aluminium sheet for building
BS EN 485..................Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Plate, sheet and strip
4.2. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
4.2.1. Fittings for Rigid Sheet Roofing
1 Fittings are to match the profile of the specified sheet and shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer.
4.2.2. Fixing Accessories
1 Screws for fixing aluminium roof edging, aprons, and the like are to be stainless steel to BS
1210, minimum 50 mm long.
2 Hook bolts and nuts shall comply with BS 1494, Part 1 and be 8 mm diameter cadmium or
zinc coated steel with plastic sleeves or applied plastic coating, shaped to suit the sheetsand
roof members and complete with plastic washers.
3 Seam bolts and nuts for aluminium sheets are to be aluminium and to galvanized sheets to be
galvanized steel, 6 mm diameter and 40 mm long complete with plastic washers.
4 Filler pieces at ridges and eaves are to be approved pre-moulded cellular plastic or rubber
bitumen units to fit exactlythe contours of the corrugations.
5 Sealant strip are to be approved flexible expanded polyurethane foam strip impregnated with
waxes and/or resins having an elastic recovery of 98% minimum and a density of not less than
145 kg/m3.
4.3. ALUMINIUM SHEET FLASHING ANDAPRONS

ROOFING S14 - 42
4.3.1. Materials Description
1 Aluminium sheet flashings, aprons, etc., are to be fabricated from 99.8 % aluminium sheet
and strip to BS EN 485, material designated 1080A, 0.9 mmthick.
2 Aluminium roof edging is to be fabricated form materials 6063-TB or 6063-TF complying

with BS 1474 to profiles to suit the verges and roof covering material.
3 Black bitumen coating solution shall comply with BS 3416, Type 1.
4.3.2. Installation of Aluminium Flashings andAprons
1 Flashings, aprons, and the like, are to be formed from sheets not more than 1800 mm long and
to be lapped a minimum of 75 mm at intersections.
2 After folding and dressing, two coats of black bitumen coating solution are to be applied to
all areas, which will come into contact with materials containing cement. Repeated folding
and dressing should be avoided to prevent work hardening.
3 The top edge of flashings are to be provided with a 13 mm turn-back to act as a waterstop and
recessed a minimum of 25 mm into the wall. The flashing are to be fixed with 20 x 20 mm
strips of aluminium folded into a wedge shape, covered with two coats of bitumen solution
and driven into the full depth of the recess at 400 mm centres. Upon completion of fixing the
recess are to be pointed in Class M6 cement mortar in accordance with Part 2 of Section 13,
Masonry.
4 Materials containing steel, copper, brass or bronze should not be allowed to come into contact
with aluminium.
4.4. CORRUGATED METALSHEETS
4.4.1. Profiled Aluminium Sheets
1 Profiled aluminium sheets shall comply with BS 4868 and be manufactured from aluminium
alloy to BS EN 485, material designation 3103-H8, with a minimum tensile strength of
175 N/mm2. Unless otherwise specified, Profile S, with a minimum thickness of 0.9 mm shall
be installed.
4.4.2. Hop-Dip Zinc Coated Corrugated Steel Sheets
1 Hop-Dip zinc coated corrugated steel sheets shall comply with BS 3083 and shall have a
sheet thickness of 0.9 mm and minimum 450 g/m2 zinc coating.
4.4.3. Installation of Corrugated and Troughed Roof Coverings
1 The sheeting is to be laid with the open joint of side laps away from the prevailing wind. The
Contractor is to obtain the approval of the Engineer as to which end of the structure the laying
is to commence before beginning sheeting work.
2 The eaves course are to be laid first and subsequent sheets laid in tiers up to the roof from
eaves to ridge, aligning sheets on both slopes on double pitched roofs.
ROOFING S14 - 43
3 Corrugations or troughs are to be in line from eaves to ridge and eaves and verges are to
maintain proper alignment.
4 Sheets are to be cut to clean, true lines with no distortion. All burrs, drilling swarf or dust and
any other foreign matter to be removed before positioning sealing strips, filler pieces and
washers.
5 Openings for outlets, vent pipes, etc., are to be cut to the minimum size necessary. Vent pipes
and the like should always pass through the centre line of the crown and are to be offset below
roof level if necessary.
6 Holes through the sheets are to be drilled 2 mm larger than the diameter of the bolt and always
through the crown of the profile. No hole should be nearer than 40 mm to the end of the sheet.
All fixings are to be of the specified type and size and be in the correct position true to line
and secure.
7 Fittings are to be fixed, where possible, by the same bolts that secure the sheeting.
8 Filler pieces shall be installed between the corrugations or troughs and flat surfaces or
supports at the end of sheet runs wherever necessary to ensure airtightness of the structure.
9 A movement joint shall be provided in all lengths over 45 m. The joint is to be formed by
installing an approved proprietary movement joint cover in a suitably sized space between the
sheet.
4.4.4. Fixing Profiled Aluminium Sheets
1 Corrugated or troughened sheets are to be laid to comply with the requirements of

with Tables 3.1 and 3.2.
Table 3.1
Minimum Laps for Roof Sheeting
End Lap Side Lap
Material Slope
mm Corrugations
Corrugated aluminium sheet 150 1½
230 1½
vertical 100 1
Troughed aluminium sheet 150 1
230 1
vertical 100 1
Corrugated Galvanized 2 more 1½
Sheet than 1½
s than
Table 3.2
Maximum Permissible Dimensions for Roof Sheeting
ROOFING S14 - 44
Maximum
Maximum Purlin Maximum Rail
Unsupported
Sheet Material Spacing Spacing
Overhang
(mm) (mm) (mm)
Corrugated aluminium 1350 1500 150
Corrugated galvanized steel 2200 2400 350
3 The centre line of end laps to coincide as nearly as possible with the centre line of supports,
or the back of angle purlins. All end laps to be fully supported.
4 Roofing sheets are to be fixed to metal purlins by hook bolts. Each bolt is to be fitted with a
metal washer shaped to the profile of the sheet and placed on the outer face together with a
plastic, or similar approved material, sealing washer, positioned between the metal washer
and sheet so that the bolt hole is sealed when the bolt is tightened. The bolt should be tightened
only sufficiently to seat the washer and so as to permit slight movement between the structural
frame and the sheeting.
5 Each sheet is to be fixed at every purlin or rail by at least two bolts situated at the side laps or
edges together with intermediate fastenings at maximum 375 mmcentres.
6 In addition to purlin or rail fixings, side laps are to be secured by means of bolts or rivets
passing through the crown of the profile at the following maximum centres:
(a) roofs more than pitch 375 to 450 mm centres
(b) roofs less than pitch 300 to 375 mm centres
(c) vertical sheeting 450 mm centres.

7 Ridge cappings are, where possible, to be secured to the roof by the same bolts that secure the
sheeting or, if the ridge purlin in not sufficiently near the ridge to permit this, the capping
should be secured to the sheeting on each side by seam bolts or rivets at maximum 450 mm
centres. The lap of the capping along the ridge should not be less than 150 mm with the open
joint away form the prevailingwind.
4.4.5. Fixing Galvanized Corrugated Sheets
1 Galvanised corrugated sheets are to be installed as described in Clause 3.4.3.
4.5. CORRUGATED TRANSLUCENTSHEETS
4.5.1. Materials Description
1 This Section covers pre-formed plastic panels or corrugated translucent sheets made from
thermosetting polyester resins to comply with BS 4154 and are to match the profile of the
adjoining metal sheets.
2 The colour of plastic panels shall be as designated in the Project Documentation unless
otherwise approved by theEngineer.
4.5.2. Submittals
1 Shop drawings for plastic panels shall show details of construction and installation,
including profiles, fastener types and flashingdetails.
2 Plastic panel samples, 750 mm square, shall be submitted for each colour or varying texture
ROOFING S14 - 45
finish used.
4.5.3. Fixing Corrugated Translucent Sheets
1 The sheets are to be laid with the same minimum side and end laps as the adjoining sheets.
Sealing strips be used where the end lap is less than 300 mm on roof pitches below
2 Pre-moulded filler strips and clear mastic shall be used to seal laps.
3 Fixing accessories and holes are to be the same as used for the adjoining sheets.
4 Each sheet should be fixed at every purlin or rail by at least two bolts situated at the sidelaps
and three intermediate fastenings for use with galvanized or aluminium corrugated profiles.
5 In addition to purlin or rail fixings, side laps are to be secured by means of seam bolts at
maximum 300 mm centres. The use of self-tapping screws or blind rivets are notpermitted.
6 Provide neoprene washers under bolt heads. If other fastenings are recommended by plastic
sheet manufacturer, install in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations.
4.6. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
4.6.1. Performance Requirements
A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof
panels, cleats, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal roofing,
fascia panels, trim, and accessories, shall comply with requirements without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation, or due to other defects in construction.
Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight.
B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements
and design criteria indicated.
C. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity loads and other loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 72.
D. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3 L/s per sq. m of roof
area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 or ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure
difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 300 Pa
E. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 or ASTM
E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 300 Pa.
F. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.
1. Uplift Rating: UL 90, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Thermal Movements: Provide metal roof assemblies that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures.
ROOFING S14 - 46
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
H. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels complying with minimum solar reflectance
index requirement when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical
products by a qualified testing agency.
4.6.2. Action Submittals
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type
of roof panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of
edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and
field-assembled work.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below:
1. Metal Roof Panels: 300mm long by actual panel width.

2. Trim and Closures: 300mm long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Accessories: 300mm long Samples for each type of accessory.
E. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and
coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Roof panels and attachments.

2. Roof-mounted items including pipe supports and penetrations, and other items mounted
on roof.
4.6.3. Submittals
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Installer.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with
energy performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.
G. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels, to include in maintenance manuals.
4.6.4. Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Engage a Manufacturer that is 9001:2000 certified or one

that employs an equivalent or higher system of quality management; with a minimum of
ROOFING S14 - 47
10 years documented experience in manufacture/fabrication of product required for this
Project; and capable of providing field service representation during installation.
B. Installer's Qualification: Certified by the Manufacturer as authorized Installer of standing-

seam roof system specified in this Part; highly-experienced, with a successful in-service
record for the installation of products similar in material and scope as those required for
the Project; and complying with the following:
4 Assumes responsibility for engineering standing-seam roof system in accordance with

Project requirements including preparation of shop drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible
for its preparation.
5 Professional Engineer Qualification: Highly-experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind required for the Project and legally qualified to practice as such in
Qatar.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from single
manufacturer.
D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide metal roof panels having insulation core material
with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1 Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2 Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
E. Regulatory Requirement for Fire-Resistance-Rated and Fire-Rated Materials:
Products/assemblies specified in this Part shall comply with fire-rating and fire-
resistance-rating requirements of the Project; and shall be approved for use and certified
in writing as such by the Qatar Civil Defense Department (QCDD).
F. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1 1. Build mock-up of typical roof eave, as shown on approved Shop Drawings; including
insulation, attachments, and accessories.
2 2. Approval of mock-ups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mock-ups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
3 3. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1 Meet with Employer’s or Employer’s representative, and Engineer, testing and

inspecting agency representative, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel
manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
metal roof panels including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2 Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
3 Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including
4 Examine purlin and rafter conditions for compliance with requirements, including
flatness and attachment to structural members.
5 Review structural loading limitations of purlins and rafters during and after roofing.
ROOFING S14 - 48
6 Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment
kerbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels.
7 Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing
and inspecting if applicable.
4.6.5. Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to
be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation
and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.
C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and
high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.
4.6.6. Project Conditions
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's
written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof
panels by field measurements before fabrication.
4.6.7. Coordination
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof kerbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations
with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of
purlins and rafters, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leak-proof,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
4.6.8. Maintenance and Repair
A. Where possible, Contractor shall engage suppliers of materials, products, and equipments
having an office and maintenance service based in Qatar.
4.6.9. Warranty
A. Warranty: Special warranty made out to the Employer by the Manufacturer and
countersigned by the Installer, agreeing to repair or replace works that fail in material or
workmanship within the specified warranty period.
1 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2 Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned
in the tract (IF ANY)
ROOFING S14 - 49
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
a. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the cracking,
checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
b. Finish Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as
mentioned in the contract (IF ANY)
C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight,
including leaks, within specified warranty period.
3 Weathertight Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or
as mentioned in the contract (IF ANY)
4.6.10. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and
mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips,
cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at
panel edges with intermediate stiffening ribs or a flat pan between ribs; designed for
sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips
located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping
panels together.
1 Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as

standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and
structural performance required.
a. Nominal Thickness: 0.9mm, minimum.

b. Exterior Finish: Manufacturer’s standard two-coat fluoropolymer finish.
c. Color: To Engineer’s approved sample from manufacturer's full range.
2 Liner Sheet: Manufacturer’s standard; of profile thickness, and finish recommended by

manufacturer for type of application indicated.
3 Clips: Manufacturer’s standard one-piece or two-piece clip capable of accommodating
thermal movement [; with thermal break pad and of height required to accommodate
total height build-up of insulated roof system].
4 Panel Coverage: 400mm, nominal; or as indicated on Drawings.
5 Panel Height: 50mm, nominal; or as indicated on Drawings.
4.6.11. Thermal Insulation
A. Insulation Core Material: Manufacturer’s standard unfaced, mineral-wool insulation

complying with ASTM C 612; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 10 and 20, respectively, per ASTM E 84; and passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
1 Density: As required for application indicated, but not less than 40 kg/cu. m.
2 Total Thickness: As recommended by roof panel manufacturer for application
indicated.
ROOFING S14 - 50
4.6.12. Vapor Retarder:
Manufacturer’s standard vapor control layer; recommended for type of application
ROOFING S14 - 51
indicated. Shall be a multi-layer composite membrane, with a polypropylene scrim
reinforced, UV stabilized virgin polyethylene film. End and side laps of the VCL shall be
sealed by two runs of butyl sealant tape. The origin shall be UK.
4.6.13. Miscellaneous Materials
A. Miscellaneous Metal Sub-framing and Furring: To ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-

coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating
designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation
unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for
support and alignment of metal panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Where required or indicated, provide components for a complete,

weathertight panel system including, but not limited to, trim, copings, fasciae, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of
metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1 Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal
panels.
2 Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels
as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include,
but are not limited to, eaves, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D. Gutters: Formed from same material as roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 2400mm long sections, of size
and metal thickness recommended by manufacturer for application. Furnish gutter supports
spaced a maximum of 900mm o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire
ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.
E. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in (3-meter long
sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness
recommended by manufacturer for application. Finish downspouts to match gutters.
F. Roof Kerbs (Where Required): Fabricated from same material as roof panels, 1.2mm
nominal thickness. Fabricate kerb sub-framing of 1.5mm nominal thickness, angle-, C-, or
Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate kerb and sub-framing to withstand indicated loads of size
and height indicated. Finish roof kerbs to match metal roof panels.
G. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.
H. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible
with panel materials, are non-staining, and do not damage panel finish.
1 Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, non-
toxic, non-staining tape 13mm wide and 3mm thick.
2 Joint Sealant: To ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
4.6.14. Metal Soffit Panels (Where Required)
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping
ROOFING S14 - 52
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through
panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps.
Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Unless otherwise indicated, match profile and material of metal roof
panels.
1 Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, match finish and color of metal roof panels.
2 Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
4.6.15. Fabrication
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Part, metal panels
may be fabricated on-site using portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same
profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate
according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details
shown.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item
indicated.
1 Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2 Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3 Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4 Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
sealant and to comply with industry standards.
5 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6 Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
panel manufacturer.
4.6.16. Finishes
A. Pretreatment: Mechanically clean and chemically treat fabricated items to obtain bare
clean, corrosion- and contamination-free metal surface in accordance with coating
manufacturer's and AAMA requirements for finish indicated.
B. Application: Apply primer and finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's
requirements for finish indicated.
C. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

ROOFING S14 - 53
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
E. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:
1 Superior-Performance Organic Finish: To AAMA 620; 2-coat fluoropolymer liquid

coating finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
a. Dry Film Thickness: As recommended by coating Manufacturer, but not less than
40 microns.
b. Color and Gloss: As per Engineer’s approved sample from the coating
Manufacturer’s full range.
4.6.17. Fall Arrest System
A. Provide complete, weather-resistant fall arrest and restraint system; complying with BS
EN 795 and recommended by roof panel manufacturer as suitable for type of roof system
indicated; comprising of, but not limited to, the following system components:
1 Grade 316 stainless steel end-, intermediate- and corner-type bracket and anchor
assembly.
2 Grade 316 stainless steel horizontal lifeline wire.
B. Fall arrest system shall have an integral shock absorber designed to reduce load in a fall
situation to a maximum of 10kN.
4.6.18. Examination
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles,
channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed
within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify
actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal
roof panel installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4.6.19. Preparation
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install sub-framing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel

support members and anchorages according to relevant industry standard and metal panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
ROOFING S14 - 54
4.6.20. Metal Panel Installation
A. General: Install metal panels and accessories according to manufacturer's written

instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to
supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the
Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
B. Fasteners:
3 Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to

the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
interior.
C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
E. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with
concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1 Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely
engaging factory-applied sealant.
2 Watertight Installation:
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or
tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.
Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 150mm end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened
together by interlocking clamping plates.
1 Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer

tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and

weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to
line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be
permanently watertight and weather resistant.
H. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters
to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 900mm o.c. using manufacturer's
standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for
thermal expansion.
I. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold
downspouts securely 25mm away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at
approximately 1500mm o.c. in between.
ROOFING S14 - 55
J. Roof Kerbs: Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.
K. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and
seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.
L. Fall Arrest System: Install according fall arrest system and metal roof panel
manufacturer’s written recommendation.
1. Install system assembly on standing seam of metal roof panel. Do not penetrate any part of
the standing-seam metal roof panels.
4.6.21. Erection Tolerances
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of
6mm in 6 meters on slope and location lines as indicated and within 3mm offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
4.6.22. Field Quality Control
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test

and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.
B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate
that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
4.6.23. Cleaning
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
5 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements for types of roofing and deck insulation.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Membrane Roofing
Part 3Metal and Plastic Roofing
Part 5Roof tiles and Shingles
ROOFING S14 - 56
Section 1 General
5.1.2 References

BS 3379...................... Flexible polyurethane cellular materials for load bearing applications
BS 3797...................... Lightweight aggregates for concrete
BS 5075...................... Concrete admixtures
BS 1105...................... Wood wool cement slabs up to 125 mm thick
BS 3837...................... Expanded polystyrene boards
BS EN 490.................. Concrete roofing tiles and fittings - Product specifications

BS EN 491.................. Concrete roofing tiles and fittings - Test methods
EN 197-1
.................... Portland Cement
5.1.3 Submittals
1 The contractor is to submit the following to the Engineer for approval before commencement
of work in this section.
2 Manufacturers literature and samples of roofing, thermal insulation, vapor barrier, roof
accessories, bitumen waterproof membranes, waterproofing materials, dampproof coursing and
elastometric sealants, etc.
3 Primary roofing materials inclusive of insulation, barriers or membranes should be obtained

from only one manufacturer if possible. Where secondary materials must be used, the primary
manufacturer is to be provided with adequate literature and samples for concurrence that the
secondary products are compatible for roofing warrantees. Concurrence will be provided by
the Contractor in writing to the Engineer prior to commencement of work.
5.1.5. General Application
1 Expanded extruded polystyrene boards shall comply with BS 3837, Grade EHD, Type A,
extruded board with skins.
2 Spray applied polyurethane or isocyanurate foam insulation is to be protected from

deterioration due to ultra violet light by a covering approved by the manufacturer of the
foam.
3 Where spray applied foam is used as an integral part of the roof waterproofing system it
must be specifically included in the manufacturer’s guarantee requirements.
4 Unless otherwise specified the insulation is to be at least equivalent to 50 mm thick material

having an ultimate thermal conductivity of 0.032 W/mK at a mean temperature of C and
a compressive resistance of not less than 150 kN/m2.
5.2. RIGID BOARD INSULATION
5.2.1. General Requirements
Rigid insulation boards are to be installed as a single layer to the thickness specified.
ROOFING S14 - 57
All joints between rigid insulation boards are to be tight and no gaps should exist where the
board meets rooflights, edge details and services penetrating the roof structure. End joints are to
be staggered.
On corrugated surfaces all long edges are to be supported by the crown of the corrugations.
5.2.2. Roof Insulation:
EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE ROOF INSULATION: Rigid cellular polystyrene Board

Insulation with closed cells to ASTM C 578, square edged, properties as follows:.
ASTM C 578-95, Type VII: 414 kPa, 35 kg/ m3 / [60 psi, 2.2 lbs/ft3.], minimum.
5.4 POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION
General Requirements
1 Polystyrene board insulation shall conform to BS 3837, and shall include the following
requirements:
a. water absorption shall not be more than 0.1 % by weight

b. density shall not be less than 32 kg/m3 for Type VI
2 Standard polystyrene boards shall conform to the following requirements:
a. nominal size shall be approximately 600 by 1200 mm minimum

b. they shall have a drainage channel on the bottom longitudinal edge of the boar2
c. they are to have a flat top surface where gravel ballast in used or ribbed bottom
pavers are used
d. they are to have ribbed top surface where flat bottom paver is used
e. they are to be tapered for roof slope where top surface is level
f. the edges shall be square, except for drainage channels.
3 Mortar faced boards shall conform to the following requirements:
a. boards shall be top surfaced with 10 mm thick facing of Portland cement latex mortar
having the following physical properties:
(i) density 1240 kg/m3
(ii) compressive strength (28 days) 25 MPa
(iii) bond strength to insulation 1 MPa
(iv) troweled finish with texture
b. drainage channels on bottom longitudinal edges of board
c. nominal size shall be approximately 600 by 1200 mm minimum
d. they shall have tongue and grooved longitudinal edges
5.4.1 Workmanship
Generally
ROOFING S14 - 58
Handle, Store and Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
applicable to the particular use:
clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation and remove any projections interfere
with placement or attachment
use only insulation that is undamaged, dry and unsoiled
extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover or envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut
and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation
unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness, install a
single layer of insulation of thickness indicated.
6. ROOF FINISHES
6.1. PAVERS / ROOF FINISH
1 ROOF PAVERS
2 Lightweight Roof Pavers: Interlocking, lightweight concrete units, specially factory cast for
use as roof ballast, grooved back, with four-way drainage capability, beveled, doweled, or
otherwise profiled, and as follows:
(a) Available Manufacturers.
(b) Size: 500 x 500 x 40 mm / or as specified in the detail drawings.
ROOFING S14 - 59
(c) Weight: Minimum 50kg/sq. m to maximum 90 90kg/sq. m.
(d) Compressive Strength: 17 MPa, minimum.
(e) Colours and Textures: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range.
(f) Paver pedestals: Plastic pedestals, complete with spacers and type to suit design
requirements.
3 Pavers and flooring as specified in Section 24, and Landscape specifications.
7. ROOF HATCHES
Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated
single-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame
counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner
joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-
resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.
1. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand a minimum live load of 40-

lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa) wind uplift.
2. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 96 inches (750 by 2440 mm).
3. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick.
a. Finish: Prime painted.
4. Insulation: Glass-fiber board.

5. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material
and finish as outer metal lid.
6. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same
material and finish as metal curb.
7. Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as
metal curb.
8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform
to roof profile.
9. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm), unless
otherwise indicated.
10. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-
type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
a. Provide 2-point latch on covers larger than 84 inches (2130 mm).

b. Provide remote-control operation.
11. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock
in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to
closed position.
a. Material and Finish: Steel tube, baked enameled.
END OF SECTION
ROOFING S14 - 60
SECTION 15 – THERMAL INSULATION
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section covers the type, quality and application of exterior wall and roof insulation,
damp proof courses, waterproof; and related joints, caulking and insulation.
This Section
Part 2 ............... Building Insulation
Part 3 ............... Cold Stores
Section 1 ......... General

Section 13 ....... Masonry
Section 14 ....... Roofing
Section 16 ...... Structural Metalwork
Section 17 ....... Metalwork
Section 24 ....... Finishes to Buildings
Section 25 ....... Glass and Glazing
1.1.2 References

BS
874........................ Methods for determining thermal insulating properties
BS
1142...................... Fibre building boards
BS
1202...................... Nails
BS
1210...................... Wood screws
BS
1449...................... Steel plate, sheet and strip
BS
2502...................... Manufacture of sectional cold rooms (walk in type)
BS
2972...................... Method of test for inorganic thermal insulating materials
BS
3692...................... ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS
3837...................... Expanded polystyrene boards
BS
3927...................... Rigid phenolic foam (PF) for thermal insulating in the form of slabs
and profiled sections
BS
3958...................... Thermal insulation materials
BS Rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for
4841...................... building
applications
THERMAL INSULATION S15 - 1

BS
5250...................... Code of practice for control of condensation in buildings
BS
5617...................... Urea-formaldehyde (UF) foam systems suitable for thermal insulation
of cavity walls with masonry of concrete inner and outer leaves
BS
5618...................... Thermal insulation of cavity walls (with masonry of concrete inner
and outer leaves) by filling with urea-formaldehyde (UF) foam
systems
BS
5803...................... Thermal Insulation for use in pitched roof spaces in dwellings
BS 6203...................... Guide to fire characteristics and fire performance of expanded

polystyrene materials (EPS and XPS) used in building applications
BS 6676...................... Thermal insulation of cavity walls using man-made mineral fibre batts
(slabs)
BS 7021...................... Code of practice for thermal insulation of roofs externally by means of
sprayed rigid polyurethane (PUR) or polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam
Code of practice for stabilization and thermal insulation of cavity
BS 7456 ..................... walls
(with masonry or concrete inner and outer leaves) by filling
with
polyurethane (PUR) foam systems
BS 8208...................... Assessment of stability of external cavity walls for filling with thermal
insulants
BS 8216...................... Code of practice for use of sprayed lightweight mineral coatings used
for thermal insulation and sound adsorption in buildings
BS 8233...................... Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings. Code of practice
BS EN 998-1 ............. Specification for mortar for masonry: Part 1: Rendering and plastering
mortar
BS EN 3261................ Unbacked flexible PVC flooring
BS EN 13162:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made mineral wool
(MW) products. Specification
BS EN 13163.............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made expanded
polystyrene (EPS) products. Specification
BS EN 13164 ............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made extruded
polystyrene foam (XPS) products. Specification
BS EN 13165.............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made rigid
polyurethane foam (PU) products. Specification
BS EN 13166.............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made phenolic foam
(PF) products. Specification
BS EN 13167:2012. ... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made cellular
glass (CG) products. Specification
BS EN 13168:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made wood wool
(WW) products. Specification
BS EN 13169:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made
expanded
perlite board (EPB) products. Specification
BS EN 13170:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made products of

expanded cork (ICB). Specification

BS EN 13171:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made wood fibre
(WF) products. Specification
BS EN 13172 .............. Thermal insulation products. Evaluation of conformity
BS EN 13467 .............. Thermal insulating products for building equipment and industrial
installations. Determination of dimensions, squareness and linearity of
preformed pipe insulation
BS EN 14319-1 .......... Thermal insulating products for building equipment and industrial
installations. In-situ formed dispensed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and
polyisocyanurate foam (PIR) products
.......... Thermal insulating products for building equipment and
BS EN 14320-1 industrial
installations. In-situ formed sprayed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and
BSEN 14496.............. Gypsum based adhesives for thermal/acoustic insulation composite
panels and plasterboards. Definitions, requirements and test methods
EN 1745:2002
............ Masonry and masonry products — Methods for determining design
thermal values
EN 13501-1
................ Fire classification of construction products and building elements —
Part 1: Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests
GSO EN 13950 Gypsum plasterboard thermal/acoustic insulation composite panels -

Definitions, requirements and test methods
ISO 12575-1
............... Thermal insulation. Exterior insulating systems for foundations
Material specification
ISO 12575-2
............... Thermal insulation products. Exterior insulating systems for
foundations: Principal responsibilities of installers
ISO 11925-2 Reaction to fire tests -- Ignitability of products subjected to
............... direct
impingement of flame -- Part 2: Single-flame source test
1.2 MATERIALS
1 Types for insulation are: thermal /acoustic / fire / damp proof courses / waterproof
2 Thermal insulation materials shall meet requirements of BS 2972 for testing for inorganic
thermal quality and expanded polystyrene materials shall meet fire requirements of BS 6203
or EN 13501-1 or ISO 11925-2.
3 Insulation material shall comply with any reference in paragraph 1.1.2, or approved by Qatar
Standards.
4 Insulation materials shall be approved by Civil Defence Department

1.2.2 Submittals
1 Submittals shall comply with the relevant provisions of Section 1, General.
2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the manufacturer’s literature and data for the
following:
a) insulation, each type used

b) adhesives, each type used
c) tape
3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details of all insulation materials to be installed.
The details shall include, but not be limited to, the type, dimensions and thermal/acoustic/damp
proof courses/waterproof insulating properties of the insulation. References to all applicable
standards shall be included with the submission.
1.2.3 Storage
1 Materials shall be stored in accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 1, General.
2 BUILDING INSULATION
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the type, quality and application of exterior wall insulation.
This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Section 5 ......... Concrete

Section 18 ....... Carpentry, Joinery and Ironmongery
2.1.2 References

BS874........................ Methods for determining thermal
insulating properties
BS 1142...................... Fibre building boards
BS 1202...................... Nails
BS 1210...................... Wood screws
BS 3692...................... Isometric precision hexagon
bolts, screws, nuts
BS3837...................... Expanded polystyrene boards

BS6203...................... Guide to fire characteristics and fire performance of expanded

polystyrene materials (EPS and XPS) used in building applications
BS6676...................... Thermal insulation of cavity walls using man-made mineral fibre batts
(slabs)
BS 7021...................... Code of practice for thermal insulation of roofs externally by means of
sprayed rigid polyurethane (PUR) or polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam
BS 7456…... Code of practice for stabilization and thermal insulation of cavity walls
(with masonry or concrete inner and outer leaves) by filling with
polyurethane (PUR) foam systems
BS 8208...................... Assessment of stability of external cavity walls for filling with thermal
insulants
BS 8216...................... Code of practice for use of sprayed lightweight mineral coatings used
for
thermal insulation and sound absorption in buildings
BS 8233...................... Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings. Code of practice
BS EN 998-1 ............. Specification for mortar for masonry: Part 1: Rendering and plastering
mortar
BS EN 13162:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made mineral wool
(MW) products. Specification
BS EN 13163.............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made expanded
polystyrene (EPS) products. Specification
BS EN 13164 ............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made extruded
polystyrene foam (XPS) products. Specification
BS EN 13165.............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made rigid
polyurethane foam (PU) products. Specification
BS EN 13166.............. Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made phenolic foam
(PF) products. Specification
BS EN 13167:2012. ... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made cellular
glass (CG) products. Specification
BS EN 13168:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made wood wool
(WW) products. Specification
BS EN 13169:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made
expanded perlite board (EPB) products. Specification
BS EN 13170:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made products of
expanded cork (ICB). Specification
BS EN 13171:2012. .... Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made wood fibre
(WF) products. Specification
BS EN 13172 .............. Thermal insulation products. Evaluation of conformity
BS EN 13467 .............. Thermal insulating products for building equipment and industrial
installations. Determination of dimensions, squareness and linearity of
preformed pipe insulation

installations. In-situ formed dispensed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and
installations. In-situ formed sprayed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and
BS EN 14496 .............. Gypsum based adhesives for thermal/acoustic insulation composite
panels and plasterboards. Definitions, requirements and test methods
EN 1745:2002 ............ Masonry and masonry products — Methods for determining design
thermal values
EN 13501-1 ................ Fire classification of construction products and building elements —
Part 1: Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests
GSO EN 13950.......... Gypsum plasterboard thermal/acoustic insulation composite panels -

Definitions, requirements and test method
ISO 12575-1
............... Thermal insulation. Exterior insulating systems for foundations
Material specification
ISO 12575-2 ............... Thermal insulation products. Exterior insulating systems for
foundations: Principal responsibilities of installers
Reaction to fire tests -- Ignitability of products subjected to
ISO 11925-2 ............. Direct impingement of flame -- Part 2: Single-flame source test Health
Technical Memorandum 08-01: Acoustics
2.2 THERMAL INSULATION
2.2.1 Minimum Envelope Performance Requirements
1 For all new air conditioned buildings, exterior building elements must have average thermal
transmittance (also known as U Value) and Shading Coefficients (SC) that does not exceed
the values specified and Light Transmittance greater than or equal to the values specified.
(a) External Walls, Roofs and Floors:
Building elements forming the external walls and floors (where one side of the floor is
exposed to ambient conditions) must have an average thermal transmittance (U Value)
which does not exceed the following values:
Roof U= 0.44W/m2K
External Wall U=0.57W/m2K
Floor U=0.57W/m2K
If the floor is in contact with the ground, the insulations should only be applied to one
meter (1m) in from the perimeter of the building.
Glazed elements with back insulated panels must be treated as walls (and therefore
must meet the performance requirement for walls.)

(b) Glazed Elements-Fenestration:
2 If the total area of external walls that let in light is forty percent (40%) or less of the external
wall area, then the glazing elements must meet the following performance criteria:
Thermal Transmittance (Summer U Value) U=2.1W/m2K (max)

Shading Coefficient (SC) 0.4 (max)
Light Transmittance 0.25 (min)
3 If the total area of external walls that let in light is between forty percent (40%) and sixty
percent (60%) of the external wall area, then the glazing elements must meet the following
performance criteria:
Thermal Transmittance (Summer U Value) U=1.9W/m2k (max)


4 For shop fronts and showrooms, other than those at ground floor level, glazing elements
must meet the following performance criteria:

5 If the glazing portion of a roof is ten percent (10%) or less of the roof area, then the
glazing elements must meet the following performance criteria:

6 If the glazing portion of a roof is greater than ten percent (10%) of the roof area, then the
glazing elements must meet the following performance criteria:


2.4 INSULATION MATERIAL TYPES
2.4.1 General
1 Various types of insulation may be specified for varying conditions or wall construction. The
BS, EN classification system is to be used for insulation material; or to any other reference
mentioned in paragraph 2.1.2 , or approved by Qatar Standards.
2 The Contractor shall use only one type of insulation in any particular area where more than
one type is optional unless approved other wise by the Engineer.
3 At least thermal insulation is to be used for exterior roofs and exterior walls of the building
4 Where insulation is used for exterior walls, roof surfaces, or below grade, the requirements
for condensation control shall be to BS 5250 and BS 5803.
2.4.2 Cavity Wall Insulation
1 Mineral Fibre Board shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1142 and be faced
with a vapour retarder having a perm rating of not more than 0.5.
2 Polyurethane or polyisocyanurate board shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS

4841 and be faced with a vapour retarder having a perm rating of not more than 0.5.
3 Extruded polystyrene Board Insulation made of closed cell, with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 5 and 165, respectively, per ASTM E 84; and as follows:
Property Standard Value
Density Not less than 25 kg/cu.m

Compressive strength at 5% compression ASTM D Not less than 210 kPa
1621 or DIN
54321
4 Foam system insulation used in cavity walls shall be to BS 5617 and BS 5618.
5 Unless otherwise stated on the drawings cavity wall insulation shall be extruded polystyrene
board of minimum density 25 kg/m3 to the thickness detailed.
2.4.3 Perimeter Insulation
1 Polystyrene board where used for exterior perimeter insulation below ground and in contact
with soil shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 3837 and BS 8216.
2 Where sprayed lightweight mineral coatings are used, they shall be to BS 8216.
2.4.4 Exterior Framing or Furring Insulation
1 On approval by the Engineer, batt or blanket type insulation can be used for exterior wall
insulation provided that proper protection, as designated in the Project Documentation, is
present.
2 Mineral fiber shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 6676.
2.4.5 Rigid Insulation

1 Rigid insulation shall be applied to the inside face of exterior walls, spandrel beams, floors
and where indicated in the Project Documentation.
2 Mineral Fiber board shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 6676 Part 1 and Part 2.
3 Mineral Fibre Rigid Insulation

(a) Mineral fiber insulation manufactured from stable glass fibers bonded with
thermosetting resins. Comply with ASTM C 612. Edges of boards shall be square.
Installation shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
(b) Physical Properties: For external wall and roof.
Thermal conductivity : 0.035 W/moK (DIN 52612)

(K Value) : K=0.24 Imperial.
Density : 64kg/m3.
(c) Facing one side in all exposed situations shall have Glass Reinforced Aluminum (FSK
tape).
(d) Fire Characteristics: ASTM E84 and E 136.
Flame Spread: 15 (Max).

Smoke Development: 20.
2.4.6 Adhesive
1 Adhesives and Coatings: types recommended for particular purpose by manufacturer of

thermal insulation.
2.4.7 Tape
1 Tape used to seal cuts, tears or unlapped joints of insulation shall have pressure sensitive
adhesive on one face.
2 The perm rating of the tape shall not be more than 0.50.
2.4.8 Mineral Fiber insulation:
1 Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: semi-rigid mineral fibre batts bonded with resin binders. It is
to conform to the requirements of BS EN 13162.
2.5 INSTALLATION
2.5.1 Execution and Workmanship
1 Insulation shall be installed with the vapour barrier facing the heated side, unless specified
otherwise.
2 Rigid insulating units shall be installed with joints close and flush, in regular courses and
with cross-joints broken.

3 Batt or blanket insulation shall be installed with tight joints and filling framing void
completely. Seal cuts, tears, and unlapped joints with tape. Insulation shall be fitted tight
against adjoining construction and penetrations, unless specified otherwise.
4 Handle, Store and Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
applicable to the particular use:
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation and remove any projections that
interfere with placement or attachment
Use only insulation that is undamaged, dry and unsoiled
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover or envelop entire area to be insulated.

Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.
Unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness,
install a single layer of insulation of thickness indicated.
2.5.2 Masonry Cavity Walls
1 Insulation shall be mounted on exterior faces of inner leaves of masonry cavity walls and
brick faced concrete walls. Fill joints with the same material used for bonding.
2 Polystyrene Board Insulation: fix securely with tightly butted joints using metal fixings,
ensuring that:
edges are not damaged
top edges are covered with a temporary batten to ensure that they remain completely
free of mortar droppings, grout and other debris
all parts of inner leaf cavity face are covered

place and secure each course of insulation before building up inner leaf above level of
previous course of insulation.
batts, boards and blankets used for cavity wall insulation are to be selectively sized to
suit wall tie spacing.
3 Mineral fiberboard and polyurethane shall be bonded to surfaces with adhesive as

recommended by insulation manufacturer.
4 Cavity wall insulation: batts, boards and blankets used for cavity wall insulation are to be
selectively sized to suit wall tie spacing.
2.5.3 Perimeter Insulation
1 When applying vertical perimeter insulation, the contractor shall:
(a) fill joints of insulation with the same material as used for bonding
(b) bond polystyrene board to surfaces with adhesive or Portland cement mortar mixed and
applied in accordance with recommendations of the insulation manufacturer.
2 When applying horizontal perimeter insulation under concrete floor slabs the Contractor
shall:
(a) lay insulation boards and blocks horizontally on level, compacted and drained fill
(b) extend insulation from foundation walls towards the centre of the building.
3 Installation General
(a) Apply insulation units to substrates, complying with manufacturer’s written

instructions. Bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to
provide permanent placement and support of units.
(b) Rigid Insulation Boards
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and staggering

joints in both directions.
Cut clearly to fit closely around projections, up stands, rainwater outlets etc.
Protect from damage after installation.
2.5.4 Exterior Framing or Furring Blanket Insulation
1 The insulation shall be packed around door frames and windows and in building expansion
joints, door soffits and other voids. Open voids are not permitted. The insulation shall be held
in place with pressure sensitive tape.
2 Vapour retarder flanges shall be lapped together over the face of the framing for a
continuous surface. Seal all penetrations through the insulation.
3 The blanket insulation shall be fastened between metal studs or framing and exterior wall
furring by continuous pressure sensitive tape along flanged edges.
4 The blanket insulation between wood studs or framing shall be fastened with nails or staples
through the flanged edges on the face of the stud. Fastenings shall be spaced the not more
than 150 mm apart.
5 For roof rafter insulation or floor joist insulation, mineral fibre blankets shall be placed
between the framing to provide not less than a two 50 mm space between the insulation and
the roof sheathing or sub-floor.
6 Ceiling insulation and soffit insulation shall be as follows:
(a) at wood framing, blanket insulation shall be fastened between the wood framing or joist
with nails or staples through flanged edges of insulation.
(b) at metal framing or ceiling suspension systems, blanket insulation shall be installed above
suspended ceilings or metal framing at right angles to the main runners or framing; the
insulation shall be taped tightly together so no gaps occur and metal the framing members
are covered by insulation.
(c) in areas where suspended ceilings adjoin areas without suspended ceilings, either blanket,
batt, or mineral fibreboard insulation shall be installed; the insulation shall extend from
the suspended ceiling to underside of deck or slab above; the insulation shall be secured
in place to prevent collapse or separation of the insulation and maintain it in a vertical
position; blanket or batt insulation shall be secured to the structure above with continuous
cleats.
2.5.5 Rigid Insulation
1 Rigid insulation shall be securely fixed to the interior face of exterior walls of solid masonry,

or to concrete walls, beams, beam soffits, underside of floors, and to the face of studs where
shown on the Project Drawings for interior walls unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2 The insulation shall be bonded to solid vertical surfaces with adhesive as recommended by
insulation manufacturer. Joints shall be filled with adhesive cement.
3 Impaling pins shall be used for attachment of the insulation to the underside of horizontal
surfaces. Fastenings shall be spaced as necessary to hold insulation in place and prevent
sagging.
4 Insulation board is to be fastened at walls or underside of ceilings with screws, nails or staples.
Fastenings shall be spaced not more than 25 mm apart and there shall be a fastening in each
corner. The fasteners shall be staggered at the joints between boards.
5 Floor insulation shall be as follows:
(a) insulation shall be bond to concrete floors in attics by coating surfaces with hot asphalt
applied at rate of not less than 35 kg per 10 m2, and firmly bed the insulation.
(b) when applied in more than one layer, bed succeeding layers in hot asphalt applied at the
rate to equal a total of not less than 35 kg per 10 m2 when completed.
(c) insulation may be installed with non-flammable adhesive in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions when a separate vapour barrier is used.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 17 – METALWORK
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Part provides the specification for preparation of shop drawings, engineering, testing,
fabrication, delivery erection and installation of steel doors, roller shutters, aluminium doors,
windows aluminium support and cladding systems and architectural metal work.

Section 5 Concrete
Section 14 Roofing
Section 16 Structural Steelworks
Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery and Ironmongery
Section 25 Glass and Glazing
1.1.2 References

BS 476........................ Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS 729........................ Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
BS 1245...................... Metal door frames (steel)
BS1282...................... Guide to the choice, use and application of wood preservatives.
BS1449...................... Steel plate, sheet and strip.
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general
BS 1474...................... engineering
purposes, bars, extruded round tube and section
BS 1615...................... Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium and
alloy
BS 1706...................... Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium
BS 1722...................... Fences
BS 1723...................... Brazing
BS 1724...................... Bronze welding by gas
BS 2901...................... Filler rods and wires for gas shielded and welding
BS 2994...................... Cold rolled steel Sections
BS 2997...................... Aluminium rainwater goods
BS 3049...................... Pedestrian guard rails (metal)
Hot-dip zinc coated and hot-dip aluminium/zinc coated
BS 3083...................... corrugated
BS 3987...................... Anodic coatings on wrought aluminium for oxidation external
architectural applications.
BS 4147...................... Bitumen based hot applied coating material for protecting iron and
steel, including suitable primers where required.
BS 4254...................... Two-part polysulphide based sealants
METAL WORK S17 - 1

BS 4255...................... Rubber used in pre-formed gaskets for weather exclusion from

buildings
BS4300...................... Specification (supplementary series) for wrought aluminium and
aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes.
BS 4315...................... Methods of test for resistance to air and water penetration
BS 4873:..................... Aluminium alloy windows
BS5368...................... Method of testing windows.
BS 5707...................... Solutions of wood preservatives in organic solvents.
BS 6213...................... Guide to selection of constructional sealants
BS 6375...................... Performance of windows
Powder organic coatings for application and storing to aluminium
BS 6496...................... alloy
extrusion, sheet and pre-formed sections for external architectural
purposes, and for the finish on aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and
pre-formed sections coated with organic coatings
BS 6497...................... Powder organic coatings for application and storing to ho-dip
galvanized hot-rolled steel Section and steel sheet for windows and
associated external architectural purposes, and for the finish on
galvanized steel Section and sheet coated with organic coatings.
BS 6510...................... Steel windows, bills, window boards, and doors
BS 7036...................... Code of practice for provision and installation of safety devices for
automatic power operated pedestrian door systems
BS 7773...................... Code for practice for cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces
BS EN 288.................. Approval of welding procedures for metallic materials

BS EN 485.................. Aluminium and aluminium alloys –sheet, strip and plate
BS EN 10142.............. Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip for
cold forming: technical delivery conditions.
BS EN 10143.............. Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip –Tolerances
on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10152.............. Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products –Technical
delivery conditions
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Samples
1 The Contractor shall submit samples and mock-ups in accordance with the relevant
provisions of Section 1, General, and as follows:
(a) submit samples of all materials and finishes including the following:
(i) samples matching the appearance, colour, texture, and other characteristics of
each finish required.
(ii) finished samples of panels and major extrusions.
METAL WORK S17 - 2

(iii) range samples showing the complete range of variation in colour, texture, and
other characteristics resulting from the manufacture, finishing, fabrication,
delivery, assembly, installation, and cleaning processes.
(iv) samples showing finishes over welds and over materials welded.
2 the size of all samples to be agreed with the engineer or as noted in the contract documents
3 the Contractor shall submit any pre-printed or prepared manufacturer’s performance data.
1.2.2 Protection Materials
1 The Contractor shall provide information or direction for application and removal
procedures for all protection materials used on or for samples during shipping, storage, and
installation.
1.2.3 Mock-ups
1 The Contractor shall provide test mock-ups as indicated in the Project Documentation, and
as required for tests
2 The Contractor shall provide visual mock-up as indicated in the Project Documentation.
3 Within the programmed time assemble a mock-up sample of the specified. Approved
samples may be included in the finished work. Obtain approval of appearance and other
relevant characteristics before proceeding with manufacture or delivery.
1.2.4 Engineering Calculations
1 The Contractor shall submit engineering calculations as directed in the Project

Documentation
2 Engineering calculations shall be submitted concurrently with the corresponding shop

drawings.
3 All engineering calculations are to bear the stamp of a professional engineer.
1.2.5 Test Reports
1 The Contractor shall submit test reports for all tests specified herein. Test reports shall be
submitted in a timely manner and prior to execution of any Works.
2 Product test reports: a qualified independent testing agency approved by the Engineer shall
be used to indicate and interpret test results on tests on components and assemblies relative
to compliance with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
3 Reconstruction test reports: a qualified independent testing agency approved by the Engineer
shall be used to indicate and interpret test results on test mock-ups relative to compliance
with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
METAL WORK S17 - 3

4 Field test reports: a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency approved by the
Engineer shall be used to indicate and interpret field test results relative to compliance with
the requirements of the Project Documentation.
1.2.6 Inspection and Production Testing Programs
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed description of inspection and
production testing programmes and inspection reports for all types of coating of aluminium
or aluminium alloy.
1.2.7 Shop Drawings
1 Shop Drawings, shall be prepared in accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 1,
General. Shop Drawings shall be prepared and approved by the Engineer prior to the
fabrication of any off-site item.
1.2.8 Maintenance Manual
1 A maintenance manual describing the various materials, equipment, and procedures for
cleaning and maintaining the parts of the Works included in this Section shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval upon completion of the Project.
1.2.9 As-Built Drawings
1 As-Built Drawings, prepared in accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 1,

General, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval upon completion of the Project.
1.2.10 Installer Certificates: signed by product manufacturer certifying that the Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
1.2.11 Installer Experience: provide a list of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the Installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer's
representative.
1.2.12 Installer Qualifications: a qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum five years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed
by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's
warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of Supervision
team/supervision team/engineers and Owners, and other information specified.
1.2.13 Manufacturer's data: submit manufacturer's product data for each type of door and frame
specified, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
construction details and fabrication methods
profiles and dimensions of individual components
data on hardware, accessories, trim, louvres and factory finishes
identifying fire-resistance label and sound rating compliances
installation instructions
METAL WORK S17 - 4

recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exposed surfaces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Fire Resisting Door: Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that
are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated on Drawings, based on testing
at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.3.2 A fire resisting door assembly must have been tested and carry the identifying label of an
approved independent testing and inspection system / agency or laboratory, confirming its'
fire resistance rating.
1.3.3 Fire resisting shutter: a shutter, which has been constructed in such a manner that when
installed in an assembly and tested, it will pass with BS 476-22 or NFPA 80, and can be rated
as resisting fire for the specified duration. A fire resisting shutter must have been tested and
carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspection assembly or
laboratory, confirming its fire resistance rating.
1.3.4 Smoke Door: a smoke door has approved quality draught seals to seal cold smoke, installed
and tested in accordance with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. A smoke door must have been tested
and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspection system /
agency or laboratory, confirming its rating.
1.3.5 Direction of Opening: on Architectural Drawings, the indications for direction of opening are
as follows:
Hinged doors are indicated by a dotted triangle, the vertex of which indicates the hinge or
pivot side
Pull and slide doors are indicated by a vertical line followed by a horizontal arrow indicating
the direction of slide Fixed windows are indicated by letter "F" Sliding windows are indicated
by an arrow indicating the direction of slide.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Fire Resisting Doors and Assemblies: all fire resisting doors, hatches, and the like, together
with associated component assemblies shall have been tested and must carry the identifying
label of an approved independent testing and inspection system / agency or laboratory,
confirming their fire resistance rating. The door test should cover all configurations available
for the door being tested. In addition, fire doors are to be designed and manufactured in
accordance with ISO 9002. Door components shall be factory fitted to the door leaves.
1.4.2 Fire Resisting Doors Assemblies: all fire resisting doors assemblies, together with all
associated assembly components, including but not necessarily limited to door frames and
door hardware shall either be the product of the door manufacturer or otherwise approved by
him, and presented under Submittals requirements as a single product package.
1.4.3 Fire Resisting Door Components: all components of fire resisting doors and assemblies,
including but not limited to door leaves, frames, ironmongery, hardware and glazing, shall
carry identifying labels of an approved independent testing and inspection system/ agency or
laboratory confirming their individual fire resistance rating. The door test should cover all
configurations available for the door being tested. The rating of all door components shall be
equal to the rating of the door assembly, and to the same standard. Locks/ latches, overhead
METAL WORK S17 - 5

closers, hinges and all hardware must be as tested or labelled components of equal
specification that can demonstrate contribution to the required integrity.
1.4.4 Fire resisting shutters, and assemblies: all fire resisting shutters, and the like, together with
associated component assemblies shall have been tested and must carry the identifying label
of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or laboratory, confirming their fire
resistance rating. The door test should cover all configurations available for the door being
tested. In addition, fire shutters, grilles, and operable partitions are to be designed and
manufactured in a system conforming to ISO 9001.
1.4.5 Fire resisting shutters, components: all components of fire resisting shutters and assemblies,
including but not limited to: shutter curtains, frames, hardware, and glazing, shall carry
identifying labels of an approved independent testing and inspection assembly or laboratory,
confirming their individual fire resistance rating. The rating of all shutter components shall
be equal to the rating of the door assembly and to the same standard. Locks/ latches, overhead
closers, hinges and all hardware must be as tested or labelled components of equal
specification that can demonstrate contribution to the required integrity.
1.4.6 Fire Labels: all fire labels shall be issued by the testing laboratory that have a continuous
inspection program to ensure conformity of production of fire doors to the tested sample.
Alternatively, labels may be produced by the door assembly manufacturer provided.
1.4.6.1 The manufacturer has a quality assurance system to ISO 9002 or approved equal.
1.4.6.2 The label produced shall bear a serial number, the name of the testing laboratory and the date
and number of the licence
1.4.6.3 The testing laboratory or a certified quality control system shall certify the consistency of the
door assembly production as per the tested specimen
1.4.6.4 The testing laboratory authorises the manufacturer to produce the labels on the conditions
listed above.
1.4.7 Manufacturer Qualifications: a firm experienced in manufacturing items specified in this

section similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
1.4.8 Fire Resisting Door Closers: all fire resisting doors shall be fitted with door closers that
automatically close and positively latch the door. Door closers shall be supplied with non-
combustible fluid.
1.4.9 Fire Resisting Door Enclosures: the wall or panel in which the fire door is installed shall have
a fire rating equal to or exceeding that of the door. Furthermore, the space between the top of
the fire resisting door assembly and the structural soffit above shall be closed by a wall or an
appropriate panel with a fire rating equal to or exceeding that of the door.
1.4.10 Soundproof Doors: all soundproof doors, together with associated component assemblies
shall have been tested and must carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing
and inspection agency or laboratory, confirming their sound rating.
1.4.11 Weather Stripping: provide weather seals to all external doors.
1.4.12 Where design uses a different standard from NFPA:
METAL WORK S17 - 6

1 Specified materials and systems shall meet the most stringent performance required subject
to the approval of the Supervision team/engineer.
2 Where complete assembly is required, follow one fire code system.
3 Provide revised door and hardware schedules to comply with the requirements of the stringent
code adopted.
1.4.13 General: provide glazed unit assemblies engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand
normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated
by testing manufacturer's standard units, representative of the types, grades, classes, and sizes
required for the project according to test methods indicated.
1.4.14 Test Criteria: testing shall be performed by an approved qualified independent testing agency
based on the following criteria:
1.4.15 Test Procedures: test glazed unit assemblies according to:
BS 6375-1 Performance of windows: classification of weather tightness and guidance

on selection and specification.
BS 6375-2 Performance of windows: specification for operation and strength
characteristics
BS 6375-3 Performance of windows: classification for additional performance
characteristics and guidance on selection and specification
BS EN 1026 for air permeability tests.
BS EN 1027 for water tightness tests.
BS EN 12211 for wind resistance tests.
BS 6375-2 for operation and strength characteristics.
1.4.16 Performance requirements: testing of glazed unit assemblies shall demonstrate compliance
with:
Air infiltration and water penetration: design, fabricate and install manufacturer's
glazed curtain wall system to permanently resist leakage of air and water through the
system in accordance with the following:
Air Infiltration: air leakage through the curtain wall system shall not exceed
1.5 m3/hr/m2 of wall area for fixed lights and 2.0 m3/hr/lin.m for opening lights when
tested in accordance with BS EN 1026 at a minimum static air pressure differential of
600 Pa.
Water Penetration: there shall be no evident water leakage through the curtain wall
system, when tested in accordance with BS EN 1027 when the curtain walling is
subjected to a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pa.
Operation and strength characteristics specified in BS 6375- 2.
1.4.17 Structural Performance: design, supervision team/engineer, fabricate, and install the glazed
window system including anchorage, and reinforcement where necessary, to withstand effects
of wind load design pressures normal to the plane of the wall and design live loads, and
accommodate deflections and movements without damage, when tested, with no material
failures or permanent deformation of structural members.
METAL WORK S17 - 7

Design wind pressure should be calculated in accordance with BS6399-Part 2, or as per

wind tunnel test for high rise buildings.
The design wind pressure for standard window systems to be derived from the
maximum calculated wind pressure as follows (CWCT ‘Standard for systemised
building envelopes’ 2.2.4).
Do not change the aesthetic aspect of the design intent of the window as set by the
architectural drawings.
Determine also the sizes and thicknesses of glass panes (refer to section 25) and
panel/facings, the sizes types and locations of framing, fixings and supports, to ensure
that the windows will resist all imposed loads, and accommodate all deflections and
movements without damage.
Structural Test Pressure: shall be equal to 150 percent of the inward and outward acting
design pressures.
Deflections: the window system shall be capable of accommodating structural support

movements and weather exposures including but not limited to sway, twist, column
shortening and long-term creep and deflection; and of performing within the following
limitations under the required design load, both positive and negative:
Perpendicular Deflection: deflection of framing members, measured perpendicular to

wall plane, shall not exceed 1/175 of the unsupported span (defined as the distance
between anchor centre lines) or 19 mm, whichever is less.
Parallel Deflection: when carrying the full dead load, deflection of framing members
measured in a direction parallel to wall plane shall not exceed an amount that will
reduce glass bite by less than 75 percent of the design dimension; nor reduce edge
clearances to less than 25 percent of design dimension or 3 mm, whichever is greater.
1.4.18 Thermal Movements: provide glazed unit assemblies that allow thermal movement resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature without buckling,
opening of joints, and overstressing of components, connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar
heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss:
temperature change (range): 67 deg. C, ambient; 100 deg. C, material surfaces.
2 MATERIAL TYPES AND FINISHES
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This part specifies the requirements for material types and finishes for non-structural metal
work.
METAL WORK S17 - 8


This Section
Part 1 General
Part 3 Metal Doors and Windows
Part 4 Architectural Metal Work
Part 5 Light Metal Support and Cladding System
Part 6 Workmanship
Section 16 Structural Metalwork

2.1.2 References

BS 729........................ Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron on steel articles
BS 1224...................... Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium
BS 1285...................... Metal door frames (steel)
BS 1449...................... Steel plate, sheet and strip
Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium
BS 1615...................... and
alloys
BS 1706...................... Electroplated coatings of cadmium and zinc on iron and steel
Hot-dip zinc coated and hot-dip aluminium/zinc coated
BS 3083...................... corrugated
Anodic coatings on wrought aluminium of oxidation
BS 3987...................... external
architectural applications
Bitumen – based hot-applied coating material for protecting iron
BS 4147...................... and
steel, including suitable primers where required.
Powder organic coatings for application and stoving to hot
BS 6497...................... dip
galvanized hot-rolled steel sections and steel sheet for windows
and
associated external architectural purposes, and for the finish
on
galvanized steel sections and sheet coated with organic coatings.
BS 7773...................... Code of practice for cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces
Continuously hot- dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip
BS EN 10142.............. for
cold forming; technical delivery conditions
Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip-tolerances
BS EN 10143.............. on
dimensions and shape
BS EN 10152 ..............Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products–Technical

delivery conditions
2.1.3 System Description
METAL WORK S17 - 9

1 Materials and components used shall be as specified or be suitable equivalents as approved

by the Engineer.
2 Materials not specified are to be of the best quality and suitable for the purpose intended
and as approved by the Engineer.
3 All materials are to be free from any defect that may impair the strength, functioning,
durability, or appearance of the work of this Section or of adjacent construction.
2.1.4 Metals
1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to select the alloy, degree of alloy control,
homogeneity, temper, metallurgical quality, degree of hardness or softness, mill tolerances,
cutting tolerances and flatness required to achieve the requirements of design, quality, and
colour matching of finish set forth in the Project Documentation.
2 Suitable low-friction separation materials shall be provided where metal materials are
adjacent and subject by design to relative movement against one another. Suitable low-
friction separation materials are as follows:
(a) teflon strip, 750 microns thick and teflon tape, 125 microns thick
(b) high-impact polystyrene
(c) other materials as approved by the Engineer.
3 Low-friction material shall be impervious to moisture.
2.1.5. GUARANTEE
2.1.5.1. Repair or replace finishes or coatings which fail or become defective and defined to include
abnormal deterioration, ageing or weathering:
Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective Warranty Period: It shall
only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned in the contract (IF
ANY)
2.2 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS FOR METALS
2.2.1 General
1 Galvanized carbon steel (hot-dip) shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 729, BS
1245, BS 6497, BS EN 10142, BS EN 10143.
2 Zinc-rich coating system shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 3083, BS EN
10152
3 Nickel and chromium shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1224.
4 Zinc plating shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1706.
5 Aluminium/zinc-coating shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1615.
6 Bituminous paint shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 4147.
METAL WORK S17 - 10

2.3 ALUMINIUM FINISHES
1 The requirements and specification for finishes on aluminium as referred to in this Part
shall comply with the following paragraphs.
2 Final colours will be selected by the Engineer from actual samples submitted by the
Contractor.
3 Metal surfaces are to match the appearance, colour, and texture of samples submitted to and
approved by the Engineer.
4 The Contractor shall submit a writing list of all aluminium products used in the Works. This
list shall identify the location of each product and their finishes as per the following principal
finishes:
(a) mechanical finishes:

(i) as fabricated
(ii) buffed
(iii) directional textured
(iv) non-directional textured.
(b) chemical finishes
(i) non-etched cleaned
(ii) etched
(iii) brightened
(iv) chemical conversion coatings
(c) coatings
(i) anodic
(ii) resinous and other organic coatings
(iii) vitreous coatings
(iv) electroplated and other metallic coatings
(v) laminated coatings
5 All aluminium and aluminium alloy products used in the Works that are to be finished in a
similar way shall be obtained from the same source unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
6 All metal surfaces which are required by Project Documentation or manufacturer’s standards
to receive a chemical conversion coat pre-treatment are to meet the minimum requirements
of BS 3987 and BS 1615.
2.3.2 Finishes for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys
METAL WORK S17 - 11

1 Unless otherwise specified for one of the alternative finishes listed Clause 2.2.1 in the
specific Project Documentation, the finish in general for aluminium shall be as follows:
2 Exterior exposed aluminium: All metal surfaces exposed to the exterior, including framing
members, shall receive either a two or three coat polyvinyl di-fluorine (PVDF) liquid coating
as follows:
(a) surfaces shall receive a thermally-cured, pigmented, PVDF coating system,

containing not less than 70 % of the fluoropolymer resin
(b) the coating system is to be spray applied under factory conditions to a pre-treated base
metal in a two-coat, two-bake process or three-coat, three-bake process in accordance
with the coating system manufacturers recommendations
(c) unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation, the coating system shall include
a primer for added substrate protection as recommended by the manufacturer to meet
any coating system guarantees
(d) finished coating thickness is to be minimum of 55 microns dry film finish (18 microns
primer, 18 microns colour coat, and 18 microns clear top coat to seal and protect the
system). The final dry film thickness shall be 55 to 65 microns
(e) the coating system is to be applied by a licensed applicator approved by the coating
system manufacturer. The applicator is to propose a program of records and samples
are to be made available to the Engineer upon request
(f) the surface quality of the coating is to be smooth and free of flow lines, streaks,
blistering, and other imperfections. The coating will be opaque and be uniform in
colour and tonality, within the range of approved upper and lower limit samples when
viewed under a uniform light source such as north daylight or light source approved
by the Engineer
(g) prior to production coating, the Contractor is to present for approval full-size
extrusions and sample panels representative of the maximum proposed range of colour
and tonality to be expected in the finished work. The number of full-size sample panels
for each coating colour is to be as approved by the Engineer
(h) to assure consistency of paint colour and tonality in the finished work, the Contractor
should propose and implement a quality control program as approved by the Engineer.
The quality control program is to be vertically integrated, and include controls by the
coating manufacturer and applicator, as well as by the Contractor during assembly and
installation of the finished work
(i) if required, the quality control program will include the use of co-ordinated empirical
inspection methods, such as the use of calibrated multi-angle spectrophotometers to
provide 3 independent checks of paint colour and tonality at the point of paint
application, during assembly, and during installation
(j) no production coating application is to commence prior to approval of this quality
control program, any installed work with coating defects or variation in colour or
tonality in excess of the approved sample range will be subject to rejection
(k) the colour and finish are subject to the sample approval procedures specified herein
and shall include:
METAL WORK S17 - 12

(i) surface exposed to view

(ii) concealed surfaces
(l) provide a compatible field touch-up PVDF coating system formulated for air-drying
at ambient temperature.
(m) the organic coating shall not peel, check, crack, chalk or change
3 Interior used aluminium: All surfaces exposed to the interior and not exposed to the exterior
shall receive a high-performance acrylic enamel organic non-metallic coating as follows:
(a) the coating is to be spray applied under factory conditions to pre-treated base metal in
a one-coated process in accordance with the coating system manufacturer’s
recommendations
(b) unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation, the coating system shall include
a primer for added substrate protection as recommended by the manufacturer to meet
any coating system guarantees
(c) the finished coating thickness shall be a minimum of 25 microns dry film thickness
(typical) unless otherwise approved by the Engineer
(d) the coating system to be applied by a licensed applicator approved by the coating
system manufacturer. The applicator is to propose a program of records and samples
of the entire coating production for approval by the Engineer, and which records and
samples shall be made available to the Engineer upon request
(e) the surface quality of the coating shall be smooth and free of flow lines, streaks,
blistering or other imperfections. The coating is to be opaque and be uniform in colour
and tonality; within the range of approved upper and lower limit samples when viewed
under a uniform light source such as north daylight or light source approved by the
Engineer
(f) prior to production coating the Contractor will present for approval full-size extrusions
representative of the maximum proposed range of colour and tonality to be expected
in the finished work.
(g) to assure consistency of paint colour and tonality in the finished work, the Contractor
should propose and implement a quality control program as approved by the Engineer.
The quality control program to be vertically integrated, and include controls by the
coating manufacturer and applicator, as well as by the Contractor during assembly and
installation of the finished work. If necessary, such a quality control program is to
include the use of co-ordinated empirical inspection methods, such as the use of
calibrated multi-angle spectro-photometers to provide 3 independent checks of paint
colour and tonality at the point of paint application, during assembly, and during
installation.
(h) no production coating application should commence prior to approval of this quality
control program by the Engineer. Notwithstanding the implementation of an approved
quality control program, any installed work with coating defects or variation in colour
or tonality in excess of the approved sample range will be subject to rejection
(i) the colour and finish are subject to the sample approval procedures specified herein
and are to include a one-coat acrylic enamel to match Engineer’s sample
METAL WORK S17 - 13

(j) provide a compatible field touch-up acrylic enamel coating system formulated for
air-drying at ambient temperature in a colour to match the factory applied finish
(k) the organic coating shall not peel, check, crack, chalk or change colour for a period
of 5 years from the completion of the Project.
1 SUPER DURABLE POLYESTER POWDER COATING (PE-SDF) for aluminium alloy

components is to be approved type to meet the requirements of BS 6496 and BS EN
13438 consisting of powder particles of Iso phthalic acid based resinous material and
additives to improve performance. Provide certificates to prove test results. The coating is
to be electrostatically sprayed on the object to produce produces a hard, durable coating:
Surface finish : Satin unless otherwise indicated.

Minimum dry film thickness : 60-80 microns as recommended by manufacturer
Guarantee : As per QCS 2014 and Contract conditions.
Color: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3.3 Storage and Handling of Materials
1 Material shall not be shipped, delivered or supplied when the finish of such material:
(a) has not been inspected and tested in the manner and by the means specified above
and as approved
(b) does not meet all the specifications for the finishes set forth in the alloy
manufacturer’s instructions
(c) does not fall within the colour and tonality range approved by the Engineer
(d) has been rejected by the Engineer
(e) has not otherwise been processed in accordance with the specified requirements.
2 Protection of Aluminium. All aluminium surfaces in contact with blockwork, concrete, render
or other alkaline materials shall be coated with two coats of black bitumen solution or similar
approved protective coating. Alternatively, shims of fibre, neoprene, or other materials which
will not interact with the aluminium or other adjacent materials may be provided and gaps
filled with backer rod and sealant as approved by the Engineer.
2.4 CARBON STEEL FINISHES
2.4.1 General
1 Requirements and specification for finishes on carbon steel as referred to this Section shall
comply to the following:
(a) all surfaces of steel members incorporated in Works shall be finished as required in
this Section
(b) if concealed from view, steel surfaces are to receive a finish in accordance with
Section 16, Structural Steel, and Section 26 Painting
(c) if exposed to view, steel surfaces are to receive the following coating system:
METAL WORK S17 - 14

(i) surface preparation: BS 7773

(ii) primer: fast curing epoxy primer coat
(iii) intermediate coat: high-build epoxy-polyamide paint
(iv) top coat: aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish system.
2.4.2 Painted Steel
1 The Contractor will propose and implement a quality program for approval by the Engineer.
The quality control program is to be vertically integrated, and include controls by the steel
fabricator and the steel finisher, as well as by the Contractor to provide independent checks
of steel quality and finish at the point of fabrication, finishing, and during installation.
2 Preparation of steel shall be as follows:
(a) steel received from the mill will be inspected for any defects or damage which could
adversely affect the fabrication and finishing of the steel. All steel members are to be
blast cleaned prior to final fabrication and assembly
(b) all fabrication is to be done prior to finishing. All welds are to be ground smooth and
finished to match adjacent surfaces, all burrs and foreign particles removed, and any
other defects remedied prior to finishing
(c) prior to finishing all fabricated steel is to be inspected and if, in the determination of
the coating applicator, the steel is not sufficiently cleaned to ensure a high-quality
finish, the steel is to be further cleaned as required to achieve the finish desired.
(d) verify that all surfaces to be painted are dry, clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, wax,
grease, or other contaminants
(e) after steel members are installed, inspect steel for damage and staining. Repair or
replace damaged members. All repair procedures are subject to approval by the
Engineer who will have the right to reject any installed work notwithstanding any
rededication procedures instituted.
3 Painting applications shall be as follows:
(a) steel is to be shop-painted with one coat of fast-curing epoxy primer and one coat of
epoxy intermediate coat as specified herein. The epoxy primer coat is to be in a
contrasting colour from the epoxy intermediate coat
(b) all steel to be painted in accordance with the recommendations of the coating
manufacturer
(c) mix and apply all coatings in accordance with paint manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Apply paint only under the climatic conditions recommended by paint manufacturer
(d) check dry film thickness after application of each coat in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer
(e) inspect finished steel members thoroughly prior to shipping to the Site. Package,
ship, store and protect primed steel prior to installation
METAL WORK S17 - 15

(f) prior to application of the finish coat, inspect the primed substrates for any defects or
conditions which may affect the application and quality of the finish coat
(g) spray or roller apply the finish coating in accordance with paint manufacturer’s
recommendations. If roller applied, finish coat is to be rolled in one direction; avoid
backrolling of any kind. Avoid combining application procedures; all surfaces are to
be rolled or all surfaces are to be sprayed
(h) the surface quality of the coating is to be smooth and free of flow lines, sags, dry
spray, overspray, imbedded particles, and other imperfections
(i) the coating is to be opaque and uniform in colour and tonality when viewed under a
uniform light source such as north daylight. Inspection shall be by visual comparison
with previously approved range samples and if necessary, include the use of co-
ordinated empirical inspection methods, such as the use of calibrated multi-angle
spectrophotometers.
4 Exterior exposed Steel: Polyurethane finish over galvanised steel as specified in Section 26.
5 Interior exposed Steel: Polyurethane finish over galvanised steel as specified in Section 26.
2.4.3 Stainless Steel Finishes
1 Stainless steel finishes as referred to in this Section shall comply with the following.
2 Stainless steel shall comply with EN 10088-2 and EN 10051.

3 Unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation, the quality of metal work
components manufactured from stainless steel shall comply with the following:
(a) Externally Type 316

(b) Internally Type 304
4 Unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation, the finish of metal work
components manufactured from stainless steel shall comply with the following:
(a) non visible surfaces 2D mill finish (e.g., roof flashings)

(b) visible surfaces 3B brush polished finish.
The finish is to be uniform and free from blemishes, scratches, and other defects.
Notwithstanding the above, the finish shall be appropriate for its function and selected so as
not to invalidate its warranty.
5 The grain of stainless steel and brushed finishes are to run in the same direction for
contiguous or adjacent components.
6 For special applications, the usage of stainless steel type shall be as stated in the Project
Documentation.
METAL WORK S17 - 16

3 METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS
3.1 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS
3.1.1 Scope of Work
1 This Part provides specification for supply and installation of steel and aluminium doors
and windows.
2 Windows and doors are collectively referred to as “units” in this Section.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Materials Classification
Part 6 Workmanship
Section 1 General
Section 25 Glazing
3.1.2 References
1 Standards referred to in this Part are as follows:

BS
476........................ Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS
729........................ Hot dipped galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
BS
990........................ Steel windows generally for domestic and similar buildings
BS
1245...................... Metal door frames
BS
1282...................... Guide to the choice, use and application of wood preservatives
BS
1449...................... Steel plate, sheet and strip.
BS Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general
1474...................... engineering
purpose bars, extruded round tubes and sections
BS
3987...................... Anodic oxide coatings on wrought aluminium for oxidation external
architectural applications
BS
4254...................... Two-part polysulphide-based sealants
BS
4255...................... Rubber used in pre-formed gaskets for weather exclusion from
buildings
BS
4873...................... Aluminium alloy windows
BS
5368...................... Method of testing windows
BS
5707...................... Solutions of wood preservatives in organic solvents
METAL WORK S17 - 17

BS
6213...................... Guide to selection of constructional sealants
BS
6375...................... Performance of windows
BS Powder organic coatings for application and stoving to aluminium
6496...................... alloy
extrusion, sheet and pre-formed sections for external architectural
purposes, and for the finish on aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and
pre-formed sections coated with organic coatings
BS
6510...................... Steel windows, gills windows boards, and doors
BS 7036...................... Code of practice for provision and installation of safety devices for
automatic power operated pedestrian door systems
BSEN 485.................. Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Sheet, strip and plate
BSEN 10142.............. Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip for
cold forming: technical delivery conditions
NFPA 80..................... Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows
3.1.3 Detailed Specification
1 Alternative alloys may be used where integral colour anodising is required provided the
physical properties of the alloy meet relevant BS Standards for the specific material.
2 All screws, nuts bolts, reverts, washers and other fastenings are to be aluminium or stainless
steel (Type 316 S16).
3 The units are to be fabricated at the manufacturer’s works as far as possible and delivered
complete and ready for installation. Aluminium windows shall be to BS 4873, BS 1474, BS
3987, BS 6496, and BS EN 485.
4 The overall sizes of assembled units are to be maintained within a tolerance of ± 1.5 mm.
Frame assemblies to be square with a maximum difference in the diagonals of 4 m.
5 The finished units to be free from all sharp edges, burrs and the like.
6 Joints in frames are to be made by screw spleen, shear block or other approved system capable
of accommodating the thermal movement of the unit and providing tightly fitting and
inconspicuous joints.
7 The main web of the aluminium outer frame should not be less than 1.2 mm thick. Frames to
be self-draining and no holes for fastenings are to be located in the external channel at sill
level.
8 All opening units are to be fully weather stripped using siliconized woven polypropylene,
wool pile or neoprene retained in dovetailed or undercut grooves formed in the aluminium
extrusions. The weather-stripping should be capable of being removed without disturbing the
glazing system and without removing the outer frame from the structure.
9 The design of the units should permit re-glazing without the need to remove the outer frame
from the structure.
METAL WORK S17 - 18

10 All hardware is to be supplied and fixed by the unit manufacturer, and should match the finish
of the surfaces of the units and be replaceable without removing the outer frame from the
structure. Fasteners are to be designated so that they cannot be released from the outside by
the insertion of a thin blade or other simple tool.
11 Windows are to meet the performance requirements of severe exposure to wind. Horizontal
sliding units are to be supported on rustproof and dustproof bearing devices that may easily
be repaired or replaced and that prevent contact between the unit and the track. Horizontal
and vertical sliding units to be separated and not slide upon each other.
12 The mechanism for vertical sliding windows is to be accessible for adjustment, repair or
replacement after the windows have been installed.
13 No window is to be openable or removable from the outside when it is fastened in a closed

position except by the use of special tools or by breaking part of the window or door.
14 All unit surfaces which will be visible in the finished work are to be protected after
manufacture by low tack tape or other suitable means capable of being removed after
exposure to the high temperatures prevalent in Qatar to leave clean, undamaged surfaces.
15 Sill frames to slope outward (level frames are not allowed).
16 Weepholes where required are to be as detailed in the shop drawings
3.1.4 Aluminium Windows: to the general requirements of BS 4873, constructed from extruded
aluminium sections made from alloy 6063 fully heat treated. Windows are to be supplied
complete with frames, sub-frames, mullions, transoms, sills, louvers, opening casements and
insect screens, as shown on the Drawings, together with manufacturer's approved matching
ironmongery, non-PVC glazing beads and gaskets, weather strips, accessories and fixings.
Bearing devices, hardware and reinforcing members are to be manufactured from material
that is corrosion resistant and compatible with aluminium. Fasteners are to be made from
cadmium plated or austenitic stainless steel 304 S15. Weather-stripping are to be made from
neoprene or EPDM rubber. Aluminium sections are to have powder coating finish.
3.1.5 Units may be pre-glazed or glazed on site in accordance with the requirements of Section S25
of the Specification.
3.1.6 Aluminium windows shall be engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal
thermal movement and differential deflection if fixed on steel structure, wind loading, and
impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard units,
representative of the types, grades, classes, and sizes required for the project according to test
methods indicated. Design wind pressure is the ‘design wind speed’ Basic wind speed 25m/s
as per BS6399-Part 2:1997 and in accordance with QCS requirements, Exposure D.
3.1.7 All main frame and sash members shall be thermally broken by poured and de-bridged method
and shall have a 5 mm minimum thermal separation. The thermal barrier material shall be a
polyurethane fill with ultimate tensile strength to meet or exceed ASTM D 638.
METAL WORK S17 - 19

3.1.8 SUN CONTROL

Sunshades: Assemblies consisting of manufacturer's standard outrigger brackets, louvers, and
fascia, designed for attachment to curtain wall with mechanical fasteners.
Orientation: Horizontal.
Projection from Wall: As indicated on Drawings.
Outriggers: Straight with rounded edge unless otherwise indicated.
Louvers:
Number: As indicated on drawings.
Shape: As indicated.
Width: As indicated on drawings.
Mounting Angle: 25 degrees unless otherwise indicated.
Finish: Super durable powder coating.
3.1.9 Skylight:
1 As indicated on drawings, skylight comprising glass double glazing system that is

mechanically attached and comprises structural sealant on four sides, with intermediate
mullions on interior and patch fittings and that has the following capabilities based on
preconstruction testing.
2 That forms a complete integrated and functional system that is fit to the purpose and produced
by an international manufacturer having not less than fifteen years documented experience in
that field.
3 That is provided from a single source as a complete system including all related accessories.
4 Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without
failure. Failure includes the following:
3.1.9.4.1 Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
3.1.9.4.2 Members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement,
to glazing units.
5 Glazing is to be as specified in section S25.
6 Steel Sections: provide hot-rolled structural shapes to fit framing sections, complying with
ASTM A 36M.
7 Gaskets and Joint Fillers: provide manufacturer's standard permanent-type framing system
gaskets and joint fillers for sliding joints, compression joint translation, or nonmoving joints
depending on joint movement and sealing requirements.
8 Fasteners: fasteners for aluminum members shall be from aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless
steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and
compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
Cadmium-plated steel fasteners are not permitted.
3.1.10 Sliding Glazed Aluminium Doors: generally satisfying the requirements of BS 5286
manufactured from extruded aluminium sections, PVF3 High durable polyester powder
coating finish, neoprene glazing gaskets, weather strips and all necessary hardware and
ironmongery.
METAL WORK S17 - 20

3.1.11 Warranty for aluminium doors and windows: provide two copies of a written guarantee in a
form acceptable to the Supervision team/engineer which is signed by the manufacturer and
the Contractor, undertaking to:
replace windows and doors which fails in materials or workmanship within the period
required by the QCS 2014 or the Conctract conditions from the date of substantial
completion. Failure of materials and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to:
excessive air infiltration, water penetration or condensation; excessive deflections or
deterioration in metal, other than due to normal weathering; and any defects in anchorage,
sealants, fixings, accessories and other components of the work
repair or replace finishes or coatings which fail or become defective and defined to include
abnormal deterioration, ageing or weathering.
3.1.12 Aluminium framed glass doors :
Door leaf material: Double glazed unit as per Glass Schedule.

Door rails: Bottom Rail.
Material/ Finish: Superdurable polyester powder coated aluminium.
Floor springs: Double swing with 90° retention.
3.3 AUTOMATIC BI-PARTING DOOR OPERATORS
1 Automatic bi-parting door operators are to be approved 240 V/50 Hz fully electric
operators, fully housed in extruded aluminium or stainless steel housing.
3.3.2 Safety Control Logic
1 The equipment is to incorporate the following safety control logic:

(a) automatic reversing if obstructed during the closing sequence (fully adjustable
sensitivity).
(b) auto retry (three times) at safety “creep” speed (1/3 speed) to detect obstruction.
(c) auto revert to normal mode after successful retry.
(d) fully adjustable speed control with independent settings for Opening, Closing, Final
Opening, Final Closing.
(e) auto stop if obstructed during opening sequence (fully adjustable sensitivity).
3.3.3 Drive System
1 The equipment is to incorporate the following drive system:
(a) squirrel cage motor with output shaft and gearbox drive shaft shall use constant rated
7 kg torque capacitor for start and run. No intermediate belts, pulleys and couplings
which are subject to failure, breakage, shearing or loss of tension shall be used
(b) thermal protection: the motor must be able to be held in the stalled position
indefinitely under full electric current without resultant damage to the windings
METAL WORK S17 - 21

(c) chain drive with minimum tensile strength of 1,950 kg and 12.5 mm pitch, directly
connected to door leaf carriage assemblies. Chains or belts of lesser tensile strength
will not be permitted
(d) auto re-close circuitry to ensure doors close if partially opened (i.e. high wind
condition)
(e) self lubricating planetary gearbox with spiral bevel drive.
3.3.4 Track
1 The track is to be replaceable, made of extruded aluminium, hard coat anodise, carrying
adjustable hanger bars supported by fully sealed raced fibber glass reinforced track wheels
(min 50 mm diameter) for smoother wear and increased life.
3.3.5 Fail Safe
2 Depending on the location of doors the following systems shall be used:

(a) bi-parting doors to exterior: doors drive fully open automatically on power failure/fire
alarm. Fail-safe shall consist of a 12v DC/220 vac inverter also incorporating battery
alarm/monitory to alert user if power is low. Doors automatically return to original
function mode when power is returned or fire signals are de-activated
(b) bi-parting doors within building which serve to Section off or divide fire zones:
(i) doors to close under power failure/smoke alarm
(ii) continuous operations under power failure (min. 50 operations required)
(iii) to be operable manually.
3.4 FIXING ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS
1 Windows are to be fixed with sufficient fastenings to comply with Clause 3.1.3, and in no
case will the number be less than the minimum specified in BS 6510 for the nearest applicable
co-ordinating size.
2 All units are to be fixed square, level and plumb without distortion.
3 Where the method of fixing is be screw fastenings direct to concrete or blockwork surrounds,
the screws are to extend a minimum of 25mm into the reveal and the plugs be of proprietary
manufacture sized to suit the screw. Wooden plugs will not be permitted. Holes in the frames
are be predrilled and the screws countersunk so as to avoid scratching, gouging or locally
distorting the frame.
4 Frames are to be protected from alkaline materials in accordance with Clause 2.2.1 or by
approved isolating tape.
5 Timber sub-frames to be treated in accordance with BS 1282 and to meet specified

requirements of BS 5707. Treatment certificates to be submitted to the Engineer.
6 Timber sub-frames to be primed or sealed before the installation of the units.
METAL WORK S17 - 22

7 Joints between the frames of external units and the surrounding construction are to be sealed
in accordance with BS 6213 BS 4254 and Clause 2.2.1 in such a way as to form a complete
weatherproof seal between the frame and the surround. The sills of sliding doors are to be
bedded in mastic. Rubber used in pre-formed gaskets for weather exclusion to the building
shall be to BS 4255
8 After installation all opening units to be eased and adjusted to provide free operation and all
moving parts are to be lubricated.
3.5 STEEL DOORS AND WINDOWS
1 Steel doors and frames shall comply with the provisions of BS 1245 and steel windows and
frames shall comply with the provisions of BS 990.
2 Guarantee for steel doors and frames: provide two copies of a written guarantee in a form
acceptable to the Supervision team/engineer, signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor,
undertaking to:
replace doors which fail in materials or workmanship within the period stated in the
QCS2014 or the Contract conditions from the date of Substantial Completion. Failure of
materials and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to: excessive air infiltration,
water penetration or condensation, excessive deflections or deterioration in metal, other than
due to normal weathering and any defects in anchorage, sealants, fixings, accessories and
other components of the work
Finish Warranty: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as
3.5.2 Steel Doors and Frames
1 The specification for proprietary steel doors shall be as follows unless otherwise specified
in the Project Documentation.
2 All steel doors shall be manufactured in properly equipped workshops by tradesmen

proficient in such work. All machinery employed shall be capable of accurately preparing,
producing and finishing doors
3 The door shall be double skinned, insulated sheet steel following the thickness and dimensions
specified in the drawings
Doors shall be fabricated from two zinc coated steel sheets not less than 1.6 mm thick with
lock seam joints at sides. The door faces shall be free of seams or joints. Top and bottom of
the doors shall be either welded flush or closed with recessed spot-channel closures. The
doors shall be provided with continuous welded “U” shaped reinforcing channels to head and
foot. Door construction shall be one of the following:
(a) not less than 1mm steel interlocking vertical channels of “Z” shaped members spaced
not more than 300 mm apart or horizontal channels not more than 350 m apart
(b) not less than 1 mm steel horizontal “U” shaped sections spaced in parallel rows not
over 220 mm on centre welded in alternating sequence to the inside face of each outer
sheet so that horizontal stiffening occurs approx
(c) a continuous truss-formed inner core of not less than 1 mm sheet metal spot-welded to
the face sheet every 70 mm horizontally and vertically over the entire surface of both
sides.
4 The doors shall be insulated with mineral wool or pressure injected polyurethane foam for
sound and thermal insulation.
METAL WORK S17 - 23
5 Doors clearance shall not exceed the following:

(a) 3mm at jamb and heads
(b) 3 mm at meeting stile of pair doors with round or bevelled edges and 6 mm for doors
with square edges
(c) 3mm at bottom measured from finished floor line.
6 Doors shall be provided with a sound deadening material to eliminate sound incident to the
normal operation of the door as necessary or required by the Engineer.
7 The finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp, or buckle.
Moulded members shall be sharp in detail, straight, and true. Corner joints shall be coped or
mitered, well-formed, in true alignment, welded and cleaned off.
8 Spot welding shall be used where practicable. Construction joints shall be welded along
their full length. Exposed welded joints shall be cleaned off and dressed smooth.
9 Steel doors shall be finished as detailed in the Project Documentation. They shall be cleaned,
filed, ground smooth and either painted with one coat of redhead primer prior to the finished
painting or stove enameled to a colour chosen by the Engineer.
10 Steel Door Frames to the general requirements of BS 1245, but to non-standard sizes and
profiles, constructed from not less than 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel sheet, finished with
factory applied corrosion inhibiting protective coating and supplied complete with transoms,
rubber silencers and glazing beads, as shown on the Drawings.
11 Door frames shall be given primer coat and finish as specified for the matching steel doors.
12 Where frames support door leaves in excess of 60 kg require one-hour fire resisting door
assemblies, the minimum steel thickness is to be increased to 1.6 mm.
13 Flush Steel Doors: 43 mm thick steel hollow doors to BS 6510, made of pre-galvanized sheet
steel to BS EN 10143 and cold rolled mild steel sections to BS 2994, hot dip galvanized to
BS 729 with coating thickness 180 g/m2. Doors are to be flush, watertight, with closed tops
and edges and reinforced internally with vertical stiffeners welded and spaced not more than
150 mm over centers.
Door cores are to be constructed with polyurethane Rigid cellular board laminated to both
face sheets or foamed-in-placed, minimum 1.8 pound per cubic foot (29 kilograms per cubic
meter) density, containing no urea formaldehyde resins.
The strength of the bond between the insulation and the steel face sheets shall exceed the
strength of the insulation, so that delamination does not occur.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied ironmongery and hardware. Drilling
and tapping for surface applied ironmongery may be done at project site.
Doors are to be supplied complete with all necessary accessories and hardware, vision panels
and louvers, as shown on the Drawings.
Doors and frames are to be supplied with Factory-Applied Paint Finish as per section S26.
METAL WORK S17 - 24

14 Fire Rated Flush Steel Doors: self-closing, fire resisting doors to the rating indicated on the
Drawings and door schedule satisfying the fire safety requirements; flush fitting steel
construction with welded internal frame, inner and outer skins of galvanized steel sheets and
infill of approved non-combustible thermal insulating material complete with frame,
intumescent strips, fire resisting hardware, and all necessary accessories and fixings. Raised
thresholds are not permitted. Door construction shall be as indicated in fire test report.
Fire doors shall be constructed in such a manner that when installed in an assembly and tested,
it will pass with BS 476 and NFPA 80, and can be rated as resisting fire for the specified
duration. External visible dimension will be as indicated in schedules and internal framing
material and dimensions will be as passed in the fire rating tests. A fire resisting door must
have been tested and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and
inspection agency or laboratory, confirming its fire resistance rating.
Provide intumescent strips either on door edges or on the door frame, where required by the
relevant codes and standards.
Doors and frames are to be supplied with Factory-Applied Paint Finish as per section S26.
15 Sound reducing steel doors: flush fitting steel construction to the thickness and construction
indicated on fire test certificate with welded internal frame, inner and outer-skins of 1.6 mm
galvanized steel sheet to BS EN 10143 and infill of rockwool, or other approved non-
combustible acoustical insulation material, complete with frame, acoustic seals, hardware and
all necessary accessories and fixings. Raised thresholds are not permitted.
Sound Reduction Index (SRI average) is to be minimum indicated dB (mean) over range of
63 to 10,000 Hz.
Submit certification that the door construction being utilized has been tested by an approved
independent testing and inspection agency or laboratory in accordance with BS EN ISO 140-
1-4 and BS 476-20 and 22. Door is to carry the identifying label of the testing system / agency
or laboratory confirming its' acoustical rating.
16 Grout: Hollow metal frames shall be filled with insulating material as mineral wool.
3.5.3 Steel Windows
1 Steel windows shall be constructed and assembled in accordance with the specification for
proprietary steel windows shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation. In addition, steel
windows shall comply with the provisions of BS 5368 and BS 6375 for testing and
performance.
2 Steel windows and frames shall be manufactured in properly equipped workshops by

tradesmen proficient in such work. All machinery employed shall be capable of accurately
preparing, producing and finishing window frames.
3 Steel windows and frames made of hot dip galvanised steel shall additionally conform to BS
729.
4 Steel windows shall be finished as shown in the Project Documentation. They shall be
cleaned, filed, ground smooth and either painted with one coat of redhead primer prior to the
finished painting or stove enamelled to a colour chosen by the Engineer
3.6 INSTALLATION OF STEEL DOOR FRAMES
METAL WORK S17 - 25

1 Frames will be fixed plumb, level and securely to prevent deflection or movement.
2 Frames which are to be built-in are to be braced with temporary struts to prevent distortion.
Base ties to be removed after the blockwork has set and before the floor finish is laid.
3 Frames to previously prepared openings are to be fixed with screw fastenings extending into
the structural reveal at least 40 mm and at maximum 450 mm centres. One fastening to be
located 200 mm from the bottom of the frame and one 200 mm from the top.
3.7 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS
3.7.1 General
1 Summary
This part includes:

Electric operated Full Weather Sealed Rolling Service Door.
(a) Cycle Life: Design doors of standard construction for normal use of 20,000 cycles
standard.
(b) Design doors to withstand a wind load of 35 psf
2 References
(a) ASTM A 653/A 653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
(b) ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel, Hot Rolled Steel
(c) ASTM A 123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
(d) ASTM A 312 – Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold
Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
(e) ASTM A 240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications
(f) ASTM A 276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
(g) ASTM B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
andPlate
(h) ASTM B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
3 Submittals
(a) Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and catalog data. Provide
installation instructions.
(b) Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings for architect’s approval. Include elevation,
sections, and details indicating dimensions, materials, finishes, conditions for
anchorage and support of each door.
METAL WORK S17 - 26

(c) Submit manufacturer’s recommended operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance

instructions.
4 Quality Assurance
(a) Manufacturer: Rolling doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five
years’ experience.
(b) Single-Source Responsibility: Manufacturer shall provide doors, tracks, motors, and
accessories for each type of door. Secondary components shall come from a source
acceptable to the manufacturer of the primary components.
5 Delivery, Storage, And Handling
(a) Deliver materials in original packaging supplied by manufacturer with intact labels.
Store materials away from harmful environmental conditions and construction.
6 Warranty
(a) Door Warranty: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned
in the contract (IF ANY) from date of installation against deficiencies due to defects
in materials or workmanship. Installer agrees to repair or replace any defects in
materials or workmanship.
(b) Project Warranty: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as
3.7.2 Service Roller shutter
1 Roll-up Aluminum Door comprises two side stiles that serve as a guide for a flexible fabric.
(a) Curtain: Constructed of flexible fabric.

Material: AT 1100 dtex polyester.
Cover: 2-side PVC.
Finish: 2-side lacquered.
Weight: 900g/m2.
Tensile strength: 4000N/5cm UNE EN ISO 1421
Tear resistance: 800N/5cm EN ISO 13937-2
Grip: 100 N/5 cm
Heat resistance: -30º + 70º
Flame retardant: M2 UNE 23727/90
Light Fastness: 6 – 8
Surface electrical resistance: <5x10e90 OHMs
Noise reduction: 12%
Color: As selected by Engineer from Manufacturers’ full range of color
(b) Bottom Bar: As per manufacturer’s standards.
(c) Guides: 2 side stiles that serves as a Guides with the following characteristics:
(i) Material: White lacquered aluminum.
(ii) Finish: lacquered finish with minimum thickness 60 microns.
(iii) Color: As selected by Engineer from Manufacturers’ full range of color
(iv) Dimension: 95 mm height by 68 mm depth.
METAL WORK S17 - 27

(d) Door Support Brackets and Mounting Plates:

Steel plate not less than 5mm thick. Provide ball bearings at rotating support points.
Bolt plates to wall mounting angles. Plate supports counterbalance assembly and
forms end enclosures.
(i) Material:
Galvanized Steel
Finish: Powder coated
(ii) Hood: As per manufacturer’s standards.
(iii) Viewing panel: As selected by Engineer.
2. OPERATION:
(a) Opening/Closing: Motor Operator.
(b) Motor Operators:
(i) General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity
recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-
cycle requirements specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor
controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-
control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and
accessories required for proper operation.
(ii) Comply with NFPA 70 / BS EN 12453: 2001 & BS EN 12604: 2000.
(iii) Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control

station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
(iv) Standard power supply: 230 V |I| ±10% 50 Hz.
(v) Type of motor: Three-phase self-braking
(vi) Nominal power: 0.5 HP / 0.37 kW
(vii) Brake: Separated DC 230 Vac-103 Vdc with half-wave rectifier
(viii) Motor protection: Motor guard up to 2A
(ix) Level of protection: IP54
(x) Operating temperature: -20ºC to 40ºC
(xi) Unlock: Lever and lower screw
(xii) Clearance stop: Digital by encoder
3. Mounting: Interior face mounted on prepared opening, unless otherwise indicated.

4. PERFORMANCE:
According to UNE-EN 13241-1
Declared performance:
METAL WORK S17 - 28

Release of hazardous substances Pass

Wind load resistance Class 0
Safe opening Pass
Mechanical resistance Pass
Task force Pass
Durability 500,000 cycles
3.7.3 Insulated Roller Shutter Door
1 Door Type: Insulated roller shutter door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.
Door Curtain Slat: 0.5mm x 228mm Steel coated with Aluzinc (55% Aluminum, 43.4%
Zinc).
Thickness tolerance: according to EN 10143:2006, +/-0.06mm – Zinc Coating – 25 microns
per side.
Profile height: 84 mm – Face – 76mm
Thermal resistance: NPD.
Curtain weight: 11.4 Kg/m2.
Wind class: according to BSEN13241-1:2003, Class 5>8,000mm.
Foam filling: Polyurethane mixture.
Coating: Polyester powder coat.
2 End locks and Wind locks:

Ductile cast iron, hot-dip galvanized end locks/wind locks riveted to ends of each slat to
prevent lateral movement and to limit slat deflection and bending stress. Furnish windlocks
based on wind load specifications. Windlocks increase resistance to curtain jamming.
3 Bottom Bar:
Two roll formed steel angles, which extend into guides, designed to reinforce curtain
bottom. Equip with vinyl weather-strip.
Galvanized Steel as per ASTM A 653/ A 653 M
Finish: Powder Coated
4 Guides:
(a) Guides shall be designed using structural angles with 85mm wind guide c/w brush
strip to each face and 100 x 50 x 5mm mild steel galvanized angle.
Material:
i) 0.5mm x 228mm Steel coated with ALUZINC (55% Aluminum, 43.4% Zinc)
Finish: powder coated.
5 Door Support Brackets and Mounting Plates:
METAL WORK S17 - 29

(a) Steel plate not less than 5mm thick. Provide ball bearings at rotating support points.
Bolt plates to wall mounting angles. Plate supports counterbalance assembly and
forms end enclosures.
Material:
Galvanized Steel
6 Hood:
(a) Formed from 1.0mm. Formed to fit the contour of the end brackets with reinforced
top and bottom edges. Provide support bracing for doors wider than 4000mm to
prevent excessive sag.
(b) Shape: Square
(c) Material:
Galvanized Steel as per ASTM A 653/ A 653 M
7 OPERATION:
(a) Opening/Closing: Motor Operator.
(b) Manual hand chain:
Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and guard,
geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide.
(c) Motor Operators:
(i) General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity
recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycle
requirements specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor
controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-
control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and
accessories required for proper operation.
(ii) Comply with NFPA 70 / BS EN 12453: 2001 & BS EN 12604: 2000.
(iii) Electric operation shall be by means of an integral motor reducer, connected to
the door shaft by a set of sprockets and roller drive chain. The unit shall be
mounted on the support brackets. Motor shall operate on 230 V, single phase,
50 Hz or 415V, three phase, 50 Hz rated for the specific application.
(iv) Limit switches shall be provided for upper and lower limit, mounted on reducer
housing actuated by rotary gear with adjustable strikers.
(v) Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control
station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
8 Mounting:
(a) Interior face mounted on prepared opening.
(b) Interior mounted between jambs and under lintel in a prepared opening.
(c) Exterior face mounted on prepared opening.
METAL WORK S17 - 30

3.7.4 EXECUTION
1 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
Examine locations of electrical connections.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2 INSTALLATION
General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and
head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to approved
Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
Installation of units shall be undertaken by the manufacturer’s authorized representative and
in accordance with manufacturer’s standards and instruction.
After installation, doors are to be tested with multiple closing/opening and witnessed for
normal operation.
3 ADJUSTING
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
4 DEMONSTRATION
Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup
services and to train Employer's maintenance personnel as specified below:
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire-release system. Reset
door-closing mechanism after successful test.
Train Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for testing and
resetting release devices.
Schedule training with Employer with at least 7 days' advance notice.
3.8. STAINLESS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Includes The Following:

1. Stainless Steel Doors
2. Stainless Steel Door Frames
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Sections Include The Following:
1. Section 13 - Unit Masonry

METAL WORK S17 - 31
2. Section 17 – Metal Works
3. Section 18 – Carpentry and Ironmongery
4. Section 25 - Glazing
A. Doors to be acceptable, based on review of chemical constituents against appropriate

regulations, for incidental food contact, if applicable to this project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company specialized in the manufacture of specialty doors

with stainless steel frames as specified herein with a minimum of 20 years documented
experience and with a record of successful in-service performance for the applications as
required for this project.
C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed stainless steel door and
frame installations similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain stainless steel doors and stainless-steel frames through one
source fabricated from a single manufacturer.
E. Source Limitations: Hardware and accessories for all stainless steel doors as specified in
Door Hardware Section should be provided and installed by the stainless steel door and
frame manufacturer.
F. F Source Limitations: Glass for windows in doors shall be furnished and installed by door and
frame manufacturer in accordance with related Section 25, Glazing.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. For fire rated doors only, please refer to life safety drawings:
a. Fabricate fire-rated frames complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
b. Fabricate borrowed light frames identical to units qualified for the scheduled rating
when tested according to the requirements of NFPA-80 and -257
c. The scheduled ratings are minimum. Provide frames or assemblies with higher ratings
where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Apply permanent label to qualifying frames using metal plates or stamp or diecast the
label into unit. Label shall meet NFPA 80 requirements.
1.4 SUBMITALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 17 and 18
B. Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts for hardware,
reinforcement and finish.
C. Indicate door elevations.
D. Submit manufacturer’s product literature, fabrication descriptions and installation instructions
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Package door opening assemblies in

manufacturer's standard containers.
METAL WORK S17 - 32
B. Store door assemblies in manufacturer's standard containers, on end, to prevent damage to

face, corners and edges.
1.6 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Warranty: according to Contract conditions and QCS 2014.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Stainless-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 666, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Approved manufacturer compliant with this specification requirements and to QCDD
2.3 DOORS
Standard door panel to consist of non-wood frame and 1 5/8" of foamed in place, 32kg/ cu.m.
(2 pcf ) polyurethane insulation between two sheets of 0.5mm ( 24 gauge), 304-2B stainless
steel. The unit is then spot welded and caulked around the perimeter.
2.4 STANDARD DOOR FRAMES
A. Door frames to be manufactured from 1.7mm (16 gauge) 304-2B stainless steel.
Frames to be welded at corners.
B. Jamb Depth: 125mm (5") standard. Widths over/under 125mm (5") available upon
request, refer to frame schedule for exact sizes.
C. Face Dimension: 50mm (2") standard. Headers available in 50mm (2") only.
D. Corner Miter: Head and Jamb members shall be standard 45 degree miter, providing a neatly
mitered corner connection.
E. Increase door height by 50mm (2”) in lieu of 100mm (4”) head
2.4 2-PART FRAMES
A. Fabricated specifically for insulated metal panel wall or other wrap-around

installation.
B. Door frames to be manufactured from 16 gauge 304-2B stainless steel. Frames to
be welded at corners.
C. Jamb Depth: Up to 380mm (15”) standard. Refer to frame schedule for exact sizes.
D. Face Dimension: 50mm (2") standard. Headers available in 50mm (2") only.
E. Corner Miter: Head and Jamb members shall be standard 45 degree miter, providing
a neatly mitered corner connection.
2.5 METAL CLAD FRAMES

A. Fabricated specifically for insulated metal panel wall or other wrap-around
installation.
B. Door frames to be clad with 304-2B stainless steel.
F. Jamb Depth: Up to 380mm (15”) standard. Refer to frame schedule for exact sizes.
G. Face Dimension: 140mm( 5 1/2”) standard.
H. Wood frame core standard.
I. Non-wood composite frame core optional
2.6 HARDWARE
A. Door Hardware Specification

B. Due to the special nature of the material in this section, all related hardware as
specified must be furnished and installed by the door and frame manufacture.
METAL WORK S17 - 33
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Openings are correctly prepared to receive doors and frames.
2. Openings are correct size and depth in accordance with shop drawings or submittals.
B. Installer’s Examination
1. Have the installer examine conditions under which construction activities of this section
are to be performed and submit a written report if conditions are unacceptable.
2. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have

been corrected is prohibited.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install door-opening assemblies in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer’s printed installation
instructions, using installation methods and materials specified in
A.installation instructions.
B. Field alteration of doors or frames to accommodate field conditions is strictly prohibited.
C. Site tolerances: Maintain plumb and level tolerance specified in manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swing open
and shut without binding and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by
gravitational influence.
B. Adjust door hardware to operate correctly in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s

maintenance instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
Clean surfaces of door opening assemblies and exposed door hardware in accordance with
respective manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS
Protect door opening assemblies and door hardware from damage by subsequent construction
activities until final inspection.
4 ARCHITECTURAL METAL WORK
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part provides specification for miscellaneous types of metal work not included
elsewhere.

This Section
3
Part 1 General
METAL WORK S17 - 34
Part 2 Material Types and Finishes

Part 6 Workmanship
Section 1 General
Section 13 Masonry
4.1.2 References

BS 729........................ Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel artivles BS
970........................ Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes
BS 1387...................... Screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars and plain end steel
tubes suitable for welding or for screwing to BS 12 threads
BS 1471...................... engineering
purposes
BS 1473...................... engineering
purposes - forging stock
BS 1474...................... engineering
purposes- bars, extruded round tubes and sections
BS 1490...................... Aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots and castings for general
engineering purposes
BS 1615...................... Method for specifying adonic oxidation coatings for general
engineering purposes
BS 2997...................... Aluminium rainwater goods
BS 4360...................... Weldable structural steels
BS 6180...................... Protective barriers in and about buildings
BS 6323...................... Seamless and welded steel tubes for automobile, mechanical and
general engineering purposes
4.2 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTERS
1 Protective handrails and balusters shall be 1100 mm high and shall comply with the
provisions of BS 6180 for Building
2 Handrails and balusters shall be manufactured from material complying with the relevant
provisions of the appropriate British Standard, as set out in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
Materials for Handrails and Balusters
Material Handrails Balusters
Solid Tubular Solid Tubular
BS Grade BS Grade BS Grade BS Grade
METAL WORK S17 - 35

Mild Steel 4360 43A 1387 - 4360 43A 1387 -

- or or
6323 HFW2 6323 HFW2
Pt 2 Pt 2
-
Stainless 970 Pt 316S3 6323 LW17K 970 Pt 316S3 6323 LW17K

Steel 2 1 Pt 8 M 1 1 Pt 8 M
Aluminium 1474 6082 1474 6082 1490 LM6 1474 6082

or or
1471 6082 - 1471 6082
3 After manufacture, mild steel and aluminium balusters shall be hot dip galvanized or
anodised, as appropriate, in accordance with BS 729 or BS 1615, Grade AA25.
4.2.2 Expansion
1 Expansion joints shall be provided in horizontal members where required by design.
2 Expansion joints shall also be provided where the handrail or balustrade coincides with an
expansion joint in the structure to which it is fixed.
3 Expansion joints shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation.
4.2.3 Fitting and Fixing
1 Mortises in concrete or blockwork to receive handrails and balustrades are to be formed as

follows:
(a) with a minimum distance of 50 mm between the outer edge of the mortise and the
outer edge of the concrete of blockwork excluding any finishing materials.
(b) to the same shape as the handrail or balustrades allowing for a minimum clearance all
round of 13 mm, e.g., a 51 mm diameter hole for a 25 mm diameter standard.
(c) to allow a minimum fixed depth of 100 mm in the concrete or blockwork excluding
any finishing material.
2 Mortises are to be thoroughly cleaned and wetted and made good with Class M5 mortar in
accordance with Part 2 of Section 13, well compacted around the member being fixed
3 The handrail or balustrades should be securely located in position, true to line and level
until the fixings have attained full strength.
4 Handrails and balustrades are not to be fixed to concrete or blockwork by means of screw
fastenings. Drilled bolt anchorages and similar dry fixings may only be used with the
approval of the Engineer and shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1473.
METAL WORK S17 - 36

5 After installation handrails and balustrades are not to be used as strutting or supports for other
work and shall be wrapped with polythene sheet or similar, securely taped to protect the
finished work until completion.
4.3 DOWNPIPES AND GUTTERS
1 Aluminium rainwater items such as gutters, downpipes and outlets shall comply with the
relevant provisions of BS 2997.
2 Rainwater items made of materials other than aluminium shall be as specified in the Project
Documentation.
4.4 FINISHES
1 Finishes for metals covered in this Part shall be as detailed in Part 2 of this Section unless
described otherwise.
4.4.2 SUNDRY ITEMS
1 SAND TRAP LOUVERS
Louver Performance Ratings:
Air Performance: Not more than 65-Pa static pressure drop at 3.0-m/s free-area intake
velocity.
Free area: Not less than 0.42 sq.m. for 1220mm wide by 1220mm high louver.
The sand rejection performance is based on 1 m X 1 m louver core area when tested as per
European Standard EN 13181:2001, Ventilation for buildings Terminals.
(a) Filtration Efficiency of Sand Grain Size (microns) @ 1m/s
(i) 355-425 (microns) :85%
(ii) 106-425 (microns) :65%
Accessories: Insect screen and horizontal face units where indicated.
Provide a face panel to give a visual look of a horizontal sand trap louver. An indoor screen
construction as specified shall be provided on the inside of each louver.
2 Handrail, Balustrade and Railing General
Handrail Extensions
3 Balustrades and Rails: galvanized steel pipe railing system that can be assembled and
joined by concealed mechanical fasteners at intersections without welding. Components are
to be joined with structural adhesive at splice joints.
Galvanized steel posts and rails are to be fabricated from ASTM A53/ A53M, Type S, Grade
B Schedule 40 pipes.
METAL WORK S17 - 37

Fittings are to be manufactured of steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Tee fittings and
elbows, which are fabricated from more than one piece, are to be of welded construction with
no weld marks visible when the fitting is installed. All surfaces which mate with pipe or
tubing, shall be precisely machined and free from burrs.
All mechanical fasteners used in the assembly shall be of cadmium-plated steel or austenitic
stainless steel. Exposed mechanical fasteners are to be of matching material and finish to the
item being fixed.
An approved two-part epoxy compound as recommended for particular purpose and

application by the manufacturer shall be used for permanent splice connections.
4.4.3 FLOOR MOUNTED GLASS BALUSTRADES: Two-piece mounting bracket system

complete as indicated on drawings. Glass shall be laminated tempered glass type. Mounting
bracket assembly shall be two-piece aluminum or steel as selected by Engineer, with one
member permanently installed to the building structure ready to receive the other member that
has been bonded to the glass. All shall be rigidly anchored to floor or stairs in a positive
manner including sufficient re-enforcement and anchoring as required. Provide internal
adjustments so rail will be plumb and aligned. Provide brushed finish stainless steel handrail
304 finish.
4.4.4 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS AND THRESHOLDS
Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron or aluminum as indicated, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish
consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in
lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
Nosings: As indicated in the details, indicated type, Screw-secured or drive-fit system angled
aluminium stair nosing with a ramp profile, anti-slip and photo-luminescent for marking the
floors stairs.
Thresholds / Flooring transitions: Fluted-saddle-type units, indicated type, with tapered

edges as specified in Section 24.13 of this specification and the corresponding detail
drawings.
4.4.5 Galvanized Steel Grating: medium and heavy duty gratings manufactured from ASTM A 1011
steel electro pressure welded. Gratings are to be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A 123/123M with a coating not less than 610 gm/m2 of coated surface.
Bearing bars and cross bars are to be of rectangular section with size and spacing as per
manufacturer's written recommendation for the span and type of loading indicated on the
Drawings. Heavy duty gratings are to be capable of supporting required wheel loads.
4.4.6 METAL LADDERS
General:
Provide ladders for interior & exterior locations fabricated from galvanized steel
with antiskid bars.
Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
METAL WORK S17 - 38

Space siderails 406 mm apart, unless otherwise indicated.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 1500 mm o.c. with welded or
bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
Steel Ladders:
Side-rails: Continuous, 12.7-by-64-mm steel flat bars, with eased edges.
Rungs: 19-mm diameter steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of side-rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-
oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung
filled with aluminum-oxide grout.
Unless otherwise indicated, galvanized finish for metal ladders including brackets
and fasteners.
4.4.7 METAL BOLLARDS
Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe 8 mm wall-thickness rectangular

steel tubing.
4.4.8 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.
Locations: Ceramic-tile wall surfaces.
Door: Minimum 1.5-mm thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame.
Frame: Minimum 1.5-mm thick sheet metal with 25-mm wide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Spring-loaded concealed pin type.
Lock: Key-operated cylinder lock.
Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
stainless-steel sheet.
Locations: Fire rated walls.
Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule
Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.
Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a
minimum thickness of 0.9 mm.
Frame: Minimum 1.5-mm- thick sheet metal with 25-mm wide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Concealed pin type.
Automatic Closer: Spring type.
Lock: Key-operated cylinder lock with interior release.
Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
Locations: Gypsum board and veneer-plaster wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 1.5-mm thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish
surfaces.
Frame: Minimum 1.5-mm thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
Hinges: Spring-loaded concealed pin type.
Lock: Key-operated cylinder lock.
Flush Access Doors for use in tile: Fabricated from UPVC.

Locations: Within tile walls behind each toilet. Allow for 600mm x 600mm panel,
ensuring panel does not interfere with grab bars.
Door: Cement composite back board to accept tile finish and to sit flush with tile surface
upon completion.
Frame: UPVC frame.
Operation: Magnetic touch latches.
6 WORKMANSHIP
6.1 GENERAL
METAL WORK S17 - 39

6.1.1 Scope
1 This Part provides general specification for workmanship of fabrication and assembly of
architectural metalwork items

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Materials Classification
Part 3 Metal Doors and Windows
Part 4 Architectural Metal Work
Part 5 Light Metal Support and Cladding System
Section 1 General
Section 25 Glass and Glazing
6.1.2 References
BS 1723...................... Brazing
BS 1724...................... Bronze welding by gas
BS 2901...................... Filler rods and wires for gas-shielded are welding
BS 5368...................... Methods of testing windows
BS 6375...................... Performance of windows
Approval of welding procedures for metallic
BS EN 288.................. materials
METAL WORK S17 - 40

6.2 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
1 Use no materials, equipment or practices that may adversely affect the functioning,
appearance and durability of the completed works.
2 The works are to be installed in compliance with the specified criteria without buckling,
opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, sealants and gaskets, opening of welds, cracking
of glass, leakage, noises or other harmful effects.
3 Conform to the materials, finishes, shapes, profiles, sizes, thicknesses, and joint locations
required by the Project Documentation.
4 Match all materials to produce continuity of line, texture and colour.
5 All work to be of the highest quality, in accordance with the best trade practices, and
performed by skilled workmen. All work shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
6 To the fullest extent practical, fabrication and assembly is to be executed in the workshop.
7 All components exposed in the finished work are to be free from wrapping, oil-canning
effects, telegraphing of welds, studs, and other fasteners; streaks, and tool and die marks.
8 Exposed metal edges are to be finished to match typical finished surfaces.
9 To the fullest extent possible, all fabrication is to be done prior to finishing.
6.2.2 Fabrication and Assembly
1 The design of the works should endeavour to keep Project site operations to a minimum.
Manufacturing, finishing, and assembly processes shall, wherever possible, be carried out
off-site and under controlled environmental conditions.
2 Assembly procedures to be carried out on the Project site are to be simple to execute and
capable of execution within the time allowed in the Project construction schedule.
6.2.3 Manufacturer’s Standards
1 Materials, components, and systems incorporated in the Work are to be mixed, applied and
installed in accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the respective
manufacturers.
2 Standards referred to in Section 25, Glazing, to apply to this Section.
6.2.4 Jointing and Reinforcing:
1 Accurately fit and firmly secure all exposed metal joints with metal-to-metal hairline joints.
2 All fastenings are to be installed at approved spacings. Fasteners are not to penetrate primary
gutters and drainage systems. Fasteners may penetrate the secondary system; however, they
must be properly sealed.
METAL WORK S17 - 41
3 All screws and bolts up to and including 8 mm and all that are tapped into a aluminium
shall be 300 Series stainless steel.
4 All bolts 10 mm and larger to be stainless steel.
5 No self-drilling fasteners are to be allowed outboard of the primary air-seal line of metal
roofs and exterior wall cladding.
6 All jointing and splicing of members are to be concealed. Exposed fasteners to occur only
where approved by the Engineer. Where exposed in finished surfaces, screw heads shall
be Phillips oval-head countersunk type, finished to match adjacent surfaces. Pop rivets are
not to be used.
7 Conceal all joint sealants unless otherwise indicated in the Project Documentation.
8 All work is to be properly reinforced for hardware, anchors, and other attachments.
6.2.5 Welding
1 All welding of steel are to be in accordance with the recommendations of BS EN 288.
2 Steel welding is to be done by skilled mechanics qualified by test as contained in BS EN 288

and as applicable to the material thickness and type of welded joint on which the welders will
be employed.
3 All welding is to be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the suppliers of
the metals being welded. The type, size, and spacing of welds are to be as shown on the
approved shop drawings. Welding materials and methods are to be such as not to cause
distortion, discoloration, or result in any other adverse effect on the required profiles and
finishes or visible surfaces of the work.
4 Welding of aluminium alloys and the qualifications of aluminium welders shall conform to
BS 2901, Part 4.
5 Welding of stainless steel shall be by TIG welding or other methods subject to approval. Use
double bevel butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any other
measures necessary to minimise distortion to conform to BS 2901, Part 2.
6 Welds splatter and welding oxides on exposed surfaces to be removed. All exposed welds
are to be finished to match and blend with adjacent parent metal prior to final finish
application.
7 Stud welding is to be done by mechanics trained by the manufacturer of the stud setting
system. The manufacturer will develop specific programs and instructions in co-
operation with the fabricator to suit the needs of the specific details. The fabricator is
to exercise particular care that all recommendations of the manufacturer are followed.
8 Brazing where required shall comply to BS 1723, Parts 1, 2 and 3.
9 Welding of bronze metals shall be to BS 1724.
10 Visible marks (telegraphing) on finished surfaces due to welding of studs will not be
acceptable.
METAL WORK S17 - 42
6.2.6 Visual Consistency of Metal Panels
1 All exposed flat metal panels are to be designated, fabricated, and installed in such a manner
that they appear visually flat when viewed from any angle. Any short length distortions,
ripples, waves, oil canning, or telegraphing of fasteners will not be permitted.
2 Provisions are to be made to allow for differential thermal movement between framing
members and the exposed metal components without noise and without distortion of the
exposed face.
3 In the event that metal flatness requires interpretation by measurement, this is to be done by
measuring and calculating the slope between any two points on the exposed surface 25 mm
apart. This slope should not exceed 0.5 % from the nominal surface plane, when measured at
an ambient temperature of 25 C.
6.2.7 Sealant and Gasket Applications
1 Sealing mechanisms (sealants and gaskets) shall be provided when required by the Project
Documentation or required for a permanently weathering installation. The sealing mechanism
for each location and use shall be as indicated in the Project Documentation. In those
locations where a mechanism is necessary but is not indicated, it shall be of a type
recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
2 Unless otherwise specified sealants for perimeter caulking are to be either one part acrylic or
one, two or three part polyurethane sealants having elastometric properties and not subject to
ultraviolet degradation.
3 Sealant is to be used with the joint primer and filler recommended by the manufacturer for
the type of material and width of joint to which it is to be applied. Exposed sealants are to
match the colour of the adjacent metal component.
4 Bond breaker tape is to be self-adhesive polyethylene tape or other plastic tape

recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant.
5 Joint backing is to be closed-cell polyethylene, non-bleeding neoprene, butyl rod or other

flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material recommended for compatibility by the
manufacturer of the sealant.
6 Specific alloys, compounds, etc. of gasket materials shall be appropriate for the function
intended and are subject to approval by the gasket manufacturer and Engineer for
compatibility and peel adhesion testing.
6.2.8 Application of Sealant
1 Sealants and primers are to be applied in the exact manner specified by the manufacturer
and are not be used when the shelf life shown on the tins or cartridges has expired.
2 The minimum width and depth of the sealant is to be 6mm and for wider joints the depth
shall be not less than half the width of the joint.
3 The surfaces of the joint are to be free from laitance, grease, loose particles, etc., and
temporary protective coatings are to be removed from metal components. All surface are to
be cleaned as necessary to ensure they are suitable for adhesion of the sealant and should be
METAL WORK S17 - 43
dry.
4 Unless the sealant manufacturer recommends otherwise:
a) the joint surfaces are to be primed.

b) joint backing is to be used to control the depth of sealant.
c) where the joint design will not permit the use of joint backing, an adhesive backed
polyethylene bond breaker tape is to be installed to prevent three sided adhesion.
5 Adjacent surface to the joint be masked with tape to prevent staining by the primer or sealant.
The tape should be removed as soon as the joint has been sealed by drawing it across, and
not away, from the joint.
6 The sealant to be applied with sufficient pressure to completely fill the joint, so as to exclude
all air pockets and to ensure adhesion of the material to the joint bond surfaces equally on
opposite sides. The surface of the sealant is to be tooled smooth and flush with the adjacent
surfaces unless detailed otherwise.
7 Apply sealants and gaskets under the climatic conditions recommended by the manufacturers.
All surfaces to receive sealants shall be treated (cleaned, primed or un-primed) in accordance
with the instructions of the sealant manufacturer.
8 All exterior glazing gaskets shall be vulcanised, injection moulded, or heat-welded at the
corners to form a continuous closure.
6.3 INSTALLATION
1 The Works are to be erected plumb, square, level, and correctly aligned within the
following limitations:
(a) offset from true horizontal, vertical, and design location is not to exceed plus or minus
3 mm per 4 m nor plus or minus 12 mm over any one length or part thereof of the
building.
(b) maximum offset from true alignment between abutting components or components
separated by less than 75 mm should not exceed 1 mm.
(c) all tolerances shall be non-cumulative.
2 Joint widths as indicated are the design joint width at an ambient temperature of 25 C.
Installation procedures are to be adjusted to take into account the ambient temperature at the
time of installation.
3 Care is to be exercised to properly support and reinforce units against racking during
hoisting and installation.
6.3.2 Anchors and Connections
1 Anchors and connections are to be provided to comply with requirements for adjustability,
movement and load transfer
2 Connections between different materials to be designed to allow for the differential thermal
METAL WORK S17 - 44

movement of the respected materials
3 Anchors and connections that are designed for movement are to be of such construction
that friction is low enough to allow for such movement without buckling or distortion
of the finished surface and other damage and without causing binding and noises
4 Self-drilling, self-threading fasteners are to be Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise
indicated
5 Metal surfaces shall be separated in such a manner that metal does not move on metal.
Materials used for this purpose should be low-friction components, sealants, or gaskets as
applicable
6 Anchorages to structural steel should not induce rotational forces in supporting members
7 All anchors, connections, fixings, and fasteners to be Type 316 stainless steel, unless
otherwise indicated
8 Where indicated in the Project Documentation, bolted fasteners exposed to view are to be a
corn-head bolts with matching nuts as approved by the Engineer
9 The total thickness of a shim pack is not to exceed a dimension equal to the diameter of the
fastener/anchor
10 Shim packs that resist compressive forces only may be high-impact plastic. Shims subject to
shear forces are to be stainless steel plates pinned together to form a monolistic shim.
6.3.3 Corrosion Protection
1 No metals, including alloys of the same base metal, are to be placed together in a manner,
combination or location likely to give rise to damage by electrolytic action or other
corrosion
2 Isolation of dissimilar metal surfaces to prevent electrolytic action is to be accomplished by

materials which are impervious to moisture and non-absorptive
3 All steel parts are to receive a protective treatment commensurate with their respective
functions and locations
4 Where used to the exterior of air-seals, or in any location vulnerable to moisture, steel shall
be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
5 Field welds on galvanized steel shall be treated with an approved field cold galvanizing
process
6 Aluminium surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, fireproofing, plaster, masonry, or

absorptive materials of any kind shall be coated with an anti-galvanic material, impervious
to moisture.
6.3.4 Lightning Protection
1 All metal cladding components, including panels, glazing frames, mullions, transoms,
METAL WORK S17 - 45

fixings, and support structures are to be fully bonded electrically to ensure electrical
continuity of the building envelope
2 All metal cladding components, as above, are to be connected to the building ground by
earthing jumper cables and connections
3 Provide for the installation of lightning arrestors, air terminals, and similar items without
electrical bonding to the metal cladding components
6.3.5 Installation of Insulation and Safing (Fire Protection)
1 Install thermal insulation and safing where indicated and as required to meet overall fire
separation requirements
2 Provide insulation behind any opaque exterior surface which has conditioned space behind
3 Install insulation using welded or mechanically fixed impaling and/or retaining clips.
Attachment methods are not to penetrate waterproofing membranes. Adhesive attachment of
insulation is not permitted
4 Install foil tape around perimeter of foil-free of insulation board to adjacent metal framing
to achieve a positive vapour barrier
5 Seal between foil-face of safing and foil-back of insulation at curtain wall with a smoke
resistant sealant to provide a positive smoke barrier between floors.
6.3.6 Flashing
1 Where required or otherwise necessary to prevent leakage, flashing is to be formed from

appropriate thickness of stainless steel, aluminium, or 1.5 mm thick neoprene
(polychloroprene) or EPDM sheet as part of a cured/uncured elastrometic sheet flashing
system. Stainless steel flashing is to be a minimum 1.0-mm thick; aluminium flashing to be
a minimum 1.5 mm thick
2 Where vertical or horizontal joints occur to accommodate movement, an elastrometric

flashing system is to be used unless otherwise detailed in the Project Documentation and
approved by the engineer.
3 Elastromeric flashing connecting to work of other Sections is to be provided by the work of

this Section, including the attachment systems to this Work and to other work (except
waterproofing or roofing)
4 Where elastomeric or other flashing connects to roofing and waterproofing work, provide
200 mm of flashing beyond the point of attachment to the Work of this Section. The
connection to roofing work is to be provided by the roofing installer. Connections of such
flashing to other than water proofing work is to be provided by the work of this Section
5 Elastomeric flashing exposed to view is to be bonded to the substrata without blistering; joints
are to be neat and as infrequent as possible. Elastomeric flashing not supported by substrate
material shall receive another layer of 1.5 mm flashing for reinforcement, fully bonded to the
finish layer and the substrate and extending at least 25 mm beyond the unsupported area.
METAL WORK S17 - 46

6.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
6.4.1 Site Tests
1 The Contractor is to engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
(a) the testing agency is to conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements
(b) the Contractor is to correct deficiencies in or remove and replace work that
inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements
(c) additional testing at Contractor’s expense, is to be performed to determine
compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
2 Air Infiltration. Test areas of installed system indicated in the Project Documentation or as
directed by the Engineer, BS 5368 and BS 6375.
3 Water Penetration. Test areas of installed system indicated in the Project Documentation or
as directed by the Engineer for compliance with system performance requirements according
to BS 5368 and BS 6375 at minimum differential pressure of 20 % of inward acting wind-
load design pressure. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, but not
less than 300 Pa.
6.5 CLEANING
1 Clean the entire work not more than four (4) days prior to date scheduled for inspections
that establish the date of Substantial Completion.
(a) clean all components of the Work in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturers
(b) clean the work from the topmost levels down in order to avoid staining of cleaned
surfaces from cleaning solution residue and runoff
(c) clean glass with approved glass cleaning solutions only and ensure that cleaning
solution is completely removed from the surface after cleaning. Do not clean glass
when it is exposed to direct sunlight.
6.6 PROTECTION
6.6.1 General Requirement
1 Protect the works from material, equipment or procedures that may impair the functioning,
appearance, or durability of the work or other construction.
2 Protect the installed work from damage by subsequent construction activities.
3 Protection materials, such as plastic membrane tapes and adhesive sheeting, are to be
suitable for the intended protection application and protection period.
4 Protection materials are to be installed in a manner that will not trap harmful moisture or
otherwise contaminate the Work.
7 EXPANSION JOINT
7.1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
METAL WORK S17 - 47

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS) 2014 is the governing document and shall take
precedence over this Specification. Contractors finding discrepancies between the two
documents shall follow the requirements of the QCS 2014.
7.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:

Expansion joint cover assemblies for floor, wall, and ceiling joints.
Preformed, self-expanding exterior sealant system
7.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
UL, Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
7.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Joint Movement: Design to permit unrestricted omnidirectional movement of joint width

without disengagement of cover.
Joint Cover Movement: Design exterior joint cover assemblies to accommodate expansion
and contraction within service temperature range of -95 deg. F to 149 deg. F (-35 deg. C to
65 deg. C).
Standard Floor Covers: Designed to withstand a minimum load of 500 lbs without
damage or permanent deformation. Heavy duty covers should withstand a point load of
2,000 lbs.
7.5 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Indicating the following:

Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard(s), characteristics,
and limitations.
Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements.
Shop Drawings: Submit following for each type of cover assembly and joint condition:
Elevations, sections, lengths, details, materials, dimensions, gauges, anchoring and
fasteners, accessories, seals, finishes and relationship to adjacent construction.
Samples: Submit two 300 mm long sample of each cover assembly.
Test results: Submit test results showing compatibility of expansion joint materials with
granite, concrete, concrete additives, sealers and other adjacent materials.
Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a minimum
of five years proven experience in the installation of expansion joint cover assemblies
of a similar size and nature and that is approved by manufacturer. Submit to Engineer,
applicator’s current certificate of approval by the material manufacturer as proof of
compliance.
Mock-up:
Construct one mock-up of each different type of expansion joint cover
assemblies in location acceptable to Engineer.
Arrange for Engineer's review and acceptance, allow 48 hours after acceptance before
METAL WORK S17 - 48
proceeding with Work.
Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by Engineer. Remove and dispose
of mock-ups which do not form part of Work.
Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum standard of quality for the balance of
the work of this Section.
7.7 PRODUCTS
1 MATERIALS
Expansion joint cover: Provide aluminum expansion joint covers following the types
indicated in the detail drawings and the below specifications, or otherwise those
recommended by expansion joint manufacturer:
Interior floor joint:

No bump aluminum expansion joint cover with elastomeric seal capable of movement of +
25% of joint width without disengagement. Including recessed central aluminum plate in order
to accommodate a variety of floor finishes.
Floor- Floor
Floor-Wall
Interior wall joint:

Surface mounted extruded aluminum expansion joint cover capable of movement of
+ 25% of joint width without disengagement following details drawings.
Interior ceiling joint:

Surface mounted, aluminum expansion joint cover capable of movement of + 25% of joint
width without disengagement.
Ceiling – Ceiling
Ceiling- Wall
Vertical exterior joint:

a. Elastomeric polyurethane sealant compliant with the following standard:
ISO 11600, Type F, Class 25 LM.
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, T1, A, M and I.
b. Silicone pre-coated, preformed, pre-compressed, self-expanding, sealant system, and meet or

exceed the following criteria:
Ensure sealant, foam and other materials will not stain or colour adjacent stone, vinyl flooring
and other adjacent materials.
Colour seal: 15 Shore-A hardness, low-modulus silicone applied to an acrylic impregnated
expanding foam. Seal width to be a minimum of 1.75 -1.85 times the nominal material
width.
Acrylic-impregnated expanding foam: Open-cell polyurethane foam impregnated with non-
drying, polymer-modified acrylic.
Impregnation density of uncompressed foam to be at least 135 and must not exceed 145
kg/cu.M.
Impregnated foam to be stable over temperature range of -104 deg. F to 248 deg. F (-40
deg.C to 120 deg.C) in accordance to ASTM C711.
Lateral, differential deflection, shear, and torsional movement capability of +50% and -50%
(total 100%) of mean temperature joint size.
Sealant corner bead: Approved by joint seal manufacturer.
Colour: To later selection of Engineer from manufacturer’s full colour range.
Horizontal exterior joint (roofs):

1. Dual-seal, double-flanged, extruded thermoplastic rubber system for sealing expansion
joints in roofs.
METAL WORK S17 - 49
2. Direct welding to PVC-based roof membranes.
3.Roof Joint includes necessary termination bar and fasteners required for installation.
4.Joint covers to be compatible with roof waterproofing types including all accessories and
following detail drawings.
5.Installation shall be performed in coordination with the waterproofing membranes

specialist installer.
2 ACCESSORIES
Fire-barrier:
Floor and wall joints shall be complete with fire barrier and fire-rated for 2 hours and UL
or Warnock Hersey listed designs.
Extend fire barrier beyond expansion joint cover, in concealed locations to maintain
fire rating, for full length of expansion joint.
Designed for indicated or required dynamic structural movement without material
degradation or fatigue in accordance with ASTM E 1399.
Tested in maximum joint width condition as a component of an expansion joint cover in
accordance with UL 2079 including hose stream testing of wall assemblies at full-rated
period by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Spring Clips: Stainless steel to manufacturer's standard.
Concealed fasteners and anchors to manufacturer's standard.

Filler strip adhesive to manufacturer's standard.
3 FABRICATION
Verify dimensions of existing Work before commencing fabrications and report

discrepancies to Engineer.
Fabricate Work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
Fabricate expansion joint covers, square, true, straight and accurate to required sizes and
profiles.
Fabricate lengths in continuous runs up to 6000 mm.
Shop assemble covers ready for installation where practicable.
Fabricate floor joint cover assemblies with anchors, levelling nuts, filler inserts etc. as
required for a complete installation to suit installation and project requirements.
Fabricate Work free from defects impairing function, appearance, strength and durability.
4 FINISHES
Stainless
Steel:
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished
finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each
piece.
Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish, unless otherwise indicated.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
METAL WORK S17 - 50

7.8 EXECUTION
1 EXAMINATION
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section
depends. Report defects to Engineer. Commencement of Work means acceptance of
existing conditions.
2 PREPARATION
Verify substrate surfaces are solid, free from surface water, frozen matter, dust, oil,
grease, scaling or laitance, projections and any other foreign matter detrimental to
performance.
Supply and install temporary protection to adjacent surfaces to prevent damage resulting
from Work of this Section.
3 INSTALLATION
Install expansion joint cover assembles in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and
Set work plumb, square, level, free from distortion.
Secure work accurately to structure in manner not restricting joint movement.
Provide acceptable means of anchorage, such as anchor clips, expansion bolts and
shields, welded studs or toggles.
Seal butt joints to manufacturer's instructions to provide watertight and air tight joints.
Adjust joint cover to freely accommodate joint movement.
Install corner bead sealant in accordance with Section 07900.
7 STEEL LOUVRES:
Provide steel louvres comprising frames made from galvanised steel sheet channels 1.5 mm
thick to BS EN 10143, grade Z2 G275. Louver blades are to be of galvanised steel sheets and
of aerodynamic section. Fix bird screens of 12 x 12 x 1 mm galvanised wire mesh. Acoustic
louvers, where shown on Drawings, are to be fitted with infill material complying with class
O Building Regulations and having glass cloth facing and to be contained behind a perforated
metal. Finish shall be electrostatically applied polyester powder coating.
END OF SECTION
METAL WORK S17 - 51

SECTION 18 – CARPENTRY, JOINERY, AND IRONMONGERY
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERALREQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 Scope
1 Section 9 specifies materials, accessories, and workmanship for the use of wood in building
construction. Part 1 of Section 18 defines general specifications as applicable.

This Section:
Part 2 Wood Treatment
Part 3 Structural Timber
Part 4 Architectural Timber
Part 5 Joinery
Part 6 Fasteners and Adhesives
Part 7 Ironmongery
Part 8 Phenolic Partitions
1.1.2 References
BS 729........................ Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
BS 1088...................... Plywood for marine craft
BS 1142...................... Specification for fibre building boards
BS 1186...................... Quality of timber and workmanship in joinery
BS 1202...................... Nails
BS 1203...................... Synthetic resin adhesive for plywood
BS 1204...................... Synthetic resin adhesives (phenolic and aminoplastic) for wood
BS 1210...................... Wood screws
BS 1282...................... Guide to the choice, use and application of wood preservatives BS
2572...................... Phenolic laminated sheet and expoxy cotton fabric laminated sheet BS
3444...................... Specification for blackboard and lamination board
BS 3621...................... Thief resistant locks
BS 3794...................... Decorative laminated plastic sheet
BS 4072...................... Wood preservation by means of copper/chromium/arsenic
BS 4079...................... Compositions
BS 4756...................... Ready mixed aluminium priming paints for woodwork
BS 4965...................... Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneeral boards and panels
BS 5268...................... Preservative Treatments for Constructional timbers Part 5
BS 5589...................... CP for preservation of timbers
BS 5666...................... Wood preservatives and treated timber
BS 5707...................... Solutions of wood preservatives in organic solvents
BS 6459...................... Door closers, mechanical performance
CARPENTRY JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY S18 - 1

BS 6462...................... Casement stays, mechanical performance

BS 6566...................... Plywood
BS 7036...................... CP for installation of safety devices for automatic power operated
pedestrian door systems
BS 7352...................... Strength and durability performance of metal hinges
BS 8201...................... Timber flooring
BS EN 635.................. Plywood, clarification by surface appearance
BS EN 1014................ Wood preservatives, creosote and creosoted timber methods of
sampling and analysis
TRADA....................... Wood information sheets
1.1.3 Definitions
1 Concealed surfaces: Surfaces which after installation in the building will be concealed by
the surrounding work, not merely by decoration.
2 Semi-concealed surfaces: Surfaces such as the internal parts of cupboards or fittings which
are not visible when the fittings are closed.
3 Class 1 finish: Refers to the exposed surfaces of joinery which are selected for clear finish.
4 Class 2 finish: Refers to the exposed surfaces of joinery which are selected for painting.
5 Direction of Opening: on Architectural Drawings, the indications for direction of opening are
as follows:
Sliding doors are indicated by an arrow indicating the direction of slide
Hinged doors are indicated by a dotted triangle, the vertex of which indicates the hinge or
pivot side Pull and slide doors are indicated by a vertical line followed by a horizontal arrow
indicating the direction of slide
1.2 TIMBER TYPES
1 Softwood for joinery is to be to BS EN 942, Class 2 and 3 generally and Class 1 for special
work.
2 Hardwood Species for Joinery: to BS EN 942. Hardwood species for joinery shall be best
quality kiln dried Iroko, Walnut, Cherry wood unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Hardwood species for joinery to be used in external locations are to be the species
recommended for that purpose.
3 Under no circumstances shall Light Red Meranti be used.
Where Teak is specified no alternative hardwood will be acceptable.Softwood for framing,

battens and the like is to be to BS EN 942, free from decay and insect attack, except pinhole
borers with no knots wider than one third the width of the timber section, and with
tolerances of +3 mm and -5 mm on specified sizes.
1.3 QUALITY

(a) Timber should comply with the requirements of Table 1.1 and should be free of the
following defectsunsound knots, dead knots, loose knots and knot holes.
(b) sapwood on any external hardwood or Class 1 finish surface.
(c) splits extending through the piece from one surface to another and ring shakes.
(d) decay and insect attack other than pinholes as defined in Tables 1.1 and 1.2.
1 Except in Class 1 finish work, defects arising from manufacture and knots may be cut or
bored out and replaced with a plug or inserts of the same species, well glued in. The plug is
to be the full depth of the hole and the grain to be in the direction of the grain of the piece
into which it is inserted. The width of any plug or insert should not be more than 6 mm
greater than the maximum limit of the knot size.
2 In jointed panels each piece is to be of the same species and in Class 1 finish work all the
exposed surfaces of each piece are to have the same character of grain and are to be matched.
Table 1.1
Quality of Timber
Features Exposed Surfaces
Class 1 Finish Class 2 Finish
Knots Pin knots up to6 mm Up to 25mm width - one half of timber
diameter only unless 25-50mm width - 15mm
the knots are specified 50-100mm width - one quarter
as a feature. Over 100mm width - 25mm
Checks, Width splits 0.3 mm 1.5 mm (filled if over 0.5 mm)
Length and Depths 300 mm 300 mm
Shakes One quarter of timber One Quarter of timber
Pitch pockets Not Permitted Not Permitted unless cut out and filled
Plugs and inserts Not Permitted Width not to be 6mm greater than maximum
limit of permitted knot size
Joints and Lamination None Not unduly conspicuous
Glue Lines
Rate of Growth Not fewer than 8 growth rings per 25 mm at any point on any cross section
Slope of grain Not greater than 1 in 10 in softwoods and 1 in 8 in hardwoods
Boxed Heart Permitted in softwoods only if there is no shake on exposed surfaces
Pitch Not permitted Permitted if hard
Pin-holes Not permitted Permitted if filled

Table 1.2
Quality of Timber
Features Concealed and Semi-Concealed Surfaces

Knots Up to 45mm width - two-thirds of timber
45-60mm width - 20mm
60-100mm width - one half
Over 100mm width - 50mm
Checks, Width splits Any width
Length and Depths Not continuous for whole length
Shakes One Half of timber
Pitch pockets Permitted
Plugs and inserts Width not to be 6mm greater than maximum
limit of permitted know size
Joints and Lamination No specified requirement
Glue Lines
Rate of Growth Not fewer than 8 growth rings per 25mm at any point on any cross section
Slope of grain Not greater than 1 in 10 in softwoods and 1 in 8 in hardwoods
Boxed Heart Permitted in softwoods
Pitch Permitted
Pin-holes Permitted
1.4 MOISTURE CONTENT
1 All timber is to be kept in stores, properly stacked, for a minimum period of three months to
ensure conditioning to a maximum moisture content from time of delivery and during site
storage to be no more than the following:
(a) timber 50mm and less in thickness to have a moisture content of 19% or less
(b) boards to have a moisture content of 19% or less
(c) timber over 50mm thick to have a moisture content of 25% or less.
2 Particular care is to be taken to ensure that all carpentry and joinery timbers, plywood,
blockboard and other timber based composite board, whether in prefabricated or loose form,
are delivered and maintained at the required maximum moisture content stated. Refer to BS
6566 Part 5 for moisture content in plywood.
1.5 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
1 The Contractor is to comply with the following requirements when dealing with structural
timbers (rough carpentry):

(a) protect timber and other products from dampness both during and after the delivery to
the site.
(b) pile timber in stacks in such a manner as to provide air circulation around the surfaces
of each piece.
(c) stack plywood and other board products so as to prevent warping.
(d) locate stacks on well drained areas, supported at least above ground and cover as
necessary for protection from driving rain and prolonged sun exposure, whilst providing
ventilation.
2 The Contractor is to comply with the following requirements when dealing with
architectural timber (finished carpentry and shopwork).
(a) joinery is to be stacked on bearers on level, dry floors. Components are to be staggered
or separated with spacers as necessary to prevent damage by and to projecting
ironmongery, beads, etc.
(b) components which cannot be immediately unloaded into conditions of storage
recommended by the manufacturer or approved by the Engineer are not to be delivered to the
site.
(b) during transit and while stored on site, doors are to be stacked horizontally in piles,
each pile on not fewer than three cross bearers laid level and true.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Drawings: provide co-ordination, fabrication and installation drawings and other information
showing such details of woodwork as the Supervision team/engineer may reasonably require
including elevations, plans and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed
methods of forming joints and any proposals for fabricating large components in more than
one piece.
1.6.2 Samples: submit material samples for each item of woodwork together with exposed finishes
to be used in the work. Obtain approval of material, appearance and other relevant
characteristics before proceeding with manufacture or delivery.
1.6.3 Samples: within the programmed time submit samples of the specified products, being part of
the quantity required for the project. Obtain approval of appearance and other relevant
characteristics before proceeding with manufacture or delivery
1.6.4 Product Data: provide data for each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. Include
data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification
by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative
used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

1.7.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: a firm experienced in manufacturing items specified in this

section similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
1.7.2 Installer Qualifications: a qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses of Supervision team/engineers
and Owners, and other relevant information
1.7.3 Weather Stripping: provide weather seals to all external doors.
1.7.4 Available Manufacturers: manufacturer’s names and products listed hereinafter are indicative
only and are to comply with requirements stated in this specification.
1.8 SPARE MATERIALS
1.8.1 Wood Cladding: The spare materials shall be supplied as per percentages or quantities
stipulated under the contract or as per QCS 2014, or no more than recommended by the
supplier.
1.9 WARRANTY FOR ARCHITECTURAL WOOD WORK
1 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and installer are
jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace architectural woodwork that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, discoloration, fading, moisture
penetration or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
(a) Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by
manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to ASTM
D 2244.
(b) Warping, distortion or twist, if installed in controlled environment or stored in similar

environment.
2 Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned in
the contract (IF ANY)
3 This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Employer may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
2 WOOD TREATMENT
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope

1 This Part specifies the use of preservative, insect protection and fire retardant treatment for
wood construction, inclusive of Structural Timbers and Architectural woodwork. Unless
stated otherwise in the Project Documentation, the guide to choice, use and application of
wood preservatives is BS 1282.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 5 Joinery
Part 6 Fastenersand Adhesives
2.1.2 References

BS 1282 ......................Guide to the choice, use and application of wood
preservatives BS 5268 ......................Preservative treatments for constructional
timbers
BS 5707 ......................Solutions of wood preservatives in organic
solvents BS 6566 ......................Plywood
BS EN 1014 ................Creosote and creosoted timber
2.1.3 Submittals
1 In accordance with the Project Documentation, provide certification as specified that

required preservation treatment or fire retardant has been completed, or in the absence of
specific requirement that at minimum the manufacturers required standard application has
been used.
2 Provide a sample of woodwork as indicated by the engineer with required coatings or

treatment application for testing where required.
2.2 PRESERVATIVETREATMENT
2.2.1 General Application
1 The preservative treatment is to be applied by pressure impregnation or the double vacuum

process. Dipping, deluging, spraying, brushing or other methods which only provide shallow
protection are not permitted.
2 The treatment to be carried out under factory conditions at the source of supply of the
timber and the Contractor is to provide a Certificate of Impregnation when required by the
Engineer.

3 Treatment is to be carried out after all cutting and shaping has been completed. If subsequent
cutting of the timber is unavoidable all freshly exposed surfaces are to receive a liberal
application of the preservative recommended in the relevant treatment specification.
2.2.2 Standard Pressure Treated Preservative
1 Wood members and plywood exposed to weather or in contact with plaster, masonry or
concrete, including wood framing of openings in exterior walls of concrete or masonry, roofed
structures; wood sills, sole plates, furring; and, wood members used in connection with
roofing and flashing materials to be treated in accordance with BS 1282, BS 5268, BS 6566,
and/or BS 5707.
2.2.3 Other Preservative Treatments
1 Creosote and creosoted timber where used as structural timber to be sampled or analysed to
BS EN 1014.
2.3 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
1 Each piece of treated material will bear identification of the testing agency and will show the
performance rating. Treatment and performance inspection, is to be by an independent and
qualified testing agency that establishes performance ratings.
2.3.2 Fire-Retardant Treatment
1 Flame Spread: flame spread class of finishes shall comply with fire safety requirements.
2 Fire Retardant Coatings: timber products shall receive fire retardant coatings complying the
fire safety requirements.
3 Fire-Retardant Treated Materials: specify fire-retardant treatment by reference to (AWPA)

American Wood Preservers' Association where fire-retardant treated materials are indicated,
provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and
AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant treated wood with appropriate classification
marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood
after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency
according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners
Use exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated

Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated
Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying
processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks
or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork

Kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated material
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
2.4 INSECT TREATMENT
1 All hardwood and softwood for permanent incorporation in the Works is to be treated with
preservative to provide protection against damage from insect larvae, termites and fungal
decay to BS 6566, Part 7. Organic solvent type preservatives are to contain a water repellent.
Certificates are to be provided confirming l necessary treatments required have been
completed
4 ARCHITECTURALTIMBER
4.1.1 Scope
1 This part includes specifications for fabrication and installation of exterior and interior
finished carpentry and millwork, and plastic laminate covered counters, cabinets, and other
such items.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 3 Framing Furring and Blocking
Part 3 Wood Doors
Part 5 Joinery
4.1.2 References
1 The following references are referred to in this Part:

BS 1142...................... Specification for fibre building boards
BS 1282...................... Choice, use and application of wood preservatives
BS 2572...................... Phenolic laminated sheet and epoxy cotton fabric laminated sheet
BS 3444...................... Specification for blockboard and lamin board
BS 4072...................... Use of copper/chromium/arsenic compositions
BS 4965...................... Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered boards and panels

BS 5268...................... Part 5 - preservative treatment of structural timber

BS 5589...................... Code of Practice for preservation of timber
BS 5666...................... Methods of analysis of wood preservatives and treated timber
BS 5707...................... Specification of solutions for timber
BS 6566...................... Plywood
BS EN 635.................. Plywood Part 2 Hardwood
4.1.3 Submittals
1 In accordance with the Project Documentation, provide Shop Drawings and Samples as
specified, or at minimum as follows:
(a) shop Drawings showing detailed finished work such as cabinetry, counters, built-in
furniture requiring shopwork finished carpentry should have large scale shop drawings
provided.
(b) samples of architectural woodwork) with final surface finishing and any required
coatings of paint, varnish, stain or other coatings, at approximate size of 700 x 100 mm.
(c) samples of plastic laminate finish on plywood or particle board at size of 300 x 15
mm
(d) certificates indicating preservative treatments or fire-retardant treatment

of materials as meets the project requirements.
(e) certificates indicating moisture content of materials as meets the project
requirements.
4.1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 Protect shopwork items from dampness both during and after delivery to site.
2 Store finished shopwork in weathertight well ventilated structures or in space in existing

buildings designated by the Engineer.
3 Do not install finished shopwork in any room or space where concrete, masonry, or plaster
work is not completed and dry.
4.2 TIMBER MATERIALS (NON-STRUCTURAL FRAMES)
4.2.1 Grading and Marking
1 Members are to bear the grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating grades of
materials, and rules or standards under which produced.
4.2.2 Sizes
1 Size references, unless otherwise specified are nominal sizes, and actual sizes are to be within
manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which the product is produced.

4.2.3 Specific Items
1 Timber for (shopwork), exterior walkways handrails, shelves, handrails, seats, cabinets and
other such items is specified in the Project Documentation and drawings.
4.2.4 Moisture Content
1 Moisture content of timber and shopwork at the time of delivery to the site should be as
follows:
(a) interior finished timber, trim and shopwork 30 mm or less in thickness, moisture
content to be 12 % minimum on 85 % of the work and a maximum of 15 % on the
remainder.
(b) exterior treated or untreated finished timber 100 mm or less in thickness, moisture
content to be 15 % minimum.
4.2.5 Fire Retardant Treatment
1 Where timber members and plywood are specified to be fire retardant treated, the treatment
is to be in accordance with BS 476.
2 Treatment and performance inspection is to be by an independent and qualified testing

agency. Each piece of treated material is to bear the identification of the testing agency and
should indicate performance in accordance with such a rating.
4.2.6 Preservative Treatment
1 All softwood for permanent incorporation in the Works to be treated with preservative to
provide protection against damage from insect larvae, termites and fungal decay. Organic
solvent type preservatives are to contain a water repellant.
2 The preservative treatment is to be applied by pressure impregnation or the double vacuum

process. Dipping, deluging, spraying, brushing or other methods which only provide shallow
protection are not permitted.
3 The treatment is to be carried out under factory conditions at the source of supply of the
timber and the Contractor is to provide a Certificate of Impregnation when required by the
Engineer.
4 Treatment is to be carried out after all cutting and shaping has been completed. If subsequent
cutting of the timber is unavoidable all freshly exposed surfaces are to receive a liberal
application of the preservative recommended in the relevant treatment specification. Refer to
BS 1282, BS 4072, BS 5268, BS 5589, BS 5666 and BS 5707.
4.2.7 Fixing of Exterior Shop work
1 Fixing of exterior shop work:
(a) all edges of timber members exposed to weather are to be end grain.
(b) all slopwork is to be primed and back painted before fixing.

(c) shopwork is to be nailed, screwed or bolted at each support (blocking).

(d) all joints are to be close fitted, mitred, tongue and grooved, rebated or lapped to
exclude water.
2 Edges of members in contact with concrete or masonry are to have a square corner caulking
rebate.
3 Staff beads are to have a caulking rebate.
4.2.8 Fixing of Interior shop work
1 Except where special profiles are shown, trim is to be standard stock molding and all members
to be of the same species. All finished shopworker is to be free from pitch pockets. Plywood
is to be a minimum 12 mm thick, unless otherwise shown or specified.
2 No interior woodwork is to be set until primed and back-painted; or until all concrete,
masonry and plaster in buildings is complete and dry.
3 Interior shop work which is to receive a transparent finish is to be primed and back-painted
only on surfaces to be concealed. Secure trim with fine finishing nails and with screws and
glue where required. Set nails for putty stopping.
4 All members such as molding strips, chair rails, and base strips which are less than 4.25 m
in length are to be from one piece of timber, back channeled and molded as shown.
5 Interior trim and items of shop work to be painted may be fabricated from jointed, built-up,
or laminated members, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
4.3 PLYWOOD
4.3.1 Softwood Plywood
1 Softwood plywood is to comply with the relevant provisions of BS EN 635 Part 2.
2 Fire resistant softwood plywood is to meet all requirements for flame spread and smoke
developed when tested in accordance with BS 476.
3 Plywood is to bear the label of the testing agency designating rate of flame spread, fuel
contributed and smoke developed.
4 Each sheet of plywood is to bear the mark of a recognized association or independent

inspection agency that will maintain a continuing control over the quality of the plywood. The
mark is to identify the plywood by species group or identification index, and show the glue
type, grade, and compliance with BS 6566.
5 Plywood shall be to BS EN 636, face grade 2 for general use and grade 1 for clear finish. All
free from bow, twist or warp.
6 Plywood for internal use generally shall have bonding type MR or INT except where
described as water resistant, which shall have bonding type WBP.
7 Plywood for external use where required, shall have bonding type WBP .

4.3.2 Hardwood Plywood
1 Hardwood plywood is to comply with the relevant provisions of BS EN 635 Part 2.
2 Fire resistant hardwood plywood
(a) core is to be exterior type softwood plywood; face and back veneer to be untreated;
factory seal planed edges, to prevent loss of fire retardant by the manufacturers
(b) plywood panels are to meet all requirements for flame spread, smoke developed and
fuel contributed, when tested in accordance with BS 576
(c) each panel is to bear the label of testing agency designating rate of flame spread,
fuel contributed and smoke developed.
4.3.3 Marine Plywood
1 Marine plywood shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1088 and BS 4079.
4.3.4 Wood Veneer
1 Wood Veneer: free from decay, wormholes and obtained from an approved supplier.
2 Surfaces of Wood: to BS EN 942, exposed surface category where not concealed or semi-
concealed after installation.
Softwood Species for Joinery: to BS EN 942. Softwood species for joinery to be used are to
be the species recommended for that purpose and as indicated on drawings.
Hardwood Species for Joinery: to BS EN 942. Hardwood species for joinery to be used in
external locations are to be the species recommended for that purpose as indicated on
drawings.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish:
As indicated on drawings and finish data sheet
Wood Species for Opaque Finish:
Any closed-grain hardwood

Species indicated on drawings and data sheets
Surfaces of Wood: to BS EN 942, exposed surface category where not concealed or semi-
concealed after installation.
4.4 WOOD PANELING
4.4.1 General

1 This part specifies requirements for use of board planks or sheet paneling of unfinished or
pre-finished surfaces for use as wall covering, wainscots, or built-in type furniture such as
counter surfaces.
4.4.2 Board Planking
1 Timber type and finish to be applied is to be as specified by the Project Documentation.
2 Unless specified otherwise board planks are to be as follows:
(a) timber stock to be 18 mm thick with each board in one piece floor to ceiling, V-cut
as shown on plans
(b) blind nail each board at each bearing on furring strips.
4.4.3 Wall Sheet Paneling
1 Use hardwood plywood, premium grade, with unfinished or factory prefinished surface.
Project drawings will specify, thickness and if surface will be vertical V-grove random
planked, or flush grooved.
2 Joints are to be tightly butted and plumb.
3 Paneling is to be laid vertically and blind nailed to wood furring.
4 Wood mouldings are to be solid wood members of the same species as the wall paneling.
5 The Type of finish required on factory prefinished wall panels to be as specified on the
drawings.
4.5 BLOCKBOARD AND LAMINBOARD
1 Blockboard and laminboard to be free from bow, twist and warp and conform to BS 3444.
2 On 3-ply boards the thickness of the veneers to be a minimum of 2.5 mm and a maximum
of 3.6 mm.
3 Cores are to consist of strips of wood of the same species throughout any one board. In
blockboard the width of each strip is not to be less than 8 mm and not more than 25 mm, and
in laminboard it is not to be less 7 mm.
4 The strips are to be laid side by side with the grain parallel and run in the longer direction of
the board. The strips may be butted end to end provided there is not gap at the butt and that
the butts in adjacent strips are staggered by at least 150 mm. The strips are to be assembled
in such a manner that the finished board is the equivalent of a solid slab free from all voids.
5 The grain of each veneer is to be parallel to that of the corresponding veneer and that of the
veneers next to the core to be at right angles to the direction of the strips in the core.

6 Face plies Class 1 and Class 2 finish to be as for plywood except that Class 1 finish veneers
may be of one or more pieces. When of more than one piece it is to be well jointed and
matched for colour at the joints. The pieces are to be equal in width subject to a deviation of
± 10% and not less than 250 mm wide.
4.5.2 Fixing Laminated Timber Boards
1 Blockboard and laminboard are to be fixed with the laminations running in the direction of
the longest span.
2 Blockboard and laminboard are not to be used externally.
3 Plywood is not to be installed with exposed edges in external work.
4 The new edges formed by cut-outs in laminated timber boards for sinks, taps and the like
are to be liberally coated with waterproof glue to form a seal.
4.7 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD PRODUCTS
4.7.1 Building Board (Hand-board)
1 Building board is to comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1142.
Medium-Density Fiberboard
Medium-density Fiberboard (MDF): product made without formaldehyde and complying with
ANSI A208.2, Product Class MD.
5 JOINERY
5.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies workmanship and special detail construction for doors, windows,
architraves, beads, and timber skirting, and speciality wood flooring of block or parquet
strips.
This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Wood Treatment
Part 6 Fasteners and Adhesives
Part 7 Ironmongery
5.1.2 References


BS 729........................ Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
BS 1186...................... Quality of timber and workmanship in joinery
BS 1202...................... Nails
BS 1204...................... Synthetic resin adhesives (phenolic and aminoplastic) for wood
BS 1210...................... Wood screws
BS 3794...................... Decorative laminated plastic sheet
BS 4756...................... Ready mixed aluminium priming paints for woodwork
BS5358...................... Solvent-borne priming paints for woodwork
5.1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 Shop Drawings: submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of
door and frame specified, include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard
data, and the following:
2 Fabrication, layout, and installation details, including anchors and conditions at openings
3 Details of each frame type and elevations of door design type
4 Full-size details of typical composite members, including reinforcement and extent of

blocking and holes for ironmongery and hardware
5 Fire ratings for fire-resisting doors and assemblies
6 Ironmongery and hardware, including operators
7 Glass and glazing details
8 Louvers and accessories.
9 Door Schedule: submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details
and openings as those on Drawings.
10 Indicate ironmongery and hardware set requirements
11 Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
12 Installer Certificates: signed by product manufacturer certifying that the Installer is approved,
13 Installer Experience: provide a list of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the Installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer's
representative.
14 Test Certificate: provide a certificate of test from an approved independent testing laboratory
describing the fire test and confirming the fire rating of the fire door system and its
components.

15 Catalogues: submit manufacturer's catalogues and technical specifications for materials and
products proposed to be incorporated into the works.
16 Manufacturer's Data: submit manufacturer's product data for each type of door and frame
specified, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
Construction details and fabrication methods
Profiles and dimensions of individual components
Data on hardware, accessories, trim, louvres and factory finishes
Identifying fire-resistance label
Installation instructions
Recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exposed surfaces.
5.2 WORKMANSHIP
5.2.1 Joinery Workmanship
1 Timber used for joinery work is to be finished to the sizes indicated in the Project
Documentation and to BS 1186.
2 The joinery to be constructed exactly as shown on the drawings. Where types of joints are
not specifically indicated they are to be recognised forms of joints for each position and
shall be made so as to comply with BS 1186, Part 2.
3 All joints are to be glued and screwed or doweled to BS 1204, BS 1210 or BS 1186 as
applicable.
4 Exposed and semi-concealed joinery is to be planed and sanded to remove all machinery and
other surface defects so that after application of the specified finish imperfections in
manufacture will not be apparent.
5 Exposed edges and corners are to be sanded off to form a “ pencil rounded” arris.
6 Architraves, cover fillets, skirtings and the like are to be accurately shaped to fit the contour
of any irregular surface against which they are required to form a close connection.
7 Joinery for painting on site is to be primed before delivery to the site to BS 4756, BS 5358.
8 Screwing into particle board is not acceptable.
5.3 TIMBER DOOR TYPES
5.3.1 Flush Doors
1 Minimum door leaf thickness is to be:
(a) internal door 40 mm

(b) external door 45 mm
1 Solid core doors to be comprise of softwood timber battens laminated together with.4mm
plywood skin or alternative synthetic approved material.
The core laminations softwood are to be a maximum 50 mm wide and are to be laid
alternately to balance stresses.
2 Semi-solid core doors are to contain a minimum 50% timber and are to be constructed on
the stressed skin principle having a minimum 4 mm plywood skin or alternative approved
system.
3 Exterior quality doors are to be constructed using Type WBP adhesives and a quality 4 mm
plywood skin or alternative approved system.
4 All facing materials including veneered materials are to be such that the following defects
do not appear on the finished surfaces:
(a) lifting at edges

(b) blistering
(c) sinking or raising of the surface due to knots or other defects in the core material
(d) ripple effect whereby the construction of the core is seen on the face of the door.
(e) to BS 3794
5 Doors are to be hardwood lipped on both horizontal and vertical edges. Lippings to be solid
and measured at least 8 mm on the face of the door. Lippings to doors with a Class 1 finish
are to match the face skin.
6 If the construction of the door is such that the lock, hinges or bolts can only be fitted where
blocks are provided to receive them, the position and extent of the blocks are to be indicated
by a suitable marking on the edge of the door. Where a surface mounted closer or a flush
bolt is specified, blocks shall also be suitably positioned to receive them.
7 Where a flush or mortised door closer is specified a solid timber rail insert minimum 75 mm
wide is to be provided for all door types. Closers are to not be fixed to the end grain of solid
core doors.
8 Openings for glazing or grilles in semi-solid core doors are to be formed with a sub-frame
all-round the opening minimum 36 mm wide.
9 The maximum deviation from a true plane on either face of a door when measured by a
straightedge is to be:
(a) (bow in length : 3 mm
(b) horizontal bow : 2 mm
(c) deviation from the true plane (twist) : 4 mm

(d) the ends of the braces are to be splay notched to the ledges and the ends of the ledges
set back 15 mm from the edges of the door. The direction of the braces should be
upwards from the hanging stile.
10 Plastic laminate Faced Doors:

(a) High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3 and meeting the
following criteria:
(i) Standard grade:
(ii) 1.59 mm for horizontal work with matte finish.
(iii) 1.10 mm for vertical work with matte finish.
(iv) Bending grade: 0.60 mm for on-site bending to radius of 75 mm with matte
finish.
(v) Pattern and finish: wood look plastic laminate.
(vi) Color: as selected by Engineer.
5.3.2 Fire Resisting Door Assemblies
1 Half-hour and one-hour fire resisting door assemblies are to have a minimum fire resisting
performance when tested in accordance with BS 476, Part 8 of 30/30 and 60/60 respectively.
2 The door and frame of fire resisting door assemblies are to be supplied by the same
manufacturer and be installed strictly in accordance with his instructions.
3 A copy of the Test Certificate shall be submitted to the Engineering for each type of door
assembly supplied.
4 The doors to generally comply with the requirements of Part 5.2.1 and are to have a
minimum 4 mm plywood skin or alternative approved system.
5 The doors are to be marked on the hanging stile with an appropriate reference indicating the
fire resisting performance of the door assembly.
6 Doors are to be fitted with an automatic self-closing device and be hung on a minimum of three
hinges, manufactured from non-combustible material and meeting BS EN 1935.Rising butt
hinges are not acceptable as an automatic self-closing device. No HOLD OPEN OPTION‟ is
permitted unless the magnetic catch is operated by the fire alarm system.
5.3.3 Hanging Timber Doors
1 The maximum clearance between frames and door when hung is to be 3 mm.
2 The maximum clearance between an internal door and finished floor level is to be 6 mm
(unless noted to be undercut) and between an external door and threshold or finished floor
level to be 3 mm.
3 External doors and doors exceeding 20 kg in weight are to be hung on three 100 mm x 75
mm hinges as a minimum.
4 Hinges to be stainless steel, aluminium or brass as noted in the project documentation or as

directed by the Engineer and to BS EN ISO 1461where applicable.

5.3.4 Door and Window Frames, Sub-frames and Linings
1 Frames, sub-frames and linings are collectively referred to as “frames” in this Part.
2 Frames are to be manufactured with either mortise and tenon or tongued joints so as to be
square and flat.
3 The backs of frames are to be painted with two coats of primer to BS 5358, or BS 4756
before installation.
4 Frames to be fixed plumb, level and securely to prevent deflection or movement.
5 Frames built-in as the surrounding structure is constructed are to be fixed with cramps at
maximum 600 mm centres. One cramp to be located 200 mm from the bottom of the frame
and one 200 mm from the top or at the nearest adjacent bed joint. All cramps are to be secured
to the frame by two screws. Alternative fixing methods are to be approved by the Engineer
and to BS 1202, BS 1204, and BS 1210 as applicable.
6 Frames which are to be built-in are to be temporarily braced sufficient to prevent distortion.
7 Frames to previously prepared openings are to be fixed with screw fastenings at maximum
450 mm centres. One fastening is to be located 200 mm from the bottom of the frame and one
200 mm from the top.
8 Packing between the frame and reveal to accurately position the frame in a previously
prepared opening is to be hardwood, located only where the fastenings tighten against the
reveal.
9 Screw fastenings are to extend into the structural reveal by at least 40 mm or the thickness
of the frame excluding any stop, whichever is the greater.
10 Door frames which occur in wet areas should not extend below the finished floor level.
5.4 PURPOSE MADE FITTINGS
1 Fittings to be constructed in accordance with Part 7 and are to be installed plumb and true.
2 Critical site dimensions are to be checked before commencing manufacture of the fittings
and no fittings dimension is to be altered without the approval of the Engineer.
3 All surfaces are to be smooth and free from splinters and no parts to have exposed rough or
sharp edges whether on the inside or outside of the fitting.
4 Where a door overlaps the frame or another door the face of the rebate is not to be more
than 1.5 mm from the face of the frame or door at any point.
5 Where a door is fitted into the surrounding framework the clearance between each edge of
the door and the frame or another door should not be more than 1.5 mm.

6 Door hinges or pivots are to be fitted in alignment.
7 Drawers should slide freely and be fitted with runners and guides so that there is no undue
play in any direction which could produce wedging or jamming.
8 Where a drawer overlaps the frame, the face of the rebate is not to be more than 1.5 mm
from the face of the frame at any point when the drawer is closed.
9 Where a drawer is fitted into the surrounding frame work the clearance around the edge of
the drawer when closed is not to be more than 1.5 mm.
5.4.2 Counters and Cabinets
1 Base counters and upper cabinets units shall be pre-fabricated units constructed to dimensions
and details indicated on Drawings.
2 Construct units from 18 mm thick MDF with plastic laminate finish post formed on both faces
and edges. Plastic laminate sheet shall be as specified in this Section, color and pattern to the
selection of the Supervision team/engineer.
3 Kitchen & Laundry Cabinets: Where indicated construct unit 18 mm thick MDF with high
pressure laminate (HPL) complying with the requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS
unless otherwise as selected by the supervision team/Engineer.
4 Units are to be assembled in manufacturer's standard system to provide neat and robust
construction.
5 Construct socle of lower cabinet units, consisting of perimeter sides and intermediate struts,
from hardwood solid blocks and finish exposed fronts to match finish of adjoining floors.
6 Provide stainless steel pre-slotted shelf holders of satin finish complete with stainless steel
removable brackets for shelf supporting.
7 Provide manufacturer's standard hardware including hinges, drawer slides, latches and knobs
of finish to the selection of the Supervision team/engineer. All hardware shall be
manufactured from stainless steel, alloy 304, of satin finish.
8 Blocking wood generally shall be from approved hardwood type.
6 FASTENERS AND ADHESIVES
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 This part deals with the specification of fasteners and adhesives.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Framing furring and blocking
Part 3 Wood doors
Part 4 Architectural timbers
Part 5 Joinery
6.1.2 References

BS 729 ........................Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel
articles. BS 1202 ......................Nails
BS 1204 ......................Synthetic resin adhesives (phenolic and aminoplastic) for
wood BS 1210 ......................Wood screws
6.2 FASTENERS
6.2.1 Nails and Screws
1 Nails and screws are to comply with BS 1202, Part 1 and BS 1210 respectively.
6.2.2 Fastenings
1 Fastenings in external areas are to be sheradised, galvanised or non-ferrous.
2 Nails are not to be less than 25 mm long or 2½ times the thickness of the member through
which the nails are being driven, whichever is the greater.
3 Screws are not be less than 12 mm long or twice the thickness of the member through which
the screws are being driven, whichever is the greater.
4 Regardless of the specified minimum lengths, nails and screws are not to be longer than the
total thickness of the members being joined, less 5 mm.
5 Nail heads should be punched, and screw heads not required to be pellated to be countersunk,
not less than 2 mm below surfaces which will be visible in the finished work, the holes filled
with putty or a proprietary filler and sanded smooth and flush.
6 Plugs for screw fastenings into blockwork or concrete are to be of proprietary manufactured
sized to suit the screw. Wooden plugs will not be permitted.
6.2.3 Pellating
1 Screw heads which are to be pellated are to be countersunk 6 mm below the timber surface.
Pellets to be cut from matching timber not less than 6 mm thick, glued in with the grain
matched, planed and sanded off flush with the face.
2 Screw heads are to be pellated where the timber surface is to receive a clear finish.

6.3 ADHESIVES
1 Adhesives used in carpentry and joinery work should be synthetic resin adhesives
complying with BS 1204, Parts 1 and 2 Type WBP for all external work and Type BR for
internal work.
6.4 ROUGH HARDWARE AND FRAME CRAMPS
6.4.1 General
1 This Part specifies fasteners and fastening systems used for Structural Timber construction
and within some framing with Architectural woodwork.
6.4.2 Products
1 Cramps to be mild steel size 2 x 25 x 250 mm girth, galvanised after fabrication to BS 729,
turned up at one end and drilled twice for 3 mm diameter screws and fishtailed at the other
end for building in.
2 Furnish rough hardware, except nails, with a standard plating, applied after punching, forming
and assembly of parts. Galvanised anchors and bolts (with nuts and washers), straps, and
hangers except bolts may be cadmium plated, or zinc-coated by electro-galvanising process.
Aluminium-alloy nails, plated nails, or zinc-coated nails, for nailing woodwork exposed to
weather are to be used. Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood should be fitted with washers.
For work exposed to the weather, washers of cast iron, or zinc or cadmium coated steel are to
be used. Special nails as required for use with ties, anchors, framing connectors, joint hangers
and similar items are to be used in accordance with the item manufacturers instructions or as
directed by the Engineer.
3 Joist Ties: Are to be mild steel flats, 5 mm by 32 mm size with ends bent 30 degrees from
horizontal, and extending at least 40 mm onto the framing. Each end to be punched for three
spikes.
4 Wall anchors for Joists and Rafters: Provide a mild steel strap, 5 mm by 32 mm with wall
ends bent 50 mm, or provide 9.5 mm by 127 mm pin through the strap and build into masonry.
Provide anchors parallel to framing long enough to extend at least 406 mm onto framing and
punch for three spikes. Provide anchors at right angles to framing; long enough to extend onto
three joists or rafters, punched for spiking at each bearing.
7 IRONMONGERY AND HARDWARE . (REFER TO APPENDIX A )
8 HOSPITAL CASEWORK
8.1 Section Includes: Furnish and install hospital furniture and accessories as shown and listed on
drawings and specified herein. Include all casework, support modules, specified tables,
overhead service, fixtures, electrical raceway, fume hoods, drying racks, countertops, sink
cutouts, splashes, supports, shelving, and equipment noted necessary for a complete furniture

installation. Provide al labors for unloading, distribution, and installation of furniture and
related items as specified. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical materials and connection to
building systems provided by project contractor.
1 Verify all critical building dimensions prior to fabrication of furniture.
2 Furnish plumbing fixtures, fittings, sinks and cup sinks as specified and as shown on drawings
as part of the Hospital Furniture System complete with required overflows, plugs, strainers
and tailpieces.
3 Traps are not included as part of this section. Fittings to be complete with nipples and lock
nuts for mounting purposes. Sinks and fixtures within the system to be pre-mounted with final
mounting.
4 Shall coordinate with Civil and Electro-mechanical installation and connections.
5 Furnish and mount electrical raceway directly attached to Hospital System and walls as shown
6 Supply water, hospital gases, and electrical services fittings.
7 Removal of all debris, packing materials, dirt and rubbish directly created as a result of
installation of furniture and equipment specified herein.
8.3 SUBMITTALS
1 Products Data: Submit hospital furniture manufacture’s details showing construction details,
material specifications and hardware specifications of all items used
2 Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop fabrication and installation drawing, including plans,
elevations, sections, details and schedules. Showing relationship to adjoining materials
Submit three sets of shop drawings consisting of:
3 Finish, Hardware, Construction options selection sheet.
4 Small scale floor plan showing casework in relation to the building.
5 Large scale elevations and plan views.
6 All items not listed or not approved shall be as specified or drawn.
7 Cross-sections; service runs; wall blocking requirements and locations; rough-in
8 Samples for Verification “Mock-up”: Provide full scale lab casework mock-up as indicated
on drawings
9 Qualification Data: for qualified manufacturer
10 Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of hospital casework with requirements of
specified product standards.

11 Submit for approval a detailed line item description of all deviation from specifications or
drawings
12 Supervision team/engineer and Construction Manager must approve all items prior fabrication
and deliver of furniture
8.4 Quality Assurance
1 Single Source Responsibility: All wood casework, accessories, and service fittings shall be
manufactured and supplied by one manufacturer.
2 Manufacturer Qualification: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for the project and with a record of successful in services performance as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
3 Submit certification indicating at least (10) years successful experience in manufacturing and
installation of casework
4 Installation: Install casework under the supervision of the Manufacturer's team.
5 Using workman certified or approved by Manufacturer All casework, work surfaces, and
service fixtures construction and performance characteristics shall be in full compliance with
European Standards. At the Employer’s request, independent, third party testing must be
submitted validating compliance and adherence to the architectural specifications.
6 Product Designations: Drawings indicates sizes and configurations of hospital casework
7 Product Standards: Comply with EN13150 – Workbenches for laboratories, and EN14727
Laboratory storage.
8 Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.
9 Mock-ups: Before installing portions of the work requiring mock-ups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with following requirements, using
materials for completed work:
Build Mock-ups in location and of size indicated or if not indicated, as directed by Engineer or
Construction Manager.
Notify Engineer and Construction Manger seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when
mock-up will be constructed.
Obtain Engineer’s approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrications, construction. Allow
seven (7) days for initial review and ach re-review of ach mockup.
Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

the completed work.
Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
1 Protection: Protect finished surface during handling and installation with protective covering
of polyethylene film or other suitable material.

2 Replacement: Damage as a result of this contractor’s work will be replaced, repaired and
restored to original conditions to the approval of the Employer’s representative at no
additional cost or inconvenience to the Employer.
8.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1 Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install hospital casework until building is

enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work are complete and dry, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
2 In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Employer’s representatives. Do not

proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have been fully
resolved.
8.7 COORDINATION
1 Work in this section requires close coordination with work specified elsewhere, as well as
installation by Employer’s representatives of Employer furnished components. Coordinates
work to ensure an orderly process in the project to prevent damage to finish and products.
8.8 WARRANTY
1 Warranty: Provide total system warranty in which manufacturer, Installer and contractor
jointly and severally responsible to repair or replace any part of the hospital case work which
fails in workmanship or appearance within specified warranty period.
Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned in
8.9 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
1 Frame Support Structure
C-FRAMES
(a) The system shall be supported on heavy-duty steel frames fully carrying the worktops.
(b) The Load Capacity shall be minimum 200kg/m2.
(c) Constructed with epoxy powder coated rectangular steel 60x30x3 tubing.
(d) C-Frames are free standing and shall include adjustable leveling feet ±15 mm.
(e) C-Frames shall support Hanging Base Cabinets as noted on drawings.
(f) Rear and front rails of frame shall support cabinets.
(g) Cabinets shall be interchangeable within C-Frame without tools.
(h) Visible ends at steal frames are supplied with plastic head caps.
PLINTH MOUNTED BENCH
(a) Under- bench Sink cabinet are mounted on 4 concealed adjustment feet -0/+ 20 mm
(b) Plinth panels are made of 13 mm Compact Density Fiberboard attached to legs by
means of metal clip allowing the panel to be adjustable and level with floor. Plastic
clips not acceptable.
(c) The worktop is directly supported by under-bench cabinet
(d) The system is rigid and the Load Capacity shall be minimum 200kg/m2.

(e) The cabinets are sealed at the bottom by u-profile made of PVC attached to the plinth
panel to provide a clean finish with floor.
(f) Plinth sealing profile made of PVC, 13 mm thickness, transparent, seals at the bottom
of carcass.
8.10. SERVICE
SYSTEM
GENERAL
(a) Service spine shall be provided with benches as shown on drawings, able to house all
piping, wiring, and outlets of fixtures and fittings.
(b) Use single Upright for frame end and double Upright for frame middle.
(c) The media service fixtures as shown on drawings shall be mounted into the service
panel to allow maximum clear workspace.
(d) Services drain, wiring and vent adjustable pipe clamps (provided by others) shall mount
on service spine within the 150mm depth service area.
(e) Service spine shall be designed to accept wide range of add-on units such as, shelving
unit, overhead cabinets, drying rack, and soap/ towel dispenser.
DESCRIPTION
(a) Service spine uprights shall be constructed from heavy-duty aluminum extrusions
profiles, 25/50mm thick and 150mm wide, Uprights shall have continuous slots that are
able to accommodate fixing of internal beams, service panels, access panels, shelving
units, service box, and wide range of accessories.
(b) Uprights shall be connected by heavy gauge steel beams.
(c) Floor mounted service spine height shall be FFL (Finish Floor Level) as shown on
drawings.
(d) Service Panels shall be fixed on service spine, made of solid phenolic resin panels
carrying electrical/mechanical fittings as shown on drawings. Steel or wood panels shall
not be used.
(e) Solid phenolic resin panels shall be minimum of 8mm thick.
(f) All aluminum and steel parts shall be electrostatic epoxy powder coated after proper
pre-treatment.
SERVICE COLUMN
Floor mounted services mounted service column up to the ceiling with adjustable
ceiling collar 200mm height
Made of two aluminum upright and service panels made of Phenolic Resin.
Service column width shall be as shown in drawings.
SHELVES
Vertical adjustable shelving units shall be mounted on service spine as shown on

drawings.
Each shelf unit shall be infinitely height adjustable on the vertical slot of the upright,
300mm depth, and fitted using aluminum brackets with T-nuts.

The shelf panel shall be made of 6 mm wired glass framed within the aluminum rails
and brackets and shall bear a load capacity of 200Kg/m2.
Shelf units are constructed from Aluminum side brackets, 67mm high aluminum back
lip, and 38mm high aluminum front rail.
LED strip light shall be integrated within the front rail of the lower shelf units, 12V,
with polycarbonate cover, power driver, and controlled by On//Off switch on each
bench
8.11. WORK SURFACE
WORKTOP
Especially for hospital environments, offering a high standard of hygiene, strength and
durability for diverse surroundings such as chemical, analytical and biological
laboratories.
Minimum thickness of 19 mm, underlying technology transforms wood-based fibers
with thermosetting resins, under high pressure and at high temperatures, into robust
compact laminate panels that meet the most challenging specifications.
ensure that each panel surface is easy to clean and resistant to a large number of
aggressive chemicals.
Worktop shall be supplied with 100 mm back splash on walls made of same material
as worktop.
The Worktop in the hospital caseworks shall be joint less.
8.12. HOSPITAL CASEWORK MATERIALS
Casework Material: MDF

Wood species: Wood casework will have High Pressure Laminate (HPL) surface. HPL
according to EN 438, ISO 4586, and ANSI/NEMA Standard LD-3-2005 Standard for High
Pressure Decorative Laminates.
All fastening devices and screws shall be treated to deter or resist corrosion.
Edge banding Is PVC, which tested according to DIN 6886.
CONSTRUCTION
(a) All structural components shall be 19mm thick with balanced surfaces.
(b) Carcass shall be made of 19 mm HPL faced MDF with 0.4 mm PVC edging strips.
(c) Door and drawer fronts finished end panels shall be surfaced with 0.9mm thick high-
pressure decorative laminate conforming to NEMA LD3-2005.
(d) Back shall be made of 6 mm thick melamine faced MDF set into grooves.
(e) Bottom of sink cabinets shall be lined with water-proof sheet with raised edges on the
sides.
(f) Carcass components are pre-drilled before assembly by CNC machine.
(g) All exposed edges are covered with PVC edging strip using hot-melt adhesive machine.
(h) All joints are tight fitting and will not rupture or loosen.
(i) Drawer's bottom made of 12 mm MDF covered with HPL on both sides.

(j) Back of drawers made of 18 mm MDF covered with HPL on both sides.
(k) Interior shelves in cupboards made of 18mm MDF covered with HPL on both sides
with 0.4mm PVC edging strips on four edges. Shelves are adjustable for regular heights
of 32mm. Each shelf is mounted on four shelf supports.
(l) Filler Panels made of 12 mm MDF covered with white mat finish HPL on both sides
with 0.4 mm PVC edging strips on all edges. Panels are removable without using tools.
(m) HPL sheets shall not be less than 0.7mm in thickness.
(n) Provide adjustment skirting panel along with the bench, made of Compact Density
Fiberboard
8.13. HARDWARE
HINGES
8.13.1. Zinc die casting, nickel plated heavy duty hinges and have an opening angle of 270°.
8.13.2. Adjustable in 3-dimensions, with built-in latch.
8.13.3. Tested according to ANSI, GRADE A
DRAWER SLIDES
(a) Full Extension, Ball bearing Drawer slides, zinc plated, silent soft closing feature with
light opening force. With continuous load capacity of 34kg.
(b) 50,000 life cycles guaranteed.
(c) ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003; Test No. 10
ADJUSTMENT FEET
(a) Adjustment ± 15 mm.

(b) Made of black polyethylene plastic material with M10 galvanized steel thread.
(c) Thread length 38mm to obtain ± 15mm adjustment.
HANDLE
(a) Material: aluminium flat curved handle with brushed nickel finish.
(b) Length: as per drawings
(c) Shape: curved shape allow sufficient hand and fingers clearance be easy to operate
grab, pull, and push
(d) No sharp corners or edges
WALL SUSPENSION FITTINGS
(a) Wall cabinets are hung using 2 suspension fittings.

(b) Fittings are adjustable in 3 dimensions with load capacity of 150 kg per pair.
CABINET SHELF SUPPORT
(a) Provide safety (lockable) shelf supports with metal pins for internal shelves tested in
accordance with the DIN EN 1153 and DIN ISO 7170:2003.
DOOR BUMPER

(a) Doors and drawers are provided with heavy duty bumpers fixed into 5mm hole
8.14. EXECUTION
DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION
SHIPPING.
Furniture shall not be delivered or stored at the jobsite until building has
become adequately dry and secure. The ambient relative humidity must be maintained
between 25% and 55% prior to delivery and through the life of the installation at
65 to 70 Fahrenheit degrees.
Secured and protected storage shall be provided by the general contractor for
furniture, fittings and hardware. All items supplied by this section and installed
by other contractors shall be delivered and released to the appropriate contractor
who will then take ownership and responsibility for these items.
All hospital furniture shall be unloaded and distributed by hospital furniture contractor.
8.15. HOSPITAL FURNITURE INSTALLATION
Install Cabinets, Tops, Accessories, and service fittings according to final

approved shop drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer’s written instructions
Installation shall be by hospital furniture manufacturer’s authorized and certified
installer.
Wall mounted furniture, shelving, supports and equipment shall be securely
fastened to in-wall
Horizontal blocking provided by appropriate trade, not to plaster, lath, or wallboard.
Appropriate
Contractor shall provide reinforcement of stud walls during erection of walls.
Hospital furniture
Manufacturer shall provide blocking requirements on shop drawings.
Make final adjustments to furniture, shelving, doors and drawers. Doors shall
swing freely, catches shall hold securely, and all other doors shall be aligned both
vertically and horizontally. Drawers shall open and close smoothly, without binding
and without excessive slide play.
Install all furniture, tops and components according to product and manufacturer’s
recommendations for a complete ready to use installation.
EXAMINATION
Examine area, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation, tolerance, location of reinforcement, and other conditions affecting
performance of hospital casework.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
8.16. CLEANING AND PROTECTING

Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or

soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Supervision
team/engineer
Wipe out cabinet interiors to remove dirt and dust. Remove pencil or other
marks, excess adhesive, etc. from all furniture. Remove all packaging, scraps,
and debris resulting from casework installation activities.
Protect tops surface during construction with plastic or other suitable water
resistance covering.
At no time shall contractor use the installed work surface or casework as
workbench, scaffolding or other uses.
9. PHENOLIC PARTITIONS.
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, as well as QCS 2014
provisions apply to this Section.
4.2 SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures
Related Requirements:
2. Section 17 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach floor-and-ceiling-
anchored compartments to overhead structural system.
3. Section 30 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars,
purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.
4.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.
Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.
3. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
4. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
5. Show locations of floor drains.
6. Show ceiling-mounted items, and overhead support or bracing locations.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.
7. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color
selection.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes
unless otherwise indicated:

8. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared
on 150mm square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
9. Each type of hardware and accessory.
Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.
Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.
Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings,
and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements
before fabrication.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in BS 8300 for toilet

compartments designated as accessible.
QCS 2014 – referenced accessibility code: Code on Accessibility in the Built

Environment 2019, Singapore
5.2 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARMENTS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and Engineer approval.
Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor, walls anchored.

1. Color and Pattern: as shown on drawings.
2. Edge Color: Through-color matching facing sheet color or dark phenolic core color.
3. HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
4. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at
5. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper,
sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted
accessories.
6. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging
doors.
7. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at

Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories.
8. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 1.59-mm thick stainless-steel continuous, cam
type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency
access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.
9. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel
latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-
faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide
units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments
designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.
10. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook
and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting
compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts.
11. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber-tipped cast-stainless-steel
bumper at out-swinging doors and entrance-screen doors. Mount with through-
bolts.
12. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging
doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units
on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with
through-bolts.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail

with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless

steel, finished to match the items they are securing. Provide sex-type bolts for through-
bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel.
5.3 MATERIALS
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Stainless steel.
5.4 FABRICATION
Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated.

Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories
where required for attachment of toilet accessories.
Floor-and-Wall-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant

anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters.
Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
Door Size and Swings: As indicated in the drawings. Minimum 815-mm wide clear
opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1 EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.
6.2 INSTALLATION
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-
height brackets as shown in approved shop-drawings.
Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and

level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with
panels when doors are in closed position.
6.3 ADJUSTING
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware

manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 24 – FINISHES TO BUILDINGS
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section specifies the general requirements for various methods and types of interior
finishes within buildings for walls, floors, and ceilings.
Section 1 General
Section 5 Concrete
Section 15 Thermal Insulation
Section 17 Metalwork
Finishes Specifications Data Sheets
1.1.2 References
1 The following standards are approved and/ or referred to in this Section:

ASTM C514
............... Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board
BS
476........................ Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS
812........................ Testing aggregates
BS
882........................ Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 1202
..................... Nails
BS 3416
..................... Bitumen based coating for cold application, suitable for use in contact
with potable water
BS 4223
..................... Determination of constructional details of textile floor coverings with
yarn pile
BS 4682
..................... Methods of test for dimensional stability of textile floor coverings
BS 5212
..................... Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements
BS 5325
..................... Installation of textile floor coverings, Code of practice
BS 5390
..................... Code of practice for stone masonry
BS 5808
..................... Underlays for textile floor coverings
BS 5975 Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible
..................... stress
FINISHES TO BUILDINGS S24 - 1

design of falsework
BS 6073-2 Precast concrete masonry units: Guide for specifying precast
.................... concrete
masonry units
BS 8000
..................... Workmanship on building sites
BS 8203
..................... Code of practice for installation of resilient floor coverings
BS 8203
..................... Code of practice for installation of sheet and tile flooring
BS 8204
..................... In-situ flooring
BS 8481
.................... Design, preparation and application of internal gypsum, cement,
cement and lime plastering systems. Specification
BSEN 459-1 ............. Building lime: Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
Resilient floor coverings. Homogenous and heterogenous

BS EN 649 ................ polyvinyl
chloride floor coverings. Specification
Methods of test for masonry units: Determination of percentage
BS EN 772-2.................. area of voids
in masonry units (by paper indentation)
Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip
BS EN 10142 ............. for
cold forming: technical delivery conditions.
Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip –
BS EN 10143 ............. Tolerances
and dimensions and shape
BS EN 12163 ............. Copper and copper alloys. Rod for general purposes
Copper and copper alloys. Rod for free machining
BS EN 12164 ............. purposes
BS EN 12167 ............ Copper and copper alloys. Profiles and bars for general purposes
Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on
BS EN 12878 ............ cement
BS EN 13139 .......... Aggregates for mortar
Design, preparation and application of external rendering and
BS EN 13914-2 .......... internal
plastering: Design considerations and essential principles for
internal
plastering
Design, preparation and application of external rendering and
BS EN 13914-1 ......... internal
plastering: External rendering
Metal beads and feature profiles for use with gypsum
BS EN 14353. ............... plasterboards.
Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics, evaluation
BS EN 14411 ............ of
conformity and marking

Gypsum based adhesives for thermal/acoustic insulation composite

BS EN 14496................. panels
and plasterboards. Definitions, requirements and test
methods
Mechanical fasteners for gypsum plasterboard systems.
BS EN 14566................. Definitions,
requirements and test methods
Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electroplated coatings of
BS EN ISO 2081 .......zinc
with supplementary treatments on iron or steel
BS EN ISO 2082 .......Metallic coatings. Electroplated coatings of cadmium with
supplementary treatments on iron or steel
Resilient floor coverings. Semi-flexible/vinylcomposition (VCT)
BS EN ISO 10595 ...... poly
(vinyl chloride) floor tiles. Specification
EN 197-1 .................... Portland cement

Specification for mortar for masonry. Rendering and plastering
EN 998-1:2010 .......... mortar
EN 1745:2002 ........... Methods for determining thermal properties
Masonry cement: Composition, specifications and conformity
GSO EN 413-1 ........... criteria
Specification for masonry units: Aggregate concrete masonry units
GSO EN 771-3 ............. (dense
and lightweight aggregates)
Gypsum plasterboard thermal/acoustic insulation composite panels
GSO EN 13950 ......... -
GSO EN 13963 ......... Jointing materials for gypsum plasterboards - Definitions,
requirements and test methods
GSO EN 14195 ......... Metal framing components for gypsum plasterboard systems -
GSO EN 13748-2:2008 Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for external use
GSO EN 13748-1:2008 Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for internal use
GSO ISO 105 ............ Textiles. Tests for colour fastness

GSOISO 6308 .......... Gypsum plaster board specification
GSO ISO 13006 ........ Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking
GSO ISO 10545-16 (BS EN ISO 10545-16) Ceramic tiles: Determination of small colour
differences
GSO ISO 10545-15 (BS EN ISO 10545-15). Ceramic tiles: Determination of lead and
cadmium given off by glazed tiles
GSO ISO 10545-14 (BS EN ISO 10545-14). Ceramic tiles: Determination of resistance to
stains
GSO ISO 10545-13 (BS EN ISO 10545-13). Ceramic tiles: Determination of chemical
resistance

GSO ISO 10545-12 (BS EN ISO 10545-12). Ceramic tiles: Determination of frost resistance
GSO ISO 10545-11 (BS EN ISO 10545-11). Ceramic tiles: Determination of crazing
resistance for glazed tiles
GSO ISO 10545-10 (BS EN ISO 10545- 10). Ceramic tiles: Determination of moisture
expansion
GSO ISO 10545-9 (BS EN ISO 10545-9) Ceramic tiles: Determination of resistance to
thermal shock
GSO ISO 10545-8 (BS EN ISO 10545-8). Ceramic tiles: Determination of linear thermal
expansion
surface abrasion for glazed tiles
GSO ISO 10545-6 (BS EN ISO 10545-6). Ceramic tiles: Determination of resistance to deep
abrasion for unglazed tiles
GSO ISO 10545-5 (BS EN ISO 10545-5). Ceramic tiles: Determination of impact resistance
by measurement of coefficient of restitution
GSO ISO 10545-4 (BS EN ISO 10545-4). Ceramic tiles: Determination of modulus of rupture
and breaking strength
GSO ISO 10545-3 (BS EN ISO 10545-3). Ceramic tiles: Determination of water absorption,
apparent porosity, apparent relative density and bulk density
GSO ISO 10545-2 (BS EN ISO 10545-2). Ceramic tiles: Determination of dimensions and
surface quality
GSO ISO 10545-1 (BS EN ISO 10545-1) Ceramic tiles: Sampling and basis for acceptance
GSO ISO 13007-4 (BS ISO 13007-4) Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives: Test methods for
grouts
GSO ISO 13007-3 (BS ISO 13007-3) Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives: Terms, definitions
and specifications for grouts
adhesives
GSO ISO 13007-1 (BS ISO 13007-1) Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives: Terms,
definitions and specifications for adhesives
ISO 14544 ................. Fine ceramics (advanced ceramics, advanced technical ceramics) --
Mechanical properties of ceramic composites at high temperature --
Determination of compression properties
ISO 14574 ................. Fine ceramics (advanced ceramics, advanced technical ceramics).
Mechanical properties
Classification system
PD CEN/TR 15123 .....Design, preparation and application of internal polymer plastering
systems
QS 12/2012 ................ Specifications of Recycled Aggregates of Construction Waste for
using in Construction Works
1.1.3 Workmanship

1 All work is to be performed by experienced and trained specialists or under supervision by

specialists or trained personnel.
1.1.4 Scaffolding
1 Scaffolding is to be erected to external facades and any other areas where it is required before
any work is commenced, so that good access is obtained to the whole of the working area
2 Scaffolding is to be supported independently of the working area and is to provide platforms

at about 2 metre intervals. A gap of at least 250mm should be left between the work face and
the scaffolding to allow sufficient clearance for working.
3 Scaffolding to be designed and erected in accordance with BS 5975.
1.2 SAMPLE PANELS AND CONTROL SAMPLES
1.2.1 Samples
1 Sample panels minimum size 600 x 600mm are to be prepared for all textured coatings to be
used in the Works.
2 If the Engineer so requires, a control samples of a finishing materials shall be prepared in an

agreed location within the Works (e.g. the floor tiling to a complete room). The area to be
used as a control is to be completed and approved to the standard of workmanship and
appearance obtained before the application of the material is proceeded with elsewhere in the
Works.
1.2.2 Samples of all finishing materials are to be provided for selection/approval by the Supervision
team/engineer, in such quantities or such size as is necessary to show natural variations of
color and texture. Sample panels, minimum size 1.0 m x 1.0 m, of all in-situ finishes are to
be provided for selection/approval by the Supervision team/engineer.
1.2.3 Once a control sample of any in-situ finish has been approved, do not change the constituents
or proportions without approval. Ensure that supplies are obtained from one source to give
uniform color and texture throughout the whole of the Works.
1.3 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
1.3.1 Cement shall be stored in dry conditions in unopened bags to avoid contamination or
deterioration.
1.3.2 All finishing materials that are liable to deteriorate or warp in adverse environmental
conditions are to be stored in suitable conditions, with original wrappings left in place for as
long as possible, except for materials which the manufacturer recommends to be conditioned.
1.4 PROTECTION OF FLOORS
1.4.1 Protect all completed work and approaches with boards or dust sheets. Remove any mortar
droppings etc. immediately.

1.5 SPARE MATERIALS
The spare materials shall be supplied as per percentages or quantities stipulated under the
contract or as per QCS 2014, or no more than recommended by the supplier.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.6.1 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: where fire-resistance-rating assemblies are indicated,

provide assemblies that are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to
ASTM E 84 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Supervision
team/engineer.
Flame Spread Index: 25 or less

Smoke Development:450 or less
2 LATH AND PLASTER
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements for lath and plaster finishes for buildings and related
structures.

This Section
Part 1 .......................... General
Part 3 .......................... Dry Lining (Wallboard)
Part 5 .......................... Tiles
Section 1 .................... General

Section 15 .................. Insulation of Buildings
Section 17 .................. Metalwork
Section 18 .................. Carpentry, Joinery and Ironmongery
2.1.2 References
1 The following standards are approved and/ or referred to in this Part:

ASTM
C150................ Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM
C472................ Test Methods for Physical testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and
Gypsum Concrete
ASTM C514 ...............Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board
ASTM
C842................ Standard Specification of Interior Gypsum Plaster Application
ASTM
C897................ Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-
Based Plasters

ASTM
C926................ Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based
Plaster
ASTM C1063 .............Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to
Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster
BS 405........................ Uncoated expanded metal carbon steel sheets for general purposes
BS 882........................ Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 1202 ..................... Nails
BS 1449 ..................... Steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 1494 ..................... Fixing accessories for building purposes
BS 4551 ..................... Mortar. Methods of test for mortar and screed. Chemical analysis and
physical testing
BS 5270-1 ................. Bonding agents for use with gypsum plasters and cement
Specification for polyvinyl acetate (PVAC) emulsion bonding agents
for indoor use with gypsum building plasters
BS 8000 ..................... Workmanship on building sites
BS 8481 .................... Design, preparation and application of internal gypsum, cement,
cement and lime plastering systems. Specification
BS EN 197-1 .............. Portland cement

BS EN 459-1 ............. Building lime: Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
BS EN 1008:2002. .... Mixing water for concrete. Specification for sampling, testing and
assessing the suitability of water, including water recovered from
processes in the concrete industry, as mixing water for concrete
BS EN 10142 ............. Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip for
BS EN 10143 ............. Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip – tolerances
BS EN 12878 ............ Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement
BS EN 13139 ............ Aggregates for mortar
BS EN 13279-2 ......... Gypsum binders and gypsum plasters Test methods
BS EN 13279-1 ......... Gypsum binders and gypsum plasters Definitions and requirements
BS EN 13658-2 ......... Metal lath and beads. Definitions, requirements and test methods:
External rendering
BS EN 13658-2 ......... Metal lath and beads. Definitions, requirements and test methods
External rendering
BS EN 13658-1 ......... Metal lath and beads. Definitions, requirements and test methods:
Internal plastering
BS EN 13658-1 ......... Metal lath and beads. Definitions, requirements and test methods
internal plastering
BS EN 13914-2 ......... Design, preparation and application of external rendering and internal
plastering: Design considerations and essential principles for internal

plastering
BS EN 13914-1 ......... Design, preparation and application of external rendering and internal
plastering External rendering
BS EN ISO 2081 .......Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electroplated coatings of zinc
with supplementary treatments on iron or steel
BS EN ISO 2082 .......Metallic coatings. Electroplated coatings of cadmium with
supplementary treatments on iron or steel
EN 998-1:2010 ..........Specification for mortar for masonry. Rendering and plastering mortar
PD CEN/TR 15123 .....Design, preparation and application of internal polymer plastering

systems
2.2 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS
1 Steel stud wall systems, shaft wall systems, ceiling or soffit suspended or furred framing, wall
furring, fasteners, and accessories for the screw attachment of gypsum board, plaster bases or
other building boards are to be as described herein.
2.2.2 Terminology
1 Underside of Structure Overhead: In spaces where steel trusses or bar joists are shown, the
underside of structure overhead is to be the underside of the floor or roof construction
supported by beams, trusses, or bar joists. In mezzanine spaces, the underside of the walk-on
floor is the underside of structure overhead.
2 Thickness of steel is specified in millimeters and is the minimum bare (uncoated) steel
thickness.
2.2.3 Submittals
1 In accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 1, General, the Contractor is to

provide the manufacturer's literature and data on the following:
(a) studs, runners and accessories
(b) hanger inserts
(c) channels (rolled steel)
(d) furring channels
(e) screws, clips and other fasteners.
2 In accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 1, General, the Contractor is to provide
the shop drawings showing the following:

(a) typical ceiling suspension system

(b) typical metal stud and furring construction system including details around openings
and corner details
(c) typical shaft wall assembly
(d) typical fire rated assembly and column fireproofing showing details of construction as
used in fire rating test.
3 In accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 1, General, the Contractor is to
provide the literature test results indicating the fire rating test designation, for each framing
system.
2.2.4 Protection
1 Steel studs, runners, rigid furring channels, “Z” shaped furring channels and resilient furring
channels shall be galvanized in accordance with the relevant provisions of BS 1369.
2.2.5 Steel Studs and Runners
1 Not less than two cutouts shall be provided in the web of each stud, approximately 300 mm
from each end, and intermediate cutouts on approximately 600 mm centres.
2 Doubled studs for openings and studs for supporting concrete backer-board shall be not less
than 850 mm thick.
3 Studs 3.5 m or less in length shall be in one piece.
4 Studs and Furrings: made from galvanized mild steel sheet to ASTM C645 or BS EN
10143, designation Z2 G275 N and passivated. Sheet thickness is not to be less than 0.56
mm for studs up to 3600 mm high, channels and furrings and not less than 0.71 mm for
studs up to 4200 mm high.
5 Jambs for gypsum partitions: galvanized steel hollow sections
2.2.6 Fasteners, Clips, and Other Metal Accessories
1 Fasteners, clips, and other metal accessories for fire rated construction shall be of the type
and size used in fire rating test.
2 Clips used in lieu of tie wire are to have a holding power equivalent to that provided by the
tie wire for the specific application.
3 Concrete ceiling hanger inserts (anchorage for hanger wire and hanger straps) shall be
galvanized steel, designed to support twice the hanger loads imposed.
4 Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/ 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.1 mm diameter.
5 Hanger Rods: mild steel hot-dip galvanized.
6 Flat Hangers: mild steel hot-dip galvanized paint.

2.2.7 Execution of Work
1 Where fire rated construction is required for walls, partitions, columns, beams and floor-
ceiling assemblies, the construction shall be the same as that used in any fire rating tests
undertaken. Construction requirements for fire rated assemblies and materials shall to
conform to BS 476.
2 Installing studs shall be carried out as follows:

(a) studs spaced at not more than 400 mm centers
(b) when studs are to extended to underside of structure overhead, they shall be cut 6 mm
to 9 mm less than floor to underside of structure overhead
(c) where studs are shown to terminate above suspended ceilings, bracing shall be provided
as indicated in the Project Documentation. Alternatively, the studs shall be extended to
the underside of the structure overhead.
(d) studs shall be extended to the underside of the structure overhead for fire partitions,
smoke partitions, shafts, and sound rated partitions or insulated exterior wall furring.
(e) at existing plaster ceilings, studs may terminate at the ceiling
(f) at openings:
(i) frame the jambs of openings in stud partitions with two steel studs placed back
to back.
(ii) fasten back to back studs together with 9 mm long “S” type panhead screws at
not less than 600 mm centers, staggered along webs
(iii) studs fastened flange to flange are to have splice plates on both sides. The splice
plates shall be approximately 600 mm x 75 mm in size. They shall be screwed
to each stud with two screws. The splice plates shall be located at 600 mm
centers, between the runner tracks.
3 Fastening studs shall be carried out as follows:

(a) studs located adjacent to partition intersections, corners and studs at jambs of openings
to shall be fastened to the flange of runner tracks with either two screws through each
end of each stud and the flange of runner; alternatively, by use of a metal lock fastener
tool
(b) studs shall not be fastened to the top runner track when studs extend to underside of
structure overhead
(c) at chase wall partitions, locate cross braces for the chase wall partitions to permit the
installation of pipes, conduits, carriers and similar items; studs or runners used as cross
bracing are to be not less than 60 mm wide.
(d) building seismic or expansion joints shall be formed with double studs, back to back,
spaced 75 mm apart plus the width of the joint
(e) control joint shall be formed with double studs spaced 12.5 mm apart.

2.2.8 Installing Supports Required by Other Trades
1 Provide for the attachment and support of electrical outlets, plumbing, laboratory or heating
fixtures, recessed type plumbing fixture accessories, access panel frames, wall bumpers,
wood seats, toilet stall partitions, dressing booth partitions, urinal screens, chalkboards,
tackboards, wall-hung casework, handrail brackets, recessed fire extinguisher cabinets and
other items supported by stud construction.
2.3 NAILS, SCREWS AND WASHERS
1 Nails, screws and washers are to be galvanized or of stainless steel as indicated in the Project
Documentation or directed by the Engineer. Pins for shot-firing to be of steel with a tight
coating of cadmium or zinc complying with ISO 2081 or ISO 2082 or equivalent.
2 Clout nails shall be galvanized steel and shall comply with BS 1202, Part 1 or equivalent.
3 Staples shall be galvanized steel and shall comply with BS 1494, Part 1 or equivalent.
2.4 METAL LATH
2.4.1 General
1 Expanded mesh lath is to be manufactured from galvanized steel as per BS EN 10346:2009,

minimum zinc coating of 225 g/m². It shall have a minimum aperture of 5 mm measured the
short way of the mesh, minimum thickness of base metal is to be 0.3 mm as per BS EN 13658-
1 for internal plastering.
2 Welded wire lath or mesh can be used with a minimum weight of 1.22 kg/m² where used as
reinforcement over different backgrounds, and with a minimum weight of 1.90 kg/m² where
used as a background for plastering or rendering as per BS EN 13658-2:2005
3 Where shown on the drawings for external rendering or as directed by Engineer, stainless
steel expanded metal lath can be used in the works. Minimum thickness shall be 0.3 mm as
per BS EN 13658-2 for external rendering.
4 Wire ties are to be galvanized with a minimum diameter of 1.20 mm.
5 Expanded Metal lathing: to BS EN ISO 3506-1:2009, plain expanded stainless steel 304,
weighing not less than 1.6 kg/m2.
2.4.2 Fixing Plain Expanded Metal Lath Backgrounds
1 Hangers, runners and bearers are to be spaced at intervals recommended by the manufacturer
of the lath.
2 The lath is to be fixed with the long way of the mesh at right angles to the supports and with
all strands sloping in the same direction. In vertical work the strands are to slope inwards and
downwards from the face of the coating.

3 The side edges of the lath are to be lapped not less than 25 mm and secured with wire ties at
not more than 150 mm centers.
4 The ends of the lath are to be lapped not less than 50 mm at supports and 75 mm between
supports and secured with wire ties at not less than 150 mm centers.
5 The lath is to be fixed with 40 mm nails or staples, driven at an angle to tighten the mesh.
Galvanized metal distance pieces are to be placed between the timber supports and the lath to
permit the render to be forced through the openings completely encasing the lath.
6 The lath is to be fixed to metal supports with wire ties at not more than 100 mm centers along
each support.
7 The ends of wire ties are to be twisted tightly together, the surplus cut off and bent away from
the face of the coating.
8 The lath is to be fixed tightly from the center outwards in such a manner that the lath and
support system create a rigid background to receive the render or other coating.
9 After fixing, staples, nail heads, all cut edges and breaks in the coating to the lathing is to be
treated with one coat of black bitumen.
2.4.3 Fixing Ribbed Lathing Backgrounds
1 Hangers, runners and bearers are to be spaced at intervals recommended by the manufacturer
of the lath.
2 The lath is to be fixed with all strands sloping in the same direction and with the ribs towards
and at right angles to the supports. In vertical work the strands should slope inwards and
downwards from the face of the coating.
3 The side ribs of adjacent sheets are to be lapped, pressed well together and secured with wire
ties at not more than 150 mm centers.
4 The ends of the lath are to be lapped at supports wherever possible. The lap should not be less
than 50 mm and are to be secured with a wire tie at each rib. Between supports the lap must
not be less than 100mm and are to be secured with two wire ties at each rib.
5 The lath is to be fixed to metal supports with two wire ties at each intersection of rib and
support.
6 The ends of wire ties are to be twisted tightly together, the surplus cut off and bent away from
the face of the coating.
7 The lath is to be fixed tightly from the center outwards in such a manner that the lath and
support system create a rigid background to receive the render or other coating.
8 After fixing, staples, nail heads, all cut edges and breaks in the coating to the lathing are to
be treated with one coat of black bitumen solution.

2.4.4 Expanded Metal Lath at Junctions of Differing Backgrounds
1 Where a rendering or plaster is to be continuous across backgrounds of different types, a strip

of metal lath with a minimum width of 300 mm and an isolating membrane of polythene sheet
or building paper behind, is to be fixed across the junction. Where small widths of one
material less than 300 mm wide are, the width is to be bridged completely and for a distance
of 150 mm on both sides.
2 The metal lath should be stretched taut and fixed along each edge at 100 mm centres using
washers and shot fired pins, nails or screws. The screws shall be fixed into plugs in pre-drilled
holes.
3 All cut edges of the metal lath and the fastenings are to receive a coating of bitumen solution.
4 Zinc coatings only partially surrounded by cement plaster or rendering are particularly liable
to corrosion and care should be taken to ensure that the metal lath is completely embedded.
5 Metal lath should not be provided where the drawings show a groove in the rendering or
plaster.
6 Dissimilar Backgrounds for Plastering: where plastering is to be continued without break

across joints between dissimilar solid backgrounds which are in the same plane and rigidly
bonded or tied together, cover joints with 150 mm wide strip of building paper to BS 1521
overlaid with 300 mm wide stainless steel lathing fixed at not more than 600 mm centers
along both edges.
2.5 BEADS AND STOPS
2.5.1 Materials
1 Beads and stops for internal plastering are to be manufactured from galvanized steel with
minimum zinc coating of 225 g/m² and 0.40 mm minimum thickness in accordance with BS
EN 13658-1, or from stainless steel with 0.30 mm minimum thickness in accordance with BS
EN 13658-1, beads and stops to be profiled to suit the depth of plaster to be applied.
2 Stainless steel beads and stops shall be used for external rendering, minimum thickness is to
be 0.30mm in accordance with BS EN 13658-2, beads and stops to be profiled to suit the
depth of plaster or render to be applied.
2.5.2 Fixing Beads and Stops
1 Beads, stops and the like are to be fixed plumb, square and true-to-line with 40 mm galvanized
clout nails or plaster dabs at not more than 600 mm centers to each mesh wing.
2 Cut edges are to be treated with one coat bituminous solution.
3 Beads and Stops in general:

provide angle beads at all external angles except where otherwise shown
provide stop beads at all stop ends except where otherwise shown
cut neatly, form mitres at return angles and remove sharp edges, swarf and other potentially
dangerous projections
fix securely, plumb, square and true to line and level; fix at not more than 600 mm centers
ensuring that wings are in full contact with background; dabs if used are to be of cement and
sand; fastenings are to be galvanized or stainless steel
after coatings have been applied, remove coating material while still wet from surfaces of
beads and stops that are to be exposed to view.
2.6 WELDED-FABRIC MESH FOR REINFORCED RENDERING
2.6.1 Materials
1 Reinforcement for rendering is to consist of fiberglass mesh or galvanized welded-fabric mesh

in accordance with BS EN 13658-2 having wires not less than 3.0 mm diameter spaced at
distances 50 mm. Wires spacing can be greater than 50 mm but shall not be greater than 150
mm if approved by the Engineer or project drawings and in accordance with BS EN 13658-
2.
2 Reinforcement to Service chases: where plastering crosses service chases and the like, cover
chases with expanded metal strip fixed at not more than 600 mm centers along both edges.
3 Protect after fixing, paint staples, nail heads, cut edges and breaks in coating to steel.
2.7 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
2.7.1 Preparation of Background to be Rendered
1 Surfaces to be rendered are to be thoroughly cleaned of all mould oil, dust and loose particles.
2 If dubbing out is required it should be done well in advance of the undercoat, using a mix at
least as strong as the undercoat but not stronger than the background. If the thickness needed
is greater than 16 mm, it is be built-up in two coats; no coat is to exceed 13 mm thick.
Concrete surfaces are to receive one of the following treatments before the application of the
undercoat:
(a) hacking by hand or mechanical means to remove all laitence and to roughen the whole
of the surface to a depth of at least 3 mm to expose the aggregate.
(b) a spatterdash treatment of one part of cement and two parts of coarse sand, mixed with
sufficient water to give a consistency of a thick slurry is to be dashed on to the
dampened background with either a trowel or a scoop to give a thin coating with a
roughcast uneven appearance. To prevent rapid loss of moisture the spatterdash is to
be dampened periodically and then be permitted to dry out slowly and harden before
the application of the rendering.

3 Blockwork surfaces are to have the joints raked out during construction. Where the joints
have not been raked out or where in the opinion of the Engineer high strength concrete blocks
with smooth surfaces will provide insufficient key, a spatterdash treatment is to be applied in
accordance with Clause 2.9.1-3.
4 Junctions of differing backgrounds are to be treated in accordance with Clause 2.5.4. A strip
of metal lath minimum 200 mm wide should also be provided over all electrical conduits and
service pipework running within chases, fixed in accordance with Clause 2.5.4.
5 Acceptance of Backgrounds: before starting preparation and applying coatings ensure that:
Backgrounds are secure, adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerances, free from
contamination and loose areas, reasonably dry and in a suitable condition to receive specified
coatings
all cutting, chasing, fixing of concealed conduits, service outlets, fixing pads and the like
and making good of the background are completed.
7 General Preparation: remove efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material by
thoroughly dry brushing. Remove all traces of paint, grease, dirt and other materials
incompatible with coating by high pressure water jet. Repeat application, if necessary, to
obtain adequate suction and mechanical bond of plaster
8 Smooth or dense concrete surfaces to receive plaster shall be mechanically hacked or

sandblasted to the satisfaction of the Supervision team/engineer.
9 In situ Concrete Surfaces: scrub with water containing detergent to ensure complete
removal of mould oil, surface retarders and other materials incompatible with coating.
Rinse with clean water and allow to dry unless otherwise specified.
10 Keying/Bonding Treatments: methods other than those specified may be submitted for
approval.
11 Bonding Agent: follow the recommendations of the manufacturer.
12 Hacking for Key: roughen surfaces thoroughly and evenly by removing entire surface to a
depth of 3 mm by hacking, bush hammering or abrasive blasting. Clean surfaces by washing
and brushing.
13 Spatter dash Keying Mix: throw onto previously dampened surfaces to a thickness of 3 - 5
mm and leave rough. Keep damp with fine water spray or by covering with polythene until
set and allow to dry out slowly and harden before applying undercoat.
14 Adjust Suction of porous or very dry masonry back-grounds by wetting immediately before
applying coatings.
2.8 PREPARATION OF MIXES FOR RENDERING
2.8.1 Preparation Procedures and Selection of Materials

1 Unless specified elsewhere in the Project Documentation the mixes for rendering are to be
selected from Table 2.1 and will vary in accordance with the types of background to which
the render is to be applied. Backgrounds are subdivided as follows:
(a) dense, strong and smooth materials - which include high density concrete and concrete
blocks providing low porosity, little suction and having smooth surfaces
(b) moderately strong and porous materials - which include medium density concrete and
concrete blocks providing some suction and mechanical key
(c) moderately weak and porous materials - which include medium density concrete and
concrete blocks providing some suction and mechanical key
(d) metal lathing
Table 2.1
Rendering Mixes
Undercoats Final Coat
Background Material
Cement : Lime : Sand Cement : Lime : Sand
Dense, strong, smooth 1:½:4½ 1 :1 : 6

Moderately strong, porous 1 :1 : 6 1 :2 : 9
Moderately weak, porous 1 :2 : 9 1 :2 : 9
Metal lathing (first coat) 1:¼:3 1 :1 : 6
Metal lathing 1:½:4½ 1 :1 : 6
2 The selection of the mixes is to take account of the following:

(a) strong mixes rich in cement have a relatively high drying shrinkage and are liable to
cracking and crazing the high drying shrinkage of strong mixes applied to weak
backgrounds may cause shearing at the surface of the background
(b) the mix for each successive coat must never be richer in cement than the mix used for
the coat to which it is applied
(c) two coats having the same mix proportions can only be applied successively if the
second coat is appreciated thinner than the first. A 10 to 12 mm first coat should only
receive a 5 to 6 mm final coat of the same mix.
3 The mixes for rendering below ground level are to be made with sulphate resisting cement.
4 Cement, lime and sand for each batch are to be accurately measured by volume using properly
constructed gauge boxes or, wherever possible, whole bags of cement or hydrated lime. Lime
shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 890.
5 Mixing should preferably be by machine. Where, however, small quantities are required,
mixing may be carried out on a board or platform which should be cleaned after each batch
has been removed.
6 The hydrated lime is first to be thoroughly mixed with the sand. Cement shall then have added
and mixing continued until the material is uniform in appearance. Water should then be added

while continuing mixing until the materials are workable and of a uniform colour and
consistency.
7 To improve workability of the mix, the hydrated lime, sand and water may first be mixed in
the required proportions and then allowed to stand undisturbed for at least 16 hours before
mixing with the cement. If allowed to stand for a longer period, it must be protected from
drying out.
8 Propriety plasticisers may not be used as a substitute for lime without the approval of the
Engineer. Amongst other considerations, the Engineer will not give approval unless:
(a) the manufacturer, brand and chemical composition of the admixture is disclosed
(b) the Engineer is satisfied that correctly calibrated equipment is available to control the
amounts used.
9 The whole of each batch is to be used within an hour of being mixed.
2.8.2 Application of the Various Render Coats
1 The work is not to be started until the background has been properly prepared in accordance
with Clause 2.9 of this Part.
2 The render shall generally be applied in two coats except where the background is metal
lathing where three coats shall be applied.
3 Before applying any coat, the background or preceding coat is to be brushed down to remove
any loose particles and is to be dampened sufficiently to ensure uniform absorption.
4 The undercoat is to be applied either by laying on with, or throwing from, a trowel or float.
It should be as uniformly thick as possible, and not less than 8 mm or more than 13 mm thick
in any part.
5 The undercoat is to be left rough and open from the edge of the trowel, and after it has been
left long enough to set firm, it should be combed with evenly spaced wavy horizontally lines.
the lines are to be approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep (less in the case of a first coat
on metal lathing). The surface should not be scratched, however, when it is to receive a
Tyrolean finish.
6 The first undercoat applied to metal lathing is to be well worked into the lath to ensure that
the material is completely embedded.
7 The finishing coat should not to be less than 5 mm or more than 10 mm thick and is to be laid
on with a trowel and finished , care being taken not to over-work the surface.
8 All coats are to be applied with firm pressure to exclude air and to ensure a good bond.
9 All coats are to be prevented from drying out too quickly. Between the hot months of April
and November the work should only be carried out in the shade. All external rendering is to
be protected by properly constructed hessian or similar screens during this period.

10 Each coat is to be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water for a minimum of three days
to allow the render to cure and then be allowed to dry out for at least a further three days
before a subsequent coat is applied or, in the case of the finish coat, before the protective
screens are removed.
11 The surface of the finish coat is to be smooth, true and free from waviness, irregularities or
blemishes with straight, level or plumb angles. External angles are to be pencil rounded.
12 Care is to be taken when rendering up to plaster beads or stops to avoid excessive polishing
at the arris and damage to the galvanizing, or stainless steel.
2.8.3 APPLYING CEMENT-SAND PLASTERING
1 Manufacturers' recommendations are to be strictly followed for all materials and products.
2 Internal plastering is to be executed in accordance with BS EN 13914-2 , as applicable.
3 External plastering is to be executed in accordance with BS EN 13914-1 , as applicable.
4 Control samples: for each type of coating work, complete sample areas, being part of the
finished work, in approved locations, size not less than 5 m2 and obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding.
5 Store cement, and plaster separately by different types, off the ground, in dry, well ventilated
areas. Use in order of delivery and within manufacturer's recommended time limit. Reject
any bag which contains caked or partially set material.
6 Mixing: measure materials by volume using clean gauge boxes. Proportions of specified
mixes are for damp sand, adjust proportions if dry sand is used. Thoroughly mix materials
dry until uniform in appearance. Add water and mix to a consistency suitable for the work.
7 Mechanical mixers: do not mix materials for longer than 5 minutes. Wash out mixer four
times daily if in continuous use, and after each batch if mixer is used intermittently or if a
different constituent is used.
8 Avoid contamination of one type of material by another and by any set material.
9 Retempering: do not use mixes after initial set has taken place and do not retemper or
reconstitute mixes unless permitted by the manufacturer.
10 Scaffolding: use independent scaffolding to avoid put-log holes and other breaks in coatings.
11 Cleanliness: protect existing work and approaches with boards, dust sheets, etc. Droppings
on finished work are to be cleaned off immediately.
12 Apply coatings firmly to achieve good adhesion and in one continuous operation between
angles and joints. Coatings are not to be less than thicknesses specified, firmly bonded, of
even and consistent appearance, free from rippling, hollows and ridges.
13 Finish surfaces to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to a right-
angle unless otherwise specified, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.

14 Drying out: prevent rapid or localised drying out.
15 Protection: adequately protect newly applied external coatings against sun, rain and inclement
weather for the first 48 hours using polythene sheet, hung clear of the face, or other approved
method.
16 Movement joints: form joints in coatings to coincide with movement joints in background.
using two stop beads with sealant infill.
17 Make good defective or damaged coatings before starting decoration. Cut out and neatly
make good any cracks as instructed.
18 Number of Coats: apply plastering in two coats, excluding keying mix coats and dubbing out
coats, finished to a thickness of 15 mm internally and 20 mm externally unless otherwise
specified.
19 Accuracy: maximum permissible gap under a 2 m straight edge and any point on surface is to
be 3 mm.
20 Dubbing Out:
if necessary to correct inaccuracies, dub out in thicknesses of not more than 10 mm

in same mix as undercoat; total thickness of dubbing must not exceed 25 mm unless
otherwise approved
in areas where thickness of dubbing will exceed 20 mm, first apply a spatter dash
keying mix
comb surface of each dubbing out coat as specified, allow each coat to dry before
the next is applied.
21 Undercoat:
coat is to be not less than 8 mm thick; on weak backgrounds coat is to be not less
than 10 mm thick
comb surface as specified
brush down each undercoat to remove dust and loose particles and wet thoroughly
before application of final coat.
22 Metal Lathing: apply spatter dash keying mix to sufficiently coat lath and reduce interstices
to the extent necessary to provide an effective key for undercoat, allow to dry out and harden
for at least 24 hours before applying undercoat. Work undercoat well into interstices to obtain
maximum key. Where access is possible apply undercoat to back of lath after first front
undercoat has set thoroughly.
23 Plain Finish Final Coat: apply to uniform thickness of 6 - 10 mm and finish with a trowel or
suitably faced float to give a tight, matt smooth surface. Do not apply water while working
up. Do not draw excessive laitance to surface by overworking.
24 Sprayed Plaster: apply by spraying machine to uniform thickness of 15 mm internally and 20

mm externally or as recommended by manufacturer and finish with a trowel or suitably faced

float to give a tight, matt smooth surface. Do not apply water while working up. Do not draw
excessive laitance to surface by overworking.
25 Plaster Backing to receive Rigid Tiles bedded in cement and sand is to be applied in one coat
of thickness not less than 15 mm and have combed surface as specified.
26 Combed surface, where specified, is to be carried out as the coating stiffens using a suitable
comb to produce evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines, approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm
deep to provide key.
27 Rough cast: throw on a plastic mix with a scoop or trowel to achieve an approved finish.
28 Drying: keep undercoat and final coat damp for first 3 days by covering with polythene sheet
and/or spraying with water. Thereafter prevent from drying out too rapidly. Work in shade
whenever possible. Allow each coat to dry out thoroughly to ensure that drying shrinkage is
substantially complete before applying next coat.
2.9 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
2.9.1 Materials
1 Cement shall comply with the requirements of EN 197-1.
2 Factory-Premixed Mix: manufacturer's standard factory-packaged blend of Portland cement,

aggregate, water retaining and other suitable admixtures and workability aids conforming to
BS EN 998-1-2 and as follows:
sand : to BS EN 13139, Table 1 or ASTM C 897
Compressive strength : not less than 4 N/ mm2
Plasticiser : to BS EN 934-3 and to approval.
Wet mix life : as recommended by manufacturer
Initial adhesion at 28 days : > 0.3 N/mm2
Bending (flexural) strength : not less than 1 N/mm2
Test : BS EN 4551-1-2 BS EN 1015-1> 4, 6, 7, 19

[ASTM C780]
3 Aggregate shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 13139 and the relevant provisions
of section 5, concrete,
4 Mixing ratio: 50 kg bag with 10 to 12 liters of clean cool water (water part 4 sec. 5).
5 VOC and formaldehyde: None (<10μg/l) when tested according to ISO/FDIS 11890-
2/GCMS
6 Thermal conductivity according to EN 1745 or as required by the engineer.

7 Plastering Mix: aerated plaster for general use comprising:

ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1
sand to BS EN 13139, Table 1 or ASTM C 897
cement-sand proportions shall be adjusted to give compressive strength not less than 5 ±1 N/
mm2
plasticiser to BS EN 934-3 and to approval, to be used with cement-sand mix in proportions
recommended by manufacturer.
8 Course Aggregate for Rough Cast: crushed stone or fine gravel to BS EN 12620, graded from
5 to 13 mm.
9 Spatter dash Keying Mix: one part ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 and two parts
clean fairly coarse sand mixed to a thick slurry and kept well stirred.
For smooth concrete surfaces, add SBR or Acrylic bonding agent per manufacturers’
recommendations.
10 Admixtures: do not use admixtures other than plasticisers and water-retaining agents without
prior approval. Do not use admixtures of any type with proprietary mixes. Do not use calcium
chloride or any admixtures containing calcium chloride.
2.9.2 Application of Portland Cement Plaster.
1 Application shall comply with ASTM C926 or BS EN 13914
2 Do not deviate more than plus or minus (3.1 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster
surfaces, as measured by a (3-m) straight edge placed on surface.
3 Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-
coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated
or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least (152 mm) at each jamb anchor.
4 Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as
a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at
metal frame cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at
junctures with metal.
5 Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
6 Concealed plaster application behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and equipment,
apply finish coat, where concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations, finish
coat may be omitted. Plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile
and similar finishes, finish coat may be omitted.
7 Water shall comply with the requirements of part 4 of section 5.
2.10 TABLE PIGMENTS FOR CEMENT
2.10.1 Materials
1 Any pigments used to color cement or cement products shall meet the requirements of BS EN
12878 or relevant ASTM standards.

2.11 TEST FOR DRYNESS
2.11.1 Procedures
1 In accordance with QCS, moisture content is to be ascertained by use of a hygrometer or

similar approved instrument.
A substrate will be considered “dry” when all readings taken in the corners, along edges and
at various points over the area being visually tested show 75 % relative humidity or less.
3 DRY LINING (WALLBOARD)
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for use of dry wallboard or plaster board.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Lath and Plaster
Section 1 General
3.1.2 References

BS 1230 ......................Gypsum Plasterboard
BS 8000 ......................Workmanship on building sites
3.1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 Drawings: provide co-ordination, fabrication and installation drawings and other information
showing such details of the work as the Supervision team/engineer may reasonably require.
2 Samples: before placing orders submit representative samples of all types of framing and
furring members and gypsum plasterboard materials. Ensure that delivered materials match
samples.
3 Control Samples: for each type of plasterboard assembly: lining, partition and ceiling, erect
and complete an area of finished work not less than 10 m2 in an approved location and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding.
3.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 Installer Qualifications: a qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Supervision team/engineers and Owners, and other information specified.

2 Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: obtain steel framing members for gypsum
board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
3 Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: obtain each type of gypsum board and other
panel products from a single manufacturer.
4 Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: obtain finishing materials from either
the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a
manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
5 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are

indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that are identical to assemblies tested for fire
resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to Supervision team/engineer.
6 Sound Transmission Characteristics: for gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing
agency acceptable to Supervision team/engineer.
STC-Rated Assemblies: indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance

Design Manual." Ratings shall be as indicated on drawings:
7 Mock-ups: Prior to finishing gypsum board assemblies, construct mock-ups of at least 10 m2

in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes as well as qualities of materials and
execution. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place unit of Work.
construct mock-ups for each type of surfaces and finishes
build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final
unit of Work:
locate mock-ups on-site in the location and of the size as directed by Supervision
team/engineer.
notify Supervision team/engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups
will be constructed.
Mock size as agreed with Supervision team/engineer.
demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
obtain Supervision team/engineer's approval of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work.
retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard

for judging the completed Work.
approved mock-ups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may

become part of the completed Work.
3.1.5 GUARANTEE

1 Guarantee: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer and Contractor
are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations, all or
any part of the plasterboard linings, partitions and ceilings which fails or becomes defective in
materials or workmanship within specified guarantee period. Defects not limited to:
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Failure in fixings.
Failure of system to meet performance requirements.

Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of
defective liability period or as mentioned in the
contract (IF ANY)
3.2 DRY LININGS
3.2.1 Materials
1 Gypsum Plasterboard Generally: wallboards and baseboards to BS EN 520,

ASTM C 1396/1396 M. Select type recommended and suitable for particular use, purpose,
exposure and finish; 12.5 mm thick with tapered edges unless otherwise indicated.
Gypsum wallboards shall be as follows:
Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
Type: Type X with water-resistant properties, where required for fire-resistance-rated

assemblies in toilet areas
Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or bevelled) for prefilling.
Thickness: As indicated in the drawings and acoustical report. For fire rated boards,
select thickness necessary to achieve specified fire resistance.
2 Thermal wallboard is to comply with Table 3.1 and consist of an insulation core having a
thermal conductivity of not less than 0.037 W/mºC bonded on one side to the gypsum
wallboard and on the reverse side with a water-vapor resistant membrane.
Table 3.1
Thermal Wallboard
Nominal Overall Wallboard Minimum Thermal
Insulation Thickness
Thickness Thickness Resistance
(mm) (mm) (mm) (W/m ºC)
22 9.5 12.7 0.40
25 12.7 12.7 0.42

28 9.5 19.0 0.57
32 12.7 19.0 0.59
3 The edge profiles of wallboard to be:
(a) tapered - for smooth seamless jointing

(b) bevelled - for V-jointing
(c) square - for stippled textured coatings, corner strip jointing or plaster.
4 Accessories for installing wallboard are to be approved proprietary materials recommended

by the manufacturer of the board and are to comply with the requirements of BS 8000, Part 8.
5 Screws: zinc or cadmium plated self-drilling and tapping screws with countersunk heads, size
22 mm x 6 gauge.
6 Jointing Compounds for plasterboard are to be proprietary drying-type factory-packaged

vinyl-based factory-mixed products complying with ASTM C474/C474M and specified
requirements for formulation and intended use.
7 Joint Tapes: should of paper for interior application are to be pressure sensitive or staple
attached proprietary reinforcing tapes, complying with ASTM C475/475M and compatible
with and as recommended for particular purpose and application by jointing compound
manufacturer.
8 Acoustical Sealant: acoustical sealant for exposed and concealed joints shall be
manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with
ASTM C 834. It shall be effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
9 Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Un-faced semi-rigid mineral-fibre blanket insulation produced

by combining mineral fibres of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with
ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). Density shall be 64 kg /m3.
3.2.2 Storage of Materials
1 Wallboards are to be stored flat in dry conditions and should always be carried on edge.
2 Rolls of sheet materials are to be stored standing on end.
3.3 FIXING OF WALLBOARD
3.3.1 Fixing Wallboard to Framed Backgrounds
1 The background is to provide supports at the maximum centers shown in Table 3.2. Additional
framing members are to be provided as necessary to ensure that all board edges are supported.
Table 3.2
Maximum Support Centers for Gypsum Wallboard
and Thermal Wallboard on Framed Background

Type Of Board Thickness Width Maximum Centres
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Wallboard 9.5 900 450 450

9.5 1200 400 400
12.7 600 600 450
12.7 900 450 450
12.7 1200 600 600
Thermal 22 1200 400 400

Wallboard 25 1200 600 600
28 1200 400 400
32 1200 600 600
2 The boards are to be fixed to backgrounds with the paper covered edges vertical and to
ceilings with the paper covered edges at right angles to the main supporting members/joists.
3 The boards are to be fixed to the backgrounds not nearer than 15 mm from the edges using 40
x 2 mm galvanized clout nails for wallboard and 60 x 2.5 mm galvanized clout nails for
thermal wallboard.
4 The nails should be driven home straight and firmly so that the heads are slightly below the
surface of the board. Care shall take not to fracture the board. Care shall also be taken to
ensure that the insulation is not compressed unduly.
5 Boards to receive direct decoration are to be fixed so that:
(d) Paper covered edges are lightly butted together

(e) Cut edges occur at internal angles
(f) Cut edges occurring at external angles are masked by paper covered edges
(g) Cut edges meeting in the same plane have a 3 mm gap between them.
6 The insulation to thermal wallboard is to be rebated at external angles to give a continuous

plasterboard face.
7 Partitioning:
studs at wall junctions and floor/soffit channels are to be fixed securely at 600 mm centres
position studs at equal centres, maintaining sequence across openings; provide additional
studs as necessary to ensure support to all vertical edges of boards

vertical joints between boards on opposite sides of partitions are to be staggered
fix boards to each stud and along all edges with drywall screws at not more than 300 mm
centres and not less than 10 mm from edge of board; set screw heads in a depression; do not
break paper or gypsum core.
8 Sound/Fire Rated Partitions:
Provide 15.9 mm plasterboard, applied at right angles to resilient channels with self-tapping
steel screws spaced 200 mm centres. along edges of board and 300 mm centres in the field of
the board. Plasterboard joints are to be oriented vertically and staggered on opposite sides of
the assembly. Resilient channels are to be spaced at 600 mm centres and fixed to 89 mm 1.0
mm thick metal studs spaced 600 centres
opposite side, provide 13 mm base layer applied to studs with self-tapping steel screws spaced
300 mm centres and apply 13 mm face sheet with self-tapping steel screws spaced 300 mm
centres Provide 50 mm thick mineral or glass fibre insulation within the stud cavity and
maintain air gap
provide gypsum board assemblies and materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. STC Rating shall as
have indicated.
provide gypsum board assemblies with a fire-resistance rating as indicated.
3.3.2 Fixing Wallboard to Solid Background
1 The walls are to be thoroughly brushed down with a hard broom to remove dust, crystallized
efflorescent salts and loose mortar.
2 Bitumen impregnated fiberboard levelling pads size approximately 75 x 50 mm are to be

bedded into minimum 3 mm thick plaster dabs set plumb by use of a straightedge and builder’s
level at not more than 1 meter centers vertically and to bridge each board joint plus one
intermediate row horizontally.
3 When the pads have set an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the boards should
be applied to the wall in dabs to stand proud of the pads. Unless recommended otherwise the
dabs shall be 50 to 75 mm wide by the length of the trowel with 50 to 75 mm gaps, in lines:
(a) Set in 25 mm around the perimeter of each board.
(b) On the line of the intermediate fixing pads.
4 The boards shall then to be pressed back firmly to the line of the pads and temporarily fixed
with double headed nails until the adhesive has set. A true and flat surface should be achieved.
5 Boards to receive direct decoration are to be fixed so that:
(a) paper covered edges are lightly butted together.

(b) Cut edges occur at internal angles.
(c) Cut edges occurring at external angles are masked by paper covered edges.

(d) Cut edges meeting in the same plane have a 3 mm gap between.
6 The insulation to thermal wallboard is to be rebated at external angles to give a continuous

plasterboard face.
7 Linings to solid backgrounds:
set out furrings vertically, at 600 mm centers and adjacent to angles and openings; bed in 200
mm long dabs of adhesive at 450 mm centers; bed short lengths of furring horizontally to
provide continuous support to top and bottom edges of boards; accurately align all furrings
to a true, vertical plane, ensuring that cavity width is maintained
working from centre of each board, screw to all furrings at not more than 300 mm centres and
not less than 10 mm from edge of board; set screw heads in a depression; do not break paper
or gypsum core.
3.3.3 Jointing of Dry Lining for Direct Decoration
1 The joints of square edge boards which are to receive a stippled textured coating are to be
finished with a paper faced cotton joint tape fixed with a suitable adhesive.
2 The joints of beveled edge boards are to have the “V” joint completely filled with joint filler
and the surplus removed.
3 The joints of tapered edge boards should either be finished by the manual methods described
in the following paragraphs, or except for joints at external angles, by approved mechanical
methods recommended by the manufacturer of the board.
4 Before joining commences the boards are to be checked to ensure that all are securely fixed
and protruding screws or nails are driven home. Cut edges are to be lightly sanded to remove
burrs and treated with a brush coat of PVC sealer.
5 Joints in straight runs of tapered edge boards are to be finished as follows:
(a) A continuous, thin band of joint filler is to be applied to the trough of the tapered edge
joints using an applicator and making sure areas are not left uncovered. A 45 mm wide
joint tape is to then be pressed into the band of filler using a taping knife. The tape is
to be firmly bedded and free from air bubbles, with sufficient filler under the tape to
ensure good adhesion
(b) Immediately after the tape has been fixed a new layer of filler is to be applied over it.
This should be brought flush with the surface of the board. Before the filler begins to
stiffen, a jointing sponge should be moistened and surplus material wiped from the
edges of the joint, taking care not to disturb the main joint filling
(c) Once the filler has set, any slight depressions in the surface are to be filled with another
coat of the filler an any projections cut back with the taping knife.
(d) When the filler has set a thick layer of joint finish is to be applied to a broad band 200
to 250 mm wide over the joint using the applicator. The edges of this band shall be
immediately feathered out with a slightly damp jointing sponge. When this band of

jointing finish has dried, another application is to be made and feathered out as before.
The first coat of finish must dry before the final finish coat is applied.
6 Joints at internal angles of tapered edge boards are to be finished as follows:
(a) The jointing tape is to be folded and pressed firmly into the angle using a brush or
applicator to make sure any air bubbles are removed and the tape is firmly bedded. A
thin layer of joint finish 150 mm wide centred on the joint is to be applied immediately
and the edges feathered out with the jointing sponge.
(b) surplus material is to be removed from the extreme edges as described in sub-
paragraph 5(b) above.
(c) when this coat has dried, another coat of joint finish 200-250 mm wide is to be applied
and the edges feathered out with the jointing sponge.
7 Joints at external angles of tapered edge boards are to be finished as follows:
(a) the edges of the board to be treated as recommended by the dry lining manufacturer
with the insulation cut back and using a bound and tapered edge so as to mask the cut
edge of the dry lining.
(b) the angles should be reinforced with a 54 mm wide corner tape consisting of strong
paper tape with bonded parallel steel reinforcement strips. The tape is to be cut to the
required length and creased firmly at the angles to allow the steel strips to lie close to
the board surfaces. A 50 mm wide band of joint filler is to be applied to each side of
the angle and the tape be pressed firmly into the corner with a taping knife, making
sure that the arris of the folded tape is straight.
(c) immediately after bedding the tape, a 125 mm band of joint filler shall be applied to
both sides of the angle with an applicator and the edges feathered out with the jointing
sponge.
(d) after the filler coat has set, a thin layer of joint finish is to be applied and the edges
again feathered out with the jointing sponge.
(e) when the first filler coat is dry, the process is to be repeated with a further application
of joint finish.
(f) Nail and screw indentations are to be filled with joint filler and finished flush. When
the filler has set a thin layer of joint finish is to be applied and the edges feathered out
with the jointing sponge.
(g) When all jointing and filling has been completed and the last application of joint finish
has dried, a slurry coat of joint finish shall be applied over the entire surface of the
boards to give an even sponged texture.
4 SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope

1 This Part specifies the requirements for manufactured special or non-standard wall surface,
both interior and exterior use, and special protective wall coatings. As these items may be
non-standard and tailored individually for specific projects, it will be the Contractors
responsibility to ensure that specifications or requirements are provided by manufacturers and
approved by the Engineer. Where applicable, the relevant provisions of BS 8000 shall be
complied with.

This Section:
Part 1 General
Part 2 Lath and Plaster
Part 3 Lining Dry(Wallboard)
Section 1 General
4.1.2 References
BS 8000 ...................... Workmanship on Building sites.
4.1.3 Submittals
1 General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contact and Division 1
specification sections.
2 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data; include product description, description
of materials, finishes, Preparation instructions, recommendations fabrication information,
Installation methods and compliance with specified performance requirements.
3 Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, panel dimensions, details, and
attachments to other work.
4 Samples for Initial Selection:

(a) Submit minimum 100mm by 100mm samples. Indicate full color, texture and pattern
variation.
5 Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including care, repair
and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout documents.
6 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4.1.4 Mockups
1 Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects.
2 Build mockup of each type of Plastic Fabrication.

3 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
4.1.5 Quality Assurance
1 Materials and systems shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly

employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least five (5) consecutive
years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used in the last
projects.
2 Resin Wall tiles must be produced from a minimum of 40% preconsumer recycle content.
3 Manufacturer must have documented training and qualification program for fabrication and
installation of plastic fabrications.
4.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 Deliver Plastic Fabrications, systems and specified items in manufacturer’s standard protective
packaging.
2 Do not deliver Plastic Fabrications, system, components and accessories to Project site until
areas are ready for installation.
3 Store materials in a flat orientation in a dry place that is not exposed to moisture or exterior
elements as recommended by the manufacturer.
4 Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact until ready for
installation.
5 Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to

prevent damage or staining following installation for duration of project.
6 Before installing Plastic Fabrications, permit them to reach room temperature.
4.1.7 Project Conditions
1 Environmental Limitations: Do not install Solid Polymer Fabrications until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, and ambient temperatures and humidity conditions are maintained
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
2 Environmental Requirements: Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity,

and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not
install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
3 Existing Conditions: Field measure to verify dimensions before fabrication.
4.1.8 Warranty

1 Manufacturer’s Special Warranty on Plastic Fabrications: Manufacturer’s standard form

agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in material or workmanship within the specified
warranty period.
2 Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned in
3 The warranty shall not deprive the owner of other rights or remedies the Employer may have
under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent
with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
4.2 AGGREGATE COATINGS
4.2.1 Tyrolean Rendering
1 Tyrolean rendering is to consist of white cement and coarse washed sand complying with
Tables 2.2 and 2.3 of Part 2 of this Section in the proportions of 1:1.5 or 1:2 applied to a
rendered undercoat.
2 Sufficient supplies of sand from a single source are to be stockpiled on site to ensure that the
Tyrolean finish is of even texture and colour throughout the Works.
3 The rendered undercoat is to be applied in accordance with Tables 2.2 and 2.3 of Part 2 of
this Section except that the surface of the undercoat is to be finished smooth with a wood float
and not scratched.
4 The Tyrolean finish coat is to be applied by an approved hand-operated machine in layers to

build up an average thickness of 6 mm and be allowed to cure and dry in the same way as a
final rendering coat.
4.3 WALLPAPER
1 Description wallpaper in rolls from same production run and that complies with ASTM F793.
(a) Category: I, Decorative Only, unless otherwise indicated.
2 Total Weight: Manufacturer’s Standards.
3 Width: Manufacturer’s Standards.
4 Repeat: Random, unless otherwise indicated.
5 Retain "Colors, Textures, and Patterns" Paragraph below unless manufacturer's product name
or designation indicates color, texture, and pattern.
6 Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

4.4 DECORATIVE WALL PANELS
4.4.1 MATERIALS
1 Decorative panels for screens and millwork:

(a) Pattern/colour: as selected by Enigneer.
2 Frame System: Provide 3 form frame systems consisting of full perimeter aluminum frames
and hardware as required for a complete installation.Frame extrusion profiles based on
harspec frame solution (by 3-form, or equal manufacturerto be aluminum alloy 6063-T6.
Finish is clear(Satin) Anodize, Architectural Type II, Class I.Material gauge thickness
different for each extrusion. Main frame parts have base wall thickness of .09"
Frame Conditions (as per 3-form or equivalent manufacturer):
Bottom/ Floor Condition (profiles, leveler, valance)
Top/Ceiling Condition (profiles, leveler, spring, valance)
Module Joints (Joint profile, joint pad)
Exposed Edge (side/exposed edge profiles, end covers)
Corner (side/wall profiles, wall valance/ leveler, connector, and corner post)
3 Adhesive and sealant: Low VOC, adhesive and sealant types as recommended by the panel
manufacturer.
4 Fasteners: Self threading screws designed for use with plastics as recommended by
manufacturer.
5 TILES
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for use of ceramic tile products and the installation of
such for wall and floor surfaces.
This Section
Part 1 ............... General
Part 2 ............... Lath and Plaster
Part 3 ............... Dry Lining (Wallboard)
Part 4 ............... Special Wall Surfaces
Part 6 ............... Terrazzo
Part 7 ............... Stone Flooring
Part 8 ............... Unit Masonry Flooring
Part 9 ............... Floor Screeds and Treatments
Part 10 ............. Joints, Caulking and Sealants

5.1.2 References
1 The following standards are approved and/ or referred to in this Part:
BS 8000-11 ............... Workmanship on building sites. Internal and external wall and floor
tiling. Ceramic and agglomerated stone tiles, natural stone and
terrazzo tiles and slabs, and mosaics. Code of practice
BS 8298-1 .................. Code of practice for the design and installation of natural stone
cladding and lining. General
BS 7956 ..................... Specification for primers for woodwork
BS EN 12057 ............. Natural stone products. Modular tiles. Requirements
BS EN 12058 ............. Natural stone products. Slabs for floors and stairs. Requirements
BS EN 15285 ............. Agglomerated stone. Modular tiles for flooring and stairs (internal and
external)
BS EN 12440 ............. Natural stone. Denomination criteria
BS EN 14411 ............ Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics, evaluation of
conformity and marking
BS EN 12004 ............. Adhesives for tiles. Requirements, evaluation of conformity,
classification and designation
GSO ISO 13006 ........ Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking
GSO ISO 10545-16 (BS EN ISO 10545-16) Ceramic tiles: Determination of small colour
differences
GSO ISO 10545-15 (BS EN ISO 10545-15). Ceramic tiles: Determination of lead and
cadmium given off by glazed tiles
stains
GSO ISO 10545-13 (BS EN ISO 10545-13). Ceramic tiles: Determination of chemical
resistance
GSO ISO 10545-12 (BS EN ISO 10545-12). Ceramic tiles: Determination of frost
resistance
GSO ISO 10545-11 (BS EN ISO 10545-11). Ceramic tiles: Determination of crazing
resistance for glazed tiles
GSO ISO 10545-10 (BS EN ISO 10545-10). Ceramic tiles: Determination of moisture
expansion
GSO ISO 10545-9 (BS EN ISO 10545-9) Ceramic tiles: Determination of resistance to
thermal shock
GSO ISO 10545-8 (BS EN ISO 10545-8). Ceramic tiles: Determination of linear thermal
expansion
surface abrasion for glazed tiles
deep abrasion for unglazed tiles
GSO ISO 10545-5 (BS EN ISO 10545-5). Ceramic tiles: Determination of impact resistance
by measurement of coefficient of restitution

GSO ISO 10545-4 (BS EN ISO 10545-4). Ceramic tiles: Determination of modulus of
rupture and breaking strength
GSO ISO 10545-3 (BS EN ISO 10545-3). Ceramic tiles: Determination of
water absorption, apparent porosity, apparent relative density and bulk
density
GSO ISO 10545-2 (BS EN ISO 10545-2). Ceramic tiles: Determination of dimensions and
surface quality
GSO ISO 10545-1 (BS EN ISO 10545-1) Ceramic tiles: Sampling and basis for acceptance
grouts
GSO ISO 13007-3 (BS ISO 13007-3) _ Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives: Terms,
definitions and specifications for grouts
adhesives
GSO ISO 13007-1 (BS ISO 13007-1) Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives: Terms,
definitions and specifications for adhesives
Classification system
ISO 14574 ................. Fine ceramics (advanced ceramics, advanced technical ceramics).
Mechanical properties
Mechanical properties of ceramic composites at high temperature --
Determination of compression properties
ANSI A108 / A118 /
5.1.3 Submittals
1 Shop Drawings: submit shop drawings showing tile and slab installations, including but not
necessarily limited to the following:
plans and elevations showing locations, layouts and patterns
locations, widths and details of expansion, contraction, control and isolation joints, and
division strips in tile/slab substrates and finished tile/slab surfaces
locations and details of waterproofing underlayments.
2 Samples: before placing orders submit for approval and selection of colours, finishes and
textures, representative samples of each type and composition of tile and slab indicated,
together with associated trims and accessories. Ensure that delivered materials match
approved samples.
3 Testing: for each type of natural stone proposed to be used, submit supplier's certified results
for following tests:

weight per unit of volume

absorption coefficient
compression breaking load
ultimate tensile strength.
4 Control Samples: for each type of tile and slab covering, complete sample areas, being part of
finished work, in approved locations, sizes not less than: 5 m2 for wall areas and 10 m2 for
floor areas, including division strips where applicable. Obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
For fully vitrified tiles with low water absorption, make trial samples with the type of
bedding selected and test for proper adhesion.
5.1.4 Warranty
1 General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2 Special Warranty: Provide written guarantee in a form acceptable to the Supervision

team/engineer, signed by Tile manufacturer, installer and Contractor, undertaking to repair or
replace, without limitations, all or any part of ceramic tiling which fails or becomes defective
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not
limited to:
Will not fade from sunlight or artificial light.

will not chip, crack or show crazing marks
Will not show wear-through (loss of glaze, where the body of the tile shows through, due to
normal use).
Will not contain manufacturing defects.
5.2 TILE ADHESIVES AND GROUTS

5.2.1 Adhesive Types
1 Adhesives used for fixing ceramic tiles to comply with. GSO ISO 13007-1 or BS EN 12004
5.2.2 PREPARATION
1 Remove coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials from substrates, including
curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone
2 For concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar, correct
conditions that do not comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108
Series of tile installation standards.
(a) Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowel able leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
(b) Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

3 Apply primer-sealer to wood and plywood subfloors when recommended by tile-setting

material manufacturer.
4 Lay out tile patterns by marking joint lines on substrates to verify joint placement at edges,
corners, doors, and other critical elements.
(a) Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when layout will be done.
(b) Obtain Architect's approval of layout before starting tile installation.
5.2.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
1 Installation standards shall comply with requirements of ANSI A108 or TCNA or BS 8000-
11.
2 ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with requirements of ANSI A108 that apply to
types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated.
(a) For stone tile floors, follow procedures in ANSI A108 for providing 95 percent mortar
coverage.
(b) For stone tile walls, follow procedures in ANSI A108 series for the materials being
used.
(c) For stone threshold, follow procedures in ANSI A108 series for the materials being
used
(d) For stone countertops, follow procedures in ANSI A108 series for the materials being
used
3 TCA Installation Guidelines or TCNA Handbook: Comply with TCA's "Handbook
for
Ceramic Tile Installation" and TCA installation methods indicated.
4 Wipe backs of tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are installed.
5 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
6 Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
7 Finish cut tile edges that will not be concealed by other construction by grinding and honing
cut surfaces and easing edges to match factory-fabricated edges, unless otherwise indicated.
8 Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
9 Match tiles within each space by selecting tiles to achieve uniformity of color and pattern.
Reject or relocate tiles that do not match color and pattern of adjacent tiles.
10 Mix tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns.
11 Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with directional pattern, orient pattern as directed by
Architect.

12 Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
(e) Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
(f) Use single-component, non sag polyurethane for joints in walls.
(g) Use single-component, non sag polyurethane for joints in floors.
5.2.4 Cement-Sand Mortar for bedding tiles and slabs is to be to the requirements of Section 13 of
the Specification and unless otherwise specified, is to comprise:
ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1, except for marble types that may stain
as a consequence of use, substitute white Portland cement to BS EN 197-1
sand for walls to BS EN13139
sand for floors to BS EN 12620, Table 5, grading limit M, but where fine sand is
specified grading limit F
Submit mix for approval to give a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 5
MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be not less than 1:3-4 by volume.
5.2.5 Adhesive Bedding for Wall Tiling: factory premixed Latex-Portland cement thin bed adhesive
to ANSI A118.4 or BS BS EN 12004, incorporating SBR latex.
Wet density ASTM C905 1634 KG/M3

Open time ANSI A118.4 50 minutes
Shear bond strength ANSI A118.4/ F5.2.4 3.5 MPa
Compressive strength ANSI A118.4/ F.6.1 34.5 MPa
Hardness ASTM D2240 50-60
5.2.6 Adhesive Bedding and Grouting for Tiling and Mosaics: two-part epoxy adhesive for fixing
ceramic wall tiles for interior and exterior locations. Adhesive is to be resistant to chemicals
and to be to ANSI A118.3 or BS EN 12004.
5.2.7 Grout for Ceramic tiles and slabs are to be proprietary type factory prepared sanded or un-
sanded mixed at site with SBR admixture in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Submit samples for selection of colours by the Supervision team/engineer from
manufacturer’s standard range.
5.2.8 Epoxy Grout for tiles and slabs is to be proprietary type non-toxic chemically resistant two-
pack epoxy grout mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Submit samples for
selection of colours by the Supervision team/engineer from manufacturer’s standard range.
5.3 CERAMIC TILES

5.3.1 General

1 This specification includes ceramic wall tiles used in standard applications for floor and wall
surfaces.
2 Tile products for walls and floors shall comply with BS EN 14411 or GSO ISO 10545 or ISO
15165 or ANSI A118 / A136.1 Material Specifications.
3 Application shall comply with BS 8000, Part 11 or ANSI A108 or TCNA Handbook for
Ceramic.
5.3.2 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles
1 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles: Provide wall tiles in varieties, sources, dimensions and finish as
indicated on Drawings and Finish schedule.
2 Ceramic Wall Tiles: to BS EN 14411, with water absorption 3% < E ≤ 6%. Tiles are to be
vitrified gloss glazed with cushion edges and spacer lugs and to sizes as shown on Drawings.
Submit samples and catalogues for selection of colors by the Supervision team/engineer from
3 Porcelain Wall Tiles and Fittings: to BSEN 14411, with water absorption e<0.5 %. Tiles are
to be fully vitrified glazed and to sizes as shown on Drawings. Submit samples and catalogues
for selection of colors by the Supervision team/engineer from manufacturer’s standard range.
4 Ceramic Stair Tiles and Fittings: pressed tiles to BS EN 14411, Type B1, with water
absorption E < 3%. Tiles are to be vitrified unglazed, with non-slip finish and with 4 grooves
in the front of the tread area running transverse to the stair direction. Submit samples and
catalogues for selection of colors by the Supervision team/engineer from manufacturer’s
standard range.
5.3.3 Fixing Internal Ceramic Wall Tiles

1 Ceramic wall tiles shall be fixed by bedding in an approved adhesive on cement rendering.
The rendering shall be applied in accordance with Part 2 of this Section except where
modified by the requirements of this Part.
2 All backgrounds are to receive the spatterdash treatment described in Clause 2.9.1 – 3(b) of
Part 2 of this Section before the surfaces are rendered.
3 The rendering is to be in one coat, except where applied to metal lathing when two coats are
to be used, and be left with a wood float finish. It is to be as uniformly thick as possible and
not less than 8 mm or more than 13 mm thick in any part.
4 Mesh reinforcement is to be incorporated in the rendering in accordance with Clause 2.8 of
Part 2 of this Section where:
(a) the structure is out of line and the thickness of render required exceeds 13 mm
(b) the rendering is to be applied over differing structural materials (See Clause 2.9 of Part
2 of this Section)
(c) the surface of the structural wall will be subject to excessive movement.
5 Where the tiling is to be bedded in a thin-bed adhesive, the trueness of the rendering is to be
such that when tested with a 3 m straightedge, no gap exceeds 3 mm. Where the gap exceeds

3 mm but is less than 6 mm, or if the walls are out of plumb by not more than 6 mm, the
Engineer may permit a thick-bed adhesive to be used or may direct that the defective areas
are cut back and made good. Deviations from true or plumb in the surface of the rendering
exceeding 6 mm are to be made good. Thin-bed adhesive should not be used for fixing
tiles with backs incorporating deep keys or frogs; for these thick-bed adhesives must be used.
6 The tiles are to be set out before the work commences so that:
(a) cut tiles are kept to a minimum and where they do occur, are as large as possible
(b) joints are horizontal and vertical, with horizontal joints aligning in walls that are
adjacent.
7 The tiles shall be neatly and accurately cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments and
around outlets, pipes and the like.
8 Movement joints not less than 6 mm wide are to be provided:
(a) at all internal vertical corners
(b) at all angles with structural walls and ceilings
(c) to give bays not greater than 3000 x 4500 mm
(d) over all structural movement joints.
9 The joints are to be carried through the rendering to the structural wall and shall be partially
filled with an approved joint filler and finished flush with an approved sealant recommended
by the manufacturer for the situation in which it will be used.
10 Glazed edge tiles to be used where edges are exposed.
11 The adhesive is to be prepared and applied with a trowel to dry rendering in the manner
recommended by the manufacturer. The tiles are to be pressed firmly into the adhesive with
a twisting/sliding action, tapped firmly into position and cleaned as soon as the bedding is
complete.
12 It is essential that the tiles are fixed in position before the surface of the adhesive dries and
the work is to be carried out in small areas of not more than 1m2 at a time.
13 The finished surface of the tiles should be plumb and true such that when checked with a 3 m
straightedge no gap exceeds 3 mm.
14 The joints are to be even, approximately 2 mm wide and where tiles without spacer lugs are
used, spacer pegs of suitable and even thickness to be inserted between the tiles as the work
proceeds.
15 The joints are to be grouted after the adhesive has set and not less than 48 hours after fixing.
The grout should be well worked into the joints so that they are completely filled, and finished
flush. Surplus grout is to be cleaned off as the work proceeds using a damp cloth and the joints
tooled smooth.
17 Adhesive Fixing for Wall Tiles: unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply
floated coat of adhesive to dry plastered background and comb surface with recommended
solid bed trowel. Fill any keys and apply thin even coat of adhesive over entire back of each
tile. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action to give finished bed thickness within
range recommended by manufacturer.
18 Skirtings: bed coved skirtings solid to walls before laying floor tiles and slabs.

Bed sit-on skirtings solid to walls after laying floor tiles and slabs. Ensure joints
in skirtings match and align with joints in floor tiling and slabs.
19 Setting out:
joints are to be true to line, continuous and without steps
joints in walls are to be truly horizontal, vertical and in alignment around corners
cut tiles and slabs are to be kept to minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive locations
joints in wall tiles and in floor tiles are to be aligned
where positions of movements joints and dividing strips are not shown they are to be agreed
with the Supervision team/engineer.
20 Use epoxy adhesive as directed by the Manufacturer.
5.3.4 Fixing External Ceramic Tiles

1 The ceramic wall tiles are to be fixed by bedding in an approved adhesive or cement rendering.
The adhesive must be suitable for external application and the Contractor is to obtain
confirmation from the manufacturer that it is suitable for the type of tile to be fixed and in the
climatic conditions prevalent in Qatar and provide the Engineer with copies of the
correspondence.
2 The tiling is to be carried out generally in accordance with Clause 5.3.3 of this Part describing
internal work except that the rendered backing is to be reinforced with galvanized welded
fabric reinforcing mesh and except where modified by this Clause.
3 Stainless steel reinforcing mesh to be used where shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
4 The mesh is to be fixed, with the horizontal wires outwards by means of 25 mm stainless steel
anchors or by drilling holes in which plastic anchors are inserted to receive 38 mm stainless
steel, slotted head, countersunk wood screws. It is essential that the fixings extend into the
structural wall by a minimum of 25 mm after passing through any dubbing etc.
5 The fixings are to be set at maximum 450 mm centers in both directions and staggered, located
so that the horizontal wires of the mesh rest on the screws. The vertical wires of the mesh
shall be spaced 3 mm from the structure by stainless steel washers placed as the screws are
inserted.
6 The mesh should be secured to the screws by stainless steel binding wire of softened quality
and 1.22 mm in diameter, twisted tightly and with its ends turned inwards.
7 The mesh is to be cut off at all movement joints leaving 40 mm free space on either side.
s
8 All cut edges of the mesh are to receive a coating of bitumen solution.
9 A slurry coat of neat cement is to be brushed on the background and the mesh. Whilst the
slurry coat is still wet, the rendering is to be applied, working around and through the wires
and ensuring that it is fully bonded to the background and that the wire is covered by a
thickness of 7 mm.

10 Joints in tiled areas are not to be less than the width of the joints in the tiling and be provided
in positions to be agreed with the Engineer, generally:
(a) over all structural movement joints.
(b) to give bays not greater than 3000 by 4500 mm.
(c) at all internal and external vertical corners.
(d) at each storey height level coinciding with the bottom of the floor slab.
5.3.5 Floor Tiles
1 Ceramic floor tiles and clay floor quarry tiles shall comply with the approved references.
2 Tiles designated as fully vitrified clay on the drawings shall have a water absorption below
0.5%.
3 Provide floor tiles in varieties, sources, dimensions and finish as indicated on Drawings and
Finish schedule.
4 Ceramic Floor Tiles and Fittings: to BS EN 14411, with water absorption E < 3%. Tiles are
to be vitrified unglazed with non-slip finish and to sizes as indicated on Drawings. Submit
samples and catalogues for selection of colors by the Supervision team/engineer from
5 Porcelain Floor Tiles and Fittings: to BS EN 14411, with water absorption e<0.5 %. Tiles are
to be fully vitrified unglazed, with non-slip finish and to sizes as shown on Drawings. Submit
samples and catalogues for selection of colors by the Supervision team/engineer from
6 Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with
the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
(a) Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6

(b) Step Treads: Minimum 0.6
(c) Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8
5.3.6 Laying Ceramic Floor Tiles by the Semi-Dry Mix Method

1 The areas of concrete substrata to be tiled are to be brushed clean and dampened until
absorption ceases and the finished floor level is to be established by means of dots and rules.
2 The mortar for bedding the tiles is to be to the thickness shown elsewhere in the Project
Documentation. It shall consist of 1 part of cement to 4 parts of sand by volume, mixed semi-
dry in a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency that
retains its shape when squeezed in the hand.
3 The minimum thickness of bedding with this system of laying is to be 40 mm. Where a
bedding thickness in excess of 70 mm is required a maximum 10 mm aggregate is to be
incorporated in the proportion of 1-part cement, 1.5 parts dry sand and 3 parts dry coarse
aggregate, by weight, laid in two applications of approximately equal thickness. The lower
layer is to be roughly compacted, but not allowed to stiffen, before the final layer is placed
on top.
4 The mix is to be spread to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required
for the bed and be thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level

with a screed board. Only sufficient mortar is to be mixed and spread as can be covered with
tiles before it has attained its initial set. A slurry of 1-part cement and 1-part sand, by
volume, is to be poured over the surface of the semi-dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel
until it is approximately 2 mm thick. Dry tiles are then to be laid on the slurry and beaten
firmly into position with a wooden beater to ensure a true surface and contact between the
tiles and bedding is complete.
5 The tiles must be correctly positioned at the time they are placed and laid with joints of about
3 mm.
6 Grouting of the joints to be carried out within a period of 4 hours of the completion of the
laying of the tiles so that the grout will attach itself firmly to the bedding. Care is to be taken
to avoid disturbing the tiles and walking boards are to be used during the grouting operation.
7 The grouting mix is to either consist of 1-part cement to 1 part fine, dry sand by volume, or
an approved proprietary grout may be used.
8 The tiles are to be neatly and accurately cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments and
around outlets, pipes and the like.
9 Tiles are to be laid level or to 1% falls in “wet” areas, as may be required. Localized variations
in level for a nominally flat floor are to be a maximum of ±3 mm under a 3 m straightedge.
Particular care is to be taken in “wet” areas to prevent low spots and the pooling of water.
10 Skirtings of the same tile size as the floor are to be fixed in such a manner that their vertical
joints coincide with the horizontal joints of the floor tiles.
11 Mix cement grouts thoroughly with minimum of clean water to give required workability.
12 Mix proprietary grouts as recommended by their manufacturer.
13 Grouting: do not grout tiles or slabs until their bedding has set sufficiently to resist
displacement and following adhesive and grout manufacturers' recommendations.
14 Grouting: work grout well into joints so they are completely filled. Finish flush and
thoroughly clean off surplus grout as work proceeds.
5.3.7 Laying Ceramic Floor Tiles by the Direct Mortar Bedding Method
1 The areas of concrete substrata to be tiled should be brushed clean and dampened until
absorption ceases and the finished floor level is to be established by means of dots and rules.
2 The mortar for bedding the tiles is to consider of 1 part of cement to 4 parts of sand by volume,
mixed in a mechanical mixer to a stiff plastic consistency so that when tamped and fully
compacted into place free water does not bleed to the surface.
3 The bedding mortar is to be laid on the concrete substrata 15 to 25 mm thick, except where
tiles 10 mm thickness or less are used in which case the bedding is not to exceed 15 mm, and
shall be levelled and tamped with a straightedge board.
4 The tiles are to be soaked in clean water for 15 to 30 minutes before fixing and allowed to
drain for 10 minutes to remove all surplus water. Fully vitrified tiles do not require soaking.

5 The bedding mortar is to be lightly dusted with dry cement sprinkled from a flour sieve and
lightly trowelled level until the surface becomes damp. The tiles are then to be laid on the
bedding and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater to ensure a true surface and that
contact between the tiles and bedding is complete.
6 Grouting and the other requirements of the semi-dry mix method described in Clause 5.3.6
of this Part of this Section also apply to the direct mortar bedding method.
7 Ceramic tiles: bed in cement-: sand mortar 1: 3 - 4 (by volume) of stiff plastic consistency
over a separating layer. Bed thickness to be 15 - 20 mm.
8 Adhesive Fixing for Floor Tiles: apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb surface
with recommended solid bed trowel. Apply adhesive to backs of tiles as necessary to fill any
depressions or keys. Press tiles firmly into position to give finished bed thickness within
range recommended by manufacturer.
9 Stair nosings and trims: fix securely and level with neatly mitred joints, adjusting to suit
thickness of covering. Fully bed in gap-filling adhesive and screw fix as recommended by
nosing manufacturer.
5.3.8 Laying Ceramic Floor Tiles in general
1 Tolerances for floor finish: sudden irregularities not permitted. Gradual irregularities
expressed as maximum permissible deviation from:
3 m straight edge : +/-3 mm
1 m straight edge : +/-1 mm.
2 Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards.
3 Immediately prior to applying the mortar bed, evenly dampen preceding surface coat or the
clean concrete block surface with water as required.
4 Dampen clean, properly prepared concrete surface with water immediately prior to placing
the bonded mortar bed. Concrete surface to be completely free of standing water.
5 Before placing mortar bed spread a very thin continuous coating of pure Portland cement on
the concrete and wet it. Broom the pure Portland cement slurry or the wetted Portland cement
dust to completely coat the concrete surface with a thin and uniform coating.
6 Immediately apply mortar bed over the pure cement coating. Firmly tamp and screed mortar
bed. Mortar bed thickness shall be a nominal 32mm.
7 Soak tile in clean water for at least 1/2 hour and drain excess water before setting. Immerse
each tile completely during the soaking period. Resoak and drain tiles that exhibit drying along
the edges before setting. Free moisture shall not remain on the backs of the tile when they are
being set.
8 Back butter each tile with bond coat prior to firmly pressing it into position and beat-in.

9 Set tile firmly on the mortar bed. Lugs on tile determine the joint width between tiles. Spacers,
string or rope shall be used to space tile that have no lugs. Bring all surfaces to a true plane at
the proper position or elevation. Thoroughly beat-in all tile while the mortar bed is still
workable. The beat-in shall fill the entire space between ribs of tile with mortar.
5.4 Protection
5.4.1 Adequately protect and keep clean all completed areas. Clean off any droppings immediately.
5.4.2 Tiling in showers and other ‘wet areas’ is to be kept dry and not brought into service for at
least 3 weeks after grouting.
6 STONE FLOORING
6.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements for interior stone flooring, set in mortar on a rigid base.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 5 Tiles
Part 8 Unit masonry Flooring
Part 9 Flooring screeds and treatments
Part 10 Joint Caulking and sealants
Section 1 General
Section 5 Concrete
6.1.2 References
ASTM C1063 ............. Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to
Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster
ASTM
C150................ Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM
C472................ Test Methods for Physical testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and
Gypsum Concrete
ASTM
C897................ Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-
Based Plasters
ASTM
C926................ Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based
Plaster
BS 1202 ..................... Nails
BS 1449 ..................... Steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 1494 ..................... Fixing accessories for building purposes
BS 405........................ Uncoated expanded metal carbon steel sheets for general purposes

BS 4551 ..................... Mortar. Methods of test for mortar and screed. Chemical analysis and
physical testing
BS 5270-1 ................. Bonding agents for use with gypsum plasters and cement
Specification for polyvinyl acetate (PVAC) emulsion bonding agents
for indoor use with gypsum building plasters
BS 5390 ..................... Code of practice for stone masonry
BS 8000-11 ............... Workmanship on building sites. Internal and external wall and floor
tiling. Ceramic and agglomerated stone tiles, natural stone and
terrazzo tiles and slabs, and mosaics. Code of practice
BS 8204 ..................... Screeds, bases and in situ floorings

BS 8298-1 .................. Code of practice for the design and installation of natural stone
cladding and lining. General
BS 882........................ Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS EN 1008:2002. .... Mixing water for concrete. Specification for sampling, testing and
assessing the suitability of water, including water recovered from
processes in the concrete industry, as mixing water for concrete
BS EN 10142 ............. Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip for
BS EN 10143 ............. Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip – tolerances
BS EN 12057 ............. Natural stone products. Modular tiles. Requirements
BS EN 12058 ............. Natural stone products. Slabs for floors and stairs. Requirements
BS EN 12440 ............. Natural stone. Denomination criteria
BS EN 12878 ............ Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement
BS EN 13139 ............ Aggregates for mortar
BS EN 15285 ............. Agglomerated stone. Modular tiles for flooring and stairs (internal and
external)
BS EN 197-1 .............. Portland cement
BS EN 413-1:2011 ..... Masonry cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria
BS EN 459-1 .............Building lime: Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
EN 998-1:2010 ..........Specification for mortar for masonry. Rendering and plastering mortar
6.1.3 Allowable Tolerances
1 Floor surface shall be true to plane within 3 mm in 3 m not cumulative.
2 Joint width deviation shall not be greater than 10 % of dimension shown on drawings.

3 Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or 1/4 of nominal
joint width, whichever is less.
4 Indicated thicknesses are minimum required thickness. Contractor to submit the loading
calculation at intended use for the Supervision team/engineers approval.
5 Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8mm difference
between planes of adjacent units.
6.1.4 Submittals
1 In accordance the with procedures in Section 1 the Contractor is to furnish the following:
(a) samples: minimum of five individual samples of stone showing range of extreme
variations in colour and texture.
(b) shop drawings: showing special stone shapes or patterns to be constructed.
2 Control samples: for each type of tile and slab covering, complete sample areas, being part of
finished work, in approved locations, sizes not less than: 5 m2 for wall areas and 10 m2 for
floor areas, including division strips where applicable. Obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
3 Testing: for each type of natural stone proposed to be used, submit supplier's certified results
for following tests:
weight per unit of volume

absorption coefficient
compression breaking load
compression breaking load after freezing
ultimate tensile strength.
6.1.5 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 Deliver materials in original sealed containers marked with name of manufacturer and
identification of contents. Store materials under waterproof on covering planking clear
of ground, and protect from handling damage, dirt stain, water and wind.
6.1.6. WARRANTY
1 General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2 Stone Flooring Warranty: Provide system warranty in which tiling and fixing materials
Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair
or replace, without limitations, all or any part of the floor tiling system which fails or becomes
defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but
is not limited to
Structural failure, deterioration in finishes; other than due to normal ageing and weathering;

and any defects in adhesion, sealants, waterproofing, flashings, fixings, coverings and other
components of the work.
Slight separations or cracks in grout.
Failure in bedding materials
Chipping, cracking, or scratching in stone.
6.2 MATERIALS
6.2.1 General
1 Stone slabs to be uniform in quality and texture, free from shale, excess mica, seams,
sealing and disintegration to BS 5390.
2 Stone tiles shall be to BS 8000, Part 11 unless otherwise specified and detailed in the
drawings.
3 Rigid base of concrete in-situ floor to BS 8204 or as otherwise detailed in the drawings shall
be provided.
4 Provision and application of materials shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 5390.
5 Natural Stone Slabs and Fittings Generally: to be first quality stone, each type obtained from
one strata, from one quarry and delivered to the site in one shipment. Slabs are to be hard
and free from cracks and other defects to surfaces and edges which may impair structural
integrity, function or appearance. Slabs are to be cut square and true with clean edges and,
uniform in shape and thickness. Length and width dimensions of individual slabs are to be
within +/-1 mm and thickness within 3 mm from those specified or shown on the Drawings.
6 Granite slabs and fittings: approved natural granite slabs to BS EN 1342/ and ASTM C615
with finish indicated on the drawings, obtained from one strata of one quarry, free from
faults and to the shaped, sizes, and patterns shown on the Drawings. Granite slabs to have
the following minimum properties:
Density: 2560 kg/m3

Compression strength: 131 MPa
Water absorption: 0.4 % max.
Modulus of rupture: 10.34 MPa.
Abrasion resistance C241, Ha: 25
Submit samples for approval of quality, texture, colour and dressing.
7 Slate: approved natural slate slabs to Comply with ASTM C 629, Classification II Interior,
with finish indicated on the drawings, obtained from one strata of one quarry, a fine, even
grain and unfading color, from clear, sound stock. Slate shall have the following minimum
properties:
Density: 2560 kg/m3
Compression strength: 131 MPa
Water absorption: 0.4 % max.
Modulus of rupture: 10.34 MPa.

Abrasion resistance C241, Ha: 25

Thickness: Not less than 30mm unless otherwise indicated.
Submit samples for approval of quality, texture, colour and dressing.
8 Slate Stair Treads and Risers: best quality Slate shown on finishes data sheet with finish as
indicated.
9 Granite Coverings to counters, vanity units and the like, where shown on the Drawings, are
to be best quality granite shown on finishes data sheet with polished finish.
6.2.2 Other Materials
1 Sand to be used for setting beds and mortart or grout mixtures shall be to BS 1199, BS
1200, and BS 882 as applicable.
2 Portland cement shall be to EN 197-1.
3 Colouring pigments shall be pure mineral pigments. They shall be lime proof and non-fading
and shall be added to grout or mortar by the manufacturer. In-situ coloured grout or mortar is
not acceptable unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
6.2.3 Mortar
1 Mortar shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 5224.
2 Sand for Mortar for stone slab cladding is to be to BS EN 13139. Sand for face work mortar
is to be from one source, different loads are to be mixed if necessary to ensure consistency
of color and texture. When a range is specified (e.g. 1:1:5-6) use lower proportion of sand
for Grade G sands and higher proportion for Grade S.
3 Sand for Beds for tile and slab finishings is to be to BS 13139.
4 Factory Prepared Mix: to BS EN 998 -1-2, manufacturer’s standard factory-packaged blend

of ordinary Portland cement, aggregate, water retaining and other suitable admixtures.
Properties shall be as follows:
Wet mix life : <1.5 hours

Initial adhesion at 28 days : > 0.3 N/mm2
Bending (flexural) strength : not less than 1 N/mm2
Compressive strength : 5 ±1 N/ mm2
Minimum cement sand mix : 1:3-4
Test : BS 4551
5 Cement, unless otherwise specified, is to be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1. For

light colored stones use white cement.
6 White Cement: to BS EN 197-1.
7 Admixtures: do not use admixtures, other than plasticizers, without prior approval. Do not
use calcium chloride or any admixtures containing calcium chloride.

8 Plasticizers: to BS EN 934-3.
9 Lime: do not use lime.
10 Pigments: to BS EN 12878.
11 Water: to be clean, free from silt, organic matter, alkali, salts and other deleterious impurities.
Obtain approval of source of supply. Test to BS EN 1008.
6.2.4 Grout
1 Grout shall consist of one-part cement to three parts sand by volume, mixed with enough
water for flowability.
6.3 EXECUTION OF WORK
6.3.1 Inspection
1 Ensure that substrate is without voids or projections that would interfere with installation of
stone paving.
6.3.2 Application
1 General: Do not use stone slabs with chips, cracks, discoloration or other visible defects.
2 Installation with Portland cement grout.

(a) spread and screed the mortar setting bed mixture 12mm to 25mm in thickness true to
plane to BS 8000 Part 9limit the setting bed to minimum amount which can be
covered with stone before initial setting
(b) apply 0.75 mm layer of neat cement paste over the setting bed. Set and level each unit
immediately. Tamp the stone brick to completely contact the setting bed
(c) grout the joints as soon as initial set is achieved. Place the grout in joints, strike flush
and tool slightly concave
(d) cure the grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days.
3 Installation with Portland cement mortar:

(a) install the stone in a full mortor bed. Remove excess mortar. Strike the joints flush
with the top surface of stone and tool slightly concave
(b) cure the mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days.
(c) Semi dry mix method: suitable for ceramic, mosaics, sandstones, limestone, concrete
and terrazzo tiles and slabs:
if base is dry and porous, dampen as necessary to reduce absorption
spread, thoroughly compact and level semi-dry cement-sand mortar 1: 4 of a crumbly

consistency not less than 25 mm thick. Lay on concrete base without sand bed.

in beddings exceeding 50 mm thick, use semi-dry concrete mix with 10 mm maximum

size aggregate in the proportion of 2: 3: 6 of cement-dry fine aggregate-dry coarse
aggregate (by weight)
overlay compacted bedding with cement-sand slurry 1: 1 (by volume), with sufficient
water to make it slightly fluid and spread with trowel to 3 mm thickness
lay tiles preferably dry. Dip rather porous tiles in water and allow to drain
slurry backs of concrete and terrazzo tiles before laying
lay tiles without delay and within two hours of laying bed. Firmly beat down into
bedding to form even surface.
4 Natural stone floor tiles and slabs: bed in cement-sand mortar 1: 3 - 4 (by volume).
Bed thickness to be 15 - 25mm.
5 General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation
Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108
series of tile installation standards.
6 Fine Grit Finish to Natural Stone Tiling and Slabs:
surface grinding and polishing should not commence sooner than 3 days after grouting,
or until the grouted joints are thoroughly hardened and cured
mechanically grind surface using coarse grit stones and water
carry out a second grinding using finishing grade stones
thoroughly clean and wash floor to remove grinding residue and dust
fill holes and depressions in surface with matching grout well pressed into surface and
allow to harden
mechanically polish surface with fine grit stones and water to a mirror polish, wash
surface clean and keep free from traffic for at least 2 days
dry grinding will be permitted only where it is not practicable to use the wet process.
7 FLOOR SCREEDS AND TREATMENTS
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for the installation of floor screeds and treatment.

This Section

Part 5 Tiles
Part 6 Terrazz o
Part 7 Stone Flooring
Unit Masonry
Part 8 Flooring
Section 1 General
Section 5 Concret e
7.1.2 References
BS 8000 ......................Workmanship on building sites.
7.1.3 Submittals
1 Product Data: for each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
2 Design Mixes: for each concrete topping mix. Include alternative mix designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
3 Material Test Reports: from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of materials with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials:
4 Material Certificates: signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
Cementitious materials and aggregates. steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

fiber reinforcement. admixtures. applied finish materials. curing compounds.
5 Shop Drawings: prepare shop drawings showing proposed patterns, movement joints and
colors indicating utilities and proposed joints.
6 Installer Certificates: signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

7 Installer Experience: list of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
1 Installers Qualifications: a qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
Consultants and owners, and other information specified

2 Coverage Rate: for liquid applied coatings, calculate the quantity of material needed for the
work in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Submit calculations for
Supervision team/engineer’s approval. Divide the areas to be coated and allocate the
appropriate quantity of coating material for each area.
3 Ready-Mixed Manufacturer’s Qualifications: manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products

complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
4 Testing Agency Qualifications: an independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the
testing indicated.
5 Concrete Testing Service: engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
6 Mockups: cast topping mockups to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, bonding, texture,
tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Confirm with the following:
build mockups approximately 10 sq. m for each pattern, if any, in the location as directed by
Supervision team/engineer.notify Supervision team/engineer seven days in advance of dates
and times when mockups will be constructed.obtain Supervision team/engineer's approval of
mockups before starting construction.
Mock up size as agreed with Supervision team/engineer.

if Supervision team/engineer determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish
and remove them from the site and cast others until mockups are approved.maintain mockups
during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed
Work.approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
7 Control Samples: for each type of topping, complete sample areas, being part of the finished
work, in approved locations, size not less than 5 m2 and obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
7.1.5 Warranty
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period
or as mentioned in the contract (IF ANY)
Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Applicator and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without
limitations, all or any part of the traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty
period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual
weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate
cracks exceeding 1.6 mm in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow, maintenance
equipment, and truck traffic.
Deterioration of traffic coatings includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Adhesive or cohesive failures.

Abrasion or tearing failures.

Surface crazing or spalling.
Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate.
Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned
in the contract (IF ANY)
7.1.6 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
1 Cement for screed and topping mixes is to be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 or
ASTM C 150 Type 1, unless otherwise specified.
2 Plasticiser: to BS 4887- 1&2 water reducing admixture resulting in high quality concrete of
reduced permeability with increased early strength. Use strictly as per manufacturer's
recommendation.
3 Admixtures: do not use admixtures other than plasticisers and water-retaining agents without
prior approval. Do not use admixtures of any type with proprietary mixes. Do not use calcium
chloride or any admixtures containing calcium chloride.
4 Water: to be clean, free from silt, organic matter, alkali, salts and other deleterious impurities.
Obtain approval of source of supply. Test to BS EN 1008.
5 Bonding Agent: styrene-butadiene co-polymer latex (SBR) for use as a waterproof bonding
agent and admixture. When used as a bonding agent it shall have adequate pot-life for easy
workability. Use strictly as per manufacturer's recommendation.
7.1.7 Membranes and Protective Coverings
1 Separating Sheet: polyethylene sheet 300 microns thick (1200 gauge):
7.1.8 Lathing and Reinforcement
1 Welded Wire Mesh Reinforcement : electrically welded steel wire, 3 mm diameter, 150 × 150
mm mesh, galvanised after fabrication.
2 Wire Netting: galvanised steel, to BS EN 10223-2&3, mesh size: 20 - 38 mm for external

rendering, not more than 50 mm for internal rendering and 25 mm for screeds and toppings.
3 Steel Fabric Reinforcement: to BS 4483, Reference D49.
4 Fibrous Reinforcement: 100 % virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing no

reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use
as concrete secondary reinforcement with the following properties:
specific gravity : 0.91
tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm2
Proportion : not less than 0.9 kg/m3 of concrete to give the required strength.
Where the thickness of the screed exceeds 70 mm, use fine concrete if directed. Submit mix
proportions for approval.

7.1.9 Cement Based Screeds and topping Mixes
1 Cement-Sand Screed:
sfine aggregate : to BS EN 12620, grading limit C or M
mix proportions : submit mix for approval to give a 28-day compressive strength
of not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be not less than 1: 4 by volume.
water-cement ratio : adjust ratio to achieve the required compressive strength.
Where the thickness of the screed exceeds 70 mm, use fine concrete if directed. Submit mix
proportions for approval.
2 Cement-Sasnd Screed for use in separate construction is to be not less than 50 mm thick. Add
bonding agent and prime substrate surface as recommended by manufacturer.
7.1.10 Epoxy Toppings
1 Heavy Duty Epoxy Topping: composed of epoxy aggregate matrix and top coats to produce
a dense, seamless and impervious topping, colours to be selected by the Supervision
team/engineer from manufacturer’s standard range.
2 Epoxy floor coating: solvent based epoxy floor coating providing abrasion, chemical resistant,
coloured, dustproof and sealed surface.
7.1.11 Surface Finishes
1 Slip-resistant material: silicon carbide or aluminium oxide, graded between BS 410-1 &2
sieves 1.70 mm and 500 micro-metres.
7.2 PREPARATION AND PROCEDURES
7.2.1 Cement and Sand Floor Screeds
1 The surface of the concrete base must be clean, firm and rough to ensure a good bond. This is
to be achieved by hacking thoroughly to remove all laitence and to expose the aggregate over
the whole area, followed by sweeping clean and hosing down to remove all dust.
2 The base is to be soaked with water for at least 12 hours and any surplus water removed before
laying commences.
3 Screeds to receive thin flexible finishes (i.e. of vinyl and rubber sheet or tile) are to consist of
1 part of cement of 3 parts of sand by weight to BS 8000, Part 9.
4 Screeds to receive strong rigid coverings (e.g. quarry and ceramic tile) are to consist of 1 part
of cement to 4 parts of sand by weight to BS 8000, Part 9.

7.2.2 Preparing bases generally
1 Clean Bases thoroughly to remove concrete, mortar, plaster, dirt, dust, rust and oil.
7.3 INSTALLATION
7.3.1 Workmanship
1 To obtain the required thickness of screed, leveling battens are to be used, carefully fixed to
line and level and fully bedded. There is to be a minimum thickness of screed of 20mm over
the top of any conduit or duct.
2 The screed is to be laid in alternate bays with plain butt joints. The length of a bay is not to
exceed 1.5 times the width. The maximum plan area of a bay shall not exceed 15 m2.
Movement and construction joints in the base are to be carried through the screed.
3 Immediately prior to laying the screed a thick brush coat of wet cement grout is to be applied
to the damp surface of the base concrete and be well scrubbed in. The brush coat must not be
applied more than 10 minutes before it is covered with screed.
4 The mix is only to contain sufficient water that will allow full compaction and shall be evenly
spread to a thickness approximately 10mm greater than that required. The screed should then
be thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed
board.
5 If a smooth surface is required, the final working up is to be done with a wood float, steel
trowel, power float or other finish as specified elsewhere in the Project Documentation. Care
is to be taken to avoid excessive trowelling which may cause crazing.
6 Screeds to receive thin flexible finishes or screeds which are finished as paving are to be laid
to a tolerance such that localized variations do not exceed ± 2 mm under a 3 metre
straightedge and ±10 mm over large areas, measured from datum.
7 As soon as each bay is completed and has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to its
surface, it is to be covered with polythene or similar sheets which are to be adequately lapped
and held down. The screed should not be allowed to dry out for a minimum period of 7 days
and no traffic shall be permitted on the surface during this time.
8 Standards: work in this Section is to be executed in accordance with BS 8204 and BS 8000-
9, as applicable.
9 Separating Sheet: ensure sheets are clean and dry. Lay single layer loose on base, lap edges
150 mm and seal with adhesive tape.
10 Unbonded Construction: lay polythene sheets and lap edges 100 mm.
11 Separate Construction: use if the concrete base has already set. Minimum thickness not less
than 40 mm.
12 roughen surface by mechanical hacking

13 keep base slab well wetted for several hours before laying screed or topping. Remove free
water then brush in cement slurry of creamy consistence. Alternatively prime as necessary
and apply bonding agent to manufacturer's recommendations
14 lay screed or topping while bonding agent is still wet.
15 Floating Construction: screed laid on a compressible layer such as thermal insulating boards,
is to be 40 mm minimum thickness with welded wire mesh reinforcement at mid depth.
16 Steel Fabric Reinforcement: lay with 50 mm laps tied securely with tying wire at 300 mm
centres.
17 Steel Fabric Reinforcement: pipes and conduits which are to be cast into screeds or toppings
are to be overlaid with 450 mm wide strip of steel fabric reinforcement.
18 Fibrous Reinforcement: for reinforced toppings, apply fibrous reinforcing as per

manufacturer’s written instructions.
19 Proprietary Materials: use strictly in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
20 Hot Weather: take adequate precautions to protect work from premature drying out.
21 Protection: adequately protect and keep clean all completed areas. Clean off any droppings
immediately. Do not heat floors or building artificially during first 4 - 6 weeks after laying
and thereafter raise temperature slowly.
7.3.2 Laying Cement Based Screeds And Toppings
1 Testing: carry out preliminary tests to BS 812, BS EN 1097 and BS EN 932-1, as appropriate,
on natural aggregates, if instructed, and submit results for approval.
2 Store different aggregates separately. Store cement dry and use in order of delivery.
3 Batching: mixes are to be batched by weight.
4 Mixing:
water content of mixes is to be minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low

enough to prevent excessive mortar being brought to surface during compaction
mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistence in suitable forced action mechanical

mixer, do not use free fall type (drum) mixer
use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
5 Joints:
where not shown on the Drawings, obtain approval of location before starting work.
A joint in architectural finishes is to be provided where such a joint occurs in the
structural slab below
forms are to be square edged with steel top surface, securely fixed
compact thoroughly at edges to give level and closely abutted joints with no lipping.

6 Joints in Bonded Toppings: bay sizes are to be not more than 15 m2, ratio of length to breadth
being not more than 3: 2 and a joint occurring over every joint in base slab.
7 Joints in Unbonded Toppings: bay sizes are to be not more than 10 m2, ratio of length to
breadth being not more than 3: 2.
8 Joints in Screed: unless otherwise specified cast screeds continuously, as far as possible
without joints, using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays wherever practicable.
9 Joints in Screed: screeds to receive in-situ finishes are to cast in bays 15 m2, ratio of length to
breadth being not more than 3: 2. Edges are to be vertical and abut at joints.
10 Compaction: dense screeds and toppings are to be fully compacted by vibrating beam or pan
vibrator or where this is not practicable by hand.
11 Compaction: dense screeds and toppings, if hand compacted and more than 40 mm thick are
to be laid and fully compacted in two layers of identical mix, approximately equal thickness
and the second layer within two hours of the first.
12 Screed to Receive Resinous Topping: screed to be monolithic or properly bonded to concrete

base using a bonding agent. Prepare base in accordance with recommendations and
instructions of the topping manufacturer.
13 Bonded Screed: lay screed bonded to the base to a minimum thickness of 25 -30 mm.
14 Unbonded Screed: lay over a separating layer to a minimum thickness of 50 mm.
15 Floating Screed: screed over compressible base is to be 70 mm thick.
16 Floating Screed: screed over extruded polystyrene thermal insulation is to be 75 mm thick

with welded wire mesh reinforcement at mid depth.
17 Tolerances for Floors: sudden irregularities not permitted. Gradual irregularities expressed as
maximum permissible deviation from:
3 m straight edge : +/-3 mm
1 m straight edge : +/-1 mm.
18 Low Spots: do not leave low spots between drainage outlets.
19 Smooth Floated Finish: use a hand float, skip float or power float to give an even surface with
no ridges or steps on screeds to receive rigid tiles and the like.
20 Troweled Finish On Screed to receive thin tile and sheet floor finishes and the like:
float to an even surface with no ridges or steps
hand or power trowel to give a uniform smooth surface free from trowel marks and
other blemishes and suitable to receive flooring material
adequately protect surface from construction traffic.
21 Trowelled Finish On Toppings:

float to an even surface with no ridges or steps
successively hand or power trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close

the surface to give a uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other
blemishes.
22 Slip-resistant trowelled finish for wearing surfaces:
float topping to an even surface with no ridges or steps
successively hand or power trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close

the surface to give a uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other
blemishes
apply slip-resistant material, sprinkled evenly at the rate of 1 kg/m2 and trowel into
surface while topping is still plastic.
23 Stair Risers: form with fine finish formwork, or render to give true lines and fine finish.
24 Cement: do not sprinkle onto surface.
25 Curing:
immediately after laying, protect surface of screed or topping from wind, draughts
and strong sunlight
as soon as screed or topping has set, closely cover with polythene sheeting and keep
in position for not less than 7 days
do not heat screeds or toppings or building artificially during first 4 - 6 weeks after
laying, thereafter raise temperature slowly.
26 Following trades: take adequate precautions to prevent damage to screeds and toppings,
including covering by suitable means. Make good defective work in screeds before applying
finishes.
27 Surface Coatings:
prepare and clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
apply number of coats of liquid surface coatings in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate
provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. Check wet film thickness with wet film
gauge.
7.3.3 Laying Epoxy Toppings
1 Generally: epoxy toppings are to be laid on prepared bases by qualified installers approved by
the topping manufacturer in

8 JOINTS, CAULKING AND SEALANTS
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for joints, caulking and sealants.
2 Related Parts and Sections are as follows

This Section
Part 5 Tiles
Part 6 Terrazzo
Part 7 Stone Flooring
Part 8 Unit Masonry Flooring
Part 9 Floor Screeds and Treatments
Section 1 General
Section 5 Concrete
8.1.2 References

BS 5212 ......................Cold applied sealant systems for concrete
pavements BS 5390 ......................Code of practice for stone masonry
BS 8203 ......................Code of practice for installation of sheet and tile
flooring BS 8204 ......................In-situ flooring
1 The Contractor is to include for all pointing, sealing, jointing caulking etc., in all locations
indicated on the drawings and where elsewhere required for waterproofing, movement,
sealing, etc. All materials shall be of a proprietary manufacture whose instructions shall be
followed at all times and shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
2 All materials shall be compatible with the other materials they shall come into contact with
and shall be specifically manufactured for the location in which they have to be used.
3 Trafficable Sealants: in accordance with ASTM C920, trafficable sealants grade T shall have
a hardness reading, after being properly cured, of not less than 25 or more than 50 when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 661 as recommended by ASTM C920. Do not use
silicone sealant in trafficable areas.
8.1.4 Samples

1 The Contractor shall submit two cartridges or representative samples of all sealants and
backup materials.
2 The samples shall include the following information:
(a) suppliers
(b) name of material
(c) specification
(d) colour
(e) date of manufacture
(f) life expectance and shelf life.
3 The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of manufacturer’s specifications,

recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant and associated
miscellaneous backup material required.
4 These shall include manufacturer’s published data or letter of certification, or certified test
laboratory reports, indicating that each material is intended generally for the applications
shown.
8.1.5 Test Panels
1 Before sealant installation work commences, test panels of each type and application of
sealant shall be installed in strict conformity with the manufacturer’s requirements in finished
work. If necessary, this work shall be supervised by a representative of the sealant supplier.
2 The Engineer shall be informed of the location of such test panels, and may change their
location if he deems necessary.
3 Test panels designated to be incorporated in the Works shall not be considered acceptable until
the Engineer provides written approval. As-built drawing with the locations of each test panel
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
4 Each test panel of a type and application of sealant shall be no less than 7.5 linear metres. The
test panels shall be used for determining faults should any joint failure occur at a later stage.
8.1.6 Certification
1 The manufacturer of the sealant shall certify:
(a) that the sealants and accessory materials to be used are compatible with each other,
chemically and in adhesion
(b) that the materials are fit for the purpose and conditions of use
(c) that the sealant, primer where required, and backer rod are compatible and will cause
no staining of material in which they are installed.

8.1.7. GUARANTEE
1 Installer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace

elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within the period stated in the QCS 2014 or in the Contract
conditions, from date of Substantial Completion.
2 Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer

agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply
with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within the period required
by the QCS 2014 or the Contract from date of Substantial Completion.
3 Exclusions: warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric

joint sealants from the following:
Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.
8.2 MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS
8.2.1 Installation and Workmanship
1 Unless otherwise indicated in the Project Documentation, a 10 mm movement joint is to be

formed at the perimeter of all tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such
as columns, machine bases etc.
2 In clay floor tiling additional intermediate movement joints are to be provided where the
flooring exceeds 6 m in any direction. In other tiled floor finishes additional intermediate
movement joints are to be provided where the flooring exceeds 12 m in any direction.
Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base, a movement joint of the same
width in the bedded finish is to be positioned immediately above.
3 The movement joint cavities are to extend through the combined thickness of the finish and
the bedding mortar or compound and be completely filled and sealed after grouting of the
normal joints takes place.
4 The requirements of this Part shall be implemented with additional compliance to BS 5212:
Part 2, BS 5390, BS 8203, and BS 8204 as applicable for the flooring system used.
5 Changes in colour or type of finish in doorways where movement joints occur are to be
situated under the centreline of the door leaf.
8.2.2 Movement Joint Filler and Sealant

1 Movement joint filler is to be approved impregnated fibreboard or cellular polyethylene

which is compatible with the sealant being used and which does not excrete bituminous or
oily products.
2 Sealants are to comply with the requirements recommended by the manufacturer for the
situation in which they will be used.
3 Butyl mastics and other forms of soft sticky mastics are not to be used.
4 Products to be used in conjunction with movement joint sealant are to be types recommended
for particular purpose by sealant manufacturer.
5 Primer: type recommended by sealant manufacturer.
6 Sealants for Pointing: one-part moisture cured silicone sealant to ASTM C920 or BS EN ISO
11600, Type A as recommended for particular purpose by manufacturer. Submit for approval
of material and color
7 Multi-Part Nonsag Polyurethane Sealants: chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base

polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920, properties shall be as follows:
Type Grade Class Shore Movement Uses

A Capability M G A O
T N
T
M
NS 25 20-25 ±50% ● ● ● ● ●
M
NS 25 25±5 ±50% ● ● ● ● ●
M
NS 25 25±5 ±50% ● ● ● ● ●
8 Multi-Part Trafficable Polyurethane Sealants: trafficable chemically curing, elastomeric

sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920, properties as follows:

T NT
M
NS 25 20-25 ±50% ● ● ● ● ●
M
P 25 40±5 ±25% ● ● ● ● ● ●
M
NS 25 25±5 +50% ● ● ● ● ●

M
P 25 25-30 ±25% ● ● ● ●
M
P 25 25-30 ±25% ● ● ● ●
9 One-Part Nonsag Silicone Sealant: neutral curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer
indicated which complies with ASTM C 920, properties shall be as follows:

T NT
S
NS 25 15 +100 /-50 ● ● ● ●
%
S
NS 25 15 +100 /-50 ● ● ●
%
S
NS 25 15 +100 /-50 ● ● ● ●
%
S
NS 25 35-40 ±25% ● ● ●
10 Colour of sealants applied to exposed joints in architectural finishes are to be approved and
selected by the Supervision team/engineer from manufacturer’s standard range.
11 Water-Tight Joints: for joints in wet areas or areas that may become exposed to water, DO
NOT rely on sealant only, install water-stops, or extend waterproofing membrane across the
joint with an expansion loop.
8.3 BRASS DIVIDING STRIP
1 Where used for tile edging, brass dividing strips shall be flush with tile surface and shall
comply with the relevant provisions of Section 17.
8.4 MATERIALS
1 Materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Where

necessary, the manufacturer shall provide training and/or site supervision.
8.4.2 Products

1 Before purchase of each sealant the Contractor shall investigate its compatibility with the
joint surfaces, joint fillers and other materials.
2 Three part sealants shall be an epoxidised polyurethane mixed in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Activated (mixed) sealant not used on the job shall be discarded
after a period of hours as instructed by the manufacturer, but in no case shall activated sealant
be held overnight.
3 Two part sealants shall be a 100 % urethane abrasion-resistant products. They must be
installed with a primmer under the optimum surface conditions as indicated in the
manufacturer’s printed data.
4 Interior sealants shall be one-part, non-sag in areas of constant water or moisture contact,
where no painting will take place. In places where painting or other dry wall finishing
conditions prevail, the interior sealant shall be a one-part latex acrylic with a fungicide to
reduce mildew, solvent-based acrylic 100% terpolymer, or silicon.
5 Joint cleaner shall be a cleaning compound recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for
the joint surfaces to be cleaned.
6 Joint primer/sealer shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for the joint
surfaces to be primed or sealed.
7 Bond breaker self-adhesive tape shall be polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer. It shall be applied to sealant-contact surfaces
where bond to the substrata or joint filler must be avoided for the proper performance of the
sealant.
8 Sealant backer rod shall be compressible rod stock, non-grassing, closed cell urethane foam,
polyethylene foam or neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable, non-absorptive
material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer.
8.5 WORKMANSHIP
8.5.1 Execution
1 Sealants shall be installed by a firm with a minimum of 5 years’ successful experience in the
application of the types of materials required.
2 Joint surfaces shall be cleaned immediately before installation of sealant. Dirt, insecure
coatings, moisture and other substances, which would interfere with the bond of sealant or
caulking compound, shall be removed.
3 Sealants shall not be placed on joint surfaces that have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed
or treated with water repellent or other treatment or coating unless a laboratory test for
durability (adhesion) has successfully demonstrated that the sealant bond is not impaired by
the coating or treatment. If a laboratory test has not been performed or shows bond
interference, the coating or treatment shall be removed from joint surface before installing the
sealant.

4 Joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar non-porous materials shall be roughened wherever
sealant manufacturer’s data indicates lower bond strength or porous surfaces.
5 Joint surfaces shall be primed and sealed wherever shown or recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
6 Sealant backer rod shall be installed behind sealants unless otherwise indicated in the Project
Documentation or recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
7 Bond breaker tape shall be installed wherever recommended by the manufacturer to ensure that
sealants will perform properly.
8 The sealant shall be installed to the depths as detailed in the Contract Documentation or as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations.
Measured at the centre (thin) section of the joint.
(a) for sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to traffic and other abrasion and
indentation, joints shall be filled to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but not more
than 16 mm deep and not less than 10 mm deep.
(b) for normal movement joints not subject to traffic, joints shall be filled to a depth equal
to 50% of joint width, but not more than 12 mm deep and not less than 9 mm deep
(c) where joints are wider than 25 mm, the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer
shall be followed
9 Sealants, primers and sealers shall not be allowed to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces
or to penetrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Masking tape or other precautionary
devices shall be used to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces.
10 Excess and spilled sealants/primers/sealers shall be removed promptly as the work progresses.
All adjoining surfaces shall be cleaned by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate
evidence of spillage, without damage to the adjoining surfaces of finishes.
11 Sealants shall be cured in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface
durability.
12 Procedures required for the curing and protecting of sealants during the construction period,
as recommended by the manufacturer, shall be strictly followed.
13 No surface treatments will be allowed that will affect either appearance or physical
characteristics of the sealing being installed.
14 Preparation: surfaces to be sealed are to be clean, dry and free from dirt, laitance, dust and
deleterious materials. Remove oil and grease with recommended solvent.
15 Joint filler: movement joint filler or back-up material be checked to ensure that it is tightly
packed and that no voids exist at base of joint.
16 Back-up material: use backing cord as support for joint sealant in walls and ceilings and other
surfaces not subject to direct surface pressure. Use polythene tape over joint filler as support
and bond-breaker for sealants in surface subject to direct surface pressure such as floors.

17 Masking tape: use masking tape on sides of joint to protect adjacent finishes from smears of
sealant and to give sharp and exact seal lines. Remove tape immediately after finishing
(tooling) seal and before a skin begins to form.
18 Primer: follow manufacturer's instructions when using primer.
19 Sealant application: mix two-part sealants using recommended equipment and strictly in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
20 Sealant application: sealant is to be applied by gun with nozzle of correct size to fit joint width
and with sufficient force to fill groove solidly.
21 Tooling sealant: tool surface of sealant immediately after application using surface lubricant
recommended by sealant manufacturer. Masking tape is to be removed immediately after
tooling.
9 CARPETING
9.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements for carpet and other textile floor coverings and installation
requirements for the same.
2 Carpet and other textile floor coverings are collectively referred to as “carpet” in this
Section.
3 Related Parts and Section are as follows:

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 9Floor Screeds and Treatments
Part 11 Recessed Duct covers
Section 1 General
9.1.2 References
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part: BS

1006...................... Methods of test for colour fastness of textiles
BS4223...................... Determination of constructional details of textile floor coverings with
yarn pile
BS 4682...................... Method of test for the dimensional stability of textile floor coverings
BS 5229...................... Code of Practice for the installation of textile floor coverings BS
8203...................... Code of Practice for the installation of sheet and tile flooring
BS 5808...................... Underlays for textile floor coverings
9.1.3 Submittals

1 The Contractor shall submit the following samples with an attached label stating brand
name and ordering reference to the Engineer for approval:
(a) carpet, 300 mm square, of each colour and texture, with cut edges sealed if necessary
(b) metal edge strip, 150 mm long
(c) plastic edge strip, 150 mm long, each colour
(d) carpet edge strip, 150 mm long, each colour.
2 Manufacturer’s certificates for the following shall be submitted:

(a) stating critical radiant flux rating of carpet
(b) stating approval of adhesive, crack filler and seaming tape
(c) installer’s qualifications as specified.
3 Manufacturer’s literature and data, including maintenance and cleaning manuals, shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
4 Manufacturer’s guarantee is to be provided for all carpeting is to be submitted. The guarantee

shall be valid from the date of handover of the Works to a period of three (3) years unless
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation. The guarantee shall cover excessive wear,
edge ravel, backing separation, shrinking, stretching and static electricity. Excess surface
wear means loss of more than 15 % by weight of face fibre.
5 Shop drawings, including installation layout plan showing seams and cuts, shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
6 All carpet and textile products used for flooring shall comply with the relevant provisions of
BS 1006, BS 4223, BS 4682 and BS 8203.
7 Control Samples: for each type of carpet or carpet tile, complete sample areas, being part of
the finished work, in approved locations, size not less than 10 m2. Obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding.
9.1.4 Performance Requirements
1 Flame Spread: flame spread class of finishes shall comply with fire safety requirements.
9.2 CARPET CUSHION (UNDERLAY)
9.2.1 General
1 This Clause provides the specification for use of carpet underlay.
9.2.2 Materials and Workmanship
1 Underlays used for textile floor coverings shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS
5808 unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the Project Documentation.
2 All underlays containing natural fibre are to be mothproofed by the manufacturer.

3 Underlays of felt or cellular rubber, suitable for medium traffic shall be not less than 6 mm
thick and shall weigh not less than 1.40 kg/m2. For heavy traffic areas, underlays shall be to
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
9.3 SHEET CARPETING (STANDARD ROLL CARPET)
9.3.1 General
1 This Clause specifies installation of standard roll carpet.
9.3.2 Products
1 Carpet to be included in the Works will include manufacturer’s written verification of

following characteristics:
(a) construction type
(b) gauge
(c) finished pile height
(d) pile weight
(e) face yarn
(f) yarn weight
(g) dye method
(h) total weight
(i) static control
(j) primary backing

(k) secondary backing
9.3.3 Installation of Carpet
1 Carpet is to be installed in accordance with the requirements of BS 5229 by skilled operatives

so that it is flat and sufficiently taut to ensure that movement of furniture over the surface
does not cause racking to take place.
2 Carpet is not to be laid until:

(a) the building is weathertight
(b) the wet trades have finished their work
(c) all painted work is finished and dry
(d) the air-conditioning system is fully operational if the carpet is to be laid in the hot
months between April and November
(e) socket outlets, duct covers and the like around which the carpet needs to be cut have
been fixed
(f) the substrate is dry and clean.
3 Carpet is to be cut and fitted to all socket outlets and other fixtures and be cut in at all
doorways and recesses. It is not to be pieced in.

4 Where practicable, room coverings are to start with a full width of carpet on the same side as
the door.
5 On completion of the installation, all loose nap ends are to be trimmed and the carpet cleaned
with a beater type vacuum cleaner. Upon completion of the cleaning, the carpet shall be
covered with clean dustsheets, hardboard or similar, as necessary to prevent damage from
dust and traffic until handover.
6 Spare carpet shall be supplied as per percentages or quantities stipulated under the contract or
as per QCS 2014, or no more than recommended by the supplier
9.3.4 Installation of Carpet Using Tackless Fixings
1 Unless the manufacturer specifically recommends otherwise, all carpet other than foam
backed and fibre bonded carpet, shall be fixed by means of tackless strip (gripper).
2 The underlay is to be installed so that its seems do not shadow through the carpet and do not
coincide with those of the carpet when laid in the same direction. Uneven edges are to be
overlapped and cut through.
3 The seams of rubber and rubber-based underlays are to be joined with approved tape not less
than 50 mm wide.
4 The underlay is to be fixed along its perimeter in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and be butted up to the edge of the gripper.
5 The underlay is to cover the treads and risers of stairs and be fixed to prevent movement and
wrinkling.
6 Seams in carpet are to be joined by approved heat-bonded tape unless alternative forms of
jointing are indicated elsewhere in the Project Documentation. Care is to be taken to ensure
that:
(a) the joints are strong enough to permit the carpet to be stretched and not break down
under use
(b) the pile is laying in the same direction
(c) the pattern matches where a repeating motif occurs
(d) the pile is not caught down into the seam
(e) the seams are straight.
7 The carpet is to be laid with the seams parallel to one main axis of the room.
8 The gripper is to be fixed around the perimeter of the area to be covered, leaving a gap
approximately two thirds of the thickness of the carpet. The carpet should be stretched into
position over the gripper using a knee kicker or power stretcher as appropriate to form a neat
edge.
9 Binder bar are to be used at all free edges of carpet and double binder bar are to be used where
carpets of a different type, colour or pattern meet.
10 Single or double binder bars as appropriate are to be used at all doorways situated under the
centre line of the door leaf. Grippers are not to be fixed across doorways.

11 At stairs, the pile of the carpet is to be inclined towards the bottom of the stair unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Grippers are to
be fixed to the bottom of all the risers and to the adjacent horizontal surface of the tread.
12 All carpet is to be re-stretched at least once during the Maintenance Period.
9.4 CARPET TILES
1 This Clause specifies carpet tiles or modules, edge strips, adhesive, and other items required
for the installation specified.
9.4.2 Submittals
1 In accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 1 the Contractor is to provide:

(a) samples
(i) one carpet module of each type, colour and texture.
(ii) plastic edge strip, 150 mm long, for each type, colour and texture
(b) manufacturer’s certificates:
(i) stating critical radiant flux rating of the carpet modules.
(ii) approving the proposed method of installation, type of adhesive, crack filler
(c) manufacturer’s literature and data, including maintenance and cleaning manual
(d) shop drawings showing:
(i) dimensions of carpeted areas
(ii) pattern direction and layout

(iii) location of edge strips.
2 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated & as indicated in Finishes & Materials Manual.
3 Performance Characteristics as follows:
(d) Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to

ASTM D 7330.
(e) Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm unless otherwise
indicated.
(f) Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 445 N according to ASTM D 2646.
(g) Tuft Bind: Not less than 36 N according to ASTM D 1335.
(h) Delamination: Not less than 18 N/mm according to ASTM D 3936.
(i) Noise Reduction Coefficient NRC: value as indicated, according to ASTM C 423.

(j) Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.
(k) Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU AATCC fading units
according to AATCC 16, Option E, unless otherwise indicated.
(l) Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive
bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no
fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
(m) Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134, unless
9.4.3 Installers Qualifications
1 The carpet modules are to be installed by operatives regularly engaged in installing carpet
modules and accessories of the type specified.
9.4.4 Carpet Tiles
1 Carpet tiles to be included in the Works will include manufacturer’s written verification of
(b) gauge
(d) face yarn
(e) yarn weight
(f) dye method
(g) total weight
(h) backing
(i) static control
2 Carpet Tiles Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated & as indicated in Finishes & Materials Manual.
3 Performance Characteristics as follows:
(a) Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to

ASTM D 7330.
(b) Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm unless otherwise
indicated.
(c) Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 445 N according to ASTM D 2646.
(d) Tuft Bind: Not less than 45 N according to ASTM D 1335.
(e) Delamination: Not less than 18 N/mm according to ASTM D 3936.
(f) Dimensional Tolerance: Within 0.8 mm of specified size dimensions, as

determined by physical measurement.
(g) Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 Aachen Test.
(h) Noise Reduction Coefficient NRC: value as indicated, according to ASTM C 423.
(i) Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.
(j) Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU AATCC fading units
according to AATCC 16, Option E, unless otherwise indicated.
(k) Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria,
not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth,
according to AATCC 174.
(l) Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134, unless
Type and Performance Characteristics should comply with as indicated in Finishes &
Materials Manual.
9.4.5 Accessories
1 Adhesive and crack fillers shall be types recommended by the carpet module manufacturer.
2 Plastic edge strips shall be the custom type, with an integral 40 mm wide base and 6 mm lip.
9.4.6 Surface Preparation
1 Cracks and holes in subfloors shall be filled with crack filler to give a smooth and level
surface.
2 Grease, loose particles, dirt and all other foreign substances shall be removed
3 When placing carpeting over existing waxed floors, the wax is to be removed prior to laying
the carpet.
4 Concrete floors are to have dust thoroughly removed by sweeping and wet mopping. The
concrete is to be sealed as per carpet manufacturer’s recommendations.
9.4.7 Installation
1 The manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be followed.
2 Release type adhesives, applied as recommended by the carpet tile manufacturer, shall be
used.
3 The carpet tile manufacturer’s recommendations for matching pattern and texture shall be
followed.
4 Lay carpet tiles uniformly to provide a tight, smooth finish. The carpet is to be free from
movement when subjected to traffic.

5 Install carpet with the pile inclination in one direction.
6 Installation of Carpet
(a) Quality of work: store, handle and install underlay, carpet and ancillary materials in
accordance with manufacturers' recommendations to provide carpeting which is tightly
seamed, accurately fitted, neatly and securely fixed, smooth, evenly tensioned and clean.
Protect adjacent surfaces as necessary to prevent damage and marking during installation of
carpeting.
(b) Layout: set out carpets so that seams and cross seams are kept to a minimum. Agree
setting out of seams and pattern before ordering carpet.
(c) Marking: ensure that carpets are delivered to site in original packing, clearly marked
with batch number.
(d) Storage: store carpet in a clean, warm, dry ventilated place. Store rolls lying down.
Keep in original packing until ready for laying. Condition carpets as recommended by
manufacturer.
(e) Commencement: do not lay carpets until building is weathertight, wet trades have
finished their work, the building is well dried out, all paint work is finished and dry, and floor
service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which carpet is to be cut have been fixed.
Inform the Supervision team/engineer not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.
(f) Environment: before during and after laying, maintain temperature and humidity
approximately at levels which will prevail after the building is occupied.
(g) Wet-laid bases: where carpet is to be laid on new wet- laid bases:
ensure that drying aids have been turned off for not less than 4 days
test for moisture content using an accurately calibrated hygrometer as in BS 5325, Appendix
A
take readings in all corners, along edges, and at various points over the area being tested
do not lay carpet until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less.
(h) Edgings and cover strips: fix securely, using matching fastenings where exposed to
view, ensuring that edge of carpet is firmly gripped.
(i) Wood bases: ensure that all boards are securely fixed and acceptably level. Punch in or
countersink protruding fastenings and plane, sand or apply smoothing compound as necessary
to provide a smooth, even surface.
9.4.8 Edge Strip Installation
1 Edge strips shall be installed over exposed tile edges adjacent to uncarpeted finish flooring.
2 Edge strips shall be anchored to floors with suitable fasteners or adhesive. If adhesive is used,
the following installation sequence shall be followed:
(a) apply adhesive to the edge strips
(b) insert tile into the lip of the edge strip
(c) press down lip over carpet.
9.4.9 Protection and Cleaning

1 On completion of the installation, the carpet shall be cleaned with a beater type vacuum
cleaner.
2 Remove spots and smears of adhesive from the carpet surface with approved cleaning agents.
3 Upon completion of the cleaning, the carpet shall be covered with clean dustsheets, hardboard
or similar, as necessary to prevent damage from dust and traffic until handover.
9.5 WALL CARPET
1 This Part specifies the requirements for wall carpeting.
2 Carpet to be included in the Works will include manufacturer’s written verification of

(b) gauge
(d) face yarn
(e) yarn weight
(f) dye method
(g) total weight
(h) backing
(i) static control
9.5.2 Installation
1 Carpet is to be installed by skilled operations so that it is flush to the wall and sufficiently
taut to ensure no bubbles or loose areas are to occur.
2 Carpet installation will be in accordance with the relevant provisions of Clause 12.3.3 or
12.3.4.
3 The Contractor is to use methods of fixing as necessary in order to ensure achieving the
requirements above. This may include the use of adhesive, tackless strips or tacks. The
Contractor is to obtain the Engineers approval of the method to be used prior to installation.
9.6 OUTDOOR CARPET
1 Textile floor coverings for outdoor use specifically manufactured for outdoor use. The
manufacturer shall submit a certificate stating that the carpet to be used is suitable for outdoor
use when subjected the climatic conditions normally encountered in Qatar.
2 Synthetic product for outdoor carpeting shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS
1006 and BS 4682.

9.6.2 Installation
1 Installation of outdoor carpeting shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of BS

5229 and the manufacturer’s requirements.
9.7 CARPET ADHESIVES
9.7.1 Installation of Carpet Using Adhesive
1 Adhesives used for fixing carpet are to be waterproof, peel-up type recommended for the
purpose by the carpet manufacturer.
2 Fibre bonded, high density foam backed carpet and carpet where the manufacturer
specifically so recommends shall be fully bonded to the floor using a peel-up adhesive applied
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Low density foam backed carpet (less
than 1.2 kg/m2 backing weight) should not be fixed with adhesive.
3 Joints in the carpet are to be bonded with adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the
carpet are to be parallel to one main axis of the room. Where applicable care is to be taken to
ensure that:
(a) the pile is laying in the same direction.
(b) the pattern matches where a repeating motif occurs.
(c) the pile is not caught down into the joint.
(d) the joints are straight.
4 Adhesive marks are to be removed from the carpet and other exposed surfaces as the work
proceeds.
5 Edge trim or dividing strip is to be used at free edges and where carpets of different type,
colour or pattern meet. The trim or strip is to be situated under the centreline of the door leaf
at all doorways.
6 At stairs the pile of the carpet is to be towards the bottom. The carpet is to be folded under
any exposed edges and fixed to each tread and riser as one continuous piece unless a nosing
is provided.
7 Carpet gripper: type as recommended for particular purpose by carpet gripper manufacturer
to suit the carpet, base and conditions of use.
Edgings and cover strips, where not otherwise specified, are to be types recommended by
carpet manufacturer, or in the absence of such recommendations types to be approved.
9.7.2 Tapes and Trims for Carpet
1 Adhesive tapes for seams are to be approved heat bonded type, minimum 75 mm wide, and
as recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet.
2 Fixing bars and carpet grippers used with self-adhesive surface strip or for application of
adhesive, are to be of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet and are to
have an anodised aluminum finish to exposed surfaces where applicable.

9.8 Completion
9.8.1 Generally:
remove stay tacks and cut away partly loose warp and face yarns with sharp napping
scissors
check for lumps, surface irregularities, signs of inadequate or uneven tension and adjust as
necessary
remove scraps and vacuum clean carpet
cover carpet with clean dust sheets, hardboard etc. as necessary to prevent damage and
soiling.
9.8.2 Waste: retain spare carpet and carpet tiles suitable for patching. On completion hand over to
the Employer pieces selected by the Supervision team/engineer.
10 OTHER FLOOR COVERINGS
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for floor coverings not dealt with elsewhere.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 9 Floor Screeds and Treatments
Part 12 Carpeting
Section 5 Concrete
10.1.2 References
1 The following Standards are referred to in this Section:

BS 2592...................... Thermoplastic flooring tiles
BS 3260...................... Semi-flexible PVC floor tiles
BS 3261...................... Unbacked flexible PVC flooring
BS 3416...................... Bitumen-based coatings for cold application, suitable for use in
BS 8000...................... Workmanship on building sites
BS 8203...................... Code of Practice for installation of sheet and tile flooring
10.1.3 Submittals
1 Approved Installers: work specified in this Section is to be executed out by experienced

operatives engaged by qualified installers approved by product manufacturers.

2 Submit for prior approval by the Supervision team/engineer the names of proposed installers
with reference to work of a similar nature carried out by them on other projects together with
relevant dates and any other information required by the Supervision team/engineer.
3 Samples: before placing orders submit for approval and selection of colors, representative
samples of each type of tile. Ensure that delivered materials match approved samples.
4 Control Samples: for each type of tile covering, complete sample areas, being part of the
finished work, in approved locations, size not less than 10 m2. Obtain approval of appearance
before proceeding.
10.2 FLEXIBLE FLOORING
10.2.1 Flexible Sheet and Tile Flooring
1 Unbacked PVC sheet flooring and homogeneous flooring to comply with BS 3261, Part 1,
Type “A”.
2 Thermoplastic floor tiles shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 2592.
3 PVC (Vinyl) asbestos floor tiles to comply with the relevant provisions of BS 3260.
4 Adhesives used for fixing PVC, thermoplastic or similar material in sheet or tile form are to
be as recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer.
5 Cork tiles shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 8203.
6 VINYL SHEET FLOORING WITH BACKING

(a) Product Standard: ASTM F1303.
(i) Type (Binder Content): Manufacturer’s standard.
(ii) Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1.
(iii) Thickness: 2 mm.
(iv) Backing Class: Manufacturer’s standard.
(b) Wearing Surface: Smooth.
(c) Sheet Width: 2m, unless otherwise indicated.
(d) Seamless-installation Method: Heat welded.
(e) Colors and Patterns: As selected by Engineer.
7 UNBACKED SHEET FLOORING

(a) Product Standard: ASTM F1913.
(b) Thickness Surface: 2.0 mm.
(c) Wearing Surface: Smooth.
(d) Seamless-installation: Method: Heat welded.
(e) Colors and Patterns: As selected by Engineer.
8 STATIC DISSIPATIVE VINYL FLOORING

(a) Standard: ASTM F 1859, Homogenous vinyl tile Type Ц.
(b) Electrical Resistance: Average no less than 1 megohm and no more than 1000
megohms when installed floor coverings are surface-to-ground tested according to
ASTM F150 with 100-V applied voltage.
(c) Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
9 RUBBER TILE FLOORING

(a) Rubber tile flooring: ASTM F1344; Sports floor tile, 610 mm x 610 mm x 6.4 mm
thick rubber flooring manufactured from natural and synthetic rubber.
10 Skirting: coved or straight pattern, types and sizes as shown on the Drawings and obtained
from manufacturer of material being fixed.
11 Edgings and Cover Strips: where not otherwise specified, are to be types recommended by
manufacturer of material being fixed, or in the absence of such recommendations types to
be approved.
10.2.2 Laying Flexible Sheet and Tile Flooring
1 Laying of flexible sheet or tile flooring shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant
provisions of BS 8203 and BS 8000, Part 11.
2 Floor screed is to be laid in accordance with Part 9 except that the requirement for laying in
bays will not apply.
(a) Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
3 The subfloor is to be smooth, hard, clean and dry before laying commences. All minor
irregularities, cracks and hollows are to receive a skim coat of proprietary levelling compound
as necessary to give a fine, true surface suitable to receive the flooring.
4 The Engineer may require all of the subfloor to be treated with levelling compound if, in his
opinion, the quality of the surface is unsuitable.
5 The flooring is to be laid with an adhesive that will be spread evenly over the subfloor with a
trowel recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Trowel ridges and high spots on the
subfloor will not be accepted.
6 Flexible PVC flooring, and other materials where the manufacturer so recommends, is to be
thoroughly rolled in two directions with a 70 kg/m2 weight applied floor roller.
7 Tiles are to be laid with tight joints and with sides parallel to the room axis.
8 Joints in sheet flooring are to be seam welded.
9 Laying tiles in General
Finished Coverings are to be accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and
free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.
Set Out Tiles from center of space or room, unless otherwise specified, so that wherever
possible tiles along opposite edges are of equal size and edge tiles are more than 50% of full
tile width.
Color Consistency: in any one space/room use only coverings from the same production
batch to prevent banding or patchiness resulting from color variation.
Patterns are to be accurately matched at joints and seams.

Heating of Tiles, when recommended by manufacturer, is to be carried out in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not overheat.
10 Adhesive Fixing:
use primer where recommended by adhesive manufacture; allow to dry thoroughly before
applying adhesive
spread adhesive evenly and lay covering, pressing down firmly and rolling, if recommended,
to ensure full contact and good bond overall
remove surplus adhesive from exposed faces of coverings as work proceeds
trowel ridges and high spots caused by particles on the substrate will not be accepted.
Adhesive bond testing shall be done before complete installation of the flexible flooring.
11 Border and Feature Strips of sheet material are to be cut along the length of the sheet to prevent
curl. Mitre joints at corners.
12 Doorways: make joint on center line of door leaf unless otherwise specified.
13 Edging and Cover Strips: fix securely, using matching fastenings where exposed to view,
ensuring that edge of covering is firmly fixed.
10.3 BITUMEN COATING SOLUTION
10.3.1 General
1 Bitumen coating solution shall comply with BS 3416, Type 1.
10.4 Completion
1 Cleaning Generally: remove all scrap, dust and dirt. Carefully remove adhesive and other
marks from coverings and adjacent surfaces, using approved cleaning agents and methods.
2 Finishing Vinyl Flooring: wash floor using mops dampened with water containing neutral
detergent. If necessary, lightly scrub heavily soiled areas using a brush or synthetic fiber
web pad. Thoroughly rinse with clean water, removing surplus to ensure no damage to
adhesive, and allow to dry. Apply two coats of emulsion polish of type recommended by
covering manufacturer.
3 Protection: cover flooring with clean dust sheets, hardboard or other suitable material to
prevent damage from dirt and traffic prior to substantial completion.
4 Waste: retain spare covering material suitable for patching. On completion hand over to the
Employer pieces selected by the Supervision team/engineer.
10.5 Workmanship
1 Quality of work: store, handle and install coverings and ancillary materials in accordance
with manufacturers' recommendations.

2 Marking: ensure that materials are delivered to site in original packing, clearly marked with
batch number.
3 Storage: store materials in a clean, warm, dry, well ventilated place. Keep in original
packing until conditioning commences.
4 Commencement: do not lay materials until building is weathertight, wet trades have
finished their work, the building is well dried out, all paintwork is finished and dry, and
floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are to be cut
have been fixed. Inform the Supervision team/engineer not less than 48 hours before
commencing laying.
5 Conditioning: before laying commences, thoroughly condition materials by unpacking and

spreading out in the spaces where they are to be laid. Minimum time and temperature are to
be as recommended by manufacturer.
6 Environment: before, during and after laying, maintain temperature and humidity
approximately at levels which will prevail after the building is occupied.
10.6 Finishing and Testing Anti-Static Flooring
1 Finishing: wash floor using mops dampened with water containing neutral detergent. If
necessary lightly scrub heavily soiled areas using a brush or synthetic fibre web pad.
Thoroughly rinse with clean water and allow to dry.
2 Testing: not less than 24 hours after washing, test electrical resistivity in the presence of the
Supervision team/engineer using equipment and procedures recommended in BS 2050.
Record results and submit to the Supervision team/engineer.
3 Marking : supply approved brass plate size approximately 50 × 75 mm, engraved with the
following details and fix in an approved position:
the words 'ANTI-STATIC FLOOR'
manufacturer and reference of flooring
name of flooring contractor
date when laid.
10.7 Ablution Sitting
1 Consists of a precast concrete sitting structure fixed to the floor using steel dowel pin
connection as per manufacturer’s detail. The dowel pin will be attached to the chemical anchor
system. The ablution sitting will have a finished outer cover shall be of stainless steel cover
grade 316L thickness not less than 4mm unless otherwise indicated. Detail shall be as
indicated on drawing.
11 RAISED FLOORING SYSTEM
11.1 General
Summary

This Part includes the general requirements necessary for, and incidental to, the complete
supply and installation of complete access flooring system including, but not limited, to the
following:
Access Flooring System as indicated in the drawings for specific technical rooms with
heights between 300 and 600mm and load.
11.2 Performance Requirement
1 Structural Performance: Provide access flooring system capable of withstanding the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined from testing to
be
conducted on Manufacturer’s current standard products by an independent testing agency,
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Ultimate Loads: Provide access flooring systems complying with, and capable of withstanding
the minimum requirement of, the following Ultimate Load Class without failing, per static
loading test procedure set in Part 5.2.1 of EN 12825:
Working Load: Provide access flooring systems complying with the indicated Deflection
Class when applied with a working load equivalent to the Ultimate Load divided by the
indicated
Safety Factor, per static loading test procedure set in Part 5.2.1 of EN 12825:
(a) Deflection Class: A; not more than 2.5mm, per Table 2 of EN 12825.
Pedestal Axial Load: Provide pedestal assemblies capable of withstanding a load not less
than four (4) times the indicated Working Load, per pedestal vertical load test procedure set
in Part 5.3.1 of EN 12825.
Permanent Deformation: Provide access flooring system capable of withstanding a 30-

minute sustained load equivalent to indicated Working Load without evidence of permanent
deflection exceeding 0.5mm, per permanent deformation test procedure set in Part 5.4 of EN
12825.
Dynamic Loading: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding the following
dynamic load tests without failing:
Hard Body Impact: Drop of a of 4.5 kg (±0.05) hard-body mass from a height of 600mm to
predetermined positions in the access floor panel, per hard body impact test procedure set in
Part of EN 12825.
Soft Body Impact: Drop of a of 40 kg (±0.8) soft-body mass from a height of 1000mm to
predetermined positions in the access floor panel, per soft body impact test procedure set in
Part 5.5.2 of EN 12825.
Dimensional Deviation: Provide access floor panels complying with indicated dimensional
and positional limits set for Class 1 as specified in Table 3 “Deviation of Panel
Dimensions”, per test procedures set in Part 5.6 of EN 12825:
Length of Panel Sides: ±0.2

Squareness of Panel: ±0.3
Straightness of Sides Horizontally: ±0.3
Panel Thickness (Without Coverings): ±0.3
Panel Thickness (With Coverings): ±0.3

Panel Twist: ±0.5

Vertical Warping of Panel: ±0.3
Difference in Height Between Perimeter Trims and Panel Surface: ±0.3
Acoustic Insulation: Provide access floor systems, including panel coverings, having the
following acoustic properties, when tested according EN ISO 140-12:
Airborne Sound Insulation (Rw): Not less than 38.

Impact Sound Insulation (LnT1w): Not more than 62.
Panel Cutout: Panel with a 200mm diameter interior cutout supported on actual
understructure shall be capable of maintaining its working load (design load) strength
anywhere on the panel without the use of additional supports.
2 Electrostatic Conductivity: Where indicated or required, provide access flooring assemblies

complying with EN 1081, EN 1815, or HD 384.6.61, where relevant.
11.3 Submittals
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1 Submit shop drawings showing complete system including floor panel layout and cutout
location, special edge conditions, cable cut-outs, fascia, receptacles and other fixings which
are to be installed on top or bottom of access floor system.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for the preparation.
Samples: For each type of flooring material and exposed finishes indicated or as required by
the Architect.
Carpet Tile: Full-size units.

Carpet Trim: Size equal to full-size floor panel.
Solid Vinyl Tile: Full-size units.
Plastic Laminate: Size equal to full-size floor panel.
Resilient Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 300mm in length.
Exposed Metal Accessories: 300mm in length.
One complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for each type of access
flooring system required.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer; for each type of product indicated.
Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Installer.
Product Test Report: Based on comprehensive test performed by an independent testing

agency, acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty to be issued upon completion of Project.
Manufacturer’s Qualification: Manufacturer shall be 9001:2000 certified or one certified as

employing an equivalent or higher system of quality management; having a minimum of Ten
(10) years documented experience in the manufacture of product/s specified in this Part;

and capable of providing field service representation, as required by Engineer, during

installation.
Installer's Qualification: Certified by the Manufacturer as authorized installer of access

flooring system products specified in this Part; highly-experienced; with a successful in-
service record in the installation of products similar in material and scope as those required
for the Project.
Source Limitation: Obtain product through one source from a single Manufacturer.
Regulatory Requirement: Fabrication and installation of access flooring system to comply

with BS EN 13501-1, “Fire Classification of Construction Products and Building Elements-
Classification Using Test Data From Reaction to Fire Tests and BS EN 13501- 2, “Fire
Classification Of Construction Products And Building Elements-Classification Using Data
From Fire Resistance Tests, Excluding Ventilation Services”; for each type of products and
application indicated.
Provide panel which are clearly and permanently marked on their underside with panel type
and concentrated load rating.
Pre-installation Conference: To be held at site prior to installation of system.
Review connection with mechanical and electrical systems, where required.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
11.5 Project Conditions
Environmental Limitations: Do not install system until spaces are enclosed, with ambient
temperature between 4 deg. C and 32 deg. C and relative humidity not more than 60 percent.
11.6 Coordination
Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in under floor cavity to prevent
interference with access flooring pedestal.
Mark pedestal locations on sub-floor by use of a grid to enable electrical and mechanical
work to proceed without interfering with access flooring pedestal.
Proceed with installation of access flooring system only after completion of other
construction within affected spaces.
11.7 Maintenance and Repair
Where possible, engage suppliers and manufacturers of materials, products and equipments
specified for the Project from companies having an office and maintenance service based in
Qatar.
11.8 Warranty
Special Warranty: Written warranty made out to the Employer by the Manufacturer and
countersigned by the Installer, agreeing to repair or replace works that fail in material or
workmanship within the specified warranty period.

11.9 PRODUCTS
11.9.1 Floor Panel and Understructure
General: Provide modular panels complying with requirements indicated and can be
interchanged using portable lifting device with other field panels without disturbing adjacent
panels or understructure.
Floor Panels: Made of the following core and encapsulation material and panel facing; with
manufacturer’s standard non-conductive synthetic protective trim on panel edges.
Core Material: Reinforced high-density CALCIUM SULPHATE core Encapsulation

Materials: Manufacturer’s standard; factory-bonded to core:
Top and Bottom: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
Side Edges: Non-conductive synthetic trim.
Panel Face Material: As specified in “Floor Panel Covering” article.

Nominal Size: 600mm x 600mm
Thickness: As indicated in the Drawing, but not less than 35mm.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances with squareness
tolerances expressed as the difference between diagonal measurements from corner to
corner.
Panel Attachment to Understructure: By bolting to pedestal head. Provide panels with holes
drilled in corners to align precisely with threaded holes in pedestal heads and to accept
countersunk screws with heads flush with top of panel.
Pedestal: Assembly consisting of base, column with provision for height adjustment and
head (cap); made of galvanized steel and passivated against corrosion.
Base: Square or circular shape with not less than 103 sq.cm. of bearing area.
Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to desired level above level of
substructure.
Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated; provide sound-damping pads or

gaskets at contact point between heads and panels.
Stringer System: (Applicable for 300mm height above slab) where indicated or required,
provide modular stringer system forming a grid and attached to pedestals with bolted or
snapon interlocking connections to provide a stable understructure and to prevent accidental
disengagement.
Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and stringers to deaden sound,
to seal off under floor cavity from above, and to maintain panel alignment and position.
Steel components shall be protected with Manufacturer’s standard galvanized or corrosion-

resistant paint finish.
11.9.2 Panel Face Material
Provide the following factory-bonded panel face materials; as indicated on Drawings and
specified in Section “Finishes” of this Specification:

Static-Control Solid Vinyl Floor covering: To ASTM F 1700; Class I; fabricated in onepiece
to cover panel within perimeter plastic edging.
Static-Control HPL Laminate: To NEMA LD 3; high-wear type, fabricated in one- piece to
cover panel within perimeter plastic edging or with integral trim serving as edging.
Provide floor panel covering with surface finish complying with ANSI A1264.2“Standard
for the Provision of Slip Resistance on Walking/Working Surfaces.
Peel Resistance: Provide panel covering having a peel resistance of more than 0.8 N/mm,
when tested according to procedures set in EN 12825.
Where access panel are required, provide factory-applied floor coverings of type matching
construction, color and thickness of adjacent floor covering material specified.
Accessories: Provide Manufacturer’s standard accessories as indicated in the shop drawings

or as specified in the Drawing.
Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor. Shall be
compatible with finish of subfloor.
Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets.
Provide reinforcements or additional support as necessary, to make panels with cutouts
comply with performance requirement.
Service Outlet: Standards UL-listed and –labeled assemblies for power, communications
and signal services.
Diffusers: Manufacturer's standard diffusers, formed from aluminum or polycarbonate

plastic to produce a removable 1-piece unit complete with diffuser, manually adjustable
flow regulator, dirt and dust receptacle, trim ring, and under floor compression mounting
ring; precisely fitted in factory-prepared openings of standard field panels, complying with
requirements for air distribution and structural performance, and as follows:
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Classified 94V-0 per UL 94.
Floor Grilles: Standard load-bearing grilles formed from aluminum or polycarbonate

plastic to produce removable one-piece unit precisely fitted in factory-prepared openings of
standard field panels, with adjustable or removable dampers where required,
complying with requirements for air distribution and structural performance, and as follows:
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Classified 94V-0 per UL 94.
Cavity Dividers: Provide manufacturer's standard metal dividers located where indicated to
divide under floor cavities.
Vertical Closures (Fasciae): Where under floor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls or
other construction, provide metal-closure plates with manufacturer's standard finish.
Ramps (As Applicable): Manufacturer's standard ramp construction of width and slope
indicated but not steeper than 1:12, with raised-disc or textured rubber or vinyl floor
coverings, and of same materials, performance, and construction requirements as access
flooring.
Steps (As Applicable): Provide steps of size and arrangement indicated with floor coverings
to match access flooring. Apply nonslip aluminum nosing to treads, unless otherwise
indicated.

Railings: Where indicated or required, provide standard extruded-aluminum railings, at

ramps and open-sided perimeter of access flooring where indicated. Include handrail,
intermediate rails, posts, brackets, end caps, wall returns, wall and floor flanges, plates, and
anchorages where required.
Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for supporting
panel edge and forming transition between access flooring and adjoining floor coverings at
same level as access flooring.
Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device of type required for
specified panels.
11.9.3 Other Materials
Provide other materials, not specifically described or indicated but required for the complete
and proper installation of access flooring system, as recommended in writing by the
manufacturer.
11.10 EXECUTION
Examination
Examine substrates, with Installer and Manufacturer’s representative present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other condition affecting
performance of work.
Verify that substrate complies with tolerances indicated and that substrate is free of crack,
ridges, depressions, scale, foreign deposits and debris that might interfere with attachment of
pedestals.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory condition has been corrected
11.11 Preparation
Layout floor panel installation to keep number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a
minimum. Avoid using panels cut to less than 150mm.
Locate each pedestal, complete all necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean
subfloor to remove dust, dirt and construction debris before beginning installation.
11.12 Installation
Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of Manufacturer’s

authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with
performance requirements and free of instability, rocking, rattles and squeaks.
Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended in writing by access flooring Manufacturer to

provide full bearing of pedestal base on sub-floor.
Adjust pedestal to permit top of installed panels to set flat, level, and to proper height.
Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access flooring Manufacturer’s written
instructions.

Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force
panels into place.
Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids
greater than 3mm where panel abut vertical surfaces.
Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt- or debris-producing activities at a
remote location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring
already installed.
Ground flooring system as recommended by Manufacturer.
Scribe and install under floor cavity dividers to closely fit against subfloor surfaces, and seal
with mastic.
Scribe vertical closures to closely fit against subfloor surfaces and adjacent finished floor
surfaces. Set in mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within under floor cavity.
Clean dust, dirt and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor
area as installation of floor panels proceed.
11.13 Adjusting, Cleaning and Protection
Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after
installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.
After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheet
of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial
Completion.
Replace access flooring panels that are stained,
12 CEILINGS
11.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for suspended ceiling systems of lay-in type and fixed
type construction.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 3 Dry lining (Wallboard)
Part 10 Joints, Caulking and Sealants
Section 17 Metal Work

Section 18 Carpentry
11.1.2 References


BS 476........................ Fire tests and building materials and structures
BS 1191...................... Gypsum building plasters
BS 1230...................... Gypsum plasterboard
BS 5492...................... Code of practice for internal plastering
BS8000...................... Workmanship on building sites
BS 8212...................... Code of practice for dry lining and partitioning using gypsum
plasterboard
BS 8290...................... Suspended ceilings
1 The suspended ceilings shall not be installed until:
(a) the building is weathertight

(b) the wet trades have finished their work
(c) all work above the ceilings such as ductwork, pipework and electrical work has been
installed, tested, inspected and approved
(d) the positions of light fittings, diffusers and the like have been checked
(e) the position of access panels have been confirmed with the Engineer.
2 The ceiling shall be installed to within 3 mm of required level. When measured against a
straight edge over a distance of 3 m, the gap between the straight edge and the ceiling shall
not exceed 3 mm.
3 The manufacturer’s recommendations for the use and installation of products covered in this
Part shall be strictly adhered to unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
4 Existing conditions shall be inspected before commencing installation of suspended ceilings

to ensure the following:
(a) that services all have been installed

(b) that fastenings and supports installed by others are in place
(c) that installation of others will not touch the back of ceiling system.
The Contractor shall verify to the Engineer in writing that such inspections has
been performed and that work is ready to commence.
11.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor is to submit shop drawings showing general layout, support framing, and
installation details including lay-in, hanger and support details.
2 Samples of support framing, lay-in, lay-in hangers and hanger insert are to be submitted for
approval.
3 Suspended ceilings shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 8212 and BS 8290.

4 Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
5 Samples: For each exposed product and for each colour and texture specified, 150-mm- in
size.
6 Samples for Initial Selection: Submit samples of all standard colours and finishes for
membranes and rails.
7 Source Limitations: Obtain through one source from a single manufacturer.
8 Control Samples: for each type of ceiling erect an area of finished work not less than 10 m2
in an approved location and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
9 Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
Ceiling suspension-system members.

Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors,
clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
Size and location of initial access modules.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
10 Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mock-ups of typical suspended ceiling, complete, directed by the Supervision

team/engineer.
Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
11 Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
11.1.5 Guarantee
1 General Guarantee: The special guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
2 Guarantee: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer, Contractor and Installer are
jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without limitations, all or any
part of suspended ceilings that fail in materials, finishes or workmanship within specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Discoloration of ceiling tiles or panels

Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability
period or as mentioned in the contract (IF ANY)
11.2 LAY-IN TYPE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
11.2.1 General
1 The lay-in material shall be tile, plank or strip membrane, as detailed in the Project
Documentation.
2 The lay-in material shall have a fire performance when tested in accordance with BS 476
which satisfies the requirements of:
(a) class 0 - BS 476, Part 6.

(b) class 1 - BS 476, Part 7.
3 The Contractor shall produce certificates that certify that the requirements of Clause 14.2.1-
2 are met.
4 For acoustic performance and requirements, refer to acoustic report.
5 The suspension system and shall be constructed from hot dipped galvanized steel sections
and galvanized wire or similar non-corrodable materials and fixings.
5 Gypsum Acoustic Suspended Ceilings: Not less than 12.5 mm thick and size available as per
manufacturer standard, reinforced water resistant and hygiene gypsum panels with square cut
edges with 20% perforated surface. Secure to concealed grid of galvanized steel tee sections
with pre-decorated enamelled aluminium sleeve over exposed surfaces, secured to steel main
runners fixed to suspension rods or wires secured to structural ceiling.
6 Mineral-Fiber-Base Acoustical Panels Design as the following:

Standard: ASTM E1264 Classification
Colour: As selected by Engineer.
Texture: Lightly textured, unless otherwise indicated.
Edges: Angled Tegular (SLT), unless otherwise indicated.
Size: As indicated.
Thickness: As indicated.
NRC Noise Reduction Absorption: 0.95.
Fire Class: Class A.
Fire Performance UL 723 (ASTM E84) Flame Spread / Smoke Developed: 0/0.
Sag Resistance: Dimensionally stable up to 100% relative humidity/32 degrees F to 104
degrees F.
7 Acoustical Panels

(a) Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to

ASTM E1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance
unless otherwise indicated.
(b) Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
(c) Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.90
(d) Edge/Joint Detail: Square.
(e) Thickness: 19 mm.
(f) Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial
formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria
and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D3273,
ASTM D3274, or ASTM G21 and evaluated according to ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21.
11.2.2 Installation
1 The tiles shall be set out so that:
(a) the soffits are level, free from undulations and lipping, with all lines and joints
straight and parallel to walls unless shown otherwise in the Project Documentation
(b) they are symmetrical about the centre lines of the roof, or space, beginning with a
tile or joint line as required to avoid narrow tiles at the perimeter edges.
2 At junctions between the ceiling and walls, and between the ceiling and columns, the ceiling
shall be finished with perimeter edge trim. The trim shall be fixed at maximum 450 mm
centres.
3 Additional hanging supports shall be provided between the floor or roof structure above and
the suspended ceiling at all access panels, light fittings, diffusers, etc. The lay-in material
shall be accurately cut to accommodate all such fittings. Under no circumstance shall any
fitting be supported by the lay-in material.
4 Care shall be taken to ensure that the tiles, planks and strip membrane are kept clean if
subsequently removed for access to services, for inspection or for remedial work.
11.2.3 Workmanship Generally
1 Suspended Ceilings Generally: unless otherwise specified, comply with the relevant
recommendations and performance requirements of BS EN 13964 for the selection and
assembly of components and materials.
2 Conditions: do not install suspended ceiling material until building is weathertight, wet trades
have finished their work and services are above level of ceiling are complete. Before, during
and after installation maintain temperature and humidity at levels similar to those which will
prevail after building is occupied.
3 Conditioning: before fixing, store ceiling tiles materials on site for at least 48 hours in
conditions similar to those which will prevail after building is occupied. Ensure free
circulation of air to surfaces.
4 Coordination: co-ordinate the work of this Section with that of other trades to ensure that:
related works within ceiling voids: electrical and mechanical services, partitions, fire barriers,
fire stopping, painting and the like; are at a suitable stage of completion to enable ceiling
installation to proceed without damage or disfigurement to the ceiling system

fixtures around which the ceiling is to be installed are completed and that services, fire barriers
and the like are in the correct position relative to the ceiling grid
hangers do not press against services or fittings and are installed vertically. Where
obstructions prevent vertical installation ensure that hangers are braced against lateral
movement or provide rigid bridging structures across obstructions
services integrated within the suspended ceiling are positioned accurately, supported
adequately and aligned and levelled in relation to the ceiling tiles and suspension system.
11.2.4 Erecting Suspended Ceilings
1 Quality Of Work: handle, store and fix suspended ceiling materials and accessories in
accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and BS EN 13964, ensuring compliance
with design and performance requirements. Set out accurately to give level soffits free from
undulations and lipping with lines and joints straight and parallel to walls unless specified
otherwise.
2 Setting Out: where not shown otherwise set out ceilings to ensure that edge tiles/sheets are
never less than half in width or length. Position grid to suit tile/sheet sizes, allowing for
permitted deviations from nominal sizes.
3 Irregular Spaces: where surrounding walls or other building elements and features to which
suspended ceiling relate are not square, straight or level obtain instructions on setting out.
4 Joints in Grid Members: position at points of contraflexure unless recommended otherwise by

grid manufacturer or method of jointing is such that grid member acts as a continuous beam.
5 Deflection of suspension grid members between supports is to be not more than 3 mm.
6 Access Panels: agree types, sizes and positions with the Supervision team/engineer before
commencing suspended ceiling installations.
7 Openings in Suspended Ceiling Materials are to be formed accurately and neatly to suit sizes
and edge details of fittings, using methods recommended by the manufacturer and without
causing damage or distortion.
8 Fire Resisting Ceilings: provide suitable means of accommodating expansion due to

temperature increase in a fire. Expansion allowance per unit length is to be not less than that
used in relevant fire test of ceiling system. Seal gaps around pipes, ducts etc. passing through
ceiling, with tightly packed mineral fibre.
9 Fire Stopping: seal any gaps at junctions of ceiling with walls, cavity barriers, ducts, pipes,
etc., with mineral wool or other approved material to prevent penetration of smoke and flame.
10 Wire Hangers: install vertically and ensure that:
hangers are carefully straightened before use, installed without bends or kinks and do not press
against any fittings within the void
hangers are tied at top and bottom with tight bends to loops to prevent any vertical movement.
11 Insulation to be fitted accurately and firmly with no gaps so that specified performance levels
are achieved. Ensure that:

insulation within individual tiles, trays, etc., is fitted closely and secured to prevent
displacement when tiles are installed or subsequently lifted. Reseal any cut dustproof sleeving
insulation is laid out over the ceiling tiles in the widest practical widths to suit spacings of
grid members, with closely butted joints
electrical cables are not covered and insulation is cut carefully around electrical fittings and
the like
on sloping and vertical areas of ceiling, fastenings are used to prevent displacement.
12 Cavity Fire Barriers: unless otherwise indicated, install barriers to subdivide the ceiling void
into areas as directed by the Supervision team/engineer.
fit tightly and fix securely at perimeters and joints, using methods recommended by the barrier
manufacturer, including steel support sections as appropriate. Ensure permanent stability and
continuity with no gaps to achieve the performance specified
seal any gaps at junctions of cavity barriers with suspended ceiling, structural soffit, walls,
ducts, pipes, etc. using mineral wool or other approved material to prevent penetration of
smoke and flame
ensure that fixing to ceiling does not impair free expansion of grid system or otherwise affect
fire resisting performance.
13 Sound Barriers:
align accurately with partition heads. Fit tightly and fix securely at perimeters and joints, using
methods recommended by the barrier manufacturer, including steel support sections as
appropriate. Ensure permanent stability and continuity with no gaps
seal any gaps at junctions of sound barriers with partition heads, suspended ceiling, structural
soffit, walls, ducts, pipes, etc. using mineral wool or suitable sealants.
14 Protect suspended ceilings from damage and dirt. Ensure ceiling tiles materials are handled
carefully and kept clean if subsequently removed for access to services, for inspection or
remedial work.
11.3 FIXED TYPE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
1 Gypsum board will be used for fixed type suspended ceilings unless otherwise indicated in
the Project Documentation.
2 Installation of gypsum board for suspended ceilings and associated plaster or rending work
shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 1191 and BS 5492.
11.3.2 Materials

1 Gypsum board suspended ceiling: shall be 12.7 mm thick gypsum plasterboard complying
with BS 1230, having one face finished for direct decoration.
Provide gypsum board ceilings as indicated on drawings, Legend Finishes and as follows:
(a) Gypsum Plasterboard Generally: wallboards and baseboards to BS EN 520:2004. Select

type recommended and suitable for particular use, purpose, exposure and finish; 15 mm thick
with tapered edges unless otherwise indicated. Gypsum boards shall be as follows
Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type: Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. With moisture- and mold-
resistant core and paper surfaces.
(g) Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type, unless otherwise indicated.
(h) Long Edges: Tapered.
(i) Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.
Type: Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M.

(a) Thickness: Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
(b) Long Edges: Tapered.
Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or bevelled) for prefilling.
Paint for gypsum ceiling in clean room shall be suitable for area of application / environment.
Submit necessary testing for Supervision team/engineer's approval.
2 Thermal wall board shall comply with Table 3.1 of Part 3 of this Section and shall consist of
an insulation core having a thermal conductivity of not less than 0.037 W/m ºC bonded on
one side to gypsum wall board and on the reverse side with a water-vapour resistant
membrane.
3 The edge profiles of wall board shall be:
(a) “tapered” for smooth seamless jointing.

(b) “bevelled” for V-jointing.
(c) “square” for stippled textured coatings, cornerstrip jointing or plaster.
4 Accessories for installing wallboard shall be approved proprietary materials recommended

by the manufacturer of the wallboard or ceiling system, inclusive of the following:
(a) soffit assemblies, where indicated on drawings shall consist of galvanized steel
channel runners and studs faced with gypsum panels, screw attached unless specified
otherwise and approved by the Engineer
(b) hangers, hanger attachments, support carrier members with connectors, and trim
members related to ceiling as is required for complete
(c) fabricated miscellaneous clips, splices, connectors, screws, and other standard metal
accessories of strength and design compatible with the suspension methods and
system.

5 Cavity Fire Barriers: asbestos-free, noncombustible board based on exfoliated vermiculite

bonded with inorganic binders:
fire resistance : to BS 476- 20, 21 and 23

integrity/insulation : As indicated
6 Sound Barriers:
Material: rockwool slabs of 200 kg/m3 density. Refer to Section 15
11.3.3 Installation
1 The Contractor shall ensure that adequate preparation is made for attachment of hangers and
fasteners and provide for support and incorporation of flush-mounted and recessed fittings
and service components.
2 The ceiling system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and
to BS 8290 Part 3.
3 Suspended and Furred Ceilings:
Unless otherwise specified suspend ceiling hangers and support framing from building
structure and as follows:
install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system
where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or
equivalent devices; size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced standards
secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and
in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail
secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate
for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them
to deteriorate or otherwise fail
do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms; furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms
do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs
do not attach hangers to steel roof deck; attach hangers to structural members
do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit
install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less
than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard:

wire hangers: 1200 mm centers
carrying channels (main

runners): 1200 mm centers
furring channels (furring

members): 400 mm centers
installation tolerances: install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-
furring or grid suspension members are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m as measured both
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members
wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as
indicated.
Unless otherwise specified, fix, join and finish boards using methods and materials as
recommended by the board manufacturer and as follows
where not shown otherwise, provide movement joints as appropriate for the area of ceiling
and/or to coincide with movement joints in surrounding structure
cut boards neatly and accurately without damaging surfaces and cores. Do not use damaged
boards
screw boards securely and firmly to grid members to give a flat surface free from bowing
and lipping. Set heads of screws below surface of boards and fill flush with surface
stagger joints of boards applied in two or more layers. Ensure that edges and ends of each
board are fully supported and screwed to grid members.
4 Taped Seamless Finish:
lightly sand cut edges of boards to remove paper burrs; apply PVAC sealer to exposed cut
edges of boards to which tape is to be applied
fill all joints and gaps and cover with continuous lengths of tape, fully bedded; when set,
cover with joint finish, feathered out to give a flush, smooth, seamless surface; apply two
coats of joint finish at external angles
spot nail and screw depressions with joint filler and when set apply a continuous overall coat
of joint finish, feathered off to give a flush, smooth surface
fill minor indents and, after joint, angle and spotting treatments have dried, apply surface
finish slurry to give a continuous, consistent texture to surface of boards.
12 GLASS REINFORCED CONCRETE CLADDING AND FEATURES (GRC)
12.1 Scope: this Section is for the specification of Decorative glass reinforced concrete (GRC)
profiled sheet and panel wall cladding and related accessories. These panels are for decorative
purpose only and are of no structural value.

12.2 INTEGRITY OF CLADDING
12.2.1 Determine sizes and thickness of cladding panels, sizes, number and spacing of fixings,
configuration and location of secondary support systems and incorporation of accessories to
ensure the cladding system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and
accommodate deflections and thermal movements without damage.
Dead loads: To BS EN 1991-1-4.
Resist all dead and live and wind loads in accordance with QCS, based on prevailing site
conditions.
The wind loads shall be calculated based on the wind speed provided in Section 1 part 1
clause 1.5.2.
Account shall be taken of the loads and deformation caused by temperature and time
dependent deformations. For such purpose 55 °C temperature variation and 90 % relative
humidity should be considered for all members, except exterior elements and façade
elements shall consider 85 oC.
Precast elements shall be designed in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1 or relevant ACI

code. Design tensile stresses should not exceed the design flexure tensile stress of concrete,
at the particular age of the concrete.
50-year return period Wind Speed:
(a) Nominal wind speed for 3 sec gust ……… 38 m/s (A per ASCE 7-05 / IBC 2012)
(b) Mean hourly wind speed…………….…… 25 m/s (as per BS 6399-2)
(c) Mean 10 minutes wind speed…………… 27 m/s (as per BS EN 1991-1-4).
12.2.2 Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of cladding panels, sizes, number and spacing of
fixings, configuration and location of secondary support systems and incorporation of
accessories to ensure the cladding system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live
loads, and accommodate deflections and thermal movements without damage. Submit
calculation sheets for Engineers approval.
12.2.3 Panel accuracy Finished dimensions of completed panels: Within the permissible deviations
given in BS 8297, table 11.
12.2.4 Accuracy of molds: Check overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and flatness of
molds immediately before each reuse, and of each unit as soon as possible after demolding.
Adjust molds as necessary.
12.3 SUBMITTALS
12.3.1 DRAWINGS:
provide co-ordination, fabrication and installation drawings and other information showing
such details of the work as the Engineer may reasonably require.
including but not necessarily limited to:
layouts of sheets and panels

details of sheet and panel profiles, corner and edge conditions, joints, supports, anchorages,
and fasteners, underlays, trim, flashings, gutters, closures, guards, and any special details
distinguish between factory and field-assembled work.
12.3.2 SAMPLES: at an agreed stage in the detailed design work, make a sample of the proposed
construction, size 500 x 1000 mm, showing the proposed colour, texture and incorporating
a completed section of a joint and each type of fixing. Obtain approval of appearance
before proceeding.
12.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
12.4.1 Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties. Submit test reports for: Specify flame spread, tensile
strength, light transmission, etc.
12.4.2 Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements
12.4.3 Manufacturer's Instructions: manufacturer's installation instructions
12.4.4 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified herein.
12.4.5 Installer Qualifications:
A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years
documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by the product
manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty.
Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Owners, and
other information specified.
12.4.6 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS:
manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction, approving

acceptable installer and approving application method.
12.4.7 FIRE-TEST-RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS:
provide GRC fabrications with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by

testing identical products per by Chiltern International Fire, UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to the Engineer as follows:
BS 476-4: Non-combustible.
BS 476-6: Fire propagation, class 0.
BS 476-7: Surface spread of flame, class 1, zero spread.
12.5 WARRANTY:
12.5.1 provide a written warranty stating that the GRC products are guaranteed against warping,
delamination, chalking, cracking, crazing, discoloration, breakage or loosening from
mountings (other than by malicious cause) for the period stated in the QCS 2014 or in the
Contract conditions, from the date of Final Certificate of Completion.

12.6 Materials
12.6.1 Glass Fibre: Alkali-resistant continuous filament fibre. comply with GRCA 'Specification for
alkali resistant glassfibre rovings and chopped strands for reinforcement of cements and
concretes'.
12.6.2 Cement: To BS EN 197-1, CEM 1 Portland cement.
12.6.3 Sand: Type: Silica sand to GRCA 'Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of
GRC products'.
12.6.4 Mixing Water: To BS EN 1008.
12.6.5 Admixtures: Type: Submit proposals. Do not use Calcium chloride based admixtures if GRC
contains cast-in steel.
12.6.6 Pigments: To BS EN 12878. Type: Powder pigments or dispersions that have proven
successful use in GRC.
12.6.7 Mould-Release Agent: The mould-release agent shall be selected by the manufacturer and
approved by the architect or engineer. This should be compatible with the surface finish
required for the product. Any residue shall be removed from the finished product so that this
does not interfere with any joint sealants or applied finishes which may be use.
12.7 CLADDING AND FEATURES
12.7.1 Grc Cladding Panels:
panels shall be composite sheets comprising polyester resin, glass fiber, pigments and fire
retardant with homogeneous through colour. Panels may include natural aggregate/powder
and/or calcium carbonate powder and shall have high resistance to erosion and vandalism and
shall not delaminate under any condition. Comply with requirements of BS EN 1169
Backing mix and production method: Submit proposals for Engineers approval.
Construction: Single skin panels attached to stud frames
Finish: Unless otherwise indicated as selected by the Supervision team/engineer from

manufacturers’ full range.
Colour: As selected by Supervision team/engineer from manufacturer's standard line of

colours or factory approved special colour.
12.7.2 Fixings And Accessories
Fixings: to be of a suitable type as recommended for particular purpose by GRC cladding

manufacturer, of stainless steel, non-ferrous metal or GRC, to avoid bimetallic corrosion and
to give ample adjustability in three dimensions.
Material: stainless steel, grade 1.4401 (316); bolts/ threaded rods austenitic stainless steel,
grade A2 class 70.
Isolation of fixings: Separate dissimilar metals at risk of bimetallic corrosion with suitable
plastics washer, sleeves etc.
12.7.3 Jointing Materials

12.7.3.1 Sealant Jointing: Class to BS EN ISO 11600.
12.7.3.2 Joint Sealant: a high performance, low modulus, one-component, moisture curing, modified
polyurethane joint sealant:
12.7.3.3 Joint Sealant: Ultra-low-modulus, one-part, neutral-cure silicone sealant that cures to a
durable, fire-resistant, flexible silicone rubber joint seal. It is used for weathersealing high-
Movement Expansion And Control Joints.
12.8 Workmanship
12.8.1 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Complete the design and detailing of the work and provide complete production information
including fabrication and installation drawings, design calculations and specifications for
claddings, mouldings, fixings and jointing.
12.8.2 Integrity:
cladding and associated features are to:
be weathertight under all conditions with full allowance made for deflections and other
movements
resist all dead and live loads; wind loads are to be calculated in accordance with BS EN 1991-
1-4, based on prevailing site conditions
accommodate without damage all drying shrinkage, creep, deflections and thermal
movements.
12.8.3 Manufacture
submit the name of the proposed cladding manufacturer, with reference to work of a similar
nature carried out on other projects together with relevant dates and any other information
required by the Engineer.
12.8.3.1 PROGRAMME:
submit proposed program for the manufacture, including moulding and curing and delivery
of cladding units.
12.8.4 Quality Of Work:
manufacture units carefully to ensure compliance with design and performance requirements,
using materials and workmanship appropriate for the purpose
all materials are to be compatible with each other, and stored and used in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations; resins are to be used as supplied and not adulterated; fillers
and admixtures are to be used only where authorized
standard of finish is to be appropriate to the end use and position in the building; ensure that
defects such as wrinkling, spotting, striations, fibre patterning, fish eyes, blisters, crazing,
cracking, dry patches and uneven or inconsistent colour do not occur.
12.8.5 Workshop Conditions:

Workshops are to be warm, clean, dry and well ventilated. Manufacture is to be suspended if
the temperature falls below 10 deg. C or if dew point is reached.
12.8.6 Patterns:
inform the Engineer when each master pattern is complete and not less than 7 days before
commencing manufacture of moulds.
12.8.7 Manufacturing Accuracy:
finished dimensions of completed units are to be such that the cladding, when erected,
complies with the requirements for accuracy of erection, and all sizes fall within the following
permissible deviations:
width and height: +0; -2 mm
straightness of edges deviation: 3 mm, any variation to be evenly distributed

from intended line with no sudden bends or
irregularities
flatness: deviation under a 1 m

straight edge placed anywhere on a
flat panel surface: 3 mm
12.8.8 Gel Coats To External Grc Surfaces:
mix resins thoroughly; all units of one colour are to have gel coats from the same colour batch
of resin
apply evenly to give an overall nominal thickness of 500 microns
check wet film thickness of gel coats of all units; if single gel coating is used, no reading is to
be less than 400 microns nor more than 600 microns; if double gel coating is to be used, submit
proposals for coat thickness limits based on the resin manufacturer's recommendations, and
obtain approval.
12.8.9 Laminating
each GRC skin contains not less than 900 g/m2 of glass fibre, in not less than 2 layers
random reinforcement is distributed uniformly, and non random reinforcement is correctly

positioned and aligned
each layer of woven fabric reinforcement has a layer of chopped strand mat on both sides
glass is fully wetted out by the resin, with a resin to glass ratio of not less than 2 to 1, higher
as appropriate
there is good overall bond between all gel coats and all layers of laminate
the GRC is well consolidated and free from air voids.
12.8.10 Cores, Ribs Etc:

ensure that all core materials, ties, ribs, fixings and accessories are fully bonded to the GRC
skins over the full contact surface area.
12.8.11 Sealing Of Units:
apply a flow coat to all surfaces of the finished units which are not gel coated
thoroughly seal all cut edges, holes etc., to protect the glass fibre from penetration of moisture.
12.8.12 Curing:
Units are to be adequately cured at not less than 50 deg. C (higher as necessary) for not less
than 8 hours (longer as necessary). Ensure that units are not distorted whilst being cured.
12.8.13 Inspection:
Completed units are to be carefully inspected and checked by the manufacturer for match with
approved samples and compliance with the Specification before dispatch to site. Make
arrangements with the Engineer for him to inspect completed units in the shop.
12.8.14 Erection, Fixing And Jointing
12.8.14.1 Grc Manufacturer:
Provide clear and comprehensive instructions and ensure that they are understood by site
operatives
Provide adequate site supervision by a suitably skilled person.
12.8.14.2 Protection:
prevent mechanical damage and disfigurement; separate units during transport and storage to
prevent chaffing; pad all slings, ropes, bearers, ladders etc.
support units as necessary so that they do not bow, twist or distort
adequately protect units from weather; surfaces not having a weathering gel coat must not
have prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or water
do not cover units with plastics sheeting or stick adhesive tape on exposed surfaces
store fixing and jointing materials indoors
do not deliver to site any units which cannot be erected immediately or unloaded into a suitable
well protected storage area.
12.8.14.3 Before commencing erection, survey the structure, including any fixing inserts. Report to the
Engineer immediately if structure will not allow the required accuracy of erection.
12.8.14.4 Accuracy Of Erection:
erect units using temporary spacers to suit the survey results and ensure generally consistent
joint widths

within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations across transverse joints) the
greatest width must not exceed the least width by more than 25%, any variation being evenly
distributed with no sudden changes
offset in elevation between nominally in-line edges across a transverse joint must not be more
than 15% of the width of the transverse joint
offset in plan or section between flat faces of adjacent panels across any joint must not be
more than 15% of the width of the joint
widths of joints must be such as to ensure that the joints perform as intended and are within
the recommendations of the joint sealant manufacturer
finished work must have a satisfactory appearance, being square, regular, true to line, level
and plane with satisfactory fit at all junctions, all to approval.
12.8.14.5 Final Fixing:
obtain approval of appearance of each elevation before tightening fixings or sealing joints
tighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended by the manufacturer; do not

overtighten restraint fixings intended to permit lateral movement.
12.8.14.6 Sealing Joints:
backing strip, bond breaker and primer are to be types recommended by sealant manufacturer
preparation of joint, depth of sealant and application are to be strictly as sealant manufacturer's
recommendations
joint is to be thoroughly clean, dry and free from oil
prime, insert backing strip and apply sealant ensuring maximum adhesion to sides of joint and
a neat, smooth and clean finish.
12.8.14.7 Damaged Units:
do not repair without approval; such approval will not be given where the units are badly
damaged or where the proposed repair will impair appearance or performance. Obtain
approval of appearance of all repaired units. Repairs are to be:
well keyed onto the surrounding cladding using both abrasion and a suitable chemical primer
carried out using the same materials as used in the manufacture of the units
adequately cured, using portable heaters for site curing.
12.8.14.8 Cleaning Down:
thoroughly clean down the entire area of the cladding work using cleaning agents and methods
recommended and approved by the manufacturer.

13. TRIM AND ACCESSORIES. THRESHOLDS
A. Non-Ceramic Trim: Material and finish, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile
mortar or adhesive. Use in following locations:
1. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
2. Thresholds at door openings
B. Stone Thresholds: Provide stone thresholds uniform in color and finish and fabricated as follows:
1. Material:
a) Marble, complying with ASTM C 503 for exterior use and minimum abrasive hardness of 10
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 241.
b) Granite complying with ASTM C 615 with applied epoxy two parts sealer.
c) Color/Finish: As selected from the manufacturers standard range.
d) Size:
i. Fabricate 50 mm wide by full width of wall or frame opening; minimum 12 mm thick;
beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open
seams.
ii. Fabricated in the sizes and profiles indicated.
e) Provide transition between tile surface and adjoining finishes at following locations:
i. At doorways where tile/stone terminates.
ii. At open edges of floor tile/stone where adjacent finish is a different height.
C. Transition Joint Strips: Profile and height as indicated; with integral perforated anchoring leg for setting
strip into setting material:
1. Transition strip profile:

a) Sloped, variable height: If adjacent flooring level is different than tile. Schluter-RENO-V.
b) Flat, smooth profile. If adjacent flooring level is same as tile.
i. Custom made solid surface material according to details.
c) Sloped profile: If adjacent flooring level is lower than tile.
d) Sloped wide profile: If adjacent flooring level is lower than tile.
2. Height:
a) As required to suit application.
b) Maximum change in level: 0-12 mm.
c) Maximum slope: 1:2
3. Material: Stainless Steel.

d) Finish: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard finishes.
14. FABRIC WRAPPED, ACOUSTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Fabric covered acoustic panels for walls
2. Clips, cleats, adhesives, and related accessories
B. Related Items
1. Gypsum wallboard and Masonry assemblies, Section 13.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for the Architect’s review.
1. Product Data for each fabric and panel core material
2. Record Samples of each type, color / pattern of fabric. Samples shall be at least305 mm
square
B. Submit for the Owner’s use / records.

1. Statement of Qualifications from installer.
2. Manufacturer’s published maintenance instructions.
3. Extra Materials
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Firm shall be an authorized or licensed installation / service agent for manufacturer
with suitable 5 year experience installing fabric‐wrapped acoustic wall panels for commercial projects
similar in scale and complexity to those required for this Project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in their original unopened packaging with legible
identification.
B. Storage and Protection
1. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Store products in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight.
3. Protect from the elements and from damage.
4. Store at temperatures above 4.4 degrees C (40 degrees F).
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
1. Maintain the ambient temperature between 16 and 32 degrees C (60‐ and 90‐degrees‐F) during,
and continuously after installation.
2. Do not begin this work until dust‐generating activities are complete.
3. Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
4. Maintain uniform humidity between 20- and 40-percent prior to, during and after installation
MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials.
1. For each color / pattern of fabric, provide Extra Materials in quantities that at least 3‐percent of
quantity required to complete their respective installations.
2. Pieces shall be at least 3 m (10‐linear feet) by full width of roll. Waste pieces of salvageable size
shall not count as Extra Material.
3. Extra Materials shall be from the same dye‐lot or production run as the installed materials.
4. Wrap or package and label Extra Materials for content and the dates and locations of
corresponding installation.
5. Deliver Extra Materials to Site as directed by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRIC WRAPPED PANELS

A. Acoustic Wall Panel (ACT‐): Flat, fabric wrapped panels
1. Core: ASTM C612, Type 1B, rigid fiber insulation,
a. Density: 112 kg/m3 (7‐pcf), minimum
b. Thickness: As required to meet NRC rating, with 25 mm (1‐inch), minimum
2. NCR rating (ASTM C423): 0.75, minimum

3. Edge detail: Beveled, resin reinforced edges
4. Method of Attachment: Panel manufacturer's standard mounting clips.
5. Fabric: To be determined by Architect.
a. Fire Rating: NFPA Class A when tested using ASTM E84
b. Pattern an Color: To be determined by Architect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify Working Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed
and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
1. Verify that proper finish is on wall at panel reveal locations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations. Install wall panels in the layout indicated; allow
for reveal between panels as indicated. If reveal is not indicated provide 6 mm (1/4‐inch). Install panels
true to line and planes indicated, using mounting systems indicated.
1. Installed, panels shall set squarely in their positions with uniform gap from top to bottom and
edge‐to‐edge at adjacent panels.
2. Unless indicated otherwise, tops of panels shall form a straight, horizontal line with less than 2
mm (1/16‐inch) offset between adjacent panels.
3.3 CLEANING
A. At completion of acoustical material installation, clean soiled or discolored surfaces. Remove
improperly installed material and reinstall. Remove damaged material and install new.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 25 – GLASS AND GLAZING
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section specifies the requirements for glass, plastic, glazing related materials and
glazing accessories. Glazing products specified apply to factory or field glazed items.

Section 27 External Works to Buildings
1.1.3 Labels
1 Temporary labels are to be provided on each pane of glass or plastic material identifying
manufacturer or brand and glass type, quality and nominal thickness. Temporary labels shall
remain intact until the Engineer approves the pane.
2 Permanent labels in accordance with BS 952 and the manufacturer’s standard label are to be
provided on the following:
(a) tempered glass panes

(b) laminated glass panes
(c) organic coated glass panes
(d) bullet resistive glass or plastic panes in accordance with BS 5051, BS 5357, and BS
5544
3 The label shall be located in the corner for each pane.
1.1.4 Submittals
1 Samples for verification and approval: 300 mm square samples of each type of glass indicated
except for clear monolithic glass products300 mm long samples of each type of sealant or
gasket exposed to view and in each colour required, except black. Install sealant or gasket
sample between two strips of material representative in colour of the adjoining framing system.
2 Manufacturer's certificates for glazing to be used in the Works are to be provided as follows:
(a) certificates stating that tempered glass, laminated glass, organic coated glass, and wire
glass meet the requirements for safety glazing material as specified in BS 5357
(b) certified test report stating that bullet resistive material meets the test requirements of
BS 5051
(c) certificates stating the following characteristics of the glass:
GLASS AND GLAZING S25 - 1

(i) visible light transmittance
(ii) visible light reflectance
(iii) shading coefficient
(iv) winter U-value
(v) summer U-value
(vi) k-value
(vii) relative heat gain
(viii) any other characteristic as required by the Project Documentation or as
requested by the Engineer.
(d) Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements. Separate certifications are not required
for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and
thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control programme of a
recognised certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to the
Supervision team/engineer.
(e) Contractor’s Warranty on glass, products: Provide warranty in which glass furnish and
to install replacements for glass units that break or deteriorate as defined in
"Definitions" Article.
3 Manufacturer’s guarantees are to be provided by the Contractor for the following elements
following QCS 2014 and contract documents:
(a) guarantee bullet resistive plastic material to remain visibly clear without discoloration
(b) Warranty Period for Insulating Glass
(c) Warranty Period for laminated glass
(d) guarantee polycarbonate to remain clear and ultraviolet light
(e) guarantee insulating plastic to not have more than 6 % decrease in light transmission and
be ultraviolet light
(f) Warranty for Coated-Glass Products
(g) Glass manufacturers’ guarantees in a form acceptable to the Supervision team/engineer,

undertaking to replace free of charge any and all glass panels which, within the period of
time required by QCS 2014 and the Contract conditions from the date of substantial
completion, are the subject of spontaneous breakage due to the presence of nickel
sulphide.
4 Mirrors Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer, Contractor and Installer
are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without limitations, all or
any part of the mirrors specified in this section which fails or becomes defective in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
(a) Defects: Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are
not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding
of the silver film.
5 Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to be incorporated into the Operating
and Maintenance Manual.

6 Manufacturer's literature and data is to be submitted to the Engineer for the following:
(a) glass, for each type required
(b) plastic glazing materials, for each type required

(c) distance setting and location blocks
(d) elastic compound for metal sash glazing
(e) putty, for wood sash glazing
(f) glazing cushions
(g) sealing compounds
(h) transparent (one-way vision glass) mirrors
(i) gaskets
(j) any other component or material if asked for in the Project Documentation.
7 Storage for all glass to be used in the Works is to be in a shaded and ventilated area and to be
protected from dirt and accidental damage. Care is to be taken to prevent the accumulation of
water between the sheets and any stacked glass that show signs of dampness are to be separated
and dried.
1.1.5 Testing
1 Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing
materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant
manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
2 Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that
glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including
sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.
3 Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing
compliance with requirements specified.
4 Sealant Compatibility And Adhesion Testing: submit to sealant manufacturers, samples of each
glass, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect glazing
sealants, for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated below:
use test methods standard with sealant manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific
preparation techniques are required for rapid, optimum glazing sealants adhesion to glass and
glazing channel substrates
perform tests under normal environmental conditions during installation
submit not less than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and each
type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated, insulating units) for
adhesion testing, as well as one sample of each glazing accessory (gaskets, setting blocks and
spacers) for compatibility testing
schedule sufficient time to test and analyse results to prevent delay in the work

investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and get sealant manufacturer's
written recommendations for corrective measures, including using special primers
testing may not be required when glazing sealant manufacturer can submit required preparation
data that is acceptable to Supervision team/engineer and is based on previous testing of current
sealant products for adhesion to and compatibility with submitted glazing materials.
1.1.6.1 Glazing Publications: comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and the glazing organizations, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
BS 952 and relevant parts of:

- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 1096 for coated glass.
- BS EN 1748-1 for borosilicate glass.
- BS EN 1748-2 for ceramic glass.
- BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass.
- BS EN 12337 for chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass.
- BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass and laminated safety glass.
1.1.6.2 Safety Glass: products complying with BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass and BS EN 12150
and BS EN 1863 for heat treated glass. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification
Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to the Supervision team/engineer.
1.1.6.3 Insulating Glass: provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least
one component light of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing
agency or other certification agency acceptable to the Supervision team/engineer.
1.1.6.4 Glazier Qualifications: engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for project with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1.1.6.5 Single-Source Responsibility: obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below:
primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated
heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated
insulating glass of each construction indicated.
laminated glass of each (ASTM C 1172) construction indicated.
1.1.6.6 Single-Source Responsibility: obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and
installation method indicated.
1.1.6.7 Color of Glass: color variation shall not be accepted. Light transmission shall not vary by more
than 0.05%.
1.1.6.8 Glass Supplies: all glass supplies shall be cut from the same batch.

1.1.6.9 Heat Treated Glass: heat treated glass shall be entirely free from nickel sulphide. Provide
certificate from supplier that all heat-treated glass units have successfully passed heat-soak test
1.1.6.10 Full heat-soak test: Provide certificate from supplier that all heat-treated glass units have
successfully passed full heat-soak test to an approved international specifications such as EN
14179 or DIN 18516.
1.1.6.11 Site-Constructed Mock-Ups: prior to glazing, erect mock-ups for each glass product indicated
below to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and quality of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the finished work:
1.1.6.12 Glass Products: erect mock-ups with the following kinds of glass to match glazing systems
required for project, including typical light size, framing systems, and glazing methods in order
to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship:
tempered glass
coated insulating glass units.
laminated glass
Erect mock-ups on site in locations and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Supervision team/engineer.
Notify Supervision team/engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups
will be erected.
Obtain Supervision team/engineer's approval of mock-ups before proceeding.
Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging finished work. Approved mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of substantial
completion may become part of finished work.
1.1.7 Performance Requirements:
1.1.7.1 General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
1.1.7.2 For acoustic performance and requirements, refer to acoustic report
1.1.7.3 Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass
lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than
thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following
criteria:
Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to

BS 6262 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:
Design Wind Pressures: Where required for exterior glazing, determine design wind pressures
applicable to Project according to QCS and design requirements.

Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to
resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.
Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass type factors
for short-duration load.
Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 25 mm,
whichever is less.
Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading
within individual glass lites.
1.1.7.4 Air infiltration and water penetration: design, fabricate and install manufacturer's glazed curtain
wall system to permanently resist leakage of air and water through the system in accordance
with the following:
Air Infiltration: air leakage through the curtain wall system shall not exceed requirements and
criteria stipulated under Section 25 Part 04: 4.2.9 in accordance with BS EN 1026 at a
minimum static air pressure differential of 600 Pa.
Water Penetration: there shall be no evident water leakage through the curtain wall system,
when tested in accordance with BS EN 1027 when the curtain walling is subjected to a peak
positive test pressure of 600 Pa.
1.1.7.5 Structural performance: design, engineer, fabricate, and install the glazed curtain wall system
including anchorage, and reinforcement where necessary, to withstand effects of wind load
design pressures normal to the plane of the wall and design live loads, and accommodate
deflections and movements without damage, when tested, with no material failures or
permanent deformation of structural members.
Design wind pressure should be calculated in accordance with BS6399-Part 2:1997, or as per
wind tunnel test for high rise buildings.
The design wind pressure for standard curtain wall systems to be derived from the maximum
calculated wind pressure as follows (CWCT ‘Standard for systemized building envelopes ’
2.2.4).
Do not change the aesthetic aspect of the design intent of the curtain wall as set by the
architectural drawings.
Determine also the sizes and thicknesses of glass panes and panel/facings, the sizes types and
locations of framing, fixings and supports, to ensure that the curtain walling will resist all
imposed loads, and accommodate all deflections and movements without damage.
Structural Test Pressure: shall be equal to 150 percent of the inward and outward acting design
pressures.
Deflections: the curtain wall system shall be capable of accommodating structural support
movements and weather exposures including but not limited to sway, twist, column shortening
and long-term creep and deflection; and of performing within the following limitations under
the required design load, both positive and negative:
Perpendicular Deflection: deflection of framing members, measured perpendicular to wall

plane, shall not exceed 1/175 of the unsupported span (defined as the distance between anchor
center lines) or 19 mm, whichever is less.

Parallel Deflection: when carrying the full dead load, deflection of framing members measured
in a direction parallel to wall plane shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite by
less than 75 percent of the design dimension; nor reduce edge clearances to less than 25 percent
of design dimension or 3 mm, whichever is greater.
1.1.7.6 Thermal Movements: the curtain wall system shall be capable of accommodating thermal
movements resulting from an ambient temperature range of 67 deg. C and a surface temperature
range within the curtain wall framing of 100 deg. C, without causing buckling, damaging
stresses on glass, failure of sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, or any other detrimental
effects.
1.1.7.7 Thermal performance: the glazed curtain wall system shall be of thermal-break construction
that has been tested in accordance with BS EN 12667 and BS EN ISO 8990 and certified by
the manufacturer to provide:
a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of at least 45 at minus 18 deg. C outside with a 15 mph
wind velocity and a 25 percent relative humidity at 20 deg. C inside when tested according to
BS EN 12667 and BS EN ISO 8990
U- alue maximum of 2.0 W/m2 °K at 24 km/h exterior wind velocity calculated in accordance
with BRE Report 443 and a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 50 when tested according
to BS EN 12667 and BS EN ISO 8990.
1.1.7.8 Thermal Stress in Glazing: Glass must have an adequate resistance to thermal stress generated
by orientation, shading, solar control, construction, and in/ out temperature difference.
1.1.7.9 Air permeability: Requirement: Permissible air leakage rates of 1.5m³/hr/m² for fixed lights
and 2.0 m³/hr/lin.m for opening lights must not be exceeded when the curtain walling is
subjected to a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pa.
1.1.7.10 Water penetration: requirement: Moisture must not penetrate to internal surfaces or into cavities
not designed to be wetted when the curtain walling is subjected to a peak positive test pressure
of 600 Pa.
1.1.7.11 Wind resistance - serviceability: glazed units in framing member tests must have all edges
supported.
1.1.7.12 Sound transmittance:
Weighted sound reduction index (Rw) within 100 to 3150 Hz frequency range to BS 5821-3:
Between internal and external surfaces of curtain walling (minimum): As indicated on

drawings.
Between adjoining floors abutting curtain walling (minimum): As indicated on drawings.
Between adjoining rooms on same floor abutting curtain walling (minimum): As indicated on
drawings.
1.1.8 SPARE MATERIALS
1.1.8.1 Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.1.8.2 Glazing materials: The spare materials shall be supplied as per percentages or quantities
stipulated under the contract or as per QCS 2014, or no more than recommended by the
supplier.
2 GLASS

2.1 GENERAL GLASS TYPES AND GLAZING
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies various types of glass available.
This Section
Part 1 General
Part 3 Workmanship

2.1.2 References

BS 952........................ Glass for glazing
BS 2571...................... General purpose flexible PVC compounds for moulding and extrusion
BS 5051...................... Security Glazing
BS 5713...................... Hermetically sealed flat double glazing units
BS 5544...................... Anti-bandit glazing (glazing resistant to manual attack)
BS 5588...................... Fire precautions in the design and construction of buildings BS
6206...................... Impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and safety
plastics for use in buildings
BS 6262...................... Code of Practice for glazing for buildings BSEN
572.................. Glass in Buildings - Basic soda lime silica glass products
2.2 GLASS TYPES AND REQUIREMENTS
1 Glass shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 952.
2 Glazing for buildings shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 6262.
3 Vacuum sealing requirements for double glazing units shall comply with the relevant
provisions of BS 5713.
2.2.2 Transparent Glass
1 Transparent glass shall be clear float or polished plate glass not less than 4 mm nominal
thickness. Sheet glass shall not be used in the Works.

2.2.3 High Performance Glass
1 High performance glass (which includes reflective and insulating glass) is at minimum to
comply with the following:
(a) high performance glass for vision areas shall be 6 mm toughened (heat strengthened)
glass. The glass may be clear, colored or color coated. The characteristics of the glass
shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation. Typically, the characteristics of the
glass will be as shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Characteristics of Glass for Vision Areas
Colored or Color Clear Glass
Coated Glass
Light Transmittance (%) 5 to 45 > 85
Light Reflectance (%) 5 to 45 < 10
Shading Coefficient 0.20 to 0.60 > 0.95
U-Value in W/(m2.K) 4.0 to 5.5 5.5 to 6.0

o 2
U-Value in Btu/( F.ft .h) 0.70 to 0.95 0.95 to 1.05
Heat Gain Coefficient 0.17 to 0.50 > 0.80
(b) insulating high performance glass units for vision areas are to consist of an outer pane
of 6 mm toughened (heat strengthened) glass and an inner pane of 6 mm clear toughened glass
separated by a 12 mm airspace. The outer pane of glass may be clear, colored or color coated.
The characteristics of the glass used in the units shall be as detailed in the Project
Documentation. Typically, the characteristics of the units will be as shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2
Characteristics of Insulating Glass Units
Colored or Color Clear Glass Units
Coated Glass Units
Light Transmittance (%) 2 to 75 80 to 85
Light Reflectance (%) 5 to 45 10 to 15
Shading Coefficient 0.25 to 0.70 0.80 to 0.85
U-Value in W/(m2.K) 1.5 to 3.0 3.15 to 3.20

U-Value in Btu/(oF.ft2.h) 0.25 to 0.55 0.55 to 0.56
Heat Gain Coefficient 0.10 to 0.60 0.7 to 0.75
(c) high performance reflective glass for spandrel areas shall be 6 mm toughened (heat
strengthened) glass with colour coating or coloured glass. The characteristics of the glass used

in the spandrel areas shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation. Typically, the
characteristics of spandrel areas will be as shown in Table 2. 2.
Table 2.3
Characteristics of Spandrel Glass
Light Transmittance (%) 2 to 75
Light Reflectance (%) 5 to 45
Shading Coefficient > 0.70
U-Value in W/(m2.K) 2.5 to 4.5

U-Value in Btu/(oF.ft2.h) 0.55 to 0.80
Heat Gain Coefficient > 0.60
(d) applicable standards:

(i) all substrates for coatings shall be of float quality and shall conform to BS 952
(ii) all fully tempered glass to be tested to BS 6206
(iii) all insulating glass units to be tested to BS 5713.
2.2.4 Mirror Glass
1 Mirror glass is to be 6 mm float glass or polished plate glass, silvered on one side. The silvering
shall be protected by a copper backing and protective paint coating. Mirror edges shall be
ground and polished. Mirror edges shall be beveled.
2.2.5 Fire Resistant Glass
1 Fire rated clear glass to meet minimum the same rating as the corresponding door to
Engineers approval. Resistance for integrity, stability and insulation shall comply with the
relevant provisions of BS 5588 Part 3
2 Wired glass to be square pattern (13 mm square), 6 mm nominal thickness and shall conform
to BS EN 572 Part 3.
2.2.6 Patterned and Rough Cast (obscured) Glass
1 To be 6 mm nominal thickness unless otherwise to the approval of the Engineer.
2.2.7 Toughened Glass
1 Toughened glass shall be processed float or polished plate glass satisfying the impact
requirements of BS 6206 Class B.
2.2.8 Decorative Glass
1 Coated glass with decorative ceramic frit applied and heat-fused to glass surface.
2 Glass Type: Clear, heat treated float glass.
3 Glass Thickness: 6 mm unless otherwise indicated.
GLASS AND GLAZING S25 -

4 Coating Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5 Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2.9 Sandblasted Glass
1 General: Thicknesses as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer for intended

application where not shown.
2 Sandblasted glass to conform BS EN 17258-1

(a) Patterned, clear or tinted, and of quality, finish, and pattern specified.
(b) Sandblasted glass to incorporate graphic image as indicated in laminated glass unit as
defined under Laminated Glass sub-section.
2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS
2.3.1 Glazing Compounds
1 Glazing compounds shall be non-setting oil based materials containing butyl rubber and shall
be approved by the Engineer.
2.3.2 Distance Setting and Location Blocks
1 Distance pieces (for setting between glass panes), setting and location blocks shall be
plasticized PVC complying with BS 2571 (softness numbers 35 to 45), rigid nylon or sealed
hardwood. Plasticized PVC shall not be used for heavy glass panes, or solar control (reflective
and insulating) glasses or sealed double glazing units.
2.3.3 Glazing Gasket
1 Glazing gaskets shall be of neoprene or EPDM material as approved by the Engineer.
2.3.4 Accessories and Compounds
2.3.4.1 Glazing Compounds, Tapes, Strips, Gaskets and Sealants unless otherwise specified are to be
types recommended for particular purpose by glass and frame surround manufacturers and,
are to be obtained from approved manufacturers.
2.3.4.2 Rubber Gaskets: to BS 4255-1, fully compatible with glazing sealants.
2.3.4.3 Silicone Sealant: to BS 5889, Type A, color to be selected by the Supervision team/engineer
from manufacturer’s standard range.
2.3.4.4 Two Part Polysulphide Sealant: to BS 4254, color to be selected by the Supervision
team/engineer from manufacturer’s standard range.
2.3.4.5 Clips For Fixing Mirrors: brass nickel plated fixed bottom clips and adjustable top clips with
resilient packing unless indicated.
2.3.4.6 Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets, EPDM, ASTM C 864 or silicone,
ASTM C 1115; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
2.3.4.7 Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM or

silicone gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness
required to maintain watertight seal.
GLASS AND GLAZING S25 -

3 WORKMANSHIP
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Section specifies workmanship requirements for glazing.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Glass
Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall
3.2 STANDARD GLAZING
1 External glazing is to be wind and watertight on completion.
2 All rebates and grooves are to be clean, dry, free from burrs and other projections, smooth
and undistorted.
3 The minimum thickness of glass other than fully toughened glass is to be 6 mm when
situated in the following locations:
(a) any hinged fully, or partly, glazed door and any adjacent side panel
(b) any sliding fully, or partly, glazed door and any adjacent side panel
(c) any glass wholly or partially within a zone between floor level and 800 mm above
floor level.
4 Glazing to internal wood doors and screens is to be bedded in self-adhesive black velvet or
approved proprietary tape and secured with hardwood glazing beads fixed with brass cups and
screws.
5 Glazing to external wood doors and screens to be bedded in approved polymer mastic pre-
formed tape and secured with hardwood glazing beads fixed with brass cups and screws.
6 All rebates to wood doors and screens to be primed and sealed.
7 Fire resistant glazing channel shall be butt jointed at corners and fixed with 38 mm countersunk
brass screws at not more than 200 mm centers and not more than 50 mm from each end. The
butt joints of glazing channels for one-hour fire resisting doors are to be sealed with
intumescent mastic.
8 Pre-Glazing of components will be permitted, but precautions are to be taken to prevent

displacement of glass or compound. Submit details and obtain approval. Panes with any
displaced glass or compound or with defective seals are to be re-glazed in situ.
9 Quality of Work:

store, handle and install glass and glazing materials in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations to ensure compliance with design and performance requirements
glazing must be wind and water tight under all conditions to BS 6375 with full allowance
made for deflections and other movements
panes are to be accurately sized with clean, undisfigured and undamaged edges and surfaces
keep materials dry until fixed
ensure that glass, surround materials, primers, sealers and paints which are to be used
together are compatible
preparation of surrounds, dimensions of edge cover and clearance, positions and materials of
distance pieces, setting and location blocks are to be BS 6262 and to glass and sealant
manufacturers' recommendations.
10 Glazing Generally is to be to BS 6262.
11 Security Glazing is to be to BS 5357.
12 Fixing Generally:
Preparation: all surfaces to receive glazing are to be clean, dry, unobstructed and free from
grease at time of priming, sealing and glazing. Allow primers or sealers to dry between coats
and before glazing. Ensure that priming or sealing by others has been carried out and, if
unsatisfactory, report to the Supervision team/engineer before glazing commences.
Directionally patterned and wired glasses: fix with pattern or wires parallel to surround and
align in adjacent panes where seen together at close quarters.
Bead Fixing: fix beads at pre-determined centres in accordance with surround manufacturer's
recommendations, unless otherwise specified.
13 Setting And location Blocks: locate as per BS 6262, figure 22.
14 Distance Pieces: locate as per BS 6262, figure 23.
15 Non-setting or Rubberizing Compounds:
fully bed glass and beads in compound and fix beads securely
trim excess compound to form smooth, neat chamfer.
16 Tapes and Capping Sealant:
apply tape of sufficient thickness to produce minimum 3 mm bed both sides of glass after
compression; butt joint tape at corners, leaving no gaps; use tape of sufficient width to fill
inside joint after compression and to finish approximately 6 mm below sight line on outside
to receive capping sealant
bed beads to frame in bedding sealant, filling all voids, press firmly into position to compress
tape and fix securely
trim excess tape to a smooth chamfer

apply capping sealant to fill outside joint, finishing to a smooth chamfer.

17 Tapes, Sealant And Inside Trim:
apply tape of sufficient size to produce minimum 3 mm bed and to fill joint after
compression; butt joint tape at corners, leaving no gaps
apply sealant, overlapping pane by at least 3 mm
fix beads securely, compressing sealant to form a complete seal
insert internal trim between bead and glass in continuous lengths, leaving no gaps and
allowing for shrinkage
trim excess tape to a smooth, neat chamfer.
18 Gaskets(Channel Type):
ensure that fixing surfaces are smooth, undistorted and free from burrs, weld spatter and
projections; any required painting is to be carried out before glazing
lay out gaskets in flat, warm area for 24 hours before glazing
ensure that edges of glass are arrissed or covered with self-adhesive tape
fit gasket to frame, butt jointing any ends in centre of top of opening, leaving no gaps
lubricate gaskets and zipper strips with water or liquid paraffin
insert glass carefully using hardwood or plastic spatulas
equalise edge clearance with setting blocks
insert zipper strips and allow to retract for at least 4 hours before mitring corners and pushing
into position, leaving no gaps.
19 Gaskets (Single Sided):
ensure that fixing surfaces are smooth, undistorted and free from burrs, weld spatter and
projections; any required painting is to be carried out before glazing
apply load bearing strip to rebate upstand with butt joints at corners, leaving no gaps
support glass on setting blocks
insert gaskets into groove to seal glass, leaving no gaps and allowing for shrinkage.
20 Fire-Resistant Channels:
fit channel firmly to glass with butt jointed corners, bedding glass in an approved material if
necessary to ensure tight fit; bed channel to surround in intumescent mastic
fix channels with screws at 100 mm staggered centres, evenly spaced and 50 mm from each
corner
seal any gaps with intumescent mastic.

3.3 GLAZING ALUMINIUM WINDOWS EXTERNALLY
1 Generally, the glazing system will utilise snap-in beads and glazing gaskets of neoprene or
EPDM as approved by the Engineer. Other glazing techniques involving the use of glazing
compounds, sealants, etc. are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval together with details
of similar installations successfully employed elsewhere in the Gulf region.
2 Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Project Documentation the maximum permitted
size of an external glass pane, with all four edges fully supported, in a low rise building
(maximum 10 m high) should not exceed the areas given in Table 3.1.
3 For maximum areas of glass panes situated externally, the recommendations of the glass
manufacturer are to apply in situations that are not covered by Table 3.1, provided that
information is not provided elsewhere in the Project Documentation. The recommendations
are to be based on a 3 second gust exceeding 180 kph (50 m/s) at 10 m above ground level and
a ground roughness category of 1.
Table 3.1
Maximum Areas for Glass Panes Situated Externally
Type of Glass Nominal Thickness (mm)
4 5 6 7 10 12
Transparent float or polished plate 1.30 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.50 8.00
Wired cast - - 1.25 - - -
Wired polished - - 1.80 - - -
Rough cast and patterned 0.70 1.20 1.75 - - -
Fully toughened 1.80 2.90 4.20 - 1.00 -
Transparent laminated - - 2.80 4.00 5.50 -
Notes: (i) Areas given are in square meters.

(ii)The Table does not apply where the building exceeds 10 m high or where the
length to breadth ratio of the pane is greater than 3:1, in such cases the
recommendations of the manufacturer shall be followed.
4 The depth of rebates for bead glazing are not to be less than that shown in Table 3.2 and the
minimum edge clearance (distance between the edge of the glass and the surround) should not
be less than 3mm for any glass up to and including 12 mm nominal thickness. The
recommendations of the glass manufacturer are to apply for all glass over 12 mm nominal
thickness.

Table 3.2
Minimum Rebate Depths for Bead Glazing
Nominal Glass Thickness (mm) Minimum Rebate Depth (mm)
4 10
5 12
6 12
10 15
12 15
5 The minimum edge cover to single glazing shall be as Table 3.3 and equal all round each
pane. The edge cover and clearance to double glazing units shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer of the units.
Table 3.3
Minimum Edge Cover for Single Glazing
Glass Area (m²) Edge Cover (mm)
Up to 0.5 5
0.5 to 1.5 9
1.5 to 4.0 12
As recommended by glass
Over 4.0
manufacturer
6 Setting blocks are to be used between the edges of the glass and the frame or surround in
order to support and centralise the glass in the opening. The minimum length of each block
shall be equal to 30 mm per m2 of glass area and the width to be equal to the thickness of the
glass (or glass insulating unit) plus the back clearance.
7 Location blocks shall be used in opening windows and doors between the edges of the glass,
other than the bottom edge, to prevent movement when they are opened. Each block shall be
at least 25 mm long and the width shall be equal to the thickness of the glass (or glass
insulating unit) plus the back clearance.
8 Setting and location blocks shall be positioned as near to the quarter points of each side as
possible.
9 Glazing gaskets are to be positioned on both sides of the glass and be correctly sized so that
when forced into the space between the glass and surround, sufficient pressure is provided to
support the glass structurally and to form an effective seal against the weather. Care is to be

taken to ensure that the gasket is correctly located in the grooves and that the glass is
completely bedded.
3.4 ICC/CCU ROOMS ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES
3.4.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard ICU/CCU entrance door assembly, complete with
doors, side-lite framing, and accessories as indicated. Comply with the following:
1 Number of Doors: As indicated.
2 Emergency Breakaway Capability: As indicated.
3.4.2 Opening Force: Provide entrance doors that require no more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to stop door
movement.
3.4.3 COMPONENTS
1 Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard 44.5-mm thick glazed doors with minimum 3.2- mm
thick, extruded tubular stile and rail members. Fabricate corners with mechanically fastened
reinforcing brackets or by welding. Incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top
and bottom rails.
(a) Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard Snap-On, extruded-
aluminum, square glazing stops and preformed resilient glazing gaskets.
(b) Stile Design: Medium stile; 89-mm nominal width.
(c) Rail Design: 89-mm nominal height, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
(d) Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stiles and rails.
2 Framing Members: Fabricated from extruded-aluminum or formed-aluminum sheet or plate.

(a) Main Extrusions: Minimum wall thickness of 3.2 mm.
(b) Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum wall thickness of 1.6 mm.
(c) Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for sidelites; match stiles and rails.
3 Headers: Fabricated from minimum 3.2-mm thick, extruded aluminum or formed- aluminum
sheet or plate. Conceal roller track in header, providing access by means of hinged or
removable access panel to permit service and adjustment. Secure panel to prevent
unauthorized access.
(a) Concealed: Fabricate header to match depth of framing and to extend full width of door
opening.
(b) Surface Mounted: Manufacturer's standard case, sized to extend full width of door
opening.
(c) Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 45 kg per leaf.
4 Carrier Assembly and Overhead Roller Track: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly
that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered ball- bearing-center
steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing- center steel wheels
operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier
assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.
1. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each
active leaf.
5 Glazing:

(a) Tempered/laminated, safety glass: BS EN ISO 12543, BS EN 12150, 8 mm thick

laminated glass, unless otherwise recommended by sliding door manufacturer.
(b) Temporary glass presence markers: Easily removable, non-residue depositing.
(c) Glazing tape: Preformed and pre-shimmed tape, paper release, color as selected by
Consultant.
(d) Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard compression types, replaceable, molded or
extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
(e) Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
(f) Glazing and rebate primers, sealants, sealers, and cleaners: Compatible with each other.
Type as recommended by glass manufacturer.
6 Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard; compatible with adjacent materials.

Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
7 Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding; compatible with adjacent materials.
(a) Reinforcement: Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.
(b) Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For
hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to
match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.
8 Motion/presence detector:
(a) K-band microwave, for two-way traffic, motion detectors and active infrared presence
sensors, designed to control the opening, hold open, and closing cycles of sliding
automatic doors, with fully adjustable detection pattern and sensitivity adjustments, in
high impact, weather tight housing.
(b) Fabricate detectors which are capable of distinguishing false impulse events, including
rain, snow, and which are unaffected by temperature changes, ambient light, or excessive
traffic flow.
9 Back-up system: Three photocell presence detectors concealed in sidelight stiles and located
at 150 mm, 610 mm, and 1500 mm A.F.F across threshold.
10 Conduit: In accordance with Division 16 for rigid and flexible conduit and accessories.
3.4.4 HARDWARE
1 Heavy-Duty Hardware: Provide units as indicated in sizes, number, and type recommended
by manufacturer for entrances required. Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless
2 Emergency Breakaway Hardware: Provide release hardware that allows panel to swing out
in the direction of egress to a full 90 degrees from sliding mode as indicated. Maximum
force to open panel shall be 222 N.
(a) Release Position: Doors fully open.
3 Limit Arm: Provide limit arm to control doors in the swing mode.
4 Manual Flush Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, edge-mortised, lever-extension-type flush

bolts. Locate flush bolts at bottom of inactive leaves of ICU/CCU doors.
5 Recessed Pulls: Manufacturer's standard units.

6 Surface Pulls: Manufacturer's standard units.
3.5 FIXING MIRRORS
1 Mirrors are to be fixed with spacer washers to compensate for irregularities in the wall
surface and with sleeves and washers to prevent contact between the mirror and the fixings.
2 fix accurately and securely, but do not overtighten fastenings
3 Ensure undistorted reflection both within and between adjoining panes.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.6.1 Indicators: do not use painted or stuck on indicators on solar control or coloured glass.
Whitewash on ordinary glass must be restricted to small central areas of panes.
3.6.2 Cleaning: remove cement and plaster based spillage whilst wet. Remove all smears and
excess glazing materials. Leave glazing clean and free from scratches inside and out.
3.6.3 Damage: replace all glass and fixing materials broken or damaged before substantial
completion, and redecorate.
4 GLAZED CURTAIN WALLING SYSTEMS
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements, components and workmanship for glazed curtain
walling systems.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Glass
Part 3 Workmanship
Section 17 Metal Work

Section 26 Painting
4.1.2 References
1 The standards referred to in this Section are as follows:

BS
4315...................... Methods of test for resistance to air and water penetration
BS
5368...................... Methods for testing windows
BS
6262...................... Code of Practice for glazing for buildings

BS
6375...................... Performance of Windows
BS 6469
..................... Powder organic coatings for application and stoving to aluminum alloy
extrusions, sheet and pre-formed sections for external architectural
purposes, and for the finish on aluminum alloy extrusions, sheet and
pre-formed sections coated with powder organic coatings
BS
6497...................... Powder organic coatings for application and stoving to hot-dipped
galvanized hot-rolled steel sections and steel sheet for windows and
associated with external architectural purposes, and for the finish on
galvanized steel sections and sheet coated with powder organic
coatings
1 Glazed curtain walling systems shall include the following components:

(a) curtain wall, infill, and skylight glazing
(b) access doors and panels, including all hardware required for a complete and operable
assembly
(c) all hardware and operating mechanisms for access door and all other operable
assemblies
(d) all main and secondary runners and runner support systems, anchors, fixings,
attachments, reinforcements and steel reinforcing for mullions and transoms required
for a complete installation, except those indicated as being provided under other
sections
(e) finishes, protective coatings, and treatments
(f) internal gutter and other water drainage systems
(g) all thermal insulation and safing associated with the work included in this
Part, including supports, backing, and reinforcements
(h) all gaskets, sealants, elastomeric and metal flashing, including sealing at junctions
with roofing waterproofing
(i) electrical bonding and earthing of all metal curtain wall components.
2 Provide manufacturer's standard structural sealant glazed mechanically attached curtain wall
system including anchorage, adapted to the application indicated for this project that complies
with performance requirements specified as demonstrated by testing the system in assemblies
similar to those indicated for the project, according to the test methods prescribed.
Design Pressure: for purposes of the following tests, "design pressure" is the design wind
speed shown on Drawings, or specified or determined from the code, whichever is greater, as
determined by Supervision team/engineer.
3 Design proposals: the preliminary design drawings indicate design intent but do not preclude
submission with tender of reasonable alternative proposals for consideration.
4 Structural sealant: provide manufacturer's structural sealant that has been tested to
demonstrate that tensile or shear stress in structural sealant joints is less than 138 kPa.

provide supports and setting blocks at each light or panel to support weight of glass; structural
sealant shall not carry gravity load of glass or spandrel panels
provide structural sealant that will withstand tensile and shear stresses imposed by curtain
wall system and movement in joints without failing adhesively or cohesively.
4.1.4 Qualifications
1 The Contractor's engineer or curtain wall subcontractor shall be experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated and as covered in this Part and are subject to
approval by the Engineer.
2 Manufacturers and suppliers of all materials and components of the Work of this Part are
subject to approval by the Engineer.
3 The installers of the Work of this Part are to have proven achievement and experience in
similar work as applicable for at least 5 years and are subject to approval by the Engineer.
4 Manufacturer qualifications: a firm experienced not less than 15 years in manufacturing

products and systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce
required units; and capable of producing curtain wall systems that meet or exceed energy
performance requirements indicated, and of documenting this performance by specified
certification and analysis..
5 Installer qualifications: a qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this section
Supervision team/engineers and Owners, and other information specified.
6 Engineering qualifications: all design works shall be performed by an experienced

consultant who has a previous experience in similar work for at least 10 years.
7 Engineering responsibility: preparation of data for mechanically attached curtain-wall

systems including the following:
shop drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project
shop drawings, preconstruction-testing program development, and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional consultant.
8 Product options: information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including
preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Supervision team/engineer,

except with Supervision team/engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Supervision team/engineer for review.

9 Single source responsibility: the complete curtain walling system including framework, glass
and glazing, anchorages, sealants, fixings, accessories, finishes and coatings are to be
designed, fabricated and installed by a single approved manufacturer in order to assure sole
single source responsibility.
4.1.5 Mockups: build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by the Supervision team/engineer.
Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements set in this

specification.
4.2 CURTAIN WALLS
1 Curtain wall systems are at a minimum to meet the requirements of this Section. Where
special conditions or proprietary systems are to be used, the specifications herein are to be
considered a performance specification guideline with specific additional specifications
included elsewhere in the Project Documentation.
2 Where alternative curtain wall systems are to be developed and specified by implementation
of the performance specification or as design of a proprietary system, the curtain wall works
are to be carried out by an approved sub-contractor who fulfils the following requirements:
(a) regularly engaged in engineering, manufacturing, finishing, installing, glazing and
sealing of the type of work specified in this section for minimum of five years
(b) able to demonstrate satisfactorily completed works of minimum size equal to that to
be included in the Works
(c) able to demonstrate an understanding of the principles of rain screen, stack effect, air
seals, dynamic forces, behavior of cast-in-place concrete structures, water and weather
controls as affecting building cladding systems
(d) able to provide documentation of calculations to verify design of the curtain walls
(e) provide documents to include details of all products, fixings and interfaces
necessary to complete the fabrication and installation.
4.2.2 Performance Requirements
1 Glazing for curtain walls is to be double glazing and is to comply with the relevant
provisions of BS 6262.
2 The Contractor shall submit documentation and drawings for approval by the Engineer for
internal framing members and external components as follows:
material:
type of metal alloy, size and details finish:
powder coated, anodised, or other finish in accordance with the relevant
provisions of BS 6496 and BS 6497

color:
designated color referred by British Standard Color Chart Number
1 The minimum film thickness on curtain walls shall be 60-80 microns (refer to coating
specification in Section 17).
3 Framing members, glass and glass fixings, frame fixings and ironmongery are to be
designed to satisfy the following:
(a) Sustain wind loadings and sufficient to avoid damage or excessive deflection when
subjected to these loads
(b) meet the weather tightness and other performance requirements in BS 4315, BS
6375 and BS 5368
(c) resistance to water and air penetration to the standards for the above exposure when
tested in accordance with BS 4315 Part 1
(d) resistance to damage from thermal movement of the assembly or adjacent structure
and assembles over the air temperature range 0 ºC to 50 ºC
(e) resistance to damage from the designed deflection of any adjacent structure shown on
the arrangement drawings or as can be ascertained from the associated shop drawings
(f) thermal conductance of work, U-value shall be less than 2.8 W/m²K (0.009 Btu/ft2/h)
(g) opening vents (windows) will include the following:
(i) extruded aluminum framed opening vents, side hung outward opening with
integral drainage.
(ii) weathertightness to BS 6375 Part 1
(iii) (hermetically sealed double glazed units in accordance with BS 6262
(iv) opening panes shall be provided with friction stays capable of holding the pane
open in any position against a pressure of 50 Pa.
4.2.3 Submittals
1 Shop drawings are to be prepared and approved by the Engineer before off-site fabrication of
any item. The shop drawings shall clearly illustrate all aspects of the walling system and are
to include, but not be limited to, the following information:
(a) the relationship of the Works to the structure, mechanical systems, roofs, and other
related work
(b) the arrangement of components
(c) the sequence and details of fabrication assembly and erection
(d) dimensions of all components
(e) details of materials and finishes
(f) type, size, location and spacing of screws, bolts, welds anchoring devices and
other accessories
(g) isometric drawings of sealing, flashing and jointing
(h) details of all connections to contiguous work

2 The Contractor shall submit samples of all components, materials and finishes as listed
below. The size of the samples shall be as approved by the Engineer.
(a) samples matching the color, texture, and other characteristics of each finish of each
major component to be included in the glazed curtain wall
(b) finished samples of panels and major extrusions
(c) Samples showing finishes over welds and over welded materials.
(d) fastening devices
(e) flashing
(f) gaskets
(g) sealants
(h) stud or plug welds to sheet and plate
(i) finish hardware
3 The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's performance data as well as application and
removal procedures for all protection materials used during shipping, storage and installation.
4 Full scale mock-ups of the curtain wall system shall be provided for testing as detailed in the
Clause 4.2.9 of this Part unless otherwise stated by the Engineer. The size, materials and
construction of the mock-ups shall be to the standard and quality as required for the Works.
The Contractor shall provide visual mock-ups and field mock-ups as indicated in the Project
Documentation
5 The Contractor shall submit calculations, showing the following:

(a) design load assumptions
(b) pressure equalisation
(c) detailed engineering of mullions
(d) moment of inertia of mullions
(e) detailed engineering of anchorage hardware, clip angles, washers, anchor bolts,
welds, torque pressures.
The calculations shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor’s engineer or curtain wall
subcontractor (refer to Clause 4.1.4-1 of this Part). The calculations shall bear the Contractor’s
stamp.
6 Products and components: prior to submittal of preliminary design, submit for approval by the
Supervision team/engineer, relevant data for all products and components proposed to be used
including:
name of manufacturer
accessories and fasteners
product catalogues
test certificates
form of written guarantee
construction details
component dimensions
finishes
colors and such other information as the Supervision team/engineer may reasonably require.

7 Information to be provided during detailed design stage: Submit the following curtain walling
particulars to demonstrate compliance with specified design and structural performance
criteria:
A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
Design calculations and schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the curtain walling to
the structure.
Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.
A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master programme.
A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main Contract
master programme.
A quality plan in compliance with CWCT 'Guide to good practice for facades', Section 6.
Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or relaxations.
Approval by the Supervision team/engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from
his responsibility for ensuring full compliance with the requirements of the specification.
8 Information to be provided before commencement testing or fabrication of curtain walling:

Submit the following curtain walling particulars:
Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.
Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance requirements.
Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.
Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming their suitability

for proposed locations in the curtain walling.
Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.
9 Information to be provided before commencement of structural sealant glazing:
Submit structural bonding sealant manufacturer's project specific approval for:
Compatibility and adhesion of products and finishes.
Full details of structural sealant glazing design.
Structural sealant dimensions.
Project specific sealant application method statement.
10 Drawings: following approval of preliminary design, submit shop drawings showing all
necessary fabrication, co-ordination and installation details and methods to be used to achieve
design appearance and performance criteria, including:
Wall elevations and typical unit elevations

Full size detail sections of every typical member
Anchors, support system, fasteners, joint system, expansion provisions and glazing details
Fabrication and erection tolerances.
Obtain approval of shop drawings prior to commencement of fabrication.
11 Samples: submit samples of each type of extrusion, fastener, connection and joint, fire-
stopping, ironmongery and hardware. Samples will be reviewed for style, appearance, color
and finish only, compliance with other requirements are to be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
12 Control samples: after finalization of details, erect areas of the curtain walling as part of the
quantity required for the project of suitable size for testing and inspecting, and obtain approval
before proceeding with manufacture of remaining quantity.
13 Installer certificates: provide signed certificates by product manufacturer certifying that the
Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
14 Installer experience: provide a list of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
representative.
4.2.4 Alternative Design, Materials and Methods of Construction
1 Design, materials and methods of construction other than those indicated in the Project
Documentation may be employed when such designs, materials and methods conform to all
of the following:
(a) the design intent and specified design requirements
(b) the specified performance requirements
(c) all applicable codes and standards
(d) approval by the Engineer.
2 If option for alternative design or design by performance specification is required,
the
Contractor’s engineer is to comply as follows:
(a) prepare and endorse complete engineering design and calculations and check and
monitor the preparation of all shop drawings for conformance with the engineering
design and calculations, and for compliance with the Project Documentation
(b) structural calculations are to be submitted for all components of the walling system
(including for mock-ups) and are to indicate ultimate factors of safety
(c) the Contractor's engineer will be present at the Site during erection and installation
of the walling system
(d) upon completion of the walling system, the Contractor's engineer is to prepare and
endorse the necessary as-built drawings for submission to the Engineer.
3 Manufacturers and fabricators of curtain wall systems are to provide calculations as follows:

(a) submit glass fabricator/manufacturer's calculations for wind pressure analysis and
thermal stress analysis
(b) submit written confirmation that the glass fabricator/manufacturer has reviewed the
pertinent shop drawings and has confirmed the acceptability of the proposed use of the
specified glass products
(c) submit written confirmation that the sealant manufacturer has reviewed the pertinent
shop drawings and has confirmed the acceptability of the proposed use of the specified
sealant products.
4.2.5 Quality Control
1 Prior to the start of fabrication, the Contractor is to submit a comprehensive Quality Control
Program covering all phases of the walling system including, but not necessarily limited to,
the following:
(a) procurement of materials including quality assurance programmes of major suppliers
(b) fabrication of components
(c) final assembly of components
(d) installation and Site quality control.
The above are in addition to the requirements of Section 1, General.
4.2.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 The requirements of this Clause are in addition to the requirements for delivery, storage and
handling of materials as detailed elsewhere in the Project Documentation.
2 The Contractor is to verify with the Engineer the location and adequacy of temporary
storage and lay-down areas of curtain wall materials prior to delivery.
3 Curtain wall components are to be delivered to the Site in labelled protective packages
individually identified for each intended location.
4.2.7 General Warranty
1 The Contractor is to provide agreement to indemnify the Owner against any defects in the
design, workmanship, quality of materials, water tightness or performance of the Works
included in this Part and to repair or replace defective design, workmanship or materials of
the walling system during the warranty period. Defective materials and workmanship include:
(a) abnormal deterioration, ageing and weathering of the walling system
(b) leakage of water or air exceeding specified limits
(c) structural failure of components resulting from exposure to pressures and forces
within specified limits
(d) failure of operating parts to function normally
(e) glass breakage due to defective design, manufacture or installation or exposure
to pressures and forces within specified limits
(f) deterioration or discoloration of finishes in excess of normal weathering and ageing
(g) failure of the walling system to meet any other specified performance requirements

2 The warranty shall not include damage caused by vandalism, or natural conditions
exceeding the performance requirements.
3 The warranty period shall be It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as
4Guarantee: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Fabricator and

Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace components of
glazed curtain wall systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:

Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
Failure of operating components.
4.2.8 Special Finish Warranty
1 Where special finishes (a finish required by the design, but not a manufacturer’s standard
finish) are specified, the Contractor shall obtain a warranty from the manufacturer covering
failure of the applied finish, and agreeing to repair or replace items that show evidence of
finish deterioration. Deterioration of finish includes but is not limited to, colour fade,
chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film integrity.
2 The special finish warranty period shall be It shall only cover the period of defective liability
period or as mentioned in the contract (IF ANY)
3 Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty in which Manufacturer and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair finishes that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
Cracking.
Checking.
Peeling.
Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
Crazing.
Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
Color retention.
Warranty Period shall be It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as
mentioned in the contract (IF ANY) 2014 and start from the date of Substantial Completion for
Super Durable Polyester powder coated finish.
.
4.2.9 Testing and Mock-Ups
1 Propriety curtain walling and roof light systems are to have been subject to testing of
specimens under laboratory conditions for resistance to:
(a) air leakage
(b) water leakage
(c) wind leakage
2 The Contractor is to ensure that the proper testing authority requirements are complied
with; such requirements include the following:
(a) testing shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory, identified by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
(b) all measurement devices used in the tests are to have been calibrated and documented
to meet applicable British Standards.
(c) the independent testing laboratory undertaking the tests shall be accredited for the
required tests to an appropriate national body.
3 The specimens shall be subject to a performance test. The specimens used for performance
testing will have been designed and constructed using the same methods, materials and
sequences as for the system to be installed on the building. The techniques, skills and quality
control used for the installation in the test will be those that are to be used for installation on
the building.
4 Laboratory tests required to be undertaken are as follows:

(a) air permeability tests method in accordance with the provisions of BS 5368 Part 1
(b) watertightness static test method in accordance with the provisions of BS 5368 Part 2
(c) watertightness dynamic test method in accordance with the provisions of
Architectural Aluminium Manufacturers Association Standard AAMA 501.183.
(d) wind resistance serviceability test in accordance with the provisions of BS 5683 Part
3, as modified by BS 6375 Part 1.
(e) wind resistance safety test in accordance with the provisions of BS 5368 Part 3
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 – PAINTING AND DECORATING
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERALINTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section specifies the requirements for the following:
(a) preparation, painting or finishing of exterior and interior surfaces exposed to view
(b) wall covering requirements and installation of fabrics, vinyl, decorative papers and
other such decorative wall coverings
(c) Traffic coating.

(d) it does not include factory applied finishes and the painting of metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical installations unless otherwise required by Project
Documentation.

Section 8 Metalwork
Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery, and Ironmongery
1.1.2 References

Mineral solvent (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents)
BS 245........................ for
paints and other purposes
BS 1336...................... Knotting
BS 4652...................... Metallic zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
BS 4756...................... Ready-mixed aluminum priming paints for woodwork
BS 5082...................... Water-borne priming paints for woodwork
BS5358...................... Solvent-borne priming paints for woodwork
1.1.3 Standards
1 All paint work is to be in accordance with BS 6150, Code of Practice for Painting.
1.1.4 Definitions
1 Full Gloss Finish: a smooth and almost mirror-like surface finish, associated with oil-based
(e.g. alkyd) paints.
PAINTING AND DECORATING S26 - 1

2 Semigloss Finish: refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3 Eggshell Finish: a surface finish, associated with oil-based (e.g. alkyd) paints that have less
sheen than a full gloss finish.
4 Silk Finish: a surface finish, associated with emulsion paints that has greater sheen than a
matt finish.
5 Matt Finish: a surface finish, associated with emulsion paints that have little or no sheen.
6 Glossary of building terms related to painting shall be as per BS 2015.
1.2 SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES
1.2.1 Samples
1 Sample panels are to be prepared for each type and colour of coating material to be used in
the Works and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. As a minimum, the following
sample panels shall be submitted:
2 Paint Colours: 300 x 300 mm samples labelled to indicate finish, formula, colour name
and/or, number, sheen and gloss units of approved colours for:
(a) each specified colour in each specified finish coat material.

(b) each standard wood finish on specified wood species.
3 Other Materials: 500 x 500 mm (minimum) samples of each paper/fabric material minimum
size showing at least the pattern repeat where applicable.
1.2.2 Product Data:
submit manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for
each material proposed for use. Submit evidence that proposed paints satisfy the
performance requirements for of paints as specified hereafter. List each material and cross-
reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by
the manufacturer's catalogue number and general classification.
1.2.3 Product Test Data:
Submit laboratory test reports for tests conducted in accordance with relevant test
procedures listed in ASTM D 5324 or BS 3900 on representative samples taken by the
Engineer from each type of paint, for the following properties:
1 Quantitative and chemical material analysis:

(a) total solid content

(b) pigment type and content
(c) extender type and content
(d) binder type and content
2 hiding power
3 abrasion resistance
4 adhesion
5 wet abrasion resistance - ASTM D 2486, Scrubbing Method (latex paints)
6 exposure resistance (exterior paints)
1.2.4 Substitution Requests:
submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product to be replaced.
Include detailed comparison between specified and proposed paint. Comparison to include:
chemical composition and properties.

opacity.
cleansability.
scrub resistance wet and dry
adhesion.
exposure resistance.
1.2.5 List of Materials
1 Before ordering materials, the Contractor is to submit a list of those materials proposed for
use on the Project for the Engineer’s approval.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND PRODUCT MARKING
1.3.1 Marking of Containers
1 Materials to be delivered in sealed containers shall be clearly labelled with the following
information:
(a) manufacturer’s name, initials or recognized trade mark

(b) title and specification number
(c) whether the material is primer, undercoat or finishing coat
(d) whether the material is for internal or external use, where appropriate
(e) color reference from BS 4800
(f) method of application
(g) batch number and date of manufacture or re-test.
2 No paint is to be used more than 18 months after manufacture or re-test.

3 Coating materials other than spray paints, bituminous paints and textured masonry paints
are to be in containers not exceeding 5 litres capacity.
1.3.2 Marking of Papers/Fabrics
1 Papers/fabrics are to be clearly marked with batch and shade numbers as appropriate.
1.3.3 Coating Materials:

1 to be delivered in sealed containers, clearly labelled with the following information:
type of material
brand name, if any
intended use
manufacturer's batch numbers.
2 Batch Deliveries of Coating Materials: to be dated for use in order of delivery.
3 Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from extreme temperatures.
4 Coating Materials Generally: check that materials to be used are recommended by their
manufacturers for the particular substrate and conditions of exposure, and that they are
compatible with each other. Inform the Engineer of any discrepancy and obtain instructions
before proceeding with application of coatings.
1.4.1 Manufacturer Qualifications:
a firm experienced in manufacturing paints similar to those indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity
to manufacture required quantity.
Products specified refer to products manufactured in the country of origin. Manufacturers

producing in other countries under license shall submit evidence that the products
manufactured under license are identical in all respects to the original products
manufactured in the country of origin.
1.4.2 Applicator Qualifications:
engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in
material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service
performance. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of Consultants and
Employers, and other information specified
1.4.3 Performance of Paintings:

paints shall be fit for purpose and manufactured specifically for the applications indicated
and uses intended, considering the type, nature, location, and aesthetic and utility
requirements of the Project, as follows:
Opacity: paint shall cover or hide the substrate to the Engineer's satisfaction.
Cleanability: paint shall not absorb dirt and shall be capable of being washed or scrubbed
periodically, to the Engineer's satisfaction, without adverse effect on its attributes or
appearance.
Scrub resistance wet and dry: paint shall resist abrasion caused by scrubbing in accordance
with ASTM D 2486.

Adhesion: paint shall adhere firmly to the substrate without peeling.
Exposure resistance: paint shall resist yellowing and weathering caused by UV rays and
ozone.
1.4.4 Material Quality:
provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
not be acceptable.
proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that
products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers.
British, European or ISO Standards establishes a minimum quality level for paint materials,
except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the
manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria.
product to be selected from manufacturer's line is to have the highest value of solid and
binder content of the specified range.
Where painting, or repainting, is carried out in occupied areas, provide odorless paints.
1.4.5 Benchmark Samples (Mockups):
provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required
on the Project. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples.
After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, the Engineer
will select room(s) or surface(s) to represent conditions for each type of coating and
substrate to be painted.
After finishes are accepted, the Engineer will use the room or surface to evaluate coating
systems of a similar nature.
Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
1.4.6 Testing of Viscosity:

the Engineer may, at his discretion, take samples of materials from each manufacturing
batch as follows:
unopened tins or samples from previously unopened tins, for submission to manufacturer for
comparison with manufacturer's own retained samples from the same batch

unopened tins or samples from previously unopened tins, as a control sample for assessment
of samples taken from painters' kettles
samples from painters' kettles for submission (with the samples described) to manufacturer
and/or independent testing laboratory for comparative testing.
1.4.7 Inspection of Work:
inspection of the whole of the work at each stage may be made, at the discretion of the
Engineer. Agree with the Engineer a programme which will facilitate such inspections and
notify him when each part and stage of the work is ready for inspection. Do not proceed
with subsequent stages of the work until authorized.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
At project completion provide 4 liters of each type or 5% of the used material quantity
whichever is higher and color of paint from same production run (batch mix) used in
unopened cans properly labeled and identified for Employer’s later use in maintenance.
Store where directed.
1.6 WARRANTY
1.6.1 General Warranty:
The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Employer of other rights
the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
Provide complete painting system guarantee in which Manufacturer, Contractor and installer
shall agree to repair or replace paint coatings that fail within the specified warranty period.
Contractor and Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of material and
labor. Failures include, but are not limited to:
Peeling or blistering of paint film.
Cracking of pain film.
Crazing of pain film
Efflorescence.
Change in colour.
Staining.

Patchiness of sheen or colour.

1.6.2 Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period
or as mentioned in the contract (IF ANY)
1.6.3 Guarantee Period for Paint on structural steel: minimum life to first maintenance in
accordance with QCS 2014 and contract conditions.
2 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the process and workmanship to be used in preparing surfaces to be
painted.

This Section
Part 3Primers, Paints and Coatings
Section 24Finishes to Buildings
2.1.2 References

BS 245 ........................Mineral solvent (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents)
for
paints and other purposes
BS 1336 ......................Knotting
2.2 GENERAL PREPARATIONS
2.2.1 Preparation
1 Before painting commences all surfaces in the work area are to be washed and scrubbed clean
of debris and every possible precaution taken to keep down dust. No paint is to be applied to
surfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free
from condensation, efflorescence, etc., before the application of each coat.
2 All items not required to be painted (e.g., ironmongery) are first to be fitted and then removed
before any painting preparation commences. The fittings shall be refixed in position when all
painting is completed.

3 Brushes, pails, kettles, etc., used in carrying out the work are to be clean and free from foreign
matter. They are to be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of
material.
4 All materials to be used for surface preparations are to be used strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
5 Standard: To BS 6150, Section 4.
6 Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating

manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
7 Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.
8 Efflorescence salts: Remove.
9 Dirt, grease and oil: Remove. Give notice if contamination of surfaces/ substrates has
occurred.
10 Surface irregularities: Abrade to a smooth finish.
11 Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill with stoppers/ fillers. Work well in and finish
off flush with surface. Abrade to a smooth finish.
12 Dust, particles and residues from abrasion: Remove. Fill with stoppers/ fillers. Work well in
and finish off flush with surface. Abrade to a smooth finish.
13 Water based stoppers and fillers: Apply before priming unless recommended otherwise by
manufacturer. If applied after priming: Patch prime.
14 Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming.
15 Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease, if necessary, before coating. Prime
resulting bare areas.
2.2.2 Preparatory Materials
1 Paint removers, abrasive papers and blocks, cleaning agents, etching solutions, stopping,
knotting, fillers and other commodities are to be of the types recommended by the
manufacturer of the coating to be applied.
2 White spirit shall comply with BS 245.

3 Knotting shall comply with BS 1336.
4 Stopping and filler for woodwork shall be an approved proprietary lead free, oil-based type
recommended for internal or external work as appropriate. Stopping for woodwork to receive
a clear finish shall be tinted to match with the surrounding woodwork.
5 Filler for plaster and rendering to be an approved proprietary type.

2.2.3 Ironmongery
1 Removal: Before commencing work: Remove ironmongery from surfaces to be coated.
2 Hinges: do not remove.
3 Replacement: Refurbishment as necessary; refit when coating is dry.
2.2.4 Chalking Surfaces:

prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Apply one coat of primer
coating conditioner.
2.2.5 Stopping, Filling and Priming:
apply oil based stoppers/fillers after priming. Apply water based stoppers/fillers before
priming unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Use proprietary materials in
accordance with manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Patch prime water based
stoppers/fillers when applied after priming.
2.2.6 External Doors:
prime and paint bottom edges before hanging.
2.2.7 Doors and Windows:
ensure that doors and opening windows etc. are eased as necessary before coating. Prime
any resulting bare areas.
2.3 PREPARATION OF PLASTERED AND RENDERED SURFACES
1 The surface is first to be scraped to remove mortar splashes, etc., and then made good, cutting
out all defective work and repairing with plaster or render of the same type as previously
used.
2 The surface is then to be rubbed down with fine glass paper to remove loose particles and to
smooth irregularities before the application of the filler coat which is to be spread evenly
with a scraper over all surfaces and allowed to dry.
3 The first application of filler coat will be rubbed down and a second application of filler
coat made as before.
4 The surface is then to be sanded using progressively finer grades of paper until perfectly
smooth and approved by the Engineer.
5 All rendered surfaces are to receive one full coat of alkali resistant primer before the
application of oil based paints.
6 Concrete: remove release agents by washing with weak detergent solution and rinse off with
clean water. Fill blow holes and other surface defects and rub down flush with surface.
7 Masonry: remove dirt, surface deposits, loose and flaking material with a stiff brush. Fill
holes and cracks and rub down flush with surface.

8 Cement-Sand Plaster: remove dirt and surface deposits with a stiff brush. Rub down to remove
nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes. Lightly rub over-trowelled glossy plaster with worn
abrasive paper. Apply and spread filler to the entire surface and rub down to leave completely
smooth and flush, free from depressions, coarse-grained surfaces and other imperfections.
9 Gypsum Plaster: remove dirt and surface deposits with a soft brush. Rub down to remove
nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes. Lightly rub over-trowelled glossy plaster with worn
abrasive paper. Fill all depressions, coarse-grained surfaces, holes and cracks and lightly rub
down flush with surface.
10 Plasterboard: fill imperfections and/or minor damage to leave a smooth, blemish-free surface.
2.4 PREPARATION OF WOOD SURFACES
1 All large, loose or resinous knots are to be cut out and the holes plugged with sound wood.
Nails are to be punched well below surfaces.
2 All surfaces are to be rubbed down with fine glass paper in the direction of the grain to give
a smooth, even finish with arises rounded or eased.
3 After dusting off all oily woods such as teak and afrormosia they are to be washed with
white spirit.
4 Two thin coats of knotting should be applied to all knots and any other resinous parts of
softwood.
5 A full coat of primer is to be vigorously brushed in, particular care being taken to fill end
grain. Backs of members are to receive two coats of primer.
6 After priming all nails, screw holes and similar depressions are to be filled with stopping,
pressed well in and finished off flush with the surface. Screw heads are to be countersunk
sufficiently to hold the stopping.
7 After priming and stopping is completed, pore and grain irregularities are to be treated with
a coat of brush or knife applied filler, and the surface rubbed down smooth and even.
8 Uncoated Wood:
ensure that large and loose knots are removed and made good with sound wood of the same
species and sand down flush
ensure that surfaces are clean and remove oil, grease and excessive natural oils with
suitable solvents
sand to a smooth, even finish with arises rounded or eased
remove resinous exudations by heat, apply two coats of knotting to resinous areas and knots
and allow to dry
ensure that heads of fastenings are countersunk sufficiently to hold stopping/filling; fill nail
and screw holes, joints, cracks, holes, depressions, open or coarse grain with stopper/filler
worked well in and finished off flush with surface; sand smooth and remove dust.

9 Priming Wood: before priming preservative treated wood ensure that any cut surfaces have
been re-treated and solvents have completely dried out. Apply primer to all surfaces including
rebates, beads, backs etc. which will be concealed when components are fixed in place.
Liberally coat all end grain, allow to soak in and then re-coat.
10 Pre-Primed Wood: remove dirt and grease from satisfactorily pre-primed surfaces and sand
lightly. Sand down chalking, powdery and other defective areas to the bare surface, remove
dust and re-prime as necessary.
11 Stopper/Filler For Clear Coatings: carefully adjust colour so that after coatings have been
applied it closely matches the colour of the wood, to approval.
12 Rebates and Beads of Woodwork which is to be varnished must have the first two coats of
varnish applied before glazing.
13 Coating of Concealed Joinery Surfaces:

Workshop Coating of Concealed Joinery Surfaces: General: Apply coatings to all surfaces of
components.
Site Coating of Concealed Joinery Surfaces: After priming, apply additional coatings to
surfaces that will be concealed when fixed in place.
2.5 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
1 Iron and steel surfaces are to be wire brushed to remove rust, loose scale, welding slag and
spatter, and cleaned with white spirit to remove oil, grease and dirt.
2 Iron and steel surfaces are to receive two coats of primer.
3 On pre-primed surfaces care is to be taken to ensure that defective primer, rust and loose
scale are removed back to bare metal and patch primed.
4 Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed within 1 hour of blasting. All other surfaces shall be
primed no later than 3 hours after preparation.
5 Uncoated Steel - Blast Cleaning: remove oil and grease by washing with white spirit or steam.
Blast clean in dry atmospheric conditions using chilled iron grit to BS EN ISO 8501and BS
EN ISO 11124-2 of suitable size, free from fines, moisture and oil. Continue blasting until
finish complies with BS EN ISO 8501- A1, second quality finish. Remove abrasive residues.
Prime surface as soon as possible after cleaning and in any case within 4 hours.
6 Uncoated Steel - Manual Cleaning: where conditions preclude blast cleaning, prepare
uncoated steel manually by chipping, scraping and wire-brushing surfaces to remove loose
rust, loose scale, welding slag and spatter. Clean out crevices. Remove oil, grease and dirt
with white spirit, avoiding spreading it over the surface. Remove residual rust with suitable
chemical treatment, applying primer as soon as it has cured.

7 Pre-Primed Steel: remove dirt and grease from satisfactorily pre-primed surfaces. Remove
any defective primer, rust and loose scale back to bare metal and patch prime to match
existing.
8 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanised surfaces with non-petroleum-based solvents so that

the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pre-treatment from galvanised
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Apply wash primer if
recommended by manufacturer of coating system.
9 Aluminium: remove any surface corrosion with fine abrasive paper lubricated with white
spirit. Wash with white spirit to remove dirt and grease and apply etching primer to provide
key. Small areas may be rubbed down to provide key.
10 Concealed Metal Surfaces: apply black bitumen coating solution to concealed surfaces of
metal components before fixing.
11 Coating of Concealed Metal Surfaces: general: apply additional coatings to surfaces that will
be concealed when component is fixed in place.
2.6 PAINT REMOVERS
2.6.1 Materials
1 The use of paint remover products is to be used only under conditions of acceptable air
ventilation/circulation for those performing the work and for the surrounding environs if
occupied or used by the public.
2 Paint remover products are to be of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the
coating to be applied.
3 Mineral solvent (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents) used in relation to paint
removal process is to conform to BS 245.
4 Manufacturer’s recommended procedures and application of paint remover products are to

be followed.
3 PRIMERS, PAINTS AND COATINGS
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies requirements for products of primers, paints and coatings for building
surfaces and elements.

This Section
Part 1 General
Part 2 Surface Preparation for Painting

3.1.2 References
1 The following Standards are referred to in this Section:

BS 4652...................... Metallic zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
BS 4756...................... Ready-mixed aluminum priming paints for
woodwork BS 5082...................... Water-borne priming paints for
woodwork
BS 5358...................... Solvent-borne priming paints for woodwork
3.2 APPLICATION
3.2.1 General
1 Coatings are to be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction to clean, dry
surfaces, in dust free and dry atmospheric conditions and after any previous coats have
hardened.
2 All brands of primers, paints and coatings are to be approved and shall comply with the
relevant British Standards.
3 Paints of different brands are not to be mixed or used in the same coating system.
4 No dilution of painting materials is to be allowed except strictly as detailed by the

manufacturers and as approved by the Engineer
5 No primed or undercoated woodwork and metalwork is to be left in an exposed or unsuitable

location for any undue period before completion of the painting process. No exterior or
exposed painting is to be carried out under adverse weather conditions, such as rain, extreme
humidity, dust storms, etc.
6 Coating Generally:
Application standard: To BS 6150, Section 5.
Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during application and
drying.
Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.
Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by manufacturer.
Overpainting: Do not paint over intumescent strips or silicone mastics.
Priming coats:
Thickness: To suit surface porosity.
Application: As soon as possible on same day as preparation is completed.
Finish:
Even, smooth and of uniform colour.
Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects.

Cut in neatly.
7 General: apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
8 General: do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film:
apply priming coats as soon as possible on the same day as preparation is completed; ensure
that they are of adequate thickness and suit surface porosity
surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules
provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used
the number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by
the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth
even surface according to the manufacturer's directions
apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of
paint until paint film is of uniform finish, colour, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive
a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces
the term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide
desired protection
paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only
paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-
specular black paint
paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces
finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior
finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces
sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat
omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted
apply coatings evenly to give smooth finish of uniform colour, free from brush marks, nibs,
sags, runs and other defects; cut in neatly and cleanly; do not splash or mark adjacent surfaces.
9 Scheduling Painting: apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent

surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying.
Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the
undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
10 Application Procedures: apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to the manufacturer's directions:
brushes : use brushes best suited for the material applied
rollers : use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended
by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
11 Application by Brush: the first, or priming, coat is to exhibit easy brushing and lapping
properties. The succeeding coats applied over the first is to show easy brushing and good
flowing, spreading and lapping properties and it shall exhibit no undue pull under the brush
and show no floating, sagging, running or dripping.
12 Application by Roller: the first, or priming, coat is to exhibit easy rolling, leveling and lapping
properties. The succeeding coats applied over the first is to show easy rolling and good
flowing, spreading and lapping properties and it shall exhibit no undue pull under the brush
and show no floating, sagging, running or dripping.
13 Application by Spray: when applied by spray after thinning with the manufacturer’s
recommended thinner, the first coat is to exhibit satisfactory spraying. The succeeding coats
applied over the first is to show easy spraying and good flowing, and lapping properties and
it shall show no floating, sagging, running or dripping.
14 Minimum Coating Thickness: apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. Check wet film thickness with
wet film gauge.
15 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of

uniform finish, colour, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
16 Transparent (Clear) Finishes: use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film or
indicated gloss. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, colour irregularity, runs, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections:
provide gloss finish for final coats unless indicated.
17 Completed Work: match approved samples for colour, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
18 Staining Wood
Primer: Apply if recommended by stain manufacturer.
Application: Apply in flowing coats and brush out excess stain to produce uniform
appearance.

19 Varnishing: thin first coat with white spirit in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Brush well in, avoiding aeration, and lay off. Apply two further coats of
varnish, rubbing down lightly between coats along the grain.
20 Unsuitable Conditions: do not apply coatings to surfaces affected by moisture, when relative
humidity is more than 80% or when heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling. Take
necessary precautions including restrictions on working hours, providing temporary
protection and allowing extra drying time, to ensure that coatings are not adversely affected
by climatic conditions before, during and after application.
21 Glazing: protect etched and ground glass from attack by oily constituents of coating materials
by treating edges before coating and cleaning surfaces after coating.
22 Completion: ensure that opening lights and other moving parts move freely. Remove all
masking tape and protective wrappings.
3.2.2 Workmanship in General
1 Standard: work in this Section is to be executed generally in accordance with BS 6150 and
BS 8000-12.
2 Quality of Work: operatives must be appropriately skilled and experienced in the use of
specified materials and methods of application. Prepare surfaces and apply coatings in
accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
3 Compatibility:
where surfaces have been treated with preservatives, check with treatment manufacturer that
coating materials are compatible with the treatment and do not inhibit its performance
inform the Engineer of any discrepancy in specification of coatings and obtain instructions
before proceeding with application.
4 Colour Range: carry out decoration in colours to BS 4800 or within range produced by
particular coating manufacturer as appropriate and as selected by the Engineer.
5 Off Site Work: off site preparation and coating is to be carried out under cover in a suitable
environment with adequate lighting. Store all items, both before and after coating, in a clean,
dry area protected from the weather and mechanical damage, properly stacked with spaces to
permit air circulation and prevent sticking of surfaces.
6 Protection: adequately protect both internal and external surfaces which are not to be coated,
by covering with dust sheets or other suitable materials. Exhibit 'wet paint' signs and provide
barriers where necessary to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.
7 CLEANING: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
3.3 PRIMERS AND UNDERCOATINGS

3.3.1 Materials
1 Primers: provide manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are

compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated
2 Undercoats on wood and metal surfaces are to be of the drying-oil/resin binder type pigmented
with titanium dioxide and/or colored pigments providing a matt or low-sheen finish suitable
for subsequent application of a drying-oil type finish.
3 Water thinned priming paints and undercoats shall only be used with the approval of the
Engineer. In order to obtain such approval, the Contractor shall demonstrate that proposed
water thinned priming paints and undercoats comply with BS 5082.
4 Etch Primers: wash or etch primer to BS 2X 32 used to prepare interior and exterior zinc-
coated (galvanised) metal surfaces to receive metal primer, are to be alcoholic solution of
resin, zinc chromate and phosphoric acid.
5 Galvanised Metal Primers: solvent based, two components, epoxy - polyamide type,
anticorrosive primer for exterior and interior, ferrous and galvanized metal surfaces. Use over
new, cleaned metals and as a spot primer or full coat over previous epoxy coatings that have
been properly prepared with hand, power tool or abrasive blasting cleaning methods.
Application methods include using brushes, rollers, and airless and conventional spray.
6 Ferrous Metal Primers: appropriate type epoxy zinc-rich primers conforming to BS 4652, for
priming ferrous metals and under high-gloss alkyd enamels. Zinc dust in base component shall
conform to BS EN ISO 3549. Content of zinc metal in dry film shall be not less than 85% of
cured paint film
7 Concrete and Masonry Primers: interior and exterior, flat, Acrylic-based primer-sealer, under
Acrylic Emulsion. Primer-sealer shall be the product recommended by the manufacturer of
finishing paint.
8 Gypsum Board Primer: white, interior, latex-based primer conforming to FS-TT-P- 650D and
shall be the product recommended by the manufacturer of finishing paint.
9 Concrete and Masonry Primers: interior, epoxy-based primer. Primer-sealer shall be the
product recommended by the manufacturer of finishing paint.
10 Primer for Wood: ready mixed aluminium priming paint to BS 4756 or solvent-borne priming
paint to BS 7956, to provide high moisture resistance and suitable for use with type of wood
and preservative treatment.
11 Fillers: Fillers in powder form for mixing with water and consisting of acrylic resins and
appropriate fillers. It is to be used on interior concrete or plastered wall surfaces as
recommended for particular purpose by the paint manufacturer. Adherence to wall surfaces is
not to be less than 50 N/cm2. to FS-TT-P-641G.

12 Fillers: Oil-based proprietary fillers in paste form consisting of alkyd resins and appropriate
fillers. It is to be used on primed interior / exterior wood as recommended for particular
purpose by the paint manufacturer. Adherence is not to be less than 50 N/cm2
13 Undercoat Materials: provide paint manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated

undercoat materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
3.3.2 Workmanship
1 Priming coats are to be applied by brush unless other methods are approved taking care to
work the primer into the surface, joints, angles and end grain.
2 Any primed surfaces which have deteriorated on site or in transit are to be touched up to the
approval of the Engineer.
3 All surfaces of joinery which have not been primed in the workshop are to be primed
immediately on arrival at site and before fixing.
4 Undercoats are to be applied as an even film over all exposed surfaces avoiding an uneven
thickness at edges and angles.
5 All priming and undercoats are to be rubbed down to a smooth surface with fine abrasive
paper and cleaned of all dust before the application of the next coat.
6 Prime Coats: before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended
by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been
prime-coated by others. Re-coat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots
or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
3.4 PAINTS AND FINISH COATINGS
3.4.1 Materials
1 The number of coats shall be as specified by the paint manufacturer, or at minimum, as

specified on Table 3.2.
Table 3.2
Minimum Number of Coats for Drying-Oil/Resin Based Paint Systems on New Work
SURFACE LOCATION PAINT SYSTEM

Wood-oil paint Internal Primer: Alkyd oil based primer
Filler
Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat
First Coat: Odorless Alkyd Enamel
Second Coat: Odorless Alkyd Enamel

External 1 coat primer

2 coats undercoat
1 coat alkyd gloss finish (lead free)
Wood-natural Internal Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler
finish Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer
First Finish Coat: polyurethane varnish
Second Finish Coat: polyurethane
varnish
Iron and steel Internal Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, zinc rich,
anti-corrosive, for metal.
Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, two-
component, pigmented, gloss.
Topcoat: Epoxy, two-component,
pigmented, gloss.
Iron and steel External Primer: epoxy zinc Rich Primer
Intermediate Coat: Epoxy zinc rich, two
component pigmented.
First Coat: Polyurethane two
component, pigmented
Second Coat: Polyurethane two
Galvanized steel Internal Primer: Etching Primer
Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, zinc rich, anti-
corrosive, for metal.
Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, two-
component, pigmented, gloss.
Topcoat: Epoxy, two-component,
pigmented, gloss.
Galvanized steel External Primer: Etching Primer
Primer: Galvanized metal primer
Structural steel Internal/External Primer: epoxy Zinc Rich Primer
(paint system shall comply with BS EN
ISO 12944)
Cement Concrete, Internal Primer: Acrylic-based primer sealer
Masonry or Plaster Filler/putty
First Coat: Interior Acrylic Emulsion
Second Coat: Interior Acrylic Emulsion

Cement Concrete, Internal Prime Coat: Epoxy, solvent based, gloss,

Masonry or Plaster two components, epoxy/polyamide
coating.
Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, solvent
based, gloss, two components,
epoxy/polyamide coating.
Topcoat: Epoxy, solvent based, gloss,
two component, epoxy/polyamide
coating.
Cement Concrete, External Primer: Acrylic-based primer sealer
Masonry or Plaster Filler/putty
First Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion
Second Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion
2 Pigment: the basic pigment is to be Titanium Dioxide Rutile to ASTM D 476, Types III or
IV. Type III is to be used for interior paints whereas type IV is to be used for exterior paints.
3 Extender Pigment: no extender pigments or inert fillers other than barayte, mica or talc.
4 Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Exterior, 100% acrylic exterior resin based emulsion to produce a
durable, flexible and water-resistant coating suitable for repeated washing and scrubbing. The
white pigment shall consist of titanium dioxide Rutile.
5 Interior Acrylic Emulsion: Interior, 100% acrylic resin based emulsion to produce a durable,
Satin, flexible and water-resistant coating suitable for repeated washing and scrubbing.
6 Interior, Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel: oleo-resinous, alkyd paint to FS- A-A-50574 (MPI 47).
Paint is to be non-toxic, drying to a smooth, highly opaque surface to produce a durable,
flexible and water-resistant coating with excellent adhesion and colour retention Undercoat
is to be suitable to receive further coatings. Finish is to be semi-gloss or as selected by the
Engineer. The minimum constituent properties are to be as follows:
7 Natural-Finish Woodwork: provide satin polyurethane varnish natural finishes over new,
interior or exterior woodwork.
8 Epoxy system for interior concrete/plaster substrates: A solvent based, gloss, two-component
epoxy/polyamide coating specified for walls surfaces in moderate to heavy traffic commercial
and moderate industrial environments. It shall be resistant to incidental splash and spillage of
dilute (5%) sulfuric acid, (15%) hydrochloric acid, (20%) sodium hydroxide, gasoline and
heavy duty cleaners and detergents. Use as a self-priming material on smooth, low porosity
concrete, and masonry surfaces. This epoxy shall be suitable for application at temperatures
ranging from 15 to 40 degrees C and a maximum relative humidity of 80%. Application is
generally by spray, but in areas where spray is impractical, a brush or roller may be used.
9 Epoxy paint system for steel & Galvanised Steel items: shall comply with BS EN ISO 12944
Corrosion category C4 top coat and primer are to be based on a high molecular weight epoxy
resin. Finish is to be gloss, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
10 Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented: paint system shall comply with BS EN ISO 12944
corrosion category C4

11 Anti-carbonation coating: Pure 100 % acrylic water based, flexible, waterproof, highly
reflective, crack bridging, and breathable, anti-carbonation coating with long lasting colors
with smooth Elastomeric Finish. One or 2 finish coats, as recommended by manufacturer,
over primer.
Primer: Manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primer applied at spreading rate

recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.10 mm.
First Coat: Smooth, factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating applied at
spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.18 mm.
Second Coat: Smooth, factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating applied at
spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.18 mm.
3.4.2 Workmanship
1 Care shall be taken to ensure that finish coats applied over calcium plumbate primer are
compatible with the primer.
2 Finish coats will be applied as an even film over all exposed surfaces, avoiding brush marks,
sags, runs and other defects. Where two gloss finish coats are specified the second coat shall
be applied within 48 hours of the first.
3 The application of paint systems for iron and steel should result in a minimum total film
thickness of 125 microns internally or externally notwithstanding the number of coats
specified.
4 Submit the third party testing report in addition submit corrosion resistance testing in
accordance with BS EN ISO 12944 requirements.
4 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope: this Section includes surface preparation and application of concealed cementitious
spray applied fireproofing material.
4.1.2 Definitions
1 SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.
2 CONCEALED: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view
behind other construction when the Work is completed and have not been defined as exposed.

3 EXPOSED: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the
Work is completed, that are in air-handling plenums, and that are identified as exposed on
Drawings.
4.1.3 Submittals
1 Product data: For each type of product indicated.
2 Shop drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:
(a) Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.
(b) Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the
following:
Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction.
For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire-resistance design designations, with each
steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile stress as each steel joist indicated. Design
designations with steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are
not permitted.
(c) Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural

components and assemblies.
Treatment of SFRM after application.
3 Product certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer.
4 Qualification data: For Installer, manufacturer, professional engineer, and testing agency.
5 Compatibility and adhesion test reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following:
Materials have been tested for bond with substrates.
Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate primers
and coatings.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
6 Product test reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for proposed SFRM.
7 Research/evaluation reports: For SFRM.
8 Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.

9 Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1 Installer qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by

SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's
products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM
to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification
on the buyer.
2 Source limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer.
3 SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or

manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test
methods.
SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification
marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities
having jurisdiction.
Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing

requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive materials,
including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water
overspray, if any of these are used in final application.
Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting
agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full
description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.
4 Compatibility and adhesion testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test
for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.
Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for
coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but
not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found
primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.
5 Fire-test-response characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteristics

indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL’s "Fire Resistance

Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency FM's "Approval
Guide, Building Materials” Omega Point Laboratories Inc. Directory of Listed Building

Products, Materials and Assemblies Insert testing agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities
having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
6 Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method

specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
7 Mockups: apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
Extent of Mockups: Approximately 9 sq. m of surface for each product indicated.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
4.1.5 Delivery, Storage, And Handling
1 Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if
applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
2 Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
3 Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove
from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.
4.1.6 Project Conditions
1 Environmental limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 4

deg C or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at
or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.
Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions regarding the high temperature limitations.
2 Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural
means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries
thoroughly.
4.1.7 Coordination
1 Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other
Sections to comply with the following requirements:
Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the
environment.

Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive

material due to exposure to weather and to unfavourable ambient conditions for humidity,
temperature, and ventilation.
Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to
occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if
any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire-
resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof
traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has
been completed.
Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other
items penetrating fire protection are in place.
Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-resistive
material until application of fire protection is completed.
Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been
applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications.
4.1.8 Warranty
1 Special warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or

delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Employer's
maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated
and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under
conditions of normal use.
4.2 PRODUCTS
4.2.1 Concealed (Cementitious) Sfrm
1 Material composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:

(a) Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland

cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with
water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
2 Physical properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required
to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced
with each property as follows:
(a) Dry Density: 240 kg/cu. m for average and individual densities, or greater if required to
attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-
A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
(b) Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated
according to the following criteria, but not less than 9 mm, per ASTM E 605:Where the
referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 25 mm or more, the minimum
allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 6 mm.Where the
referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 25 mm but more than 9 mm,
the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 9 mm or 75 percent
of the design thickness.No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-
resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than
240 kg/cu. m.
(c) Bond Strength: 7.2 kPa minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 19-
mm minimum thickness of SFRM.
(d) Compressive Strength: 35.9 kPa minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of
SFRM tested shall be 19 mm and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less
than 240 kg/cu. m.
(e) Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
(f) Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
(g) Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760.
(h) Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.270 g/sq. m in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For
laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 19 mm, maximum dry density is 240
kg/cu. m, test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and
tests are terminated after 24 hours.
(i) Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities having
jurisdiction:
Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 0.Fungal Resistance:
No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
4.2.2 Exposed Intumescent Mastic Fire-Resistive Coatings

1 Fire-Resistive, Intumescent Mastic Coating: Factory-mixed formulation.

2 Water-Based Formulation: Approved by manufacturer and Engineer / authorities having
jurisdiction and investigated for Conditioned Interior Space Purpose by UL.
3 Non-Water-Based Formulation: Approved by manufacturer and UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction and investigated for
Interior General Purpose and Exterior Use by UL.
4 Multicomponent system consisting of intumescent base coat and topcoat.
5 Colour and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's
6 PRIME COAT: Latex-type 2 pack epoxy primers applied at the spreading rate recommended
by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.1 mm. primer shall
give protection to the structural steel
Life to first Maintenance: Life of building for C1 environment

Life to first Maintenance: Up to 20 years in a C2 to C4 Environment
7 INTERMEDIATE COAT: Latex-type intumescent coat to give the fire protection required
and certified by the approved testing laboratory.
8 TOP SEAL: finish and seal coat recommended by the Manufacturer

Colours: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
9 BASIC FINISH: Definition: Reasonably smooth and even. Orange peel, other texture, minor
runs and similar minor defects are acceptable.
10 NORMAL DECORATIVE FINISH: Definition: Good standard of cosmetic finish generally,

when viewed from a distance of 5 m or more. Minor orange peel or other texture is acceptable.
HIGH DECORATIVE FINISH: Definition: High standard of evenness, smoothness and gloss
when viewed from a minimum distance of 2 m.
Fire-Resistive, Intumescent Mastic Coating: Factory-mixed formulation.
11 Water-Based Formulation: Approved by manufacturer and Engineer / authorities having

jurisdiction and investigated for Interior General Purpose by UL.
12 Multicomponent system consisting of intumescent base coat and topcoat.
Colour and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
4.2.3 Auxiliary Fire-Resistive Materials
1 General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
2 Structural steel, whether interior or exterior shall receive an anti-corrosive primer coating, as
per as per requirement of this section part 3 prior to the application of spray applied
fireproofing. The application of the anti-corrosive primer to protect the underlying structural
steel shall be as per the recommendations in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and may require
the use of bonding agents or mechanical attachment on beams, columns, tube and pipe steel
to maintain the fire-resistive rating. Obtain the certification of the coating supplier that the
primer is fully compatible with portland cement based fireproofing. An on-site mock-up and

bond test shall be performed on all unknown or untested coatings prior to application of
fireproofing to determine compatibility.
3 Primers based on chlorinated rubber, bitumen or solvent born thermoplastics should not be
used because of their softening in case of fire.
4 Substrate primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product,
provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
6 Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.
7 Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics of

SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction.
8 Adhesive for bonding fire-resistive material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM.
9 Metal lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish
required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material
manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads,
and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM.
10 Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each SFRM for application over
concealed SFRM.
5 EXECUTION
5.1.1 Examination
1 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate
is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
(a) Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related
materials and construction are specified.
(b) Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose
scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulates, or other
foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates
under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
(c) Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and
similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
(d) Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.

2 Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.
3 Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related
work are completed.
4 Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to

verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
5 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
5.1.2 Preparation
1 Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials
during application.
2 Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,
oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulate.
3 Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible

shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.
5.1.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
1 Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-
resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2 Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance"
Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use,
sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures
affecting test results.
3 Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and
fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and
intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position required for support and
reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in
writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure
attachment of lath and fabric to substrate.
4 Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required
to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for
material and application indicated.
5 Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be
protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of
fire-resistive covering in a single course.

6 Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement
method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.
7 For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants,

apply SFRM that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.
8 Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over
which they are applied.
5.1.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM
1 Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve
fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and
densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.
2 Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain

designated fire-resistance rating.
3 Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
4 Apply sealer to concealed SFRM.
5.1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1 Testing agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
(a) Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
2 Tests and inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take
place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed
with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or
exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.
(a) Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 93-sq. m area, or partial area,
on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 0.093-sq. m sample area, with
sample width of not less than 152 mm per ASTM E 605.
(b) Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural
members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame
beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12
measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
(c) Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from
sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural

framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5,
"Displacement Method."
(d) Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 929
sq. m area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size
indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing
member, per ASTM E 736.
Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on

surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive
material.
If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating
materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, but not less than
minimum per ASTM E 736.
(e) If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing
and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of
noncompliance.
3 Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion
and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
4 Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate
that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.
5.1.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR
1 Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
2 Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3 Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove
fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any
damaged or removed areas.
4 Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
5.1.7 Traffic coating systems:
1 Traffic Coating System (covered areas): Consisting of a flexible, liquid applied,

elastomeric waterproofing membrane and liquid applied polyurethane wearcourse.
2 Traffic Coating System (open areas including ramps): Consisting of a flexible, liquid
applied, elastomeric waterproofing membrane, liquid applied polyurethane wearcourse, and
100% solids topcoat.

3 Colour to be selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colours.

4 Traffic coating system shall be low V.O.C. compliant and include all primers, flashings,
sealants, aggregates, and accessories for a complete installation.
6 VINYL DECORATIVE SURFACE
6.1. Digital printed wallcovering;
1 Vinyl finishing coat, viscose polyester backing s indicated in the drawings.

Roll width 130cm.
Density; 350gr/m2
Fire resistance ; EN13501 B s1 d0
IMO 2010 FTP part 2-5
ASTM E84, A
7 HELIPAD FLOOR COATING;
A. Primer;
The primer slightly sprinkled with quartz sand sand serves the mechanical grip for the subsequent coating
1. Barrier primer:
Primer for substrates with increased moisture content. Apply barrier primer without broadcast completely
seals‐in the pores.
Material consumption Primer: min. 300 – 500 g/m2 per layer
2. Blocking primer,
min 500 – 600 g/m² without sand scattering

300 – 400 g/m² sand scattering if scattering needed
B. Wear coat:
Apply solvent free, two component polyurethane coating with high abrasion resistance and capability for
crack bridging.
Apply the first wear coat with a low consumption of binder and broadcast with quartz sand
The second wear coat is sprinkled with corundum and a granulation of 1.0 – 2.0 mm
Abrasive strength min 2.0N/mm² EN ISO 4624
Tensile strength aprox 15N/mm² EN ISO 196/ASTM C109
Grey color
• Shore D hardness: 60 – 65
• elongation at a break: approx. 30%
C. Sealer:
Two component sealer is weather‐ and colour‐proof with high resistance against acid and lye,
lubricant and fuel, colour stable, solvent-based, abrasion resistant
Material consumption 300 – 600 g/ m2
Relative humidity max . 85%
Application temperatura 10–30°C (min. 3°C above dew-point)
D. Lining:
Poliurethane bond outdoor paint.

Abrasion resistant, weather stable, two components, stress resistant, Red and white colour or as defined
in the project documentation. The pressure‐resistance arises from the hardness of the sanding materials
(corundum). The technical data by far suffices to satisfy the requirements for the application on a
helicopter landing pad.
Material consumption 300‐400 gr /m2 or as per manufacturer recommendation.
Application method
Base preparation
Substrate preparation;
The substrate must be prepared by vacuum shot blasting. Rough contaminations can be removed by
grinding.
Apply barrier primer directly to the surface if the substrate moisture content does not exceed max. 6 CM
% and the surface is absorbend and free from puddles. There should be no water in the pores. The surface
must have an adhesive strength of minimum 1.5 N/mm². All traces of contaminants such as oils, fats,
greases, paint residues, chemicals, algae and laitance should be removed. Cracks and hollow spots must be
properly remedied. Before re‐topping old coatings.
Before starting the application, the material has to be heated to ambient temperature (air and floor
temperature). Material must be mixed with a suitable electrical stirrer as per the manufacturer
recommendation. The inclusion of air in the stirring process is to be avoided.
It should be particularly ensured that a film‐forming, closed surface is produced. The first layer must not
be sprinkled over with quartz sand. The second layer can be rolled with a short pile roller usually 12 h after
the application of the first layer. To improve inter‐layer adhesion the wet primer can be sprinkled slightly
with silica sand. (consumption approx. 800 g/m2 ). Overcoating Overcoating has to take place within 24
hours after application of the layer.
Wear coat.
Surface must be clean and free of dust and loose particles. The crack bridging layer shall
be applied as per manufacturer instructions, not later than 24hours after the previous
layer has been laid.
Components must be stirred nd mixed until the mix is homogeneous using electric stirrer.
The inclusion of air in the stirring process is to be avoided.
The coat are poured onto the surface and spread over the area using a serrated spatula
for layer thickness control. Quarz sand 0,7 -1.2 is used.
Sealer.
Substrate preparation
The substrate must be clean and free of dust and loose particles. All traces of contaminants such as oils, fats, greases,
paint residues, chemicals, algae and laitance should be removed.
Must be applied no later than 24 hours after the previous layer has been laid.
Mix the components following the manufacturer instructions,

The sealer is poured onto the surface and spread over the entire area using a rubber squeegee.
Then it is rolled with a roller (short-piled) in one direction. The formation of puddles should be avoided.
As finish we recommend to roll in one direction with a wide short-pile mohair roller. The drying time for seams of the wet
sealer is 5 minutes.
Line marking.
Surface adhesion test needs to be performed.

Material must be mixed with a suitable electrical stirrer as per the manufacturer recommendation. The
inclusion of air in the stirring process is to be avoided.
Application can be done with brush or suitable line marking machine. Apply in one or two spray
applications.
After application, the material needs to be protected from water or rain as per the manufacturer
instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 30 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
1. GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE
1.1.1. This Section is for the specification of supply and installation of toilet and bath
accessories including unit mirrors.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation/maintenance instructions for all
manufactured products and materials.
Shop Drawings:
2. Submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, locations,
and designs proposed for use.
Record Documents:
3. Provide record approved product data and shop drawings.
1.2.1. Setting Drawings: submit drawings for cut-outs required in other work; include
templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cut-outs and
installing anchoring devices.
1.2.2. Product Schedule: submit product schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and
installation locations by room of each accessory required. In the Product Schedule, use
designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations
as indicated on Drawings.
1.2.3. Maintenance Data: submit maintenance data for accessories, to be included in the
operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement
parts and service recommendations.
1.2.4. Quality Assurance
1.2.4.1. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory and comparative data to Engineer for review.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and

anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate
delivery with other Work to avoid delay.
Single Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of
accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise
acceptable to Architect.
1.3. SPARE MATERIALS

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES S30 - Page 35 of
1.3.1. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.3.2. Toilet Accessories: The spare materials shall be supplied as per percentages or quantities
stipulated under the contract or as per QCS 2014, or no more than recommended by the supplier.
2. MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
Materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards and conform to
codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.1 COMPONENTS
2.1.1 Metal and Wood component parts of fittings including fastenings, fixings, treatments
and finishings, unless otherwise indicated are to be in accordance with the
requirements of Sections 17 and 18 of the Specification.
2.1.2 Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304 unless Type 316 is indicated and required,
with satin finish, in 0.8-mm minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
2.1.3 Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.9-
mm minimum nominal thickness.
2.1.4 Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Z180 hot-dip zinc coating.
2.1.5 Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus
chromium electro-deposited on base metal.
2.1.6 Mirror Glass: as per the requirements of Section 25 of the Specification.
2.1.7 Galvanised Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.1.8 Fasteners, screws, bolts, and other devices are to be of same material as accessory unit,
tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.2 FABRICATION
Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units.
On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification
of each accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate
indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
Surface Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated,

fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or
access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed
anchorage wherever possible.
Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate

units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels
with full length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed
when unit is closed.
Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate
wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and
support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent
moisture accumulation, as follows:

4. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.8mm and full mirror size,
with non-absorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable
filler material.
Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid,
tamperproof, as follows:
5. One piece galvanized steel, wall hanger device with spring action locking
mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
6.
Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal
access for servicing, re-supply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's
representative.
2.3 WASHROOMACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Waste receptacle :
1 Pedal operated, tip-open bin waste receptacle

2 Include interior receptacle, manufactured with black color thermoplastic ABS
3 Includes a steel handle for its removal.
4 Material; Stainless Steel AISI 410
5 Capacity: 12 L / 20 L As indicated in the schedule of accessories.
6 Finish: Polished finish
2.3.2 Clothes Hook

1. Material; Stainless Steel
Finish: Brushed finish.
Types as indicated in the schedule of accessories and drawings.
2.3.3 Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1 Surface mounted soap dispenser.
2 Soap dispenser fabricated from stainless steel able to dispense all-purpose soap
dispenser complete with corrosion-resistant valve.
3 Size: 12 mm length x 20.5 mm height x 7 mm width.
4 Lockset: Requires special key to open.
5 Refill Indicator: Window type.
6 Valve to be operable with one hand and require less than 5 lb of force to comply
with the accessibility Guidelines referred in QCS 2014
7 Finish: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish.
2.3.4 Paper towel dispensers:

1 Surface mounted, automatic paper towel dispenser.
2 Type: Folded.
3 Finish: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish.
4 Size: 260mm length x 340mm height x 130 mm width or as indicated in the drawings.
2.3.5 Folding Shower Seat:

1 Type: wall mounted. 485 mm projected from wall.
2 Shower seat: plastic slatted seat.
3 Frame: Polyester coated aluminium.
4 Fixings: seat must be securely fixed to a solid wall using appropriate fixings.
2.3.6 Back support with cushion

1 Material: polyester coated aluminium.
2 Colour: As selected by Engineer.
3 Size: 360 mm length x 230 mm projected from wall.
2.3.7 Grab bar (Handicap)

1 32 mm outside diameter, grab bar fabricated from 1.2 mm thick stainless steel.

2 Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3 Finish: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish and peened grip.
4 Lengths and configurations: As indicated on drawings.
5 Construction: 38mm clearance between grab bar and wall.
6 Sizes: Refer to Drawings.
2.3.8 Grab bar hinged-swing up

Stainless steel with satin finish.
Dimensions as indicated in the accessories schedule
2.3.9 Mirror, Framed:

7. Material: No. 1 quality, 6mm select float glass, 0.8mm galvanized steel back and
stainless steel retainer angle; channel frame with mitered corners.
8. Size: As indicated in the drawings.
9. Mounting: Concealed hangers.
2.3.10 Toilet Tissue Dispenser,:

10. Material: Satin-finish stainless steel.
11. Capacity: Double Roll and Single standard core tissue roll as indicated in
accessories schedule and drawings.
12. Mounting: Surface.
2.1.11. Shower curtain

2.1.12. Shower curtain hook
2.1.13. Shower curtain rod. Heavy duty shower curtain rod.
Material Stainless Steel
7.2.1 HOSPITAL ACCESSORIES
7.2.1.1 DRYING RACK
1 Made of rigid High Impact Polyester

2 Supplied with 72 push-in pegs
3 Drainage hose attached to a seamless drip channel
4 Supplied with mounting kit, draining hose, and fixing template
5 Dimensions: As indicated
7.2.1.2 SOAP DISPENSER
1 Shall be mounted on glass screen in sink unit, service spine or on hospital walls
2 Silver anodized aluminum housing
3 Stainless Steel long lever for elbow operation
4 High-density polyethylene (HDPE) bottle.
5 Exchangeable stainless steel pump
7.2.1.3 TOWEL DISPENSER
1 Dispenser for paper towel

2 Silver anodized aluminum housing
3 Lockable front door
3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERALLY
3.1.1 Coordination: ensure manufacturer's standard details and fixing instructions are provided as
necessary for co-ordination with related building elements and services.
3.1.2 Fabricating, Machining and Assembling of fittings are, where relevant, to be in accordance
with the requirements of Sections 17 and 18 of the Specification.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Installation shall meet or exceed Qatar Construction Specifications.
Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other

Work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment,
cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items.
3.2.1 Fixing Generally including storage and protection are, where relevant, to be in accordance
3.2.2 Install Accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
3.2.3 Secure Mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle
bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.
3.2.4 Install Grab Bars to withstand a downward load of at least 1112 N, when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.3.1 Adjust Accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms
function properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
3.3.2 Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
3.3.3 Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 - FURNITURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 Scope: this Section is for the specification of furniture provided loose within building spaces,
together with all associated hardware, fixings, ironmongery and accessories as shown on
drawings or on schedule.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product Data for each type of furniture item specified, including material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, finishes, and accessories.
1.2.2 Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for
each type of unit indicated.
1.2.3 Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size
approved by Engineer and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of work.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the
full range of variations expected.
1.2.4 Shop Drawings: show design, dimensions and construction. Include material thicknesses,
finishes, direction of wood grain for wood items, reinforcements, and attachments.
1.2.5 Control Samples: following approval of drawings and samples, prepare one of each type of
purpose-made furniture as part of the quantity required for the project and obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding with manufacture of remaining quantity.
1.2.6 Product Schedule: use room designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule.
1.2.7 Operation And Maintenance Data: for furniture items to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that
could be detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.3.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.4 Coordination
1.4.1 Coordinate layout and installation of furniture with work of other contracts.
1.5 Warranty
FURNITURE Section 31 - 1
1.5.1 Special Warranty: manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace custom furniture that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Structural failures, including excessive deflection, that impair furniture's usefulness
Faulty operation of hardware
Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal wear.
1.5.2 Warranty Period: It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned in
2 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
2.1 Source Quality Control
2.1.1 Inspection And Testing: at Engineer's or Employer's option, furniture may be inspected and
tested at manufacturer's expense to determine compliance with Contract Documents.
Examination may be made at factory by Engineer's or Employer's representative at any time
during the manufacturing process, at any point of delivery, or before installation.
2.2 Stone countertops
2.2.1 Granite
Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C615/C615M.
Description: Uniform, fine-grained stone, with color as selected by Engineer, without

veining.
Cut: Vein.
Cut stone from contiguous, matched slabs in which natural markings occur.
Finish: Polished unless otherwise indicated.
2.2.2 Adhesives, Grout, Sealants, and Stone accessories
General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are
recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-

setting and -grouting epoxy.
Plywood Subtops: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C
Plugged, touch sanded.
Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated,
as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do
not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
2.2.3 Stone fabrication, general
Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and
starts that may impair structural integrity, function, or appearance.
Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not
impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by
Architect.
Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an
overall uniform appearance.
Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated.
Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments.
Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work.
Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to
reversecontour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge
and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints
between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly
eased unless otherwise indicated.
Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone
type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on
exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.
Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements
for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
2.2.4 Stone countertops
General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VII."
Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 20 mm. Gage backs to
provide units of identical thickness.
Edge Detail: 20-mm full bullnose unless otherwise indicated.
Splashes: Provide 20-mm-thick backsplashes and end splashes unless otherwise indicated.
Height: 100 mm unless otherwise indicated.

Top-Edge Detail: 10-mm bevel unless otherwise indicated.
Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.
Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations
indicated.
Joint Locations: Not within 450 mm of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section
less than 900 mm long may result, unless unavoidable.
Joint Type: Grouted, 1.5 mm in width.
Cutouts and Holes:
Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or
pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom
surfaces of countertop and projecting 5 mm into fixture opening.
Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for
counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout
locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.
Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and
similar items.
3 WORKMANSHIP
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
3.2 Adjusting
Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.
3.3 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.
Type: Provide Standard type or Veneer type made from material complying with
requirements for Standard type, as indicated unless Special Purpose type is indicated.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged,
touch sanded.
4. METAL LOCKERS AND LOCKERS BENCHES
PART1. GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, apply to this
Section.
1. SUMMARY
2. Section includes:
a. Metal lockers.
b. Locker benches.
1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS
The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless
identified by a specific edition date.
Reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be
applicable to this Project.
Materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with all applicable requirements
and standards.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
Uniformity: Provide metal lockers that are standard products of single manufacturer,
with interchangeable like parts. Include necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and
fastenings.
1.4. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5. SUBMITTALS

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker and bench.
Shop Drawings: For metal lockers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment
details.
2. Show locker trim and accessories.
3. Include locker identification system and numbering
sequence. Retain "Samples" Paragraph below for single-
stage Samples, with a subordinate list if applicable. Retain
"Samples for Initial Selection" and "Samples for
Verification" paragraphs for two-stage Samples.
Samples: For each color specified, in manufacturer's standard size.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors available.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard size:
4. Lockers and equipment.
5. Locker benches.
Product Schedule: For lockers. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for
their installation.
Deliver master and control keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package
service.
1.7. FIELD CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field

measurements before fabrication.
1.8. COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases for metal lockers unless on locker
stand (legs) along with benches.
1.9. WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within
specified warranty period.
6. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Structural failures.
Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
7. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is

excluded.
8. Warranty Period for Welded Metal Lockers: As required by
per QCS 2014 and Contract conditions.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. Materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Lockers shall not have Manufacturer branding or logo.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers, locker benches, and accessories

from single source from single locker manufacturer.
13. 1. Obtain locks from single lock manufacturer.
2.2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Accessibility Standard: BS 8300 Design of an accessible and inclusive built

environment
2.3. MANUFACTURERS
Approved manufacturers.
2.4. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Provide steel lockers with vented door panel as specified herein. Provide the
following arrangements and sizes as indicated on the Drawings:
B. Lockers types and sizes as defined in the drawings and Interior design
documentation.
2.5. MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: Mild cold rolled and leveled furniture steel, free from buckle,
scale, and surface imperfections.
B. Fasteners: Cadmium, zinc, or nickel-plated steel; exposed bolt heads, slotless

type; self locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
C. Equipment: Hooks and hang rods of cadmium plated or zinc plated steel.
2.6. FABRICATION, GENERAL
Construction: Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat
and free ofZdents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch. Weld frame
members together to form rigid, one piece structure. Weld, bolt, or rivet other joints
and connections. Grind exposed welds flush. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on
fronts of locker doors or frames.
2.7. FINISHES, GENERAL
Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinished stainless-steel and
chrome-plated surfaces.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish consisting of a primer and a
thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for
applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.036mm on doors,
frames, and legs, and 1.1 mils (0.028 mm) elsewhere.
14. Color: Provide locker units in color(s) selected by Architect from manufacturer's
complete line (15 choices minimum) of available colors. Concealed parts may
be manufacturer's standard neutral color.
2.8. WARDROBE LOCKERS
A. Body: Fabricate back and sides of minimum 0.6mm steel, with double flanged
connections extending full height. Form top and bottom of not less than
0.6mm steel, with flanged edges.
1. Provide 0.6mm, steel sheet hat shelf in single tier units.

2. Form exposed ends of non recessed lockers of minimum 1.3mm (16 gage)
steel.
B. Door: One piece, minimum 12mm MDF with plastic laminate and plastic edge
bands, colour as specified on drawings.
1. Ventilation: Provide slots at full perimeter of opening.
2. Hinges: Steel, full loop, 5 knuckle, tight pin. Weld to inside of frame and
secure to door with not fewer than 2 factory installed fasteners that are
completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed.
Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 1m high; at least 2 hinges for each door 1m high or
less.
C. Handle and Latch: Positive automatic, non-protruding, prelocking, pry resistant

latch and pull; 14 gage plastic covered, heavy duty, vandalproof lift up handle,
with strike and eye for padlock.
15. A 0.8mm (20 gage) stainless steel recessed pocket containing the latch and
handle shall be provided.
16.
2.9. LOCKER ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless

otherwise shown:
1. Single Tier Units: Hat shelf, one double prong rear hook and not fewer than 2
single prong side hooks.
2. Double Tier Units: One double prong rear hook and not fewer than 2 single
prong side hooks.
3. Lockers 450mm Deep: Provide hang rod in lieu of hook.
4. Multi-tier Lockers with space between Vertical Components: Provide chrome
plated hang rod between verticals.
B. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or

stamped, nonferrous metal number plates with numerals not less than
12mm high. Number lockers in sequence as directed by Architect.
Attach plates to each locker door, in latch recess, with at least 2
fasteners of same finish as number plate.
C. Continuous Sloping Tops: Not Required. Top shall be bullheaded with

gypsum board flush to the face of lockers to avoid accumulation of dirt.
D. Separators (for double tier): Provide horizontal dividers of not less than
16 gage sheet steel between doors of multiple tier lockers to ensure
rigidity.
E. Trim: Provide trim at jambs and head of recessed lockers, consisting of
not less than 1mm cold rolled steel. Factory finish trim to match
lockers. Secure trim to lockers with concealed fastening clips.
F. Filler Panels: Provide filler panels where indicated, of not less than
1mm steel sheet, factory fabricated and finished to match locker units.
G. Accessible Lockers: For lockers indicated to be accessible, provide

shelf in locker located no lower than 9” above finished floor surface.
Provide accessibility symbol graphics at exterior of locker door.
Completed installation shall comply with requirements of BS 8300 and
accessibility codes referred in QCS2014.
2.10. LOCKS
Combination Padlock: Provided by Owner.
Built-in Combination Lock: Key-controlled, three-number dialing combination locks;

capable of at least five combination changes made automatically with a control key.
2.11. LOCKER BENCHES
A. Manufacturers: Obtain benches and accessories from the same manufacturer of

lockers or manufacturers associated supplier.
17. Obtain benches from single manufacturer.
B. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 445 mm.
C. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and
edges.
18. Size: Minimum 305mm wide by 32mm thick except provide min 610mm wide
tops where accessible benches are indicated.
19. Clear hardwood slates with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat
of clear lacquer on top and sides.
D. Fixed-Bench Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener

holes for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and
anchors, and as follows:
20. Tubular Steel: 38-mm square steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard
pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-
coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.
Color: Match metal lockers or Match Architect's sample
E. LOCKERS SEATS AND STANDS
Colour coded Solid Grade Laminate seat and Aluminium framework form a bench seat
in front of the locker,allowing full access to the locker. All units come complete with
adjustable levelling feet
Types, finishes and colours as defined in Interior design documentation.
F. MATERIALS:
1. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500 M, cold rolled.
2. As specified in Interior design documentation.
2.12. FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and
free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp
edges and burrs.
21. 1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel
sheet unless otherwise indicated.
22. 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for
complete installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back;
and common intermediate uprights separating compartments
C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment:
1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong
wall hooks.
2. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall
hooks.
3. Coat Rods: For each compartment of each locker In lieu of ceiling hook for
metal lockers 610mm high or more and 457mm deep or more.
D. Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints,

seams, and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in
assembly of main locker groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-
piece structures. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
E. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

23. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 381 mm above the floor.
24.
25. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher
than 1219 mm above the floor.
F. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose

base and base ends; finished to match lockers.
G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without

visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.
26. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.
H. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 64mm width and in lengths as long as
practical; finished to match lockers
I. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match

lockers. Provide slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
J. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 25-mm wide edge dimension and
designed for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of non-recessed
metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
27. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
K. Finished End Panels: Fabricated to conceal unused penetrations and

fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of non-recessed
metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
FURNITURE Section 31 -
28. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
L. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf;

finished to match lockers.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and floors or support bases, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
3.2. INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable and local requirements,

referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Install metal lockers at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation.
C. Connect groups of all-welded lockers together with standard fasteners,

with no exposed fasteners on face frames.
D. Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by

manufacturer, but not more than 910 mm on center. Install anchors
through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal
distortion, using concealed fasteners.
E. Install trim, metal base, sloping top units, and metal filler panels and end
panels, using concealed fasteners. Provide flush, hairline joints against
adjacent surfaces.
3.3. ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices are operating properly.
B. Touch up marred finishes but replace units that cannot be restored to

factory finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures
recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer
3.4. . PROTECTION
A. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do
not permit use during construction.
B. Touch up marred finishes or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored
to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures
recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
5. MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING SYSTEMS
General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, mobile metal storage shelving system; designed

for shelves to span between and be supported on floor rails, with shelves adjustable over
the entire height of shelving unit. Fabricate shelf units with end panel at each end so each
unit is independent. Provide fixed top and bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves,
and accessories indicated.
End Panels: Fabricated from 0.55-mm thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with horizontal slots
spaced at manufacturer's standard spacing, but not less than 25 mm o.c. for supporting
shelves.
Shelves: Fabricated from steel sheet, with slots or holes at 50 mm o.c. for shelf
dividers, of thickness required to withstand the following load-carrying capacity. Fabricate
shelves with vertical front that is flanged and returned.
Load-Carrying Capacity: For medical
records.
Base: Closed; fabricated from same material and with same finish as end panels.
Accessories:
Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves.
Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.55-mm thick, cold-rolled steel sheet.
Label Holders: Clear plastic, designed to clip onto front edge of shelf.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or colour coated to the later selection of the
Engineer.
6. MAGNETIC BOARD
Supply and installation of Magnetic board with pen shelf.

Wall mounted 4mm white tempered glass, scratch proof 0.35 mm white painted steel plate sticked with a special glue at the back side
of the glass board.
Size: As indicated in Interior design documents.
Locations; Head of SMS, Director of nursing, Physicians, Head Physicians
7. LOOSE FURNITURE:
7.1. CHAIRS AND ARM CHAIRS

7.2. SOFA
7.3. BED
7.4. TABLE AND WORKSTATIONS
7.5. STORAGE UNITS
7.6. ACCORIES.
SECTION 32 - FIRESTOPPING
1. FIRESTOPPING
1.1. SCOPE
1. This Section includes firestopping for the following:
Space above suspended ceiling

Mechanical and electrical shafts
Penetrations in fire walls
2. RELATED SECTIONS
Other Sections of the Specification containing requirements that relate to this Section include
but are not necessarily limited to the following:
Section 13 "Masonry"
Section 17 "Metal work"
Section 18 “Carpentry, joinery and ironmongery”
Section 24 "Finishes to Buildings"
Mechanical Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations.
Electrical Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
1.2. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.2.1 General: provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of
fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
1.2.2 F-rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: provide through-penetration firestop systems

with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equalling or
exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
1.2.3 Ducts, pipes, wires, electrical busducts and conduits passing through fire barriers shall be
protected as follows:
1.2.4 the space between the penetrating items and the fire barrier will be filled with fire stop
compounds capable of maintaining the required fire resistance and resisting the passage of
smoke.
1.2.5 non-metallic and non-pressurized pipes that exceed 40mm in diameter will be provided with
fire stop jackets on both sides of the barrier.
1.2.6 ducts shall be provided with fire dampers if passing through 2-hour fire barrier or 1-hour fire
barrier. Refer to Specification for Mechanical Works and corresponding drawings.
1.2.7 Ducts, pipes, wires, electrical busducts and conduits that are located outside protected shafts
and passing through floor slabs will be protected as follows:
FIRESTOPPING Section 32 - 1
1.2.8 the space between the penetrating items and the slab will be filled with fire stop compounds
capable of maintaining the required fire resistance and resisting the passage of smoke.
1.2.9 non-metallic and non-pressurized pipes that exceed 40mm in diameter will be provided with
fire stop jackets on the underside of the slab.
1.2.10 ducts shall be provided with smoke dampers. Refer to MEP drawings and specifications..
1.2.11 T-rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: provide through-penetration firestop systems

with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and
where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in
occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:
(a) where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities
(b) where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft
enclosures
(c) where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors
required to have a temperature-rise rating
(d) where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 100 mm diameter
nominal pipe or 100 cm2 in overall cross-sectional area.
1.2.12 Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants:

Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119,
but not less than that equalling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in
which the joint occurs.
1.2.13 For Firestopping Exposed to View, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products
that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1.2.14 For Firestopping Exposed to View, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25
and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Product Data for each type of product specified.
1.6.2 Shop Drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining
construction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction
condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of
qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each
condition indicated:
submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency
that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and
penetrating items.
1.6.3 Schedule of penetrations: Identify all penetrations and submit fireproofing treatment for each.
1.6.4 Product Certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
1.6.5 Product Test Reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting
agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
1.6.6 Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
1.6.7 Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
representative.
1.6.8 Qualification Data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project
names, addresses, names of design consultants and employers, and other information
specified.
1.4.1 Fire-Test-Response Characterstics: provide firestopping that complies with the following
requirements and those specified under Subsection 11-1.3 "System Performance
Requirements":
Fire stopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing
and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under
conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 2.5 Pa is maintained at a
distance of 20 mm below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test
assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing

and inspecting agency.
through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-

penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by
Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics
per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least
2.5 Pa, as measured 20 mm from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying
with the following requirements:
fire-resistance ratings of joint sealants: as indicated by reference to design designations listed
by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspection agency.
1.4.2 Information on Drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration

firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions
that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated
systems require the Engineer's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the
performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would
replace and are acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4.3 Installer Qualification: engage an experienced Installer with minimum five years documented
experience who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer
as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per
specified requirements and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/ engineers and owners, and other
information specified or required by Engineer. Firestopping work shall be executed by one
specialized subcontractor.
1.4.4 Single-Source Responsibility: obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of
penetration and construction condition from a single manufacturer.
1.4.5 Field-Constructed Mockup: prior to installing firestopping, erect mockups for each different
through-penetration firestop system indicated to verify selections made and to demonstrate
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final installations.
locate mock-ups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer
notify Engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be erected
obtain Engineer's acceptance of mock-ups before start of permanent work
retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard

for judging completed permanent work
accepted mock-ups in an undisturbed condition at time of substantial completion may become

part of completed permanent work.
1.4.6 Provide Firestopping Products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method
specified in 40n may become part of completed permanent work.orklections made and to
demonstr
1.4.7 Co-ordinating Work: co-ordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure
that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
1.5.1 Deliver firestopping products to the site in original, unopened containers or packages with
intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of
manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's
classification marking applicable to project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multi-
component materials.
1.6.1 Store and Handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.6.1 Environmental Condition: do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures
are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to
rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.6.1 Ventilation: ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural

means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.7 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
1.7.1 Compatibility: provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each
other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
1.7.2 Products: consider and use only products which have been third party tested in accordance
with UL1479-ASTM E 814 for specific fire rated construction penetration.
1.7.3 Accessories: provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to comply with Subsection 1.3 "System Performance Requirements". Use only
components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing
and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include
but are not limited to the following items:
1.7.4 permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
(a) semi-refractory fibre (mineral wool) insulation.
(b) sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage
of fill materials in liquid state.
(c) joint fillers for joint sealants.
(d) temporary forming materials
(e) substrate primers
(f) collars
(g) steel sleeves.
1.7.5 Application: provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that
comply with system performance and other requirements.
2. MATERIAL & PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPINGMATERIALS
2.1.1 use rigid firestopping materials to close penetrations by metal pipes or conduits
2.1.2 use intumescent firestopping materials to close penetrations by plastic pipes or conduits
2.2 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
2.2.1 Intumescent Sealant: single-component, intumescent, latex or acrylic formulation.
2.2.2 Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: single-component, silicone- based sealant of grade

indicated below:
Grade S/L: pourable self-levelling grade for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.
Grade N/S for vertical surfaces: nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces.
2.2.3 Fire Rated Expansion Joint Sealant: multi-component, medium modulus polurethane-based
sealant as indicated below:
Movement: 40 % extension and 25 % compression
2.2.4 Pillow System: moisture resistant Fiberglas bags containing intumescent material.
2.2.5 Intumescent Putty: non-hardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents,

inorganic fibres, or silicone compounds.
2.2.6 Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: solvent-release-curing, single-component,

synthetic-polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below:
grade: pourable (self-levelling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a non-
slumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to non-sag grade for
both opening conditions
grade for horizontal surfaces: pourable (self-levelling) grade for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces
grade for vertical surfaces: non-sag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces.
2.2.7 Intumescent Wrap Strips: As per manufacturer’s standard to match with adjacent assembly.
2.2.8 Intumescent Foam Strips: compressible fire retardant foam strips faced on either or both sides
with an intumescent sheet to fill gap widths from 5 to 200 mm
2.2.9 Premixed Load Bearing Fire Seal: ready mixed cementitious load bearing compound
containing lightweight aggregate and non-combustible inorganic powders.
2.2.10 Fire Resistant Batts: slabs made of non-combustible mineral fibre batts, precoated with fire
resistant impermeable skin.
2.2.11 Fire Barrier For Expansion Joints:

Fire barrier for expansion Joints should be prefabricated assemblies that have been tested in
accordance with ASTM E 119 [BS 476-20 and 22], UL 263 procedures for the rating of two
hours unless indicated otherwise. These fire barriers shall be inserted in joints in slabs and in
fire rated walls. Material is to carry the label of an independent testing laboratory. Fire barrier
assemblies are to include fire barrier and encapsulated insulation.
The joint system fire barrier shall consist of foil heat shield, an insulation drape and an
insulation block or other system tested by third party and approved by engineer.
WORKMANSHIP
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Examine Substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements
for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Surface Cleaning: clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping
to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following
requirements:
remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from
penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping
clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining
from cleaning operation
remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
3.2.2 Priming: prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do
not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
3.2.3 Masking Tape: use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces
that will remain exposed upon completion of work and that would otherwise be permanently
stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from
firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing
firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.2.4 Mixing: for those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping
manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of
mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
3.3 INSTALLINGTHROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
3.3.1 General: comply with Subsection 1.3 "System Performance Requirements" and the through-
penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to
products and applications indicated.
3.3.2 Install Forming/Damming Materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop
systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
3.3.3 Install Fill Materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce
the following results:
completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items
apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
items
for fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.3.4 Shafts: in mechanical and electrical shafts, provide intumescent collars around plastic or soft
pipes and cables before filling the shaft opening with fire seal.
3.3.5 Curtain walls: fill the gap between the curtain wall and the building structure with intumescent
foam strips and intumescent sealants as necessary to produce fire and smoke barrier.
3.3.6 Fire Stop Jackets: fire stop jackets shall be provided for non-metallic pipes that exceeds 40
mm and penetrates fire barriers, as follows:
on the underside of fire barriers in fire rated floor construction.
on both sides of fire barriers in fire rated wall construction.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1 Inspecting Agency approved by the Engineer and employed and paid by Contractor will
observe firestopping operations and examine completed firestopping to determine, in general,
if it is being and has finally been installed in compliance with requirements.
3.4.2 Inspecting Agency will report observations and determinations promptly and in writing to
Contractor and Engineer.
3.4.3 Do Not Proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until inspecting agency reports
have been issued and approved by the Engineer.
3.4.4 Deficiencies: where found, repair or replace firestopping to the approval of the Engineer, so
that it complies with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
3.5.1 Clean Off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products
and of products in which opening and joints occur.
3.5.2 Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they
are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated
firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with
specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 33 - FITTINGS
1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope:
this Section is for the specification of fittings (other than furniture and furnishings) fixed to
the building fabric or provided loose within building spaces, together with all associated
hardware, fixings, ironmongery and accessories, including:
1.1.1 Corner guards
1.1.2 Wall bumpers
1.1.3 Crash rail
1.1.4 Handrails
1.1.5 Floor mats and frames
1.1.6 Mechanical dock levelers
1.1.7 Dock bumpers
1.1.8 Cubicle curtain assemblies
1.1.9 Manual roller shades
1.2 Related Sections:

Other sections of the Specification containing requirements that relate to this Section include
but are not necessarily limited to the following:
Section 13 "Masonry"
Section 17 "Metal work"
Section 18 "Carpentry, Joinery and Ironmongery"
Section 24 "Finishes to Buildings"
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Product Data: submit manufacturer’s product data and specifications for each type of fitting,
including construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, together with charts showing the full range of finishes and colours available, for
selection by the Supervision team/engineer.
1.3.2 Drawings: provide co-ordination, fabrication and installation drawings and other information
showing such details of the work as the Supervision team/engineer may reasonably require
including elevations, large scale sections and proposed methods of fixing.
1.3.3 Samples: submit samples of each type of fitting in colours and finishes selected by the
Supervision team/engineer. Obtain approval of appearance and other characteristics before
proceeding with manufacture or delivery.
1.3.4 Control Samples: following approval of drawings and samples, prepare one of each type of
purpose-made fitting as part of the quantity required for the project and obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding with manufacture of remaining quantity.
1.4 WARRANTY:
1.4.1 Special Warranty:
FITTINGS Section 33 - 1
Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and installer are jointly and severally
responsible and agree to repair or replace architectural woodwork and other items specified
in this section that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, discoloration, fading,
moisture penetration or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
(a) Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by
manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to
ASTM D 2244.
(b) Warping, distortion or twist, if installed in controlled environment or stored in similar

environment
(c) Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
(d) Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
(e) Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
1.4.2 Warranty Period:

It shall only cover the period of defective liability period or as mentioned in the contract (IF
ANY)
1.4.3 This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Employer may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
2 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
2.1 Components
2.1.1 Metal, wood and other component parts of fittings including fastenings, fixings, treatments
and finishings are to be in accordance with the requirements of sections 17 and 18 of the
specification.
2.1.2 Counter tops, fronts and the like are to be in accordance with the requirements of Section 24
of the specification and as indicated. Counter tops will be of indicated type.
2.2 PRODUCTS
2.2.1 Corner Guards:

Engineered PETG Corner Guards: Surface mounted guards consisting of continuous retainer
with snap-on cover. Color matched end caps to be provided for both partial and full height
applications. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall construction.
2.2.2 Crash Rail:

Engineered PETG Handrails: Surface mounted assembly consisting of a continuous extruded
aluminum retainer with cover and integral shock absorbing cushions where indicated. Color
matched mounting brackets to be spaced as indicated on installation instructions. Color
matched end caps and corners shall be attached to allow post installation adjustment.
Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall construction.
2.2.3 Handrail:
1 Description: 142.9mm combination handrail/bumper guard configuration.
2 Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be high impact with shadow grain texture.
3 Thickness: 1.98 mm.
4 Color: As selected by Engineer.
5 Aluminum Retainers: Extruded aluminum retainers should be 6063-T6 alloy, nominal 1.90
mm thick retainer. Minimum strength and durability properties as specified in ASTM B221.
6 Fasteners: All fasteners to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum retainers.

All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the manufacturer.
2.2.4 Foot Grille:
1. 304 grade stainless steel grid, with minimum rolling load tested to 500lbs and 5/8” depth,
suitable for heavy and medium pedestrian traffic.
2. stainless -steel foot grilles:
a) tread wires: No. 4 finish

b) grating: mat
3. frame: same material and finish as foot grille.
4. support system: extruded-metal support system for drainage pit application.
5. Drain pans: stainless steel.

by vacuuming the reservoir or power washing the product.
2.2.5 Mechanical Dock Levelers
2.2.5.1 Type: Recessed, pit installed hinged dock leveler. Manually operated dock leveler
shall be mechanical and complete with ratchet locking hold down mechanism and rear
fixed hinge.
2.2.5.2 Deck size type 1: 2134 mm (W) by 3137 mm (L).

2.2.5.3 Pit Size: 2159 mm (W) by 2819 mm (L).
2.2.5.4 Deck size type 2: 2134 mm (W) by 3750 mm (L).
2.2.5.5 Pit size: 2159 mm (W) by 3379 mm (L).
2.2.6 Function:
1 Vertical Travel: Working range of 305 mm above and 305 mm below dock level.
2 Automatic Vertical Compensation: Unit provides float of 305 mm above and 305 mm below
dock level.
3 Automatic Lateral Compensation: Leveler shall have deck flex up to 102 mm to compensate
for non-level trailer beds. Rear hinge fixed and does not come up above floor level.
4 Lip Operation: Mechanically operated lip that automatically extends and locks into position.
Lip will yield under impact of incoming truck and will automatically drop pendant upon
truck's departure. The length of the lip extension shall not be less than 406 mm from the ramp
edge.
5 Vertical deployment and restoring ranges by model and lip length.
2.2.6.1 Operation:
1 Mechanical Operating System: No manual lifting involved. Attendant pulls release chain at
rear of deck that releases the locking hold down system, lip will extend and operator to walk
dock down to truck bed.
2 The deck is driven up by heavy-duty lift springs and the lip is smoothly powered out. Dock is
then "walked" down onto the truck bed.
3 Hold down is designed to minimize cross traffic bounce and provide instant hold when in
working position, unit will float with truck movement.
4 A second chain is pulled to disengage the fall safe legs and allow below level operation.
5 When the truck departs, the lip releases, allowing the unit to be returned to the cross-traffic
position.
2.2.6.2 Rated Capacity:
Welding procedure compliant with A.W.S.D1.1 specifications. All units rated in compliance
with ANSI MH30.1. Structural deck support to include minimum eight each high-tensile solid
steel J-beam members.
Rated Capacity: As scheduled and indicated on Drawings.
2.2.6.3 Standard Safety Devices:

Toe Guard: Full working range metal toe guard protection.
Mechanical fall safe legs to limit free fall, provide emergency support in the event a truck
departs and below level lip control for end-loading.
Cross traffic support - lip engaged in saddles.
Corner below level stops.
V- grooved dock strut, integral to unit (standard).
Lip leading edge, optimized bevel (standard).
2.2.6.4 Finish and Color:
Powder Coated and bake cure, resistant to chemicals, corrosion, and incorporates UV
inhibitors to reduce fading of colors (standard).
Deck, lip, frame powder coated gray or color as specified.
Toe guards powder coated safety yellow as specified by ANSI Z535.1. High visibility OSHA
safety striping on stationary side toe guards.
Warranty: Warranties are subject to standard limitations on liability. Consult manufacturer for
full details on warranty information and product registration.
2.2.6.5 Standard Accessories:
Night Locks. Resist unauthorized entry beneath locked overhead door.

406mm long lip
Dock Bumpers: Standard, laminated bumpers 356 mm (W) by 254 mm (H) by 114 mm (D).
Lip Size: As scheduled and indicated on Drawings.
2.2.7 DOCK SHELTER
Designed to accommodate larger doorways and docks that serve a bigger variety of trailer
types and sizes. It provides full access to the rear of the trailer while fitting snugly around
the top and sides. Cross-docking traffic is protected from weather conditions, adding an
extra degree of safety to the process.
2.9.3 Cubicle Curtain Assemblies

Curtains and Curtain Tracks:
1 Curtain tracks shall be fabricated from 5-micron satin finish extruded aluminum as indicated
in drawings and as approved by Engineer.
2 Cubicle Curtain Track and glider hooks:
(a) Tracks with P.V.C. dust covers and glider hooks at rate of 10 per meter, complete
with connecting bridge and end covers. Tracks, dust covers, glider hooks, connecting bridge
and end covers to be provided as indicated in drawings.
3 Cubicle Curtains:
(a) Width: 1830 mm.
(b) Provide fire resistant polyester white heavy nylon mesh, 406 mm wide for cubicle
curtain lengths up to 2134mm and 610 mm wide for cubicle curtain lengths from 2134
mm to 2743mm. Mesh shall pass NFPA 701 small and large scale.
(c) Provide 50 mm reinforced grommet heading matching fabric width, double stitched to
mesh. Grommets to be durable, washable and installed at maximum 146 mm centres
and not further than 32 mm from ends.
(d) Stitching and tailoring shall be of a high quality, suitable for heavy duty applications
and done by a reputable firm subject to approval. Hem all edges, interlock all seams,
double stitched with 50 mm wide matching top hem, double thicknes , double stitched
to body of mesh with 32 mm side edge hems and 50 mm double bottom hems.
(e) Fabric to be of stable dimensions and shrinkage shall not exceed 3% in each dimension
when repeatedly washed with hospital grade detergent.
(f) Length of curtain to be 20% more than the length of track hem.
(g) Curtain length: To be actual dimensions on site, unless otherwise indicated.
(h) Full coordination between track and curtain in detailing, heading tape, stitching
and tailoring to be Contractor’s responsibility.
(i) Locations: All areas where cubicle curtains are required except Inpatient Rooms as
per drawings.
2.9.4 Manual Roller Shades:
1 Roller Shades:
(a) Texture: 3-percent openness factor, unless otherwise indicated.
(b) Fabric: S, polyester vinyl coated. Colour: Beige.
(c) Installation: Wall mounted.
(d) Locations: As per Drawings.
2 Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and

wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the
weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable
from support brackets. Provide capacity for one roller shade band per roller, unless otherwise
indicated.
3 Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
4 Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel.
5 Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide
concealed, by pocket of shade material, internal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as
required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation.
6 Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous loop bead chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and
bracket lift operator.
(a) Clutch: Heavy duty, capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or
provideadaptor.
(b) Lift Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller
shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades.
(c) Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
(d) Bead Chain: Stainless steel.
(e) Cord Tensioner Mounting: Sill.
(f) Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or
descendingtravel.
7 Mounting: Wall mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller
shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.
3 WORKMANSHIP
3.1 GENERALLY
3.1.1 Coordination: ensure manufacturer's standard details and fixing instructions are provided as
necessary for co-ordination with related building elements and services.
3.1.2 Fabricating, Machining and Assembling of fittings are, where relevant, to be in accordance
with the requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
3.2.1 Fixing Generally including storage and protection are, where relevant, to be in accordance
3.2.2 Installation should be done as per manufacturer standard installation.
3.2.3 Sealant Pointing:
1 Ensure that finishes to backgrounds are complete and surfaces to receive sealant are clean and
dry
2 Remove protective covering from fittings the minimum necessary to apply sealant
3 Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations to give a neat,

smooth, watertight joint.
Completion: ensure that doors and drawers are accurately aligned and do not bind. Adjust as
necessary to ensure smooth operation. Check, adjust and lubricate ironmongery as necessary to
ensure correct functioning.
END OF SECTION

Architectural Mockup Room Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Architectural Mockup Room Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HOSPITAL

Section Number Section Name

02 PART 16 QA/QC MOCKUP ROOM

SECTION 2 – QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

PART 16 – MOCKUP ROOM

1.2.1 Mockups: Independent structures, installations, or assemblies that represent components of a

1.3.8 Make adjustment in the sample panels as required by the Engineer.

MOCKUP ROOM S2 Part 16 - 1

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1.3 Field Representation: During construction of mockup, representatives of the manufacturers

Certificates submitted following QCS requirements, and contract conditions.

MOCKUP ROOM S2 Part 16 - 2

2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may

Item/Material Section Reference

MOCKUP ROOM S2 Part 16 - 3

IP 006 25 mm wall Section 24 Finishes to Buildings

MOCKUP ROOM S2 Part 16 - 4

3.2.1 Maintain mockups during course of construction or until removal is directed.

MOCKUP ROOM S2 Part 16 - 5

2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows:

1 The following standards referred to in this Part:

1.2 APPROVAL OF SUPPLY SOURCE

1.2.1 General Requirements

1.3 SAMPLES, TESTING AND SUBMITTALS

1.3.1 General Requirements

3 The sample is to be accompanied by the following written information:

(a) Type of unit

(c) Name of manufacturer

5 Further samples will be selected and tested as directed by the Engineer.

1.3.2 Sample Panels

4 Brickwork to be incorporated in the Works is to match original sample brickwork panels as

4 Joints and connections to adjacent structures, including soffits

5 Openings through fire walls

6 Cavity wall insulation

7 Damp proof courses.

1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING

1.4.1 Storage of Materials

3 Packaged materials shall be stored in their original containers.

1.5.1 General Requirements

4 Blockwork shall be water cured for a minimum of three days.

1.6.1 General Requirements

1 Clean exposed masonry surfaces on completion. Protect material liable to damage.

1.6.3 Concrete Masonry Units

2 MORTAR AND GROUT

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. Related Parts and Sections are as follows:

1 The following standards are referred to in this Part:

PD 6472 ..................... Guide to specifying the quality of building mortars

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

2.2.1 Preparation Requirements

Nominal Mix by mass and their compressive strength

M4 105 35 725 110 755 4

M6 135 25 700 155 710 6

M12 190 20 655 190 675 12

1 Cement is to comply with the relevant provisions of Section 5, Concrete.

3 Cement, unless otherwise specified, is to be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1.

4 Sulphate Resisting Cement: to BS 4027.

5 White Cement: to BS EN 197-1.

6 Lime: Do not Use Lime.

1 Water is to comply with the relevant provisions of Section 5, Concrete.

2.5.1 General Requirements